Ministry of Government Services...6.3 Bid deposits of unsuccessful Bidders will be returned after the Contract award has been made, or previous to such time at the discretion of the

Ministry of Government Services

L.F.McIntosh Building Prince Albert, Saskatchewan Second Floor Renovations

Consultants: Architectural, Mechanical, Electrical: Stantec Consulting

June 27, 2014 Stantec #144401282

L.F. McIntosh Building Section 00 01 00 Second Floor Renovation TABLE OF CONTENTS Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 4

Stantec Architecture Ltd. November 23, 2012

00 01 00 Table of Contents ...................................................................................................................... 4

Division 00 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms 00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders ............................................................................................................... 9 00 22 00 Supplementary Instructions to Bidders...................................................................................... 1 00 41 13 Bid Form .................................................................................................................................... 6 00 52 13 General Contract ....................................................................................................................... 4 00 72 00 General Conditions Index .......................................................................................................... 2 00 72 00 General Conditions .................................................................................................................. 34 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions ........................................................................................................ 1

Division 01 – General Requirements 01 11 00 Summary of Work ...................................................................................................................... 1 01 23 10 Alternatives ................................................................................................................................ 1 01 31 00 Project Coordination .................................................................................................................. 4 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures ................................................................................................................ 3 01 35 30 Health and Safety Requirements .............................................................................................. 3 01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements .......................................................................................................... 1 01 45 00 Quality Control ........................................................................................................................... 3 01 52 00 Construction Facilities ............................................................................................................... 1 01 56 00 Temporary Barriers and Enclosures ......................................................................................... 2 01 61 00 Basic Product Requirements ..................................................................................................... 4 01 73 03 Execution Requirements ........................................................................................................... 1 01 74 11 Cleaning and Waste Management ............................................................................................ 2 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures ................................................................................................................. 1 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals ................................................................................................................... 4

Division 02 – Existing Conditions 02 41 19 Select Structure Demolition ....................................................................................................... 4 02 80 00 Hazardous Materials.................................................................................................................. 4

Division 03 – Concrete Not Used

Division 04 – Masonry Not Used

Division 05 – Metals 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications ..................................................................................................................... 3

Division 06 – Wood and Plastics 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry ....................................................................................................................... 3 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry ........................................................................................................................ 7 06 47 00 Plastic Laminate Finishing ......................................................................................................... 2

Division 07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection 07 21 16 Blanket Insulation ...................................................................................................................... 2 07 84 00 Firestopping ............................................................................................................................... 3 07 92 10 Joint Sealing .............................................................................................................................. 4

Division 08 – Doors and Windows 08 11 00 Metal Doors and Frames ........................................................................................................... 4 08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors ..................................................................................................................... 2 08 71 00 Finish Hardware ........................................................................................................................ 9 08 80 50 Glazing ....................................................................................................................................... 2

Section 00 01 00 L.F. McIntosh Building TABLE OF CONTENTS Second Floor Renovation Page 2 of 4 Project No. 144401282

November 23, 2012 Stantec Architecture Ltd.

Division 09 – Finishes 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies ....................................................................................................... 9 09 22 16 Non-Structural Metal Framing ................................................................................................... 3 09 22 27 Acoustical Suspension .............................................................................................................. 2 09 31 00 Tiling .......................................................................................................................................... 4 09 51 13 Acoustic Panel Ceilings ............................................................................................................. 2 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring ....................................................................................................................... 8 09 68 00 Carpeting ................................................................................................................................... 2 09 72 16 Vinyl-Coated Fabric Wall Covering ........................................................................................... 3 09 90 00 Painting .................................................................................................................................... 11 Division 10 – Specialties 10 14 00 Signage ...................................................................................................................................... 2 10 14 00-1 Signage - Appendix ................................................................................................................... 3 10 21 13 Metal Toilet Compartments ....................................................................................................... 3 10 28 00 Toilet and Bath Accessories ...................................................................................................... 4 10 80 00 Miscellaneous Specialties ......................................................................................................... 4 Division 11 – Equipment Not Used Division 12 – Furnishings 12 21 00 Roller Blinds .............................................................................................................................. 1 Division 13 – Special Construction Not Used Division 14 – Conveying Systems Not Used Division 15 – Mechanical 21 00 00 Mechanical – Fire Suppression ............................................................................................... 11 21 05 29 Mechanical – Hangers and Supports for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment .................. 2 21 13 13 Mechanical – Wet Pipe Fire Suppression Sprinkler Systems ................................................... 5 21 24 13 Mechanical – Dry Chemical Fire Extinguishing Systems .......................................................... 2 22 00 00 Mechanical – Plumbing ........................................................................................................... 10 22 05 13 Mechanical – Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment .................................... 1 22 07 00 Mechanical – Plumbing Insulation ............................................................................................. 4 22 08 00 Mechanical – Commissioning of Plumbing ............................................................................... 2 22 11 13 Mechanical – Facility Water Distribution Piping ........................................................................ 3 22 11 19 Mechanical – Domestic Water Piping Specialties ..................................................................... 4 22 13 13 Mechanical – Facility Sanitary Sewers ...................................................................................... 2 22 13 19 Mechanical – Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties ...................................................................... 2 22 30 00 Mechanical – Plumbing Equipment ........................................................................................... 1 22 40 00 Mechanical – Plumbing Fixtures ............................................................................................... 4 23 00 00 Mechanical – Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning ......................................................... 10 23 05 13 Mechanical – Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment ......................................... 1 23 05 23 Mechanical – General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping ................................................................ 2 23 05 29 Mechanical – Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment ................................... 2 23 05 48 Mechanical – Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment ...................... 3 23 05 93 Mechanical – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC ....................................................... 3 23 07 00 Mechanical – HVAC Insulation .................................................................................................. 6 23 21 13 Mechanical – Hydronic Piping ................................................................................................... 4 23 21 23 Mechanical – Hydronic Pumps .................................................................................................. 2 23 25 00 Mechanical – Pipe Cleaning and Chemical Treatment ............................................................. 2 23 30 00 Mechanical – HVAC Air Distribution .......................................................................................... 8 23 80 00 Mechanical – Decentralized HVAC Equipment ......................................................................... 2

L.F. McIntosh Building Section 00 01 00 Second Floor Renovation TABLE OF CONTENTS Project No. 144401282 Page 3 of 4

Stantec Architecture Ltd. November 23, 2012

25 00 00 Mechanical – Automatic Temperature Controls ...................................................................... 17 Division 16 – Electrical 26 03 10 Electrical – Electrical Demolition for Remodeling ...................................................................... 3 26 05 01 Electrical – Common Work Results - Electrical ......................................................................... 7 26 05 26 Electrical – Grounding and Bonding .......................................................................................... 2 26 05 32 Electrical – Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings .............................................................. 3 26 05 33 Electrical – Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems ........................................................... 1 26 05 34 Electrical – Conduit and Conduit Fittings .................................................................................. 2 26 05 36 Electrical – Cable Trays for Electrical Systems ......................................................................... 2 26 05 53 Electrical – Identification for Electrical Systems ........................................................................ 4 26 24 17 Electrical – Panel Boards .......................................................................................................... 3 26 27 26 Electrical – Wiring Devices ........................................................................................................ 4 26 50 00 Electrical – Lighting ................................................................................................................... 2 26 51 13 Electrical – Interior Lighting Fixtures, Lamps, and Ballasts ...................................................... 3 26 53 00 Electrical – Exit Signs ................................................................................................................ 2 27 05 13 Electrical – Communication Services ........................................................................................ 7 LIST OF DRAWINGS Architectural A001 Information Sheet A101 Second Floor Demolition Plan A201 Second Floor Plan A202 Second Floor Furniture Plan A301 Second Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan A401 Second Floor Finishes Plan A501 Enlarged Washroom Plans and Elevations A502 Enlarged Washroom Plans and Elevations A503 Enlarged Elevator Lobby Plan and Elevations A601 Interior Elevations A602 Interior Elevations A603 Interior Elevations A604 Casework Details A801 Room Finish Schedule A802 Door and Frame Schedule and Details Mechanical M200 Mechanical Drawing List & Legend M201 Mechanical Plumbing - Demolition M202 Mechanical Plumbing - New M203 Mechanical Fire Protection – Demolition/New M204 Mechanical Heating – Demolition (1st Floor) M204 Mechanical Heating/Ventilation – Demolition M206 Mechanical Heating – New M207 Mechanical Cooling and Ventilation – New M208 Mechanical Details M209 Mechanical Schedules & Details Electrical

Section 00 01 00 L.F. McIntosh Building TABLE OF CONTENTS Second Floor Renovation Page 4 of 4 Project No. 144401282

November 23, 2012 Stantec Architecture Ltd.

E001 Legend and Specifications E201 Second Floor Power - Demolition E202 Second Floor Lighting - Demolition E203 Second Floor Power - New E204 Second Floor Lighting - New E501 Panel Schedules and Details

END OF SECTION

Section 00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders Page 1 of 9

ARTICLE 1 - PROJECT 1.1 Project Name - 2nd Floor Relifing, LF McIntosh Building 1.2 Project Location - 800 Central Avenue, Prince Albert, Saskatchewan 1.3 Project No. - PW5023-01 / 86948 1.4 Job No. - LLM13057 / 04612 ARTICLE 2 - OWNER 2.1 HER MAJESTY THE QUEEN in right of the Province of Saskatchewan as represented

by the Minister of Central Services. ARTICLE 3 - CONSULTANT 3.1 Stantec Architecture Ltd., Ste 100, 75 – 24th Street East, Saskatoon, Sask. S7K 0K3 ARTICLE 4 - BIDS 4.1 Bids shall be made on the Bid Form provided, enclosed in the self-addressed envelope

provided by the Owner, sealed. 4.2 Deliver Bids to: Ministry of Central Services Rm 726, 800 Central Avenue, PO Box 3003 Prince Albert, Saskatchewan S6V 6G1 4.3 Bids will be received until 2:00 P.M. City Time, on the 17th day of July, A.D. 2014. 4.4 Bids must be delivered as designated above to be considered as bona fide bids.


4.5 Telegraphic or telephone proposals will not be accepted. However, modifications to official bids will be accepted if they are signed by a duly authorized representative of the Bidder and received prior to the closing of bids as set forth in Article 4.3.

4.6 Each bid shall be accompanied by a letter from a Surety Company authorized to transact

Guarantee Insurance in the Province of Saskatchewan, agreeing to provide bonding in accordance with GC55 of the General Conditions.

4.7 All Bid Forms must be completed and signed in ink and the company seal affixed

wherever signatures are required by the appropriate signing officers of such Bidder. 4.8 Bidders may modify their bid submission by facsimile (FAX). Bid modifications shall be

addressed as set out in Article 4.2 and transmitted to "FAX" telephone number (306) 953-2338. .1 Bidders electing to use "FAX" as a means of transmitting Bid modifications shall

assume the burden of proof that their communication has been received by the Owner, and that their transmission is:

a) in a readable state; b) received prior to close of bidding; and c) in conformance with the requirements otherwise set forth in the Contract

Documents. .2 Confirmation of the Owner's receipt of the "FAX" may be obtained verbally by

telephoning CENTRAL SERVICES at (306) 953-2270. ARTICLE 5 - BONDING 5.1 The Contractor shall provide bonding in accordance with GC55 of the General

Conditions. 5.2 Where a Bidder elects to require separate guarantee bonds from his Subcontractors, he

shall account for the payment of related costs.


ARTICLE 6 - BID BOND 6.1 The Bidder shall enclose with his bid a Bid Bond endorsed "ten percent of Bid Price", or a

Certified Cheque in the amount of ten percent of his Bid Price, as evidence of good faith. The bid security shall be in favour of the Owner.

6.2 The Bidder is advised that an Agreement to Bond must be executed by a Surety Company

issuing the Bid Bond and must be executed in such a manner sufficient to bind the Surety Company. This document must be attached to and form part of the Bid Bond. This document must be completed regardless of whether the bid deposit is in the form of a Certified Cheque or Bid Bond. Failure to comply with the requirements of this clause may render the bid "informal" and may result in its rejection by the Owner.

6.3 Bid deposits of unsuccessful Bidders will be returned after the Contract award has been

made, or previous to such time at the discretion of the Owner. 6.4 Bid Bonds shall be issued in a standard CCDC 220 Form. ARTICLE 7 - PLAN DEPOSIT 7.1 Plans and specifications held by the unsuccessful Bidders must be returned in good

condition within thirty days of bid opening in order for the plan deposit (where applicable) to be returned. After this time, the plan deposit will be forfeited.

ARTICLE 8 - SUB-CONTRACTORS 8.1 All Sub-contractors shall file their bids in accordance with the Saskatchewan Bid

Depository Regulations at Prince Albert Construction Association, before 2:00 P.M. City Time, on the 14th day of July, A.D. 2014.

ARTICLE 9 - INSURANCE 9.1 Bidders should be aware that the General Conditions of the Contract provide that certain

insurance must be put in place in respect of the Work and that immediately upon award of a Contract, or in any case prior to the commencement of any of the Work of the Contract, certified copies of the insurance policies obtained by each Contract and Subcontractor shall be submitted to the Owner. All such policies shall be placed with insurers and in forms acceptable to the Owner. Each policy obtained must state that it cannot be cancelled, lapsed or materially altered without at least thirty days prior written notice to the Owner.


9.2 If any Contractor or Subcontractor fails to furnish to the Owner a certified copy of each

policy required to be obtained hereunder or, if after furnishing such certified copy, the policy lapses, is cancelled or is materially altered, then in every such case the Owner may obtain and maintain such insurance coverage in the name of such Contractor or Subcontractor. The cost thereof shall be payable by the Contractor or Subcontractor to the Owner on demand and the Owner may at its election deduct the cost thereof from any monies which are due to the Contractor.

ARTICLE 10 - TAXES 10.1 The property and/or services provided in this contract are being purchased by Central

Services with Ministry Funds and are therefore not subject to the Goods and Services Tax (GST). The Bid Price should not include GST but should include all other Federal and Provincial Government Sales or other Taxes in force at the date set out in Article 4.3, or as amended by addenda.

10.2 The Bidder shall indicate on the Bid Form if he/it maintains, and for the period of twelve

months proceeding the closing date on which bids are opened, has maintained, a permanent place of business in Saskatchewan.

10.3 In the event the Bidder has not maintained a permanent place of business in

Saskatchewan, the Owner may require the Bidder to deposit a sum equivalent to five percent (5%) of the total amount to be paid under the Contract, or furnish a guarantee bond, satisfactory to the Owner, in a penal sum equivalent to five percent (5%) of the said totals amount, to secure payment of the Provincial Sales Tax imposed by The Provincial Sales Tax Act amendments thereto.

ARTICLE 11 - ALTERNATES/EQUALS 11.1 The Contract is based on the materials, equipment methods and products as described in

the Specifications or as shown on the Drawings. The Consultant's approval, as identified hereinafter, is required before any materials, equipment, or methods may be substituted for the materials, equipment, or methods as may be described in the Specifications or shown on the Drawings.

11.2 Where the phrase "or equal" or "or equal as approved by the Consultant" occurs in the

Specifications or on the Drawings, do not assume that any particular substitute material, equipment, or method will be approved by the Consultant. Requests for substitution(s) must be submitted in writing, and must be received by the Consultant, at least seven (7) clear working days prior to the Bid closing date.


11.3 When a request to substitute any material, equipment, or method is made to the

Consultant, the Consultant will review the request to determine whether or not it will achieve results similar to the specified material, equipment, or method. The Bidder is responsible for ensuring that all requests involving substitutions include sufficient information and details to enable the Consultant to determine if there is quality and performance equivalency or otherwise acceptability of the material, equipment, method or product. The request shall identify any and all changes required in the applicable Work, and all changes to any other works, which would become necessary to accommodate the requested substitution.

11.4 If the Consultant is satisfied that the requested substitution will achieve similar results to

the specified material, equipment or method, the Consultant will approve the substitution as an equal, unless instructed otherwise by the Owner. All Bidders may then use that material, equipment, or method in place of the specified material, equipment, or method.

11.5 If and when the Consultant approves a particular material, equipment, or method as an

equal, an Addendum will be issued to all Bidders indicating this. 11.6 If the Consultant does not approve a particular material, equipment, or method as an

equal, Bidders shall base their bid price(s) upon the material, equipment, or method specified. The requested substitution shall be considered an alternate. Bidders may indicate separately in the bid any change in price or time which will apply if use of an alternate is accepted. No later claim may be made by the Contractor for an addition to the Contract price or Contract Time because of any other changes in the Work(s) necessitated by the use of any accepted alternate.

11.7 The decision of the Consultant on these matters shall be final. ARTICLE 12 - INVESTIGATING THE SITE 12.1 Each Bidder must make himself personally acquainted with the location, extent and

purpose of the proposed Work and must inform himself by such reasonable means as he may prefer, as to the actual conditions and requirements of the Work. For example, the Bidder is cautioned to take into consideration such matters as the presence of watermains, sewers, gas or water pipes, conduits, or railway tracks along or crossing the proposed Work, or any other obstruction whatsoever, the nature or character of the soil, the probable or possible presence of ground water, boulders, old foundations or concealed obstacles, and the depth that frost penetrates the ground. Each Bidder shall arrange with the Consultant for suitable access to the site for his investigation.


12.2 It is understood that any investigation made by the Owner has been or will be made entirely for the use and information of the Owner and if any information as to the character of the materials likely to be encountered in performing the Work, or any other information as to the condition of the site is given to the Bidder, it is understood that the Owner shall not be responsible if the information does not correctly set forth the facts, or if any written documents made by or for the Owner do not correctly set forth the results of any investigations made.

12.3 Any drawings, calculations or other documents prepared by the Owner for its own use

(and so marked) and furnished to a Bidder at his request shall be accepted by the Bidder entirely at his own risk and the Owner shall assume no responsibility for the information contained therein.

12.4 No claim shall be by any Bidder after the submission of his bid that there was any

misunderstanding as to his responsibility in securing for himself information relative to the nature or amount of the work to be done or as to the conditions imposed by the Contract. After the awarding of the Contract no claim shall be made against the Owner by the Contractor on the grounds that the Owner or any of its officials, servants or agents had knowledge of information with respect to the site of the Work, which was not communicated to him.

ARTICLE 13 - DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS 13.1 Bidders finding discrepancies in, or omissions from, Drawings, Specifications, or other

documents, or having any doubt as to the meaning or intent of any part thereof, shall at once notify the Consultant, who will send written instructions or information to Bidders. Oral interpretations or statements made to any Bidder shall not effect a modification of any provision of the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 14 - ADDENDA 14.1 Addenda or corrections issued during the time of bidding shall become a part of the

Contract Documents. 14.2 Neither the Owner nor the Consultant will be responsible for oral instructions or

representations. All addenda, changes, corrections or modifications shall be in writing. 14.3 The Consultant will issue addenda during the bidding period as occasion arises, but in no

case shall addenda be made available to the Bidders later than five (5) working days prior to Bid closing, unless issued as a special addenda for extension of the time for receipt of bids, which shall be made available no later than three (3) days prior to Bid closing.


ARTICLE 15 - SASKATCHEWAN MATERIALS 15.1 Bidders are encouraged to use Saskatchewan manufactured materials and products where

cost and quality of materials at the time of bid, are equal, so as to facilitate local content from Saskatchewan manufacturers, suppliers, and contractors.

15.2 The Owner provides equal opportunity for all Canadian Contractors, sub-contractors,

suppliers, and manufacturers to bid the work. ARTICLE 16 - COMPLETION OF BID FORM 16.1 Complete and return the bid to the address as shown above in Article 4.2 herein, prior to

the closing time on date for receipt of bids. The Bidder must fill in all blank spaces on the Bid Form completely. Bids shall be compiled showing a complete list of all Subcontractors which the Bidder proposes to use. No erasures or alterations will be accepted. Bids shall be signed, sealed, witnessed and dated in accordance with the legal requirements of the Ministry, partnership or individual submitting the Bid.

ARTICLE 17 - COMPLETION OF GENERAL CONTRACT 17.1 The General Contract is issued in duplicate to the Bidder. Both copies of the Contract

must be completed in order to award the Contract. The completed Contract must be submitted within seven (7) working days after the close of the bid or a bid may be rejected.

17.1.1 Page 1. Insert Bidder's name and address. 17.1.2 Article 1.1.3. Insert date of completion of Work. 17.1.3 Article 3.1 Insert amount of stipulated sum. 17.1.4 Article 5.1 Insert name and address of Bidder's official representative, charged

with receiving notices. 17.1.5 Page 4. Sign, date, and seal or witness General Contract.


ARTICLE 18 - BID ACCEPTANCE/CONTRACT START-UP 18.1 The Owner reserves the right to reject all or any part of any bid and/or to waive technical

defects in the bid, if in its judgment the interest of the Owner may so require. 18.2 Where the Contract is proposed in separate sections, or with alternates, the Owner

reserves the right to award any section separately or to choose any alternate which is in its best interests.

18.3 Bids and bid deposits shall be valid for a period of 40 calendar days following close of the

Bidding, during which the Owner may exercise his rights pertaining to Articles 18.1 and 18.2 herein.

18.4 Bid submissions shall be prima facie evidence of the Bidder's preparedness and ability to

commence the Work at the Site within fourteen (14) calendar days following notice of award.

18.5 Work at the Site shall commence regardless of the soil or weather conditions encountered,

and shall continue without interruption, except as provided in Article GC37 of the General Conditions, until the Work is complete.

18.6 In the event the Bidder's Bid is formally accepted, and the Bidder is unable to commence

the Work in the time allotted in Article 18.4 herein, the successful Bidder's bid security shall be considered forfeited in an amount limited to the lesser of:

18.6.1 the difference between the amount of the successful Bidder's Bid and the

amount of such other bidder as the Owner may contract with for the Work; and, 18.6.2 an amount in consideration of damages to which the Owner may be entitled by

reason of the successful Bidder's failure or refusal to commence the Work in the allotted time.


ARTICLE 19 - ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS 19.1 The successful Bidder will be required to submit a schedule of values of the various parts

of the Work (Bid Price Breakdown), and a schedule of the Work showing the dates of commencement and completion of each division of the Work (construction schedule) all as set out in GC32.3 of the General Conditions.

19.2 The successful Bidder will also be required to sign, seal or witness two complete,

separately bound, sets of Drawings and Specifications, which will be sent to him when he receives notification of acceptance of his bid. Both sets of bound Drawings and Specifications will be required to be returned with the construction schedule.

Mod: 01-Oct-2013

Section 00 22 00 Supplementary Instructions to Bidders Page 1 of 1 Additional Requirements Site Meeting: Pretender site Inspection will be held on July 8, 2014 at 10:00 am. Interested Bidders to meet in the Front Lobby of the LF McIntosh Building, 800 Central Avenue, Prince Albert, Saskatchewan Mod: 01-Oct-2013

Section 00 41 13 Bid Form Page 1 of 6 ARTICLE 1 - PROJECT 1.1 Project Name - 2nd Floor Relifing, LF McIntosh Building 1.2 Project Location - 800 Central Avenue, Prince Albert, Saskatchewan 1.3 Project No. - PW5023-01 / 86948 1.4 Job No. - LLM13057 / 046162 ARTICLE 2 - FROM (BIDDER) 2.1 ________________________________________________________________________

(Name of Company, Partnership or Individual) ARTICLE 3 - DELIVER BIDS TO: 3.1 Ministry of Central Services Accommodation Services Room 726, 800 Central Avenue, PO Box 3003 Prince Albert, Saskatchewan S6V 6G5 ARTICLE 4 - TO (OWNER) Ministry of Central Services 2nd Floor, 1920 Rose Street Regina, Saskatchewan S4P 0A9 4.1 Having carefully examined the Contract Documents as defined in the General Conditions

and having examined and accepted all conditions affecting the Work, the undersigned hereby bids and agrees to furnish all labour, materials, equipment, services and plant and to execute the whole of the works of every description, required or necessary for the Completion of the Project described above.

4.2 The Work shall be done in accordance with the Contract Documents, prepared for or on

behalf of the Owner and submitted to the contractors bidding for the above-mentioned Work, and also in accordance with such further detailed drawings and instructions as may be given from time to time by the Owner or its Representative during the process of the Work.

Section 00 41 13 Bid Form Page 2 of 6 4.3 The Work shall be completed in the manner stated to the full and entire satisfaction of the

Owner or its Representative within the time stated in Article 4.4 below, and in accordance with the aforementioned documents, for the stipulated sum (Bid Price) of:

___________________________________________________ CANADIAN DOLLARS ($ ) The property and/or services provided in this contract are being purchased by Central

Services with Ministry Funds and are therefore not subject to the Goods and Services Tax (GST). The Bid Price should not include GST but should include all other Federal and Provincial Government Sales or other Taxes in force at the closing date referred to in Article 4.3 of the instructions to Bidders, or as amended by addenda. Additional or deductible taxes that may be imposed or removed subsequent to this date, and which shall be payable by or to the Owner, shall result in an adjustment to the contract price.

4.4 Once accepted in writing by the Owner, the Contractor shall commence work. The Work

shall be completed and ready for use and occupation within ________ days. 4.5 The undersigned further agrees upon acceptance of this bid to execute a Contract in the

prescribed form and to furnish the Bonds or other guarantee therein referred to. 4.6 The undersigned encloses herewith a Bid Bond in an amount equal to 10% of the Bid

Price referred to in Article 4.3 hereof, either the said Cheque or the Bond drawn or issued in favour of the Owner.

ARTICLE 5 - PERMANENT PLACE OF BUSINESS 5.1 We, the undersigned, have (____) have not (_____) maintained a permanent place of

business in Saskatchewan continuously for the twelve months immediately preceding the closing date of this Bid.

ARTICLE 6 - SURETY/AGREEMENT TO BOND 6.1 Attached hereto is the Agreement to Bond provided by: _______________________________________________________________________, (Name of Proposed Surety Company) agreeing to provide bonding in accordance with GC55 of the General Conditions.

Section 00 41 13 Bid Form Page 3 of 6 ARTICLE 7 - ADDENDA 7.1 The undersigned acknowledges receipt of the following addenda to the Specifications as

issued by the Consultant and which form part of the Contract Documents, the description of the Addendum, the numbers, number of pages and dates of these addenda being:

(Description of Addendum) (No. of Pages) (Date) (Addendum No.) (If no addenda were received, indicate “No addenda received”). ARTICLE 8 - EXECUTION OF CONTRACT 8.1 The undersigned agrees to sign and seal the General Contract (or have affixed its

corporate seal and execute the General Contract as attested by the signatures of its proper officers in that behalf) and agrees to provide the Contract (duly executed and completed, in duplicate) to this bid, all as set out in the Instructions to Bidders.

8.2 The undersigned agrees that the Owner may accept this bid by issuing a registered Letter

of Intent within 40 calendar days following the date of closing of bids. The undersigned acknowledges the provisions of GC32.2 of the General Conditions, and Article 18.6 of the Instructions to Bidders providing for forfeiture of the bid security, should the undersigned fail to commence the Work within 14 days of being notified of the acceptance of this Bid. The undersigned agrees that compliance with the provisions of GC32.2 of the General Conditions is a condition precedent to entering into a contract for the construction of the Project and the delivery of signed Contract Documents will be deferred until this condition precedent is satisfied.

8.3 The undersigned agrees that if he/it fails to commence the Work within the time allotted

by and as provided in GC32.2, there will be no delivery of signed Contract Documents and the bid security, limited to the lesser amount of the enclosed Certified Cheque/Bid Bond or the difference between the amount of this bid and the amount of the bid of such other bidder as the Owner may contract with for the construction of the Project, shall be forfeited in lieu of damages to which the Owner may be entitled by reason of the undersigned's failure or refusal to commence the Work of the Contract within the allotted time.

Section 00 41 13 Bid Form Page 4 of 6 8.4 Should this bid be accepted, one set of signed Contract Documents will be delivered to the

undersigned once the condition precedent set out in GC32.2 of the General Conditions is satisfied. This shall also entitle the undersigned to the return of the bid security once the undersigned submits the bonding called for by GC55 of the General Conditions.

8.5 In the event the undersigned's bid is not accepted, the enclosed Certified Cheque/Bid

Bond is to be returned to the undersigned 40 days after the date of the closing of bids, unless a satisfactory arrangement is made with the undersigned for its retention for a further stated period.

ARTICLE 9 - ACCEPTANCE OF BID 9.1 In submitting this bid, we recognize the right of the Owner to accept the bid at the Bid

Price submitted, or to reject all or any part of the bid and/or to waive technical defects in the bid, if in its judgment the interest of the Owner may so require. We further recognize that we must complete this Bid Form and the duplicate form of contract in their entirety.

9.2 It is acknowledged that the Bid Price submitted shall be open for acceptance for a period

of 40 calendar days from the date of Bid Closing. ARTICLE 10 - BONDING, PRICE BREAKDOWN AND CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 10.1 If we are notified of the acceptance of this Bid within the time aforementioned, we the

undersigned will: 10.1.1 Provide bonding as required in GC55 of the General Conditions. 10.1.2 Provide a detailed Bid Price Breakdown on the prescribed form and in

accordance with GC46.1 of the General Conditions. 10.1.3 Provide a construction schedule in accordance with the General Conditions. 10.1.4 Sign, seal and witness two complete separately bound sets of Drawings and

Specifications.

Section 00 41 13 Bid Form Page 5 of 6 ARTICLE 11 - WARRANTY PERIOD 11.1 We undertake to warrant Work to be performed under the General Contract following the

date of certified Substantial Performance of the Contract, or such longer periods as specified in the Contract Documents.

11.2 All warranty work shall be performed promptly, at our own expense. 11.3 We acknowledge and accept the warranty conditions as provided for in Article 1.1.4 of the

General Contract and Articles GC43, GC47 and GC64 of the General Conditions. ARTICLE 12 - AUTHORIZED CHANGES 12.1 In the event that the Owner elects to introduce changes in the Work, pursuant to GC44 of

the General Conditions, the valuation of changes shall be as provided in Article GC45 of the General Conditions.

ARTICLE 13 - SUB-CONTRACTORS 13.1 We submit herewith a list of Sub-Contractors whom we propose to employ for the

performance of such portions of the Work as indicated. It is agreed that there will be no substitution in Sub-Contractors, nor will any parts of the Work be sublet without the consent of the Owner having been previously obtained in writing:

Description Name of Sub-Contractor of Work Sub-Contractor Address

Section 00 41 13 Bid Form Page 6 of 6 ARTICLE 14 - SIGNATURES ____________________________________________ (Name of Company, Partnership or Individual) (Witness or Seal) ____________________________________________ ____________________________ (Address) (Witness Name) ____________________________________________ ____________________________ (Legal Signature) (Witness Signature) Signed this ______ day of ____________, A.D. 20__, in the City of ____________ in the Province of _________________. Mod: 01-Oct-2013

Section 00 52 13 General Contract Page 1 of 4 THIS AGREEMENT is made in duplicate this _____ day of ___________________, in the year Two Thousand and Fourteen by and between: HER MAJESTY THE QUEEN in right of the Province of Saskatchewan as represented by

the Minister of CENTRAL SERVICES 2nd Floor, 1920 Rose Street

Regina, Saskatchewan S4P 0A9

herein (and in the Contract Documents) called the "Owner";

- and -

herein (and in the General Conditions) called the "Contractor".

WITNESSED: That the Owner and the Contractor undertake and agree as follows: ARTICLE 1 1.1 The Contractor will: 1.1.1 Provide all the materials and perform all the Work shown on the Drawings and

described in the Specifications and as otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents for the Project described as:

Base building upgrades and tenant improvements on the 2nd floor, LF

McIntosh Building, 800 Central Avenue, Prince Albert, Saskatchewan which have been signed in duplicate by both the parties, and which were prepared

by Stantec Architecture Ltd. acting as, and herein (and in the General Conditions) entitled, the "Consultant".

1.1.2 Do and fulfill everything indicated by this General Contract, the General

Conditions of the Contract, the Specifications and the Drawings, or as otherwise contained in the Contract Documents.

Section 00 52 13 General Contract Page 2 of 4 1.1.3 Commence the Work by the _____ day of ________________, 20__ and

substantially perform as certified by the Consultant, all the Work by the _____ day of ____________, 20__.

1.1.4 The Contractor agrees to correct properly, at his own expense, defects or

deficiencies in the Work which appear prior to and during the period of one year from the date of Substantial Completion of the Work, as set out in the Certificate of Substantial Completion of the Work, or such longer periods as may be specified for certain products or work.

a) The Consultant or Owner's Representative shall promptly give the Contractor

written notice of observed defects and deficiencies. b) The Contractor agrees to correct or pay for damage resulting from corrections

made under the requirements of Article 1.1.4 herein. ARTICLE 2 2.1 The following is a list of the Contract Documents referred to in Article 1: 2.1.1 __________________________________________________________________ 2.1.2 __________________________________________________________________ 2.1.3 __________________________________________________________________ 2.1.4 __________________________________________________________________ 2.1.5 __________________________________________________________________ 2.1.6 __________________________________________________________________ 2.1.7 __________________________________________________________________

Section 00 52 13 General Contract Page 3 of 4 ARTICLE 3 3.1 The Owner will:

3.1.1 Pay the Contractor in Canadian dollars, for the materials and services to perform the Work, the Contract Price of: _______________________________________ and ___/100 dollars ($ ) subject to additions and deductions as provided in the General Conditions of the Contract.

3.1.2 Make periodic payments on account thereof upon receipt of the Consultant's

certificate, in accordance with The Builders' Lien Act, of the Province of Saskatchewan, and as follows:

a) in accordance with the General Conditions (GC 41, 46 and 47) make periodic

payments of ninety per cent (90%) of the value, proportionate to the amount of the Contract, of labour and materials incorporated in the Work or delivered at the Site up to the first day of that month as estimated by the Contractor and approved by the Consultant, less the aggregate of previous payments;

b) on Completion of the entire Work, the balance due under the Contract,

subject to the provisions of The Builders’ Lien Act. However, if on account of climatic or other conditions reasonably beyond the Contractor's control, there are items of Work that cannot readily be completed, the payment in full for the Work which has been completed shall not be delayed on account thereof, but the Owner or Consultant may withhold a sufficient and reasonable sum until the uncompleted Work is finished and such sum as will adequately protect the Owner against liens.

ARTICLE 4 4.1 The "General Conditions of the Contract" hereto annexed and signed in duplicate by both

parties, and the aforesaid Specifications and Drawings, are all to be read into and form part of this General Contract and the whole shall constitute the Contract between the parties and it shall ensure to the benefit of and be binding upon them and their successors, executors, administrators and assigns.

Section 00 52 13 General Contract Page 4 of 4 ARTICLE 5 5.1 All communications in writing between the parties or between them and the Consultant

shall be deemed to have been received by the addressee if delivered to the individual or to a member of the firm or to any officer of the Ministry for whom they are intended or five working days after being sent by mail or Telex and addressed as follows:

To the Owner: Ministry of Central Services Rm 726, 800 Central Avenue PO Box 3003 Prince Albert, Saskatchewan S6V 6G5 To the Contractor: To the Consultant: Stantec Architecture Ltd. Ste 100, 75 – 24th Street East Saskatoon, Saskatchewan S7K 0K3 _________________________________________________________________________ IN WITNESS WHEREOF the parties have hereunto executed this Agreement the day and year first above written. SIGNED, SEALED AND DELIVERED MINISTRY OF CENTRAL SERVICES in the presence of Per: _________________________ Per: _________________________ (CONTRACTOR) Per: ________________________ Per: ________________________ Mod: 01-Oct-2013

Section 00 72 00 General Conditions – Index Page 1 of 2 ARTICLE PAGE DESCRIPTION GC1 1 Definitions GC2 3 Interpretations GC3 4 The Consultant's Decision GC4 4 Documents - General GC5 5 Specifications GC6 5 Applicable Standards GC7 5 Detail Drawings and Instructions GC8 6 Copies Furnished GC9 6 Shop Drawings GC10 7 Drawings and Specifications on the Work and Record Drawings GC11 7 Ownership of Drawings and Models GC12 7 Publicity Releases GC13 7 Samples GC14 8 Superintendence GC15 8 Sub-Contracts GC16 9 Relationship of the Contractor and Sub-Contractor(s) GC17 9 Employees and Workmanship GC18 10 Labour Standards Practice GC19 10 Separate Contracts GC20 10 Saskatchewan Materials, Services and Labour GC21 11 Materials, Equipment, Services and Plant GC22 11 Equals GC23 12 Alternate Materials and Substitutes GC24 12 Material Tests and Mix Designs GC25 12 Temporary Buildings and Services GC26 13 Material, Plant and Real Property Supplied by Owner GC27 13 Material, Plant and Real Property Becomes Property of Owner GC28 14 Use of Premises GC29 14 Construction Sign(s) GC30 14 Protection of Personnel, Work and Property GC31 15 Smoking and Fires GC32 16 Time of Essence GC33 16 Site and Subsurface Conditions GC34 17 Examination of the Work GC35 17 Rejected Work GC36 18 Deductions and Uncorrected Work GC37 18 Emergencies GC38 18 Cutting, Patching and Digging GC39 19 Cleaning Up GC40 19 Operating and Maintenance Manuals and Instruction Period GC41 20 Certification Inspections and Takeover Procedures GC42 22 Correction After Substantial Performance

Section 00 72 00 General Conditions – Index Page 2 of 2 GC43 22 Warranty Period Examination GC44 23 Changes in the Work GC45 23 Valuation of Changes GC46 24 Application for Payments GC47 25 Certificates and Payments GC48 26 Taxes GC49 26 Permits, Notices, Laws and Rules GC50 26 Patent Fees GC51 26 Indemnification by Contractor GC52 27 Indemnification by Owner GC53 27 Contractor's Liability Insurance GC54 28 Builder's Risk Insurance GC55 29 Bonds GC56 29 Delays GC57 30 Owner's Right To Do Work GC58 30 Owner's Right To Terminate Contract GC59 31 Contractor's Right To Suspend Work or Terminate Contract GC60 32 Damages and Mutual Responsibility GC61 33 Liens GC62 33 Dispute Resolution GC63 33 Notices and Decisions in Writing GC64 34 Assignment GC65 34 Confidentiality

Section 00 72 00 General Conditions Page 1 of 34 GC1 - DEFINITIONS 1.1 Agreement - is the Agreement and Schedules appended thereto for professional Services,

between the Owner/Client and the Consultant. 1.2 Change Order (CO) - means a written order formally changing the Contract and signed

by both the Contractor and the Owner, issued after the execution of the General Contract, authorizing an addition, deletion or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Time.

1.3 Completion - shall have the meaning ascribed to it in the Builders’ Lien Act of

Saskatchewan. 1.4 Construction Cost - means the most current actual contracted cost of all elements of the

Project as specified in the Contract Documents, as determined by the Contractor, verified by the Consultant, and approved by the Owner.

1.5 Contract - means the combined documents consisting of the General Contract, the

General Conditions, the Supplementary General Conditions, the Drawings specified therein or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, all Specifications and Drawings further detailing, explaining or altering the Work, albeit these Drawings or Specifications shall be issued after the Contract is executed. It shall also include the Bid Form, Schedule of Prices, Contractor's Bond and all other exhibits mentioned in the Contract as forming part thereof.

1.6 Contract Documents - The Contract Documents consist of the executed General

Contract between the Owner and the Contractor, the General Conditions of the Contract, the Drawings, Specifications, addenda and such other documents as are identified as constituting part of the Contract Documents.

1.7 Contract Time - has the meaning as set forth in Article 1.1.3 of the Contract for

Substantial Performance of the Work. 1.8 Contractor - means the party or parties to whom shall have been let the Contract for the

Work to be done. 1.9 Extra Work - shall have the meaning ascribed thereto in GC45.2 hereof. 1.10 Other Contractor - means any person or firm or corporation employed by or having a

contract, directly or indirectly for the performance of, with the Owner otherwise than through the Contractor.

Section 00 72 00 General Conditions Page 2 of 34 1.11 Owner - means Her Majesty the Queen, in Right of the Province of Saskatchewan as

represented by the Minister of Central Services, the designated Project Manager, or other authorized nominee.

1.12 Plan - shall have the same meaning as Drawings, unless the context otherwise implies. 1.13 Plant - means all tools, machinery, equipment, boilers, wagons, trucks, and all temporary

structures such as storehouses, shoring, forms, scaffolding, lumber, and in general whatever appliances, appurtenances or apparatus shall be brought to or constructed upon the site by the Contractor for the performance of the Work.

1.14 Project - shall mean and refer to the Project described in the Recitals of the Contract

which is the subject of the Contract Documents issued by the Consultant, and the subject of the Contractor's Work.

1.15 Project Manager - such person from time to time identified as such to the Contractor by

the Owner in writing. 1.16 Proposed Change Notice (PCN) - means a document drafted by the Consultant, issued

by the Owner (or the Consultant on his behalf) to the Contractor outlining proposed changes to the Work, in order that a price or a change in Contract Time be established, if these proposed changes were incorporated into the Work. It is not a contractual document as issued or an authorization for the Contractor to proceed, but will become a formal offer when documented by the Contractor and submitted for consideration.

1.17 Site - means the place or places where the Work under the Contract is being carried out,

erected, built or constructed. 1.18 Specification - means in all cases the latest edition thereof and includes both General

Conditions and Supplementary Conditions together with any addendum thereto, whether in writing or conveyed by drawing.

1.19 Sub-Contractor - includes only a person, firm or corporation having a contract with the

Contractor for the execution of a part, or parts, of the Work included in the Contract, and a person, firm or corporation furnishing material called for in the Contract and worked to a special design according to the Drawings or Specifications, but does not include one who merely furnishes material not so worked, the latter being referred to herein as a Supplier.

1.20 Substantial Performance - shall have the meaning ascribed to it in the Builders’ Lien

Act of Saskatchewan.

Section 00 72 00 General Conditions Page 3 of 34 1.21 Supplier - means any person, firm or corporation furnishing material to the Contractor or

any Sub-Contractor for use in the Work, such material not being worked to a special design.

1.22 Surety - means the company, which executes the bond required by the Contract to be

furnished by the Contractor. 1.23 Work or Works - includes the whole of the works materials, plant and real property

required to be done, supplied, furnished or performed which are mentioned or contemplated in the Contract Documents; or the place of Work as the context requires. The term Works includes all the preliminary work necessary to put the Site in condition to enable the Contract to be proceeded with. The intention of the parties hereto being that the Contractor shall perform, at his own expense in every respect, the Work of constructing and delivering to the Owner the completed Project without any expense to the Owner other than payment of the Contract Price.

1.24 Consultant - shall be the person or firm named as such in Article 5 of the General

Contract, or such other person as the Owner shall designate from time to time. GC2 INTERPRETATIONS 2.1 The headings in the Contract Documents, other than headings contained or used in the

Plans or in the Specifications are inserted for convenience of reference only. 2.2 In interpreting the Contract, in the event of discrepancies or conflicts between: 2.2.1 anything in the Plans and Specifications and the General Conditions, the

General Conditions govern; 2.2.2 anything in the General Conditions and the Supplementary General Conditions,

the Supplementary General Conditions govern. 2.3 In interpreting the Plans and Specifications, in the event of discrepancies or conflicts

between: 2.3.1 the Plans and Specifications, the Specifications govern; 2.3.2 the Plans, the Plans drawn with the largest scale govern; and 2.3.3 figured dimensions and scaled dimensions, the figured dimensions govern.

Section 00 72 00 General Conditions Page 4 of 34 2.4 The words Contractor and he or any derivative thereof shall have a plural, feminine or

neutered meaning where the context so requires. 2.5 Where the Contractor, as defined herein, consists of more than one person or corporation,

their liability to perform the covenants herein contained to be performed by the Contractor shall be joint and several.

2.6 This Contract shall ensure to the benefit of and be binding upon the respective executors,

administrators, successors and permitted assigns of the Owner and the Contractor. 2.7 The Law of the Province of Saskatchewan shall govern in interpreting this or any related

agreement between the parties to this Contract. GC3 THE CONSULTANT'S DECISION 3.1 The Consultant is in the first instance the interpreter of the Contract Documents and the

judge of the Contractor's performance. The Consultant shall use his powers under the Contract to enforce faithful performance by both parties hereto.

3.1.1 In case of the termination of the employment of the Consultant, the Owner shall

appoint a Consultant whose status under the Contract shall be that of the former Consultant.

3.2 Should the Contractor hold the Consultant's decisions to be at variance with the Contract

Documents or to involve changes in Work already built, fixed, ordered or in hand in excess of the Contract, or to be given in error, he shall appropriately notify the Consultant before proceeding to carry them out.

3.2.1 In the event of the Consultant and the Contractor fail to agree as to whether or

not such decision by the Consultant is consistent with the Contract, and the Consultant decides to carry out the disputed Work, the Contractor shall act according to such decision, and may invoke arbitration as provided in GC62, to settle questions of cost recovery or Contract Time variation.

GC4 DOCUMENTS - GENERAL 4.1 The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is called for by any one shall be as

binding as if called for by all.

Section 00 72 00 General Conditions Page 5 of 34 4.2 The intention of the Contract Documents is to include all labour, equipment, services,

materials and plant necessary for the proper execution of the Work. 4.3 The Contract Documents shall be read by all trades to properly acquaint them with the

nature of the Work required. Failure to do so will not relieve them of the responsibility for coordinating the Work and for the supply and/or installation of materials required in the Work.

4.4 Descriptions of material or work in words which when so applied have well known

technical or trade meanings shall be given such recognized meanings. GC5 SPECIFICATIONS 5.1 The specifications shall be read in conjunction with and having reference to the whole of

the Contract Documents. GC6 APPLICABLE STANDARDS 6.1 Where Standards for specifications are referred to in the Specifications, such Standards

shall form a part of the Contract Documents. 6.2 Where Standards other than Canadian Standards Association (C.S.A.) are shown,

equivalent C.S.A. specifications shall take precedence and shall govern wherever applicable.

GC7 DETAIL DRAWINGS AND INSTRUCTIONS 7.1 The Consultant shall from time to time furnish as necessary for the execution of the

Work, additional instructions, by means of drawings or otherwise. The Work shall be executed in conformance with the Contract Documents. In giving such additional instructions, the Consultant shall have authority to make minor changes in the Work, which do not result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Time.

7.2 When the Contractor or the Consultant so requests they shall jointly prepare a schedule,

subject to change from time to time in accordance with the progress of the Work. Dates shall be fixed at which the various detail drawings will be required, and the Consultant shall furnish them in accordance with this schedule.

Section 00 72 00 General Conditions Page 6 of 34 GC8 COPIES FURNISHED 8.1 The Consultant shall furnish to the Contractor, without charge, as many copies of all

Drawings and Specifications as are reasonably necessary for the proper execution of the Work.

GC9 SHOP DRAWINGS 9.1 The term Shop Drawings shall include shop drawings, setting drawings or diagrams and

related notes used by manufacturers and fabricators to detail and clarify the Work. 9.2 The Contractor and the Consultant shall jointly prepare a schedule, fixing the dates for the

submission of Shop Drawings for the beginning of manufacture and installation of materials and for the completion of the various parts of the Work. In the event the parties cannot agree on a schedule, the Consultant's ruling shall be binding.

9.3 The Contractor shall furnish to the Consultant, at proper times, all Shop Drawings which

the Consultant may deem necessary in order that the manufacturers or fabricators may clarify the details of the Work.

9.4 The Contractors shall make any changes in Shop Drawings which the Consultant may

require consistent with the Contract, and shall submit sufficient copies of the revised Shop Drawings to the Consultant for review, all but four of which shall be returned to the Contractor if found to be acceptable by the Consultant.

9.5 The Contractor shall review and thoroughly check all Shop Drawings before they are

submitted to the Consultant and so indicate by stamping and signing all Shop Drawings submitted.

9.6 When submitting Shop Drawings, the Contractor shall notify the Consultant, in writing,

of change made therein from the Consultant's Drawings or Specifications. 9.7 The Consultant shall review the Shop Drawings noting his comments and changes

thereon. Should changes be called for, the Contractor shall make all such changes and resubmit in the same manner as outlined above and, if necessary, repeat the process until all required changes are made and "review completed" is noted on the Shop Drawings.

9.8 The Consultant's review of Shop Drawings or the revised Shop Drawings shall not relieve

the Contractor from responsibility for errors made by the Contractor therein or for changes made from the Consultant's Drawings or Specifications not covered by a Contractor's written notification to the Consultant.

Section 00 72 00 General Conditions Page 7 of 34 9.9 The review of Shop Drawings by the Consultant is for the purpose of confirming general

configuration only. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for actual measurements and dimensions.

GC10 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ON THE WORK AND RECORD

DRAWINGS 10.1 The Contractor shall keep one copy of all Drawings, Specifications and approved Shop

Drawings on the Work, at the Site, in good order, and available to the Consultant and his representatives.

10.2 The Contractor shall maintain one complete set of all Drawings exclusively to record

as-built information and shall indicate thereon neatly, each and every field change, change in the Work from that set forth in the original Contract Documents, or component of the Work being covered which may require future access, as it occurs. By Completion, this set of drawings shall be turned-over to the Consultant.

GC11 OWNERSHIP OF DRAWINGS AND MODELS 11.1 All Drawings, Specifications and copies thereof and all models are the property of the

Owner. GC12 PUBLICITY RELEASES 12.1 The prime consultants, subconsultants, and their staff shall not make any public

presentation with regard to the project without the prior approval of Central Services. 12.2 There shall be no publicity releases in connection with the project without prior approval

in writing of Central Services. GC13 SAMPLES 13.1 The Contractor shall furnish for the Consultant's approval such samples as the Consultant

may reasonably require. The Work shall be in accordance with approved samples. Materials, methods, finishes utilized in the Work shall at all times be consistent with the approved samples.

Section 00 72 00 General Conditions Page 8 of 34 GC14 SUPERINTENDENCE 14.1 The Contractor shall have, unless otherwise stipulated in the Contract Documents, control

of the administration and the methods utilized in the Work. 14.2 The Contractor shall be solely responsible for directing and supervising the means,

methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and for initiating, maintaining and over-seeing all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, using his best skill and attention therefor.

14.3 The Contractor shall forthwith upon Contract Award designate a competent

superintendent, as communicated to the Owner in writing, and keep him on the Work, during its progress, and until Completion, along with any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to the Consultant. The Owner reserves the right to refuse the superintendent chosen by the Contractor.

14.4 The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and any Notice, consent,

order, direction, decision or other communication given to him, shall be held to be given to the Contractor.

14.5 The superintendent shall not be changed except with the consent of the Consultant, unless

the superintendent ceases to be in his employ. GC15 SUB-CONTRACTS 15.1 The Contractor agrees that the list of names of Sub-Contractors set out in the Bid Form is

the list of Sub-Contractors proposed to be used to carry out those parts of the Work noted thereon and he shall not employ any to whom the Consultant may reasonably object.

15.2 The Contractor will not make any substitutions for any Sub-Contractor who has been

accepted by the Owner, without the prior expressed consent of the Owner in writing. 15.3 If the Consultant shall object to the employment of a Sub-Contractor, as referred to in

GC15.1, and the Contractor must engage another Sub-Contractor at a higher price, then the Contract Price shall be increased by the difference between the two bids.

15.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for the effective coordination of the Work of Other

Contractors and all Sub-Contractors with each other and with his own forces and for expediting the supply of materials, equipment, plant and utilities as required, to ensure Completion on or before the completion date set out in Article 4.4 of the Bid Form.

Section 00 72 00 General Conditions Page 9 of 34 15.5 The Consultant shall in accordance with the Builders’ Lien Act of the Province of

Saskatchewan, on request, furnish to any Sub-Contractor the amounts certified by the Consultant in respect of his contract.

15.6 The Contractor shall not be obliged to employ as a Sub-Contractor to whom he may

reasonably object. 15.7 Nothing contained in the Contract documents shall create or be deemed to create any

Contractual relationship between any Sub-Contractor and the Owner. GC16 RELATIONSHIP OF THE CONTRACTOR AND SUB-CONTRACTOR(S) 16.1 The Contractor shall bind every Sub-Contractor by the terms of the Contract Documents,

as far as applicable to his Work by incorporating the Contract Documents into each and every Sub-Contract either directly or by reference thereto.

16.2 The Contractor shall be held as fully responsible to the Owner for the acts and omissions

of his Sub-Contractors, and of persons directly or indirectly employed by them, as for the acts and omissions of persons directly employed by him.

GC17 EMPLOYEES AND WORKMANSHIP 17.1 The Contractor shall provide all labour and services necessary to complete the Work,

unless specified otherwise. 17.2 The Contractor shall endeavour to employ only Saskatchewan Sub-Contractors, services,

manufacturers, fabricators, suppliers and labour from the locality where the Work is being performed to the extent to which it is available.

17.3 The Contractor shall employ on the Work only qualified, skilled and fit persons who shall

demonstrate the highest standard of workmanship. 17.4 The Contractor shall examine existing or previously completed surfaces, or substrates to

determine its suitability and acceptability for the proper execution of any and all subsequent overlying work, and shall immediately advise the Consultant of any unsuitable or unacceptable conditions encountered, and actions taken, or proposed.

Section 00 72 00 General Conditions Page 10 of 34 GC18 LABOUR STANDARDS PRACTICE 18.1 The Contractor shall post and keep posted in a conspicuous place on the premises where

the Contract is being executed, occupied or frequented by Workmen, a copy of The Labour Standards Act.

18.2 The Contractor shall keep a proper record showing the names, trades and addresses of all

the Workmen in his employ, and the wages paid to and the time Worked by such Workmen and the books and documents containing such records shall be open at all times to examination by a representative of the Ministry of Advance Education, Employment and Labour.

GC19 SEPARATE CONTRACTS 19.1 The Owner reserves the right to let other contracts in connection with the Work, of which

the Work pursuant to this Contract is a part, and the Contractor shall, in conjunction with the Consultant, schedule his Work with that of the Other Contractor(s).

19.2 If any part of the Contractor's Work depends for its proper execution or result upon the

Work of any Other Contractor, the Contractor shall in writing report promptly to the Consultant any defects in the Work of such Other Contractor as may interfere with the proper execution of the Contractor's Work.

19.3 Should the Contractor fail to adequately inspect or report defects as per GC19.2, he shall

have no claim against the Owner by reason of the defective or unfinished Work of any Other Contractor except as to latent defects not reasonably observable at or prior to commencement of the Contractor's Work.

19.4 In letting separate Contracts the Owner shall be responsible for the coordination of fire

and other insurance coverage. 19.5 The Owner reserves the right to do Work with his own forces, subject to the conditions of

GC19.1 to GC19.4 inclusive. GC20 SASKATCHEWAN MATERIALS, SERVICES AND LABOUR 20.1 The Contractor shall so perform the Work pursuant to this Contract with a view to

maximizing Saskatchewan content in the form of Sub-Contractors, suppliers, manufacturers, and labourers.

Section 00 72 00 General Conditions Page 11 of 34 20.2 The Contractor shall allow equal opportunity for all sub-contractors, suppliers, and

manufacturers to work on the project. GC21 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, SERVICES AND PLANT 21.1 Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall arrange, provide and pay for all labour,

equipment, services, materials, plant, real property, tools, and utilities necessary for the execution of the Work.

21.2 The Contractor shall employ in the Work only new materials and of the highest quality,

unless specified otherwise. 21.3 The Contractor shall provide such temporary sheds, space or cover as required to

adequately store, protect and otherwise shelter materials and appliances delivered to, and accepted by the Contractor, at the Site.

21.4 The Contractor shall keep such records of all materials, plant and real property referred to

in GC21.1 as the Consultant from time to time requires and shall satisfy the Consultant, when requested, that such material plant and real property are at the place and in the condition in which they ought to be.

GC22 EQUALS 22.1 The Work equipment and materials supplied by the Contractor shall be of materials and

equipment herein specified as being: 22.1.1 Of specified manufacture; or, 22.1.2 A specific equal, approved in advance by the Consultant; or, 22.1.3 As having been granted an equivalent rating listed as approved by the

Consultant in addenda. 22.1.4 Where materials or equipment not specified or approved thus are used by the

Contractor, the Contractor uses such at his own risk and may be required by the Consultant to supply materials or equipment as specified or of approved equal or replace installed non-approved materials and make good the Work, at no increase to the Contract Price.

Section 00 72 00 General Conditions Page 12 of 34 22.2 Equipment and material equals shall be both designated as such and approved for use in

advance by the Consultant in accordance with Article 11 of the Instructions to Bidders. GC23 ALTERNATE MATERIALS AND SUBSTITUTES 23.1 The Work equipment and materials supplied by the Contractor shall be based on the

materials and equipment specified or as equal specified or established as equal by addenda. The use of other materials or equipment by the Contractor as an alternate or substitution shall be as approved in advance by the Consultant as specified, or as listed in addenda, in accordance with Article 11 of the Instructions to Bidders.

GC24 MATERIAL TESTS AND MIX DESIGNS 24.1 The Contractor shall furnish for the Consultant's approval such material tests and mix

designs as the Consultant may reasonably require. The cost of providing the foregoing beyond the extent called for in the Specifications shall be charged to the Owner. The work shall be in accordance with approved material tests and mix designs.

GC25 TEMPORARY BUILDINGS AND SERVICES 25.1 The Contractor shall provide and maintain a seasonally appropriate waterproof temporary

office at the Site of sufficient size for the use of Consultant, Contractor, and Sub-Contractors, equipped with electric lights, heating equipment, plan table and plan racks, weather-tight windows and door, and necessary locks.

25.2 Locate temporary office on site where directed, and remove when Work is completed. 25.3 The Contractor shall install a telephone at the Site for free local use of the

Sub-Contractors and the Consultant until Completion. 25.4 The Contractor shall, at a location or locations directed, provide and maintain in a

sanitary condition temporary toilet(s) as necessary for use of employees. The Contractor shall prohibit Workmen from using permanent toilet fixtures while the Work is in progress.

25.5 The Contractor shall supply and furnish all equipment, plant, tools, machinery such as

temporary ramps, barriers, stairs, ladders and other such construction materials, all of substantial construction, required to carry out the Work, and maintain these throughout the term of the Contract in good repair.

Section 00 72 00 General Conditions Page 13 of 34 25.6 The Contractor shall arrange for and furnish at his own expense, all water, electricity,

lighting, heating, and other utilities necessary for construction purposes. Temporary lighting shall be adequate for the use of Sub-Contractors during the construction. No part of any temporary system or temporary equipment shall be incorporated in the finished Work.

25.7 The Contractor shall remove all temporary Work from the premises on or before

Completion of the total project. GC26 MATERIAL, PLANT AND REAL PROPERTY SUPPLIED BY THE OWNER 26.1 Subject to GC21.2, the Contractor is liable to the Owner for any damage to material, plant

or real property that is supplied, placed or given over to the care, custody and control of the Contractor by the Owner for use in connection with the Contract, whether or not the damage is attributable to causes beyond the Contractor's control.

26.2 The Contractor is not liable to the Owner for any loss or damage to material, plant or real

property referred to in GC21.1 if that loss or damage results from and is directly attributable to reasonable wear and tear.

26.3 The Contractor shall not use any materials, plant or real property referred to in GC26.1

except for the purpose of performing this Contract. GC27 MATERIAL, PLANT AND REAL PROPERTY BECOMES PROPERTY OF

OWNER 27.1 All material, plant and the interest of the Contractor in all real property, licenses, powers,

and privileges acquired, used or provided by him for the Contract shall, from the time of their acquisition pursuant to this Contract, use or provision, becomes the property of the Owner for the purposes of the Work and they shall continue to be the property of the Owner:

27.1.1 in the case of material(s), until the Consultant indicates that he is satisfied that

it will not be required for the Work; and 27.1.2 in the case of plant, real property, licenses, powers or privileges, until the

Consultant indicates that he is satisfied that the interest vested in the Owner therein is no longer required for the purpose of the Work.

Section 00 72 00 General Conditions Page 14 of 34 27.2 Material or plant that is the property of the Owner by virtue of GC27.1 shall not be

removed from the Site or disposed of except for the purposes of the Work without the written consent of the Consultant.

27.3 The Owner shall not be liable for any loss or damage however caused to the material or

plant referred to in GC27.1. The Contractor shall be liable for such losses and damage notwithstanding that the material is the property of the Owner.

GC28 USE OF PREMISES 28.1 The Contractor shall confine his apparatus, the storage of materials and the operations of

his Workmen to limits indicated by laws, ordinances, and permits or by direction of the Consultant, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with his materials.

28.2 The Contractor shall not load or permit to be loaded any part of the Work with a weight

that will endanger its safety. 28.3 The Contractor shall enforce the Consultant's instructions regarding signs,

advertisements, fires, smoking and fencing. GC29 CONSTRUCTION SIGN(S) 29.1 The Contractor shall arrange for, erect and remove (upon completion) Construction

Sign(s) as outlined in the contract drawings and specifications. 29.2 The Contractor shall not permit any other sign to be posted on or adjacent to the Site,

without written consent of the Owner, and in accordance with details submitted to and approved by the Owner. All such supplementary signage shall be paid for by the requesting party.

GC30 PROTECTION OF PERSONNEL, WORK AND PROPERTY 30.1 Except for the work done by the Owner or any Other Contractor, the Contractor shall be

solely responsible for construction safety at the Site and for compliance with the rules, regulations, and practices required by all applicable health and safety legislation, including The Occupational Health and Safety Act and Regulations thereunder, and shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the work. Without limiting the generality of this section, the Contractor shall ensure that all reasonable precautions are

Section 00 72 00 General Conditions Page 15 of 34

taken to protect the safety of all personnel in the area of the work, whether employed by the Contractor or not.

30.2 The Contractor shall provide such security as directed or in the absence of such direction

as is reasonably required in the circumstances of the Work to protect the Work from damage, loss, or injury.

30.3 The Contractor shall provide, as directed, all facilities necessary for the purpose of

maintaining security, and shall assist any person authorized by the Owner to inspect, or to take security measures in respect of the Work and the Site.

30.4 Necessary hoardings, covered ways, guardrails, barriers, and night lights as may be

necessary for the security of the Site or safety or as required by bylaws or ordinances shall be erected and maintained by the Contractor.

30.5 The Contractor shall reasonably protect adjacent property as required by law and the

Contract documents, and shall make good any damage to such property and shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless from any claim arising out of such damage as may occur.

30.6 The Contractor and Sub-Contractor(s) shall locate and ensure protection of all existing

utility services. The damage of any service shall be immediately repaired by the responsible party, at no additional cost to the Owner.

GC31 SMOKING AND FIRES 31.1 Unless otherwise determined by the Owner in its sole discretion, smoking by the

Contractor and his forces shall be at the discretion of the Contractor, while complying with all legislative requirements and he shall assume the responsibility for the necessary protection of the building and material against the possibility of damage or fire which could result from smoking. Smoking is not allowed in “enclosed public places.”

31.2 The Contractor and his men are forbidden to light fires of any kind in or about the Work,

except within control devices used in the preparation of materials, or except with the written permission of the Consultant.

31.3 Where fire or exposed flame is used for such preparation of materials, the Contractor

shall take all necessary precautions to protect the Work and adjacent property. 31.4 The Contractor shall not allow rubbish to collect around the Site, and burning rubbish at

the Site shall be prohibited.

Section 00 72 00 General Conditions Page 16 of 34 GC32 TIME OF ESSENCE 32.1 Time is of the essence of the Contract. 32.2 The Contractor shall within fourteen (14) days after being notified of the award of the

Contract commence Work at the Site and shall continue Work without interruption, except as provided in GC56.2 - GC56.3 inclusive, until the whole of the Work is complete.

32.3 The Contractor shall within thirty (30) days of the Contract award, prepare a schedule of

the Work showing each division of the Work, the date of commencement and completion of each division, and the delivery date of all items of material and equipment. He shall submit four (4) copies of the completed schedule to the Consultant.

32.4 All materials and labour shall be furnished at such time as shall be in the best interest of

all parties concerned, to the end that the combined Work of all may be fully and properly completed within the Contract Time.

32.5 Any delay resulting in increased cost which is the result of improperly scheduled Work

shall be borne by the party responsible therefor. 32.6 Delays in the Work shall be resolved in accordance with GC56. GC33 SITE AND SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS 33.1 The Contractor shall have fully investigated the Site, familiarizing himself with all

prevailing conditions for the Work in accordance with Article 12 of the Instructions to Bidders.

33.2 In the event that during the execution of Work subsurface conditions at the Site are found

to differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents and soil reports, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Consultant in writing of such changed conditions.

33.3 The Consultant shall promptly investigate such changed conditions and if he finds that

they differ materially and will result in need to redesign the Work or result in an increase or decrease in the Contract Time, an adjustment shall be made between the parties and the Contract modified in writing accordingly.

Section 00 72 00 General Conditions Page 17 of 34 GC34 EXAMINATION OF THE WORK 34.1 The Owner, the Consultant, or their designated representatives shall at all times have

access to the Work wherever it is in preparation or progress and the Contractor shall provide proper facilities for such access and for examination of the Work.

34.2 If the specifications, the Consultant's instructions, the laws, or the ordinances of any

public authority require any Work to be tested or approved, the Contractor shall give Notice of the day and time of its readiness for examination, and if the examination is by an authority other than the Consultant, of the day and time fixed for such an examination.

34.3 If any Work should be covered up without approval or consent of the Consultant, it must,

if required by the Consultant, or other authority having jurisdiction, be uncovered for examination. If such Work be found in accordance with the Contract, the Owner shall pay the cost of re-examination and replacement, unless such examination was previously specified, is reasonably foreseeable, or if such Work is found to be not in accordance with the Contract.

34.4 If, as a result of an examination of the Work referred to in GC34.1, it is established that

the Work was not performed in Accordance with the Contract Documents, then, and without limiting or otherwise affecting any of the Owners rights and remedies under the Contract either at law or in equity, the Contractor shall pay the Owner, on demand, all reasonable costs and expenses that were incurred by the Owner in having that examination performed.

34.5 Examinations of the Work undertaken by the Consultant and/or his representative are

periodic. It is not incumbent upon the Consultant to notify the Contractor when to begin, to cease or resume Work or to give early notice of the rejection of the faulty Work or in any way to supervise in such a manner as to relieve the Contractor of responsibility or consequences of neglect or carelessness by him or his employees or subordinates.

GC35 REJECTED WORK 35.1 The Contractor shall promptly remove from the premises any defective Work, whether

the result of poor Workmanship, use of defective materials, damage through carelessness or other act of Contractor, which has been condemned by the Consultant as failing to conform to the Contract Documents, whether incorporated in the Work or not.

35.2 The Contractor shall promptly replace and re-execute the deficient Work in accordance

with the Contract Documents and without expense to the Owner and shall bear the


expense of making good all Work of Other Contractors destroyed or damaged by such removal or replacement.

35.3 If the Contractor does not remove such condemned materials or Work within the time

fixed by Notice, the Owner may remove them and may store such materials at the expense of the Contractor. If the Contractor does not pay the expense of such removal within five (5) days thereafter, the Owner may, upon ten (10) days Notice sell such materials at auction or at private sale and shall account for the net proceeds thereof, after deducting all the costs and expenses that would have been borne by the Contractor.

GC36 DEDUCTIONS AND UNCORRECTED WORK 36.1 If, in the opinion of the Consultant, it is not expedient to correct defective Work or Work

not done in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may deduct from the Contract Price the difference in cost between the Work as done and the estimate for that called for by the Contract, the amount of which shall be determined in the first instance by the Consultant without in any way limiting any other right which the Owner may have.

GC37 EMERGENCIES 37.1 The Consultant has authority in an emergency to stop the progress of the Work whenever,

in his opinion, such stoppage may be necessary to ensure the safety of life, or of the Work, or neighboring property. This includes authority to make such changes and to order, assess and award the cost of such Work as an extra to the Contract or otherwise as may in his opinion be necessary.

GC38 CUTTING, PATCHING AND DIGGING 38.1 The Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting or patching of the Work that may be required to

make it fit to receive or be received by Work of the Other Contractor(s) shown upon, or reasonably implied by, or in the Contract Documents.

38.2 The Contractor shall not endanger any existing Work by cutting, digging or otherwise,

and shall not cut or alter the Work of any Other Contractor save with the consent of the Consultant.

Section 00 72 00 General Conditions Page 19 of 34 GC39 CLEANING UP 39.1 The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of waste

material or rubbish caused by his employees or Work, and by Completion, he shall remove all his rubbish and tools, equipment and surplus materials from and about the Work.

39.2 In addition to removal of rubbish, the Contractor shall clean all glass, replace any broken

glass, remove stains, spots, marks and dirt from any finished Work, clean hardware, remove paint spots and smears from all surfaces, clean all fixtures, and wash all concrete and resilient floors, remove all errant spots, soil and paint by Completion.

39.3 In case of dispute the Owner may remove the rubbish and charge such cost as the

Consultant shall determine to have been incurred. GC40 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND INSTRUCTION PERIOD 40.1 The Contractor shall supply three (3) hardbound copies of operating and maintenance

manuals and manufacturers' instructions to the Consultant for delivery to the Owner prior to Substantial Completion. Manuals shall be prepared under the following headings and shall include:

40.1.1 Introduction - explain, in general, the purpose of the equipment and provide a

schematic drawing of the complete system with a brief outline of its operation and limitations.

40.1.2 Equipment List - itemize the various pieces of equipment, giving the name,

type and model number and other information that will be pertinent, and locating the piece of equipment in the Work and explaining its function relevant to the operation of the plant.

40.1.3 Equipment Setting and Adjustment - outline the latitude of various manual

adjustments and settings that can be made and the effect of such changes on the operation of the plant.

40.1.4 Preventative Maintenance - detail the requirements and provide an annual

schedule for the minimum preventative maintenance required and the timing for each activity, necessary for warranty maintenance and economical longevity of operation for each piece of equipment. Information shall include but not be limited to: the types of lubricants needed, and frequency of application; calibration requirements; filter changes; treatment, and additives.

Section 00 72 00 General Conditions Page 20 of 34 40.1.5 Parts List - include a breakdown of each piece of equipment detailing the parts

that may be replaced and indicating the part number. 40.1.6 Shop drawings - as related. 40.2 The Contractor shall provide training to the Owner's operating and maintenance

personnel, in the method of operation, adjustment and maintenance of all mechanical and electrical equipment and systems, all to the Owner's satisfaction. Instructions shall be in the form of prepared lectures and on site demonstration to fully acquaint the staff in the operation and maintenance of heating, ventilation, air conditioning, refrigeration, fire protection, plumbing controls, and electrical systems, or other systems or equipment as may be pertinent, and as applicable to the Work.

40.3 The Owner shall not be responsible for takeover of equipment until the Contractor's

responsibilities pursuant to GC40.1 and GC40.2 have been fulfilled. 40.4 During the tenth month following Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall examine

the mechanical services and re-adjust and/or re-balance the systems as required to compensate for the drift in settings over the break-in period, generally attributed to newly configured systems. The Contractor shall immediately thereafter submit a brief technical report to the Consultant describing the findings and related actions taken.

GC41 CERTIFICATION INSPECTIONS AND TAKEOVER PROCEDURES 41.1 Where in the Contractor's judgement the value of outstanding Work and deficiencies may

permit the release of the Substantial Performance Certificate, in accordance with the Builders’ Lien Act, the Contractor shall provide due Notice to the Consultant requesting an inspection for certification. Before Substantial Completion can be requested all as-built drawings, warranties and operating manuals etc. must be completed, submitted and approved by the Consultant.

41.2 Following receipt of the Contractor's written request, the Consultant shall, if he deems the

Work ready for inspection, advise the Contractor of the date that the inspection shall take place.

41.3 Inspections shall require in addition to the presence of the Contractor, Consultant and

Owner's Representative, the attendance of Sub-Contractors and Sub-Consultants, related to the specific examination and having full knowledge of the Work to that point.

41.4 On completion of the inspection of the Work, the Consultant shall jointly, with his

Sub-Consultants, prepare a written list of deficiencies and outstanding work which shall


be distributed to all those who attended the inspection. This inspection report shall list Work that has not been completed due to special conditions, stating what these special conditions are and may specify a suitable completion holdback pursuant to the Builders’ Lien Act.

41.5 Where the certified value of outstanding work and deficiencies negate the release of the

Substantial Performance Certificate, following further progress by the Contractor and upon further Notice, a subsequent inspection will be made to determine if deficiencies have been corrected and a supplementary inspection report will be issued. The cost and expenses to the Consultant of repeat inspections will be charged directly to the Contractor.

41.6 When the outstanding Work and remaining deficiencies have been corrected to the degree

required under the Builders’ Lien Act, and certified acceptable to the Consultant, the latter shall issue a Substantial Performance Certificate.

41.7 Upon the receipt of the Substantial Performance Certificate, the Contractor shall submit

his request for holdback release, which shall be administered in accordance with the Builders’ Lien Act.

41.8 Where in the Contractor's judgement the Work has progressed to a point which may

permit the release of the Completion Certificate, the Contractor shall, in accordance with the Builders’ Lien Act, provide due Notice to the Consultant requesting inspection for such certification.

41.9 The Completion inspection shall take place in a manner similar to GC41.2 to GC41.6

inclusive, with the exception that a Completion Certificate is ultimately issued. 41.10 Upon the receipt of the Completion Certificate, the Contractor shall submit his request for

final claim and shall attach to this request for payment all necessary documents including the following:

41.10.1 Any drawing/document/specification information over and beyond that deferred

under substantial completion; 41.10.2 Approval, certificates and clearances from authorities having jurisdiction; 41.10.3 Confirmation in writing from the Contractor, Sub-Contractors and Suppliers as

required stating that warranty for all of the work performed as part of their contract against faulty materials and workmanship for a minimum period of twelve (12) months from the date on the Certificate of Substantial Performance


of the work, or for a period of time otherwise specified in the Contract Documents is in place.

41.10.4 Signed statutory declaration stating that materials and services have been paid

for, that all workmen employed on the project by the Contractor and Sub-Contractors have been paid in full, that all terms and requirements of the Builders’ Lien Act have been complied with, that all taxes have been paid, that all assessments under the Unemployment Insurance Acts and Workers' Compensation Acts have been paid and that no person, firm, or corporation has filed, or is entitled to file, a lien either for unpaid wages, materials purchased, or work performed, or services rendered.

41.10.5 Clearance Certificate from the Workers' Compensation Board stating that the

Contractor and Sub-Contractors that worked on the building have an account in good standing with the Board.

41.10.6 Other clearances and certificates as specified in the Contract Documents. GC42 CORRECTION AFTER SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE 42.1 Subject to any special provisions in the Contract Documents, and extensions for latent

deficiencies, the Contractor shall remedy any defects due to faulty materials or workmanship appearing within a period of one year from the date of the Certificate of Substantial Performance and shall pay for any consequential damage to other Work resulting therefrom which appears within such period and neither the Certificate of Substantial Performance nor payment shall relieve the Contractor from responsibility hereunder. The Owner shall give notice of observed defects promptly.

42.2 This article shall not be deemed to restrict any liability of the Contractor arising out of

any law in force in the Province of Saskatchewan. GC43 WARRANTY PERIOD EXAMINATION 43.1 Ten months following the date on the Certificate of Substantial Performance, the

Contractor, the Owner and the Consultant shall together examine the building to determine any deficiencies in materials or Workmanship which have occurred or become apparent since the date of Substantial Performance.

Section 00 72 00 General Conditions Page 23 of 34 43.2 The Consultant shall list all deficiencies and notify the Contractor to rectify such

deficiencies within the two month period prior to the end of the one year warranty period referred to in GC41.10.3.

43.3 Immediately before the end of the one year warranty period referred to in GC41, the

Consultant, the Owner and the Contractor shall make a final examination of the Work to assure that the deficiencies recorded at the ten month examination have been corrected by the Contractor.

43.4 The warranty shall be extended beyond one year after notice of a deficiency in accordance

with GC43.2 and GC43.3 until such time as the deficiency is certified as remedied. GC44 CHANGES IN THE WORK 44.1 The Owner may, without invalidating the Contract, make changes by altering, adding to,

or deducting from the Work providing a necessary adjustment in Contract Price and/or Contract Time.

44.2 All such Work shall be executed under the conditions of the Contract, except that any

claim for extension or reduction of Contract Time caused thereby shall be adjusted at the time of ordering such change.

44.3 Except as provided for in Article 3.1.1 of the Contract, no change shall be made unless in

pursuance of a written Change Order and no claim for an addition to or deletion from the Contract Price shall be valid unless so ordered and at the same time valued or agreed to

be valued as provided in GC45. GC45 VALUATION OF CHANGES 45.1 When a proposed change may involve a change in cost, the consultant shall request a

quotation by means of a Proposed Change Notice. The value of any change shall be determined in one of the following ways:

By Estimate and Acceptance in a Lump Sum 45.1.1 The contractor shall submit to the consultant for approval, a fully itemized

quotation listing subcontractors, and general contractor's own work showing labour and material separately.

Section 00 72 00 General Conditions Page 24 of 34 The net cost to include material cost to the contractor, rental as per contractor's

cost, labour and field supervision including payroll charges, general conditions, if they can be properly assessed otherwise charged on a percentage basis not to exceed 5% of the other costs. The fee charged by any contractor shall be calculated in accordance with the following schedule:

i) Net cost up to and including one thousand dollars ($1,000.00), fee fifteen

percent (15%). ii) Net cost one thousand and one to two thousand, five hundred dollars ($1,001.00

- $2,500.00), fee ten percent (10%). iii) Net cost two thousand, five hundred and one to five thousand dollars

($2,501.00 - $5,000.00), fee seven percent (7%). iv) Net cost over five thousand dollars ($5,000.00), fee to be negotiated, but not to

exceed five percent (5%). No multiple fees on changes shall exceed 25% of initial cost. 45.2 By Unit Prices Agreed Upon Unit prices shall be submitted with tender where requested and shall include all

allowances for contractor's overhead and profit. 45.3 If none of the above methods is agreed upon, such value may be determined in manner set

out in Article GC62. 45.4 When the aggregate cost of Change Orders amount to an increase or decrease in the

Contract Price of 10% or greater, the Contractor shall forthwith provide Notice to the Surety requesting an extended endorsement, and

45.5.1 a copy of said endorsement shall be forwarded to the Owner in accordance with

GC55, and 45.5.2 at Completion the Owner shall be issued a premium or refund by the Contractor

in an amount equal to the debit or credit in the cost of bonding corresponding to the increase or reduction from the initial Contract Price, subject to GC44, GC45 and GC46.1.3.

GC46 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENTS 46.1 The Contractor's Bid Price Breakdown for the Work, as submitted with the Bid Form, or

as subsequently amended at the time of Contract award, itemizes the standard 16 Work


divisions, and represents the total Contract Price, subject to GC46.1.3. The Contractor shall reference the approved values, or approved amendments thereto, in making Application for Payments.

46.1.1 The Contractor's Overhead and Profit shall be fairly and proportionally

distributed to each division of the Work. 46.1.2 The schedule shall be made out on a prescribed form, and supported by such

evidence as to its correctness, as the Consultant may direct. 46.1.3 The breakdown and related values on this schedule, when approved by the

Consultant, shall be used as a basis for applications for payment and subsequent certification, subject to adjustment as approved by the Consultant as the Work progresses.

46.2 In applying for payments, the Contractor shall submit a Request for Payment Certificate

(in triplicate) detailing the corresponding progress of the various divisions of the Work, supported by such evidence as the Consultant may direct, clarifying a right to the total payment claimed.

GC47 CERTIFICATES AND PAYMENTS 47.1 The Consultant shall within ten (10) days of the receipt of a Request of Payment

Certificate, certify the account for payment or advise the Contractor promptly in writing why the account is amended or disapproved.

47.2 A Certificate for Payment shall provide for holdbacks in accordance with The Builders’

Lien Act of Saskatchewan. 47.2.1 The contractor shall utilize Form C1 (Subsection 41(1.3) of The Builders’ Lien

Act to request certification of Substantial Performance of this contract. 47.3 The Owner shall within forty (40) days of the Consultant's certificate, make payment of

the account in accordance with Article 3.1.2 of the Contract. 47.4 No payment made to the Contractor and no partial or entire use or occupancy of the Work

by the Owner shall be construed as an acceptance of any Work or material not in accordance with this Contract, in the absence of Certification of Completion by the Consultant, and expiration of the applicable warranty period.

Section 00 72 00 General Conditions Page 26 of 34 GC48 TAXES 48.1 The property and/or services provided in this Contract are being purchased by Central

Services with Department Funds and therefore are NOT subject to the Goods and Services Tax (GST).

48.2 The Contractor shall pay all other government sales or excise taxes in force at the date of

closing of the Bidding Phase, provided that any subsequent increase or decrease in such taxes shall increase or decrease any Contract Price accordingly.

GC49 PERMITS, NOTICES, LAWS AND RULES 49.1 The Contractor shall apply and pay for all necessary permits or licenses required for the

execution of Work (but this shall not include the obtaining of permanent easements or rights of servitude).

49.2 The Contractor shall give all necessary notices and pay all fees required by law and

comply with all laws, ordinances, rules and regulations relating to the Work and to the preservation of the public health.

49.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of all Workmen and equipment on the

project in accordance with all applicable safety legislation passed by federal, provincial and local authorities governing safety.

GC50 PATENT FEES 50.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees and shall save the Owner harmless

from loss on account of suits or claims for infringement of patents in the performance of the Work.

GC51 INDEMNIFICATION BY CONTRACTOR 51.1 The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and the Consultant and

their directors, officers, employees, agents, contractors and sub-contractors, his agents and employees, from and against all liabilities, claims, losses, costs, damages and expenses, including personal injuries, in any way caused by, or arising directly or indirectly from, or in consequence of the activities of the Contractor, his Sub-Contractors, his Sub-Sub-Contractors and their respective servants, agents or employees in performing


the Work, including an infringement or an alleged infringement of a patent or any other kind of intellectual property.

GC52 INDEMNIFICATION BY OWNER 52.1 The Owner shall, subject to the Patent Act, and any other law that effects the Owner's

rights, powers, privileges, or obligations, indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, from and against all liabilities, claims, losses, costs, damages and expenses, directly attributable to:

52.1.1 lack of or defect in the Owner’s title to the Work whether real or alleged; or 52.1.2 an infringement or an alleged infringement by the Contractor of any patent or

invention or any other kind of intellectual property occurring while the Contractor was performing an act for the purposes of the Contract employing a model, plan, or design or any other thing related to the Work, that was supplied by the Owner to the Contractor.

GC53 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 53.1 The Contractor shall maintain General Liability Insurance covering premises and

operations liability, non-owned automobile, elevators (if applicable), Contractor’s Contingency Liability with respect to the operations of Sub-Contractors, Completed Operations Liability and Contractual Liability. If applicable, coverage shall include explosion, collapse and undermining and damage to underground facilities.

The Limit of Liability shall be not less than two million dollars ($2,000,000) per occurrence for Bodily Injury, Personal Injury and Property Damage combined Limit. If an aggregate amount is required by the Insurer, an amount not less than $2,000,000 will apply separately to and only to: 1) Products & Completed Operations 2) Personal Injury

53.2 The Contractor shall obtain automobile liability insurance covering all owned

automobiles used by the Contractor, his respective servants, agents or employees under this Agreement, with limits of not less than two million ($2,000,000) per occurrence.

Section 00 72 00 General Conditions Page 28 of 34 53.3 The Contractor shall ascertain that all Sub-Contractors and Sub-Sub-Contractors

employed by him or contracted to him carry insurance in the form and limits as required by the Contractor.

53.4 A certificate of insurance shall be completed, signed and returned prior to commencement

of any Work of the Contractor and within 30 days of the execution of this document and 30 days after the renewal on each anniversary of the insurance policy. The contractor is responsible to ensure that each subcontractor and sub-sub-contractor provides certificates of insurance prior to the commencement of any Work of the Sub-Contractor and Sub-Sub-Contractor and within 30 days of the execution of this document and 30 days after the renewal on each anniversary of the insurance policy.

53.5 The Owner, using the legal name of “Her Majesty the Queen, in Right of the Province

of Saskatchewan as represented by the Minister of Central Services” shall be added as Additional Insured to the policies described in GC53.

53.6 All policies shall be with insurance companies licensed to do business in Saskatchewan. 53.7 The Contractor may take out such additional insurance as he may consider necessary and

desirable. All such additional insurance shall be obtained at no cost to the Owner. GC54 BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE 54.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain all risk course of construction insurance in

the joint names of the Owner, using the legal name of “Her Majesty the Queen, in Right of the Province of Saskatchewan as represented by the Minister of Central Services” and the Contractor and including as named insureds all contractors, subcontractors, engineers, architects and suppliers for the full value of the completed project.

54.2 A certificate of insurance shall be completed, signed and returned prior to commencement

of any Work of the Contractor and within 30 days of the execution of this document and 30 days after the renewal on each anniversary of the insurance policy.

54.3 All policies shall be with insurance companies licensed to do business in Saskatchewan.

Section 00 72 00 General Conditions Page 29 of 34 GC55 BONDS 55.1 The Contractor shall provide and maintain in good standing until the fulfillment of the

Contract, a performance bond and a labour and materials payment bond covering the faithful performance of the Contract, including the requirements of the warranty provided for in GC41 - correction after completion, and payment of all wages and other obligations arising under the Contract.

55.2 All such bonds shall be issued by a company approved by Central Services and

authorized to transact Guarantee Insurance in the Province of Saskatchewan, and in the standard CCDC 221 and CCDC 222 Insurance Industry of Canada approved forms.

55.3 The bonds shall each be in an amount equal to at least 50% of the Contract price and shall

remain in full force and effect for a period of twelve (12) months after the date the Consultant issues the Certificate of Substantial Performance.

55.4 The costs attributable to providing such bonds shall be included in the Contract Price. 55.5 Increases or decreases in the cost of bonding arising out of Change Orders shall be

administered in accordance with GC45.4. 55.6 The Obligee named in the above-referenced bonds shall be the Owner, that is, “Her

Majesty the Queen, in Right of the Province of Saskatchewan as represented by the Minister of Central Services”.

GC56 DELAYS 56.1 If the Contractor is delayed in the completion of the Work by any act or neglect of the

Owner, his agent, or any Other Contractor or any employee of any one of them or by Change Order, then the remaining Contract Time shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Consultant may decide.

56.2 If the Contractor is delayed in completion of the work by labour disputes, strikes, lock-

outs (including lock-outs decreed or recommended by a recognized Contractors’ Association for its member of which the Contractor is a member), fire or similar catastrophic event, unusual delay by common carriers or without limit to any of the foregoing, by any cause of any kind whatsoever beyond the Contractor’s control, then the time of completion shall be extended for a period of time equal to the time lost due to such delays.

Section 00 72 00 General Conditions Page 30 of 34 56.3 In addition to GC56.2 and without limit to the foregoing, Contract Time shall be

extended because of any cause whatsoever within the Contractor's control which the Consultant shall decide as justifying a delay, and for such reasonable time as the Consultant may decide.

56.4 No Contract Time extension shall be made for delay unless Notice of claim is given to the

Consultant within fourteen (14) days of its commencement, provided however, that in the case of a continuing cause of delay only one claim shall be necessary.

56.5 If no schedule is made under GC7.2, no claim for delay shall be allowed on account of

failure to furnish drawings until two weeks after demand for such drawings, and not then unless such claim be reasonable.

56.6 The Consultant shall not, except by Notice to the Contractor, or as provided in GC37 stop

or delay any part of the Work pending decisions or proposed changes either by himself or the Owner.

56.7 Normal Saskatchewan weather shall not constitute a claim for delay. GC57 OWNER'S RIGHT TO DO WORK 57.1 If the Contractor should neglect to prosecute the Work properly or fail to perform any

provision of this Contract, the Owner, after five (5) days following Notice to the Contractor, may without prejudice to any other right or remedy he may have, make good any failure to perform.

57.2 The Owner may deduct the cost thereof, which in the Consultant's opinion is reasonable

from the payment then or thereafter due to the Contractor. GC58 OWNER'S RIGHT TO TERMINATE CONTRACT 58.1 The Owner, upon the signification by the Consultant that sufficient cause exists to justify

such action, may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy he may have, by giving the Contractor Notice, immediately terminate the employment of the Contractor and take possession of the premises and of all materials, tools and appliances thereon and finish the Work by whatever method he may deem expedient, but without undue delay or expense, if:

Section 00 72 00 General Conditions Page 31 of 34 58.1.1 the Contractor should be adjudged as bankrupt; or, 58.1.2 the Contractor should make a general assignment for the benefit of his

creditors; or, 58.1.3 a receiver should be appointed on account of the Contractor's insolvency; or, 58.1.4 the Contractor should, except in cases recited in GC56.1 to GC56.3 inclusive,

refuse or fail to supply enough properly skilled Workmen or proper materials after having received seven (7) days notice in writing from the Consultant to supply additional Workmen or materials; or,

58.1.5 the Contractor should fail to make prompt payment to Sub-Contractors for

material, services or labour; or, 58.1.6 the Contractor should persistently disregard laws, ordinances, or the instruction

of the Consultant; or, 58.1.7 otherwise be guilty of a substantial violation of the provisions of the Contract. 58.2 In cases identified in GC58.1, expenses incurred by the Owner shall be quantified by the

Consultant. The Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any payment in excess of that amount certified for payment by the Consultant to the date of Termination, and if:

58.2.1 the unpaid balance of the Contract price shall exceed the expense of finishing

the Work, including compensation to the Consultant for his additional services, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor; or,

58.2.2 such expense shall exceed such unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the

difference to the Owner. The expense incurred by the Owner as herein provided shall be certified by the Consultant.

GC59 CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO SUSPEND WORK OR TERMINATE THE

CONTRACT 59.1 The Contractor shall have the right to suspend the Work or terminate the Contract if: 59.1.1 the work is stopped under an order of any court, or other public authority

through no act or fault of the Contractor or by anyone employed by him; or,

Section 00 72 00 General Conditions Page 32 of 34 59.1.2 the Consultant fails to approve or forward the Contractor's Application for

Payment as provided in the Contract Documents; or, 59.1.3 the Owner should fail without justification to pay to the Contractor within

fifteen (15) days of any payment coming due, as provided herein. 59.2 Pursuant to GC59.1 the Contractor shall by registered mail advise the Owner of such

failure, and if no substantive reason is given for the delay within ten (10) days, then the Contractor may upon five (5) days written notice to the Owner stop Work and/or terminate this Contract without prejudice to any other right or remedy he may have, and recover from the Owner payment for all the Work executed and any loss sustained upon the plant or material, with reasonable profit and damages.

GC60 DAMAGES AND MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY 60.1 If either party to this Contract should suffer damage in any manner because of any

wrongful act or neglect of the other party, or of anyone employed by him then he shall be reimbursed by the other party for such damage.

60.2 Claims under GC60 shall be made in writing to the party intended to be held accountable

within fourteen (14) days after the first observance of such damage, except as expressly stipulated otherwise in the case of faulty Work or materials.

60.3 Claims under GC60 may be adjusted by agreement or in the manner set out in GC62 and

the party reimbursing the other party as aforesaid shall thereupon be subrogated to the rights of the other party in respect of such wrongful act or neglect if it be that of a third party.

60.4 Should the Contractor cause damage to any Other Contractor on the Work, the Contractor

agrees that upon due Notice to settle any claim resulting with such Other Contractor in accordance with GC62.

60.5 If the Contractor becomes liable to pay or satisfy any final order or judgement against the

Owner then the Contractor shall have the right, upon undertaking to further indemnify the Owner against any and all liability for costs, to appeal in the name of the Owner final order or judgement, so obtained, to any and all courts of competent jurisdiction.

Section 00 72 00 General Conditions Page 33 of 34 GC61 LIENS 61.1 Neither the final payment nor any part thereof shall become due until the Contractor, if

required, shall obtain and deliver to the Owner a complete release of all liens, other than his own, arising out of the Contract.

61.2 This Contract and its performance is subject to the applicable provision of The Builders'

Lien Act of Saskatchewan, as amended from time to time. GC62 DISPUTE RESOLUTION 62.1 In the case of any dispute arising between the Owner (or the Consultant acting on his

behalf) and the Contractor as to their respective rights and obligations under the Contract, either party hereto shall be entitled to give to the other Notice of such dispute and to request arbitration thereof.

62.2 The parties may, with respect to the particular matters then in dispute, agree to submit the

same to resolution in accordance with the applicable law of the Province of Saskatchewan.

62.3 Arbitration proceedings shall not take place until after Completion or alleged Completion

of the Work except: 62.3.1 on a question of Certificate for Payment; or, 62.3.2 in a case where either party can show that the matter in dispute is of such nature

as to require immediate consideration while evidence is available. 62.4 Each party shall be responsible for payment of fees of its respective nominee and if

applicable for one half the fee of the umpire. GC63 NOTICES AND DECISIONS IN WRITING 63.1 All Notices shall be given in writing only, and shall be either hand delivered or delivered

by double registered mail to the addresses identified in the bidding documents. 63.2 Decisions and instructions shall only be considered to have been communicated when

provided in writing from one party to the Contract to the other. Oral instructions or decisions shall not be deemed a valid means of communication.

Section 00 72 00 General Conditions Page 34 of 34 GC64 ASSIGNMENT 64.1 This Contract or any part hereunder, or any actual or any beneficial interest herein, shall

not be assignable by the Contractor. GC65 CONFIDENTIALITY 65.1 The Contractor shall not disclose sensitive data that they may be given access to during

the performance of the Contract. 65.2 The Contractor shall protect confidential information that has been entrusted to them by

Central Services as though it was their confidential information. 65.3 The Contractor shall not divulge any information to any third party without the verbal or

written consent of Central Services except as required in the course of carrying out services under the Contract.

65.4 The Contractor shall return to the project manager, Central Services information received

or created during the performance of their contract. 65.5 The Contractor shall provide upon request, employee information to allow for security

screening of their employees, and the employees of their Agents, who require access to information or assets while providing services to or on behalf of Central Services.

65.6 The Contractor shall make their employees, Sub-Contractors and Sub-Sub-Contractors

aware of these requirements. Mod: 01-Oct-2013

Section 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions Page 1 of 1 SC1 THE “OWNER” 1.1 Referring to the following General Conditions:

• GC53 Contractor’s Liability Insurance • GC54 Builder’s Risk Insurance • GC55 Bonds

The Owner shall mean “Her Majesty the Queen, in Right of the Province of Saskatchewan as represented by the Minister of Central Services”.

Mod. 01-Oct-2013

L.F. McIntosh Building Section 01 11 00 Second Floor Renovation SUMMARY OF WORK Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 1

PART 1 General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

.1 Title and description of Work.

.2 Contract Method.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures.

1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

.1 Work of this Contract comprises architectural, mechanical and electrical base building upgrades and tenant improvements to the second floor of L. F. McIntosh Building located in Prince Albert, Saskatchewan.

1.4 WORK BY OTHERS

.1 Work of this Project must include provisions for coordinating related work, identified in Contract Documents, for following principal items.

.1 Supply and install of Haworth Life Space Walls.

1.5 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES

.1 Contractor has use of site until Substantial Performance.

.2 Contractor shall limit use of premises for Work, for storage, and for access, to allow;

.1 Partial owner occupancy.

.2 Public usage of adjacent occupancies.

.3 Coordinate use of premises under direction of Owner and Consultant.

.4 Obtain and pay for use of additional storage or work areas needed for operations under this Contract.

PART 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

END OF SECTION Stantec Architecture Ltd. June 27, 2014

L.F. McIntosh Building Section 01 23 10 Second Floor Renovation ALTERNATIVES Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 1

Part 1 General

1.1 REFERENCES .1 Canadian Construction Documents Committee (CCDC)

.1 CCDC 23-[2005], A Guide to Calling Bids and Awarding Construction Contracts.

1.2 REQUIREMENTS .1 Referenced specification Sections stipulate pertinent requirements for products

and methods to achieve Work stipulated under each Alternative.

.2 Co-ordinate affected related Work and modify surrounding Work to integrate Work under each Alternative.

1.3 AWARD/SELECTION OF ALTERNATIVES .1 Indicate variation of Bid Price for Alternatives described below and listed in Bid

Form and/or Supplementary Bid Form. Note that this form requests a 'difference' in Bid. Price by adding to or deducting from base Bid price.

.2 Bids will be evaluated on Base Bid price. After determination of preferred Bidder, consideration will be given to Alternatives and Bid Price adjustments.

.3 In accordance with CCDC Document No. 23 - A Guide to Calling Bids and Awarding Construction Contracts, low [Bid] [Tender] will be determined on basis of lowest [Bid] in accordance with Contract Documents on which Project is to be actually constructed, including those alternatives for which prices have been invited and which are to be incorporated in Work.

1.4 ALTERNATIVES .1 No alternatives.

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED .1 Not Used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED .1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION

Stantec Architecture Ltd. June 27, 2014

L.F. McIntosh Building Section 01 31 00 Second Floor Renovations PROJECT COORDINATION Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 4 PART 1 General 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Coordination Work with other contractors and work by Owner under administration of

Consultant. .2 Scheduled progress meetings. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Section 01 11 00 – Summary of Work .2 Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures 1.3 DESCRIPTION

.1 Coordination of progress schedules, submittals, use of site, temporary utilities, construction

facilities and construction Work, with progress of Work of other contractors, under instructions of Consultant.

1.4 CONSTRUCTION ORGANIZATION AND START-UP

.1 Within 7 days after award of contract, General Contractor shall request and schedule a

meeting of parties in contract to discuss and resolve administrative procedures and responsibilities.

.2 Senior representatives of the Owner, Consultant, General Contractor, major Subcontractors,

field inspectors and supervisors will be in attendance. .3 Agenda to include following: .1 Appointment of official representative of participants in Work. .2 Schedule of submission of shop drawings, samples, in accordance with Section 01 33

00 - Submittal Procedures . .3 Delivery schedule of specified major equipment. .4 Site security in accordance with Section 01 52 00 – Construction Facilities. .5 Proposed changes, change orders, procedures, approvals required, mark-up

percentages permitted, time extensions, overtime, and administrative requirements .6 Record drawings in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals. .7 Maintenance in accordance with Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals. .8 Monthly progress claims, administrative procedures, photographs, and holdbacks (GC). .9 Appointment of inspection and testing agencies or firms in accordance with Section 01

45 00 - Quality Control. .10 Insurances and transcript of policies (GC).


Section 01 31 00 L.F. McIntosh Building PROJECT COORDINATION Second Floor Renovations Page 2 of 4 Project No. 144401282 .4 Comply with Consultant's allocation of mobilization areas of site; for field offices and sheds, for

access, traffic, and parking facilities. .5 During construction coordinate use of site and facilities and Consultant's procedures for intra-

project communications: Submittals, reports and records, schedules, coordination of drawings, recommendations, and resolution of ambiguities and conflicts.

.6 Coordinate field engineering and layout work with Consultant. 1.5 SCHEDULES .1 General Contractor shall submit preliminary construction schedule to Consultant within 15

days of contract award. .2 During progress of Work, revise and resubmit as directed by Consultant. 1.6 ON-SITE DOCUMENTS

.1 Maintain at job site, one copy each of the following: .1 Contract drawings. .2 Specifications. .3 Addenda. .4 Reviewed shop drawings. .5 Change orders. .6 Other modifications to Contract. .7 Field test reports. .8 Copy of approved Work schedule. .9 Manufacturers' installation and application instructions. 1.7 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS MEETINGS

.1 During course of Work, General Contractor shall schedule and administer bi-weekly project

meetings. .2 Senior representatives of the Owner, Consultant, General Contractor, major Subcontractors

will be in attendance. .3 Construction progress meetings will take place at the site. .4 General Contractor will take minutes and will reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within

three days after each meeting to meeting participants, and affected parties not in attendance. .5 Agenda to include following: .1 Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting. .2 Review of Work progress since previous meeting.

June 27, 2014 Stantec Architecture Ltd.

L.F. McIntosh Building Section 01 31 00 Second Floor Renovations PROJECT COORDINATION Project No. 144401282 Page 3 of 4 .3 Field observations, problems, conflicts. .4 Problems which impede construction schedule. .5 Review of off-site fabrication delivery schedules. .6 Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule. .7 Revisions to construction schedule. .8 Progress schedule, during succeeding work period. .9 Review submittal schedules: expedite as required. .10 Maintenance of quality standards. .11 Review proposed changes for affect on construction schedule and on completion date. .12 Other business. 1.8 SUBMITTALS .1 General Contractor shall make submittals to Consultant for review. .2 Submit preliminary shop drawings, product data and samples in accordance with Section 01

33 00 – Submittal Procedures for review for compliance with Contract Documents; for field dimensions and clearances, for relation to available space, and for relation to Work of other contracts. After review, revise and resubmit for transmittal to Consultant.

.3 Submit requests for payment for review, and for transmittal to Consultant. .4 Submit requests for interpretation of Contract Documents, and obtain instructions through

Consultant. .5 Process substitutions through Consultant. .6 Process change orders through Consultant. .7 Deliver closeout submittals for review and preliminary inspections, for transmittal to

Consultant. 1.9 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

.1 General Contractor shall provide information required by Consultant for preparation of

coordination drawings. .2 Review and approve revised drawings for submittal to Consultant. 1.10 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

.1 Refer to General Conditions and Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures. PART 2 Products 2.1 NOT USED


Section 01 31 00 L.F. McIntosh Building PROJECT COORDINATION Second Floor Renovations Page 4 of 4 Project No. 144401282 .1 Not Used PART 3 Execution 3.1 NOT USED .1 Not Used

END OF SECTION


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 01 33 00 Second Floor Renovations SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 3 PART 1 General 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Shop drawings and product data. .2 Samples. .3 Certificates and transcripts. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control. .2 Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE

.1 Submit to Consultant submittals listed for review. Submit with reasonable promptness

and in orderly sequence so as to not cause delay in Work. Failure to submit in ample time is not considered sufficient reason for an extension of Contract Time and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed.

.2 Work affected by submittal shall not proceed until review is complete. .3 Present shop drawings, product data, samples and mock-ups in SI Metric units. .4 Where items or information is not produced in SI Metric units converted values are

acceptable. .5 Review submittals prior to submission to Consultant. This review represents that

necessary requirements have been determined and verified, or will be, and that each submittal has been checked and co-ordinated with requirements of Work and Contract Documents. Submittals not stamped, signed, dated and identified as to specific project will be returned without being examined and shall be considered rejected.

.6 Notify Consultant, in writing at time of submission, identifying deviations from

requirements of Contract Documents stating reasons for deviations. .7 Verify field measurements and affected adjacent Work are coordinated. .8 Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submission is not relieved by

Consultant’s review of submittals. .9 Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submission from requirements of Contract

Documents is not relieved by Consultant's review. .10 Keep one reviewed copy of each submission on site. 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA .1 The term "shop drawings" means drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules,

performance charts, brochures and other data which are to be provided by Contractor to illustrate details of a portion of Work.

.2 Indicate materials, methods of construction and attachment or anchorage, erection


Section 01 33 00 L.F. McIntosh Building SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Second Floor Renovations Page 2 of 3 Project No. 144401282

diagrams, connections, explanatory notes and other information necessary for completion of Work. Where articles or equipment attach or connect to other articles or equipment, indicate that such items have been coordinated, regardless of Section under which adjacent items will be supplied and installed. Indicate cross references to design drawings and specifications.

.3 Allow 10 working days for Consultant's review of each submission. .4 Adjustments made on shop drawings by Consultant are not intended to change Contract

Price. If adjustments affect value of Work, state such in writing prior to proceeding with Work.

.5 Make changes in shop drawings as Consultant may require, consistent with Contract

Documents. When resubmitting, notify General Contractor in writing of any revisions other than those requested.

.6 Submissions shall include: .1 Date and revision dates. .2 Project title and number. .3 Name and address of: .1 Trade Contractor. .2 Subcontractor. .3 Supplier. .4 Manufacturer. .4 General Contractor's stamp, signed by authorized representative certifying

approval of submissions, verification of field measurements and compliance with Contract Documents.

.5 Details of appropriate portions of Work as applicable: .1 Fabrication. .2 Layout, showing dimensions, including identified field dimensions, and

clearances. .3 Setting or erection details. .4 Capacities. .5 Performance characteristics. .6 Standards. .7 Operating weight. .8 Wiring diagrams. .9 Single line and schematic diagrams. .10 Relationship to adjacent work. .7 Submit electronically or 8 prints of shop drawings for each requirement requested in

specification Sections and as consultant may reasonably request. Following return of reviewed drawings provide copies of additional prints as may be requested by General Contractor and Consultant.

.8 Submit electronically or 8 copies of product data sheets or brochures for requirements

requested in specification Sections and as requested by Consultant where shop drawings will not be prepared due to standardized manufacture of product.

.9 Supplement standard information to provide details applicable to project. .10 If upon review by Consultant, no errors or omissions are discovered or if only minor

corrections are made, copies will be returned and fabrication and installation of Work may proceed. If shop drawings are rejected, noted copy will be returned and resubmission of


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 01 33 00 Second Floor Renovations SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Project No. 144401282 Page 3 of 3

corrected shop drawings, through same procedure indicated above, must be performed before fabrication and installation of Work may proceed.

1.5 SAMPLES

.1 Submit for review samples in duplicate as requested in respective specification Sections.

Label samples with origin and intended use. .2 Deliver samples prepaid to office of General Contractor. General Contractor shall submit

samples to Consultant for review. .3 Notify General Contractor in writing, at time of submission of deviations in samples from

requirements of Contract Documents. .4 Where colour, pattern or texture is criterion, submit full range of samples. .5 Adjustments made on samples by Consultant are not intended to change Contract Price.

If adjustments affect value of Work, state such in writing to General Contractor prior to proceeding with Work.

.6 Make changes in samples which Consultant may require, consistent with Contract

Documents. .7 Reviewed and accepted samples will become standard of workmanship and material

against which installed Work will be verified. 1.6 MOCK-UPS

.1 Erect mock-ups in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control. 1.7 CERTIFICATES AND TRANSCRIPTS .1 Immediately after award of Contract, submit Workers' Compensation Board status,

transcription of insurances to Consultant. PART 2 Products 2.1 NOT USED .1 Not Used PART 3 Execution 3.1 NOT USED .1 Not Used

END OF SECTION


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 01 35 30 Second Floor Renovations HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 3

PART 1 General


.1 Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures

.2 Section 01 41 00 - Regulatory Requirements

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Province of Saskatchewan .1 Occupational Health and Safety Act, 1993, S.S. 1993. .2 The Occupational Health and Safety Regulations, 1996

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.2 Submit site-specific Health and Safety Plan: Within 14 days after date of Notice to Proceed and prior to commencement of Work. Health and Safety Plan must include: .1 Results of site-specific safety hazard assessment. .2 Results of safety and health risk or hazard analysis for site tasks and operation.

.3 Submit copy of General Contractor’s authorized representative's work site health and safety inspection reports to Consultant and authority having jurisdiction.

.4 Submit copies of reports or directions issued by Provincial health and safety inspectors.

.5 Maintain copies of incident and accident reports.

.6 Maintain copies of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) on site for reference.

.7 Consultant will review General Contractor's site-specific Health and Safety Plan and provide comments to Contractor within 10 days after receipt of plan. Revise plan as appropriate and resubmit plan to Consultant within 10 days after receipt of comments from Consultant.

.8 Consultant's review of General Contractor's final Health and Safety plan should not be construed as approval and does not reduce the Contractor's overall responsibility for construction Health and Safety.

.9 On-site Contingency and Emergency Response Plan: Address standard operating procedures to be implemented during emergency situations. Carry out regular tests of emergency plan to familiarize all worksite personnel of procedures.

1.4 FILING OF NOTICE

.1 File Notice of Project with Provincial authorities prior to commencement of Work.

1.5 SAFETY ASSESSMENT

.1 Perform site-specific safety hazard assessment related to project.


Section 01 35 30 L.F. McIntosh Building HEALTH AND SAFETYREQUIREMENTS Second Floor Renovations Page 2 of 3 Project No. 144401282 1.6 MEETINGS

.1 Schedule and administer Health and Safety meeting with Consultant prior to commencement of Work.

1.7 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 Develop written site-specific Health and Safety Plan based on hazard assessment prior to commencing any site Work and continue to implement, maintain, and enforce plan until final demobilization from site. Health and Safety Plan must address project specifications.

.2 Consultant may respond in writing, where deficiencies or concerns are noted and may request re-submission with correction of deficiencies or concerns.

1.8 RESPONSIBILITY

.1 Be responsible for health and safety of persons on site, safety of property on site and for protection of persons adjacent to site and environment to extent that they may be affected by conduct of Work.

.2 Comply with and enforce compliance by employees with safety requirements of Contract Documents, applicable federal, provincial, territorial and local statutes, regulations, and ordinances, and with site-specific Health and Safety Plan.

1.9 COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENTS

.1 Comply with Saskatchewan Occupational Health and Safety Regulations.

1.10 UNFORSEEN HAZARDS

.1 Should any unforeseen or peculiar safety-related factor, hazard, or condition become evident during performance of Work. Follow procedures in place for Employee's Right to Refuse Work in accordance with Acts and Regulations of Province having jurisdiction. Advise Consultant verbally and in writing.

1.11 HEALTH AND SAFETY CO-ORDINATOR

.1 Employ and assign to Work, competent and authorized representative as Health and Safety Co-ordinator. Health and Safety Co-ordinator may also be Site Superintendent and must: .1 Have working knowledge of occupational safety and health regulations. .2 Be responsible for completing Contractor's Health and Safety Training Sessions

and ensuring that personnel not successfully completing required training are not permitted to enter site to perform Work.

.3 Be responsible for implementing, enforcing daily and monitoring site-specific Contractor's Health and Safety Plan.

.4 Be on site during execution of Work and report directly to and be under direction of site supervisor.

1.12 POSTING OF DOCUMENTS

.1 Ensure applicable items, articles, notices and orders are posted in conspicuous location on site in accordance with Acts and Regulations of Province having jurisdiction, and in consultation with Consultant.


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 01 35 30 Second Floor Renovations HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS Project No. 144401282 Page 3 of 3 1.13 CORRECTION OF NON-COMPLIANCE

.1 Immediately address health and safety non-compliance issues identified by authority having jurisdiction or by Consultant.

.2 Provide Consultant with written report of action taken to correct non-compliance of health and safety issues identified.

.3 Consultant may stop Work if non-compliance of health and safety regulations is not corrected.

1.14 WORK STOPPAGE

.1 Give precedence to safety and health of public and site personnel and protection of environment over cost and schedule considerations for Work.

PART 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

END OF SECTION


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 01 41 00 Second Floor Renovations REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 1

PART 1 General


.1 References and Codes.

1.2 REFERENCES AND CODES

.1 Perform Work in accordance with 2010 National Building Code of Canada (NBC) including all amendments up to tender closing date and other codes of provincial or local application provided that in case of conflict or discrepancy, more stringent requirements apply.

.2 Meet or exceed requirements of:

.1 Contract documents.

.2 Specified standards,codes and referenced documents.

1.3 BUILDING SMOKING ENVIRONMENT

.1 Contractor is cautioned that the jobsite is a non-smoking site, and shall make necessary allowances for observance by construction personnel. Any violation of or disregard to this site requirement by construction personnel is grounds for dismissal from the site.

PART 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 01 45 00 Second Floor Renovations QUALITY CONTROL Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 3

PART 1 General


.1 Inspection and testing, administrative and enforcement requirements.

.2 Tests and mix designs.

.3 Mock-ups.

.4 Mill tests.

.5 Equipment and system adjust and balance.


.1 Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.2 Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 Owner/Contractor Agreement.

1.4 INSPECTION

.1 Refer to General Conditions.

.2 Allow Consultant access to Work. If part of Work is in preparation at locations other than Place of Work, allow access to such Work whenever it is in progress.

.3 Give minimum 24 hours notice requesting inspection if Work is designated for special tests, inspections or approvals by Consultant instructions.

.4 If Contractor covers Work that has been designated for special tests, inspections or approvals before such is made, uncover such Work, have inspections or tests satisfactorily completed and make good such Work.

.5 Consultant may order any part of Work to be examined if Work is suspected to be not in accordance with Contract Documents. If, upon examination such work is found not in accordance with Contract Documents, correct such Work and pay cost of examination and correction. If such Work is found in accordance with Contract Documents, Owner shall pay cost of examination and replacement.

1.5 INDEPENDENT INSPECTION AGENCIES

.1 Independent Inspection/Testing Agencies may be engaged by the Owner for purpose of inspecting and/or testing the following portions of Work. Cost of such services will be borne by the Owner.

.1 Building Envelope

.2 Firestopping

.3 Painting

.2 Provide equipment required for executing inspection and testing by appointed agencies. Stantec Architecture Ltd. June 27, 2014

Section 01 45 00 L.F. McIntosh Building QUALITY CONTROL Second Floor Renovations Page 2 of 3 Project No. 144401182

.3 Employment of inspection/testing agencies does not relax responsibility to perform Work in accordance with Contract Documents.

.4 If defects are revealed during inspection and/or testing, appointed agency will request additional inspection and/or testing to ascertain full degree of defect. Correct defect and irregularities as advised by Consultant at no cost to Owner. Pay costs for retesting and re-inspection.

1.6 ACCESS TO WORK

.1 Allow inspection/testing agencies access to Work, off site manufacturing and fabrication plants.

.2 Co-operate to provide reasonable facilities for such access.

1.7 PROCEDURES

.1 Notify appropriate agency and Consultant in advance of requirement for tests, in order that attendance arrangements can be made.

.2 Submit samples and/or materials required for testing, as specifically requested in specifications. Submit with reasonable promptness and in an orderly sequence so as not to cause delay in Work.

.3 Provide labour and facilities to obtain and handle samples and materials on site. Provide sufficient space to store and cure test samples.

1.8 REJECTED WORK


.2 If in opinion of Consultant it is not expedient to correct defective Work or Work not performed in accordance with Contract Documents, Owner may deduct from Contract Price difference in value between Work performed and that called for by Contract Documents, amount of which shall be determined by Consultant.

1.9 REPORTS

.1 Submit electronically 3 copies of inspection and test reports to Consultant.

.2 Provide copies to Subcontractor of work being inspected or tested, manufacturer or fabricator of material being inspected or tested.

1.10 TESTS AND MIX DESIGNS

.1 Furnish test results and mix designs as may be requested.

.2 The cost of tests and mix designs beyond those called for in Contract Documents or beyond those required by law of Place of Work shall be appraised by Consultant and may be authorized as recoverable.

1.11 MOCK-UPS

.1 Prepare mock-ups for Work specifically requested in specifications. Include for Work of all Sections required to provide mock-ups.


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 01 45 00 Second Floor Renovations QUALITY CONTROL Project No. 144401282 Page 3 of 3

.2 Construct in all locations acceptable to Consultant or as specified in specific Section.

.3 Prepare mock-ups for Consultant's review with reasonable promptness and in an orderly sequence, so as not to cause any delay in Work.

.4 Failure to prepare mock-ups in ample time is not considered sufficient reason for an extension of Contract Time and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed.

.5 If requested, Consultant will assist in preparing a schedule fixing dates for preparation.

.6 Remove mock-up at conclusion of Work or when acceptable to Consultant.

.7 Mock-ups may remain as part of Work.

.8 Specification section identifies whether mock-up may remain as part of Work or if it is to be removed and when.

1.12 MILL TESTS

.1 Submit mill test certificates as requested if required of specification Sections.

1.13 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

.1 Submit adjustment and balancing reports for mechanical, electrical and building equipment systems.

PART 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 01 52 00 Second Floor Renovation CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 2

PART 1 General


.1 Construction aids.

.2 Parking.


.1 Section 01 56 0 - Temporary Barriers and Enclosures

1.3 REFERENCES


.2 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)

.1 CGSB 1-GP-189M-84, Primer, Alkyd, Wood, Exterior.

.2 CGSB 1.59-97, Alkyd Exterior Gloss Enamel.

.3 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)

.1 CAN3-A23.1-/A23.2-94, Concrete Materials and Methods for Concrete Construction/Method of Test for Concrete.

.2 CSA-0121-M1978, Douglas Fir Plywood.

.3 CAN/CSA-Z321-96, Signs and Symbols for the Occupational Environment.

1.4 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

.1 Provide construction facilities in order to execute work expeditiously.

.2 Remove from site all such work after use.

1.5 SCAFFOLDING

.1 Provide and maintain scaffolding, ramps, ladders, swing staging platforms and temporary stairs as necessary to complete the Work.

1.6 HOISTING

.1 Provide, operate and maintain hoists and cranes required for moving of workers, materials and equipment. Make financial arrangements with Subcontractors for use thereof.

.2 Hoists and cranes shall be operated by qualified operator.

1.7 ELEVATORS

.1 Permanent service elevator may be used by construction personnel and transporting of materials. Co-ordinate use with Consultant.

.2 Provide protective coverings for finish surfaces of cars and entrances. Repair all damage.


Section 01 52 00 L.F. McIntosh Building CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES Second Floor Renovations Page 2 of 2 Project No. 144401282 1.8 SITE STORAGE/LOADING


.2 Confine work and operations of employees to defined work area only. Do not unreasonably encumber premises with products.

.3 Do not load or permit to load any part of Work with a weight or force that will endanger the Work, building or building occupants.

1.9 CONSTRUCTION PARKING

.1 Parking will be permitted on site provided it does not disrupt performance of Work.

1.10 SECURITY

.1 Provide and pay for responsible security personnel or other measures designed to guard site and contents of site after working hours and during holidays, in accordance with the requirements of the insurance companies having jurisdiction and governing codes, regulations and bylaws.

1.11 FIRST–AID

.1 Provide a clearly marked and fully stocked first-aid case in a readily available location.

1.12 EQUIPMENT, TOOL AND MATERIALS STORAGE

.1 Protect and locate materials on site in a manner to cause least interference with work activities.

PART 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 01 56 00 Second Floor Renovations TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 2

PART 1 General


.1 Barriers.

.2 Environmental Controls.

.3 Traffic Controls.

.4 Fire Routes.


.1 Section 01 52 00 - Construction Facilities.

1.3 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

.1 Provide temporary controls in order to execute Work expeditiously.

.2 Remove from site all such work after use.

1.4 ACCESS TO SITE

.1 Provide and maintain access roads, sidewalk crossings, ramps and construction runways as may be required for access to Work and continuation of Owner’s normal business operations.

1.5 FIRE ROUTES

.1 Maintain access to property including overhead clearances for use by emergency response vehicles.

1.6 PROTECTION FOR OFF-SITE AND PUBLIC PROPERTY

.1 Protect surrounding private and public property from damage during performance of Work.

.2 Be responsible for damage incurred.

1.7 PROTECTION OF BUILDING FINISHES

.1 Provide protection for finished and partially finished building finishes and equipment during performance of Work.

.2 Provide necessary screens, covers, and hoardings to separate construction areas between phasing.

.3 Confirm with Consultant locations and installation schedule 3 days prior to installation.

.4 Be responsible for damage incurred due to lack of or improper protection.


Section 01 56 00 L.F. McIntosh Building TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES Second Floor Renovations Page 2 of 2 Project No. 144401282 1.8 PROTECTION OF OWNER OCUPIED AREAS

.1 Maintain negative pressure within construction area and dust proof hoarding separating the construction area from adjacent areas of the building occupied by the Owner. Install dust filters on al mechanical return vents.

PART 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 01 61 00 Second Floor Renovations BASIC PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 4

PART 1 General


.1 Product quality, availability, storage, handling, protection, and transportation.

.2 Manufacturer's instructions.

.3 Quality of Work, coordination and fastenings.

.4 Existing utilities.


.1 Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

.1 Conform to reference standards, in whole or in part as specifically requested in specifications.

.2 If there is question as to whether any product or system is in conformance with applicable standards, Consultant reserves right to have such products or systems tested to prove or disprove conformance.

.3 The cost for such testing will be born by Owner in event of conformance with Contract Documents or by Contractor in event of non-conformance.

.4 Conform to latest date of issue of referenced standards in effect on date of submission of Bids, except where specific date or issue is specifically noted.

1.4 QUALITY

.1 Products, materials, equipment and articles (referred to as products throughout specifications) incorporated in Work shall be new, not damaged or defective, and of best quality (compatible with specifications) for purpose intended. If requested, furnish evidence as to type, source and quality of Products provided.

.2 Defective products, whenever identified prior to completion of Work, will be rejected, regardless of previous inspections. Inspection does not relieve responsibility, but is precaution against oversight or error. Remove and replace defective products at own expense and be responsible for delays and expenses caused by rejection.

.3 Should any dispute arise as to quality or fitness of products, decision rests strictly with Consultant based upon requirements of Contract Documents.

.4 Unless otherwise indicated in specifications, maintain uniformity of manufacture for any particular or like item throughout building.

.5 Permanent labels, trademarks and nameplates on products are not acceptable in prominent locations, except where required for operating instructions, or when located in mechanical or electrical rooms.


Section 01 61 00 L.F. McIntosh Building BASIC PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Second Floor Renovations Page 2 of 4 Project No. 144401282 1.5 AVAILABILITY

.1 Immediately upon signing Contract, review product delivery requirements and anticipate foreseeable supply delays for any items. If delays in supply of products are foreseeable, notify Consultant of such, in order that substitutions or other remedial action may be authorized in ample time to prevent delay in performance of Work.

.2 In event of failure to notify Consultant at commencement of Work and should it subsequently appear that Work may be delayed for such reason, Consultant reserves right to substitute more readily available products of similar character, at no increase in Contract Price or Contract Time.

1.6 STORAGE, HANDLING AND PROTECTION

.1 Handle and store products in manner to prevent damage, adulteration, deterioration and soiling and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions when applicable.

.2 Store packaged or bundled products in original and undamaged condition with manufacturer's seal and labels intact. Do not remove from packaging or bundling until required in Work.

.3 Store products subject to damage from weather in weatherproof enclosures.

.4 Store cementitious products clear of earth or concrete floors, and away from walls.

.5 Store sheet materials and lumber on flat, solid supports and keep clear of ground. Slope to shed moisture.

.6 Store and mix paints in heated and ventilated room. Remove oily rags and other combustible debris from site daily. Take every precaution necessary to prevent spontaneous combustion.

.7 Remove and replace damaged products at own expense and to satisfaction of Consultant.

.8 Touch-up damaged factory finished surfaces to Consultant's satisfaction. Use touch-up materials to match original. Do not paint over name plates.

1.7 TRANSPORTATION

.1 Pay costs of transportation of products required in performance of Work.

1.8 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

.1 Unless otherwise indicated in specifications, install or erect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not rely on labels or enclosures provided with products. Obtain written instructions directly from manufacturers.

.2 Notify Consultant in writing, of conflicts between specifications and manufacturer's instructions, so that Consultant may establish course of action.

.3 Improper installation or erection of products, due to failure in complying with these requirements, authorizes Consultant to require removal and re-installation at no increase in Contract Price or Contract Time.


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 01 61 00 Second Floor Renovations BASIC PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Project No. 144401282 Page 3 of 4 1.9 QUALITY OF WORK

.1 Ensure Quality of Work is of highest standard, executed by workers experienced and skilled in respective duties for which they are employed. Immediately notify Consultant if required Work is such as to make it impractical to produce required results.

.2 Do not employ anyone unskilled in their required duties. Consultant reserves right to require dismissal from site, workers deemed incompetent or careless.

.3 Decisions as to standard or fitness of Quality of Work in cases of dispute rest solely with Consultant, whose decision is final.

1.10 CO-ORDINATION

.1 General Contractor to coordinate and maintain efficient and continuous supervision of all sub-trades in laying out Work.

.2 Be responsible for coordination and placement of openings, sleeves and accessories.

1.11 CONCEALMENT

.1 In finished areas, conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in floors, walls and ceilings, except where indicated otherwise.

.2 Before installation, inform General Contractor if there is interference. Install as directed.

1.12 REMEDIAL WORK

.1 Add or replace all firestopping to current NBC standards to update separation between floor slabs and within core area as required.

1.13 LOCATION OF FIXTURES

.1 Consider location of fixtures, outlets, and mechanical and electrical items indicated as approximate.

.2 Inform Consultant of conflicting installation. Install as directed.

1.14 FASTENINGS

.1 Provide metal fastenings and accessories in same texture, colour and finish as adjacent materials, unless indicated otherwise.

.2 Prevent electrolytic action between dissimilar metals and materials.

.3 Space anchors within individual load limit or shear capacity and ensure they provide positive permanent anchorage. Wood, or any other organic material plugs are not acceptable.

.4 Keep exposed fastenings to a minimum, space evenly and install neatly.

.5 Fastenings which cause spalling or cracking of material to which anchorage is made are not acceptable.


Section 01 61 00 L.F. McIntosh Building BASIC PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Second Floor Renovations Page 4 of 4 Project No. 144401282 1.15 FASTENINGS - EQUIPMENT

.1 Use fastenings and equipment to manufacturer’s recommendations.

1.16 PROTECTION OF WORK IN PROGRESS

.1 Adequately protect Work completed or in progress. Work damaged or defaced due to failure in providing such protection is to be removed and replaced, or repaired, as directed by Consultant, at no increase in Contract Price or Contract Time.

.2 Prevent overloading of any part of building. Do not cut, drill or sleeve any load bearing structural member without written approval of Consultant.

1.17 EXISTING UTILITIES

.1 When connecting to existing services or utilities, execute Work at times directed by local governing authorities, with minimum of disturbance to Work, and/or building occupants.

.2 Protect, relocate or maintain existing active services.

PART 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used

PART 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used

END OF SECTION


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 01 73 03 Second Floor Renovations EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 2

PART 1 General


.1 Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching the Work.


.1 Section 01 11 00 - Summary of Work.


.3 Individual product Sections: cutting and patching incidental to work of section. Advance notification to other sections required.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects: .1 Structural integrity of any element of Project. .2 Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements. .3 Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. .4 Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements. .5 Work of Owner or separate contractor.

.2 Include in request: .1 Identification of Project. .2 Location and description of affected Work. .3 Statement on necessity for cutting or alteration. .4 Description of proposed Work, and products to be used. .5 Alternatives to cutting and patching. .6 Effect on Work of Owner or separate contractor. .7 Written permission of affected separate contractor. .8 Date and time work will be executed.

1.4 MATERIALS

.1 Required for original installation.

.2 Change in Materials: Submit request for substitution in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

1.5 PREPARATION

.1 Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching.

.2 After uncovering, inspect conditions affecting performance of Work.

.3 Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.

.4 Provide supports to assure structural integrity of surroundings; provide devices and Stantec Architecture Ltd. June 27, 2014

Section 01 73 03 L.F. McIntosh Building EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS Second Floor Renovations Page 2 of 2 Project No. 144401282

.5 methods to protect other portions of project from damage.

1.6 EXECUTION

.1 Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill, to complete Work.

.2 Fit several parts together, to integrate with other Work.

.3 Uncover Work to install ill-timed Work.

.4 Remove and replace defective and non-conforming Work.

.5 Provide openings in non-structural elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical Work.

.6 Execute Work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing.

.7 Employ original installer to perform cutting and patching for weather-exposed and moisture-resistant elements, and sight-exposed surfaces.

.8 Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic or impact tools not allowed on masonry work without prior approval.

.9 Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

.10 Fit Work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces in non fire rated assemblies.

.11 At penetration of fire rated wall, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with firestopping material in accordance with Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping.

.12 Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes: For continuous surfaces refinish to nearest intersection; for an assembly, refinish entire unit.

.13 Conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in floor, wall and ceiling construction of finished areas except where indicated otherwise.

PART 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 01 74 00 Second Floor Renovation CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 2

PART 1 General


.1 Progressive cleaning.

.2 Final cleaning.

1.2 RELATED SECTION

.1 Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures



1.4 PROJECT CLEANLINESS

.1 Maintain Work in tidy condition, free from accumulation of waste products and debris.

.2 Remove waste materials from site at regularly scheduled times or dispose of as directed by Consultant. Do not burn waste materials on site.

.3 Make arrangements with and obtain permits from authorities having jurisdiction for disposal of waste and debris.

.4 Provide on-site containers for collection of waste materials and debris.

.5 Provide and use clearly marked separate bins for recycling.

.6 Remove waste material and debris from site and deposit in appropriate container at end of each working day.

.7 Clean interior areas prior to start of finish work, and maintain areas free of dust and other contaminants during finishing operations.

.8 Store volatile waste in covered metal containers, and remove from premises at end of each working day.

.9 Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances. Use of building ventilation systems is not permitted for this purpose.

.10 Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned, and as recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.

.11 Schedule cleaning operations so that resulting dust, debris and other contaminants will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces nor contaminate building systems.

1.5 FINAL CLEANING



Section 01 74 00 L.F. McIntosh Building CLEANING Second Floor Renovation Page 2 of 2 Project No. 144401282

.2 When Work is Substantially Performed, remove surplus products, tools, construction machinery and equipment not required for performance of remaining Work.

.3 Remove waste products and debris other than that caused by others, and leave Work clean and suitable for occupancy.

.4 Prior to final review, remove surplus products, tools, construction machinery and equipment.

.5 Remove waste products and debris.

.6 Remove waste materials from site at regularly scheduled times. Do not burn waste materials on site.

.7 Make arrangements with and obtain permits from authorities having jurisdiction for disposal of waste and debris.

.8 Clean and polish glass, mirrors, hardware, wall tile, stainless steel, chrome, porcelain enamel, baked enamel, plastic laminate, and mechanical and electrical fixtures. Replace broken, scratched or disfigured glass.

.9 Clean interior and exterior of windows.

.10 Remove stains, spots, marks and dirt from decorative work, electrical and mechanical fixtures, furniture fitments, walls, floors and ceilings.

.11 Clean lighting reflectors, lenses, and other lighting surfaces.

.12 Vacuum clean and dust building interiors, behind grilles, louvres and screens.

.13 Wax, seal, shampoo or prepare floor finishes, as recommended by manufacturer.

.14 Inspect finishes, fitments and equipment and ensure specified workmanship and operation.

PART 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

PART 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

END OF SECTION


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 01 77 00 Second Floor Renovation CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 2 PART 1 General 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Administrative procedure preceding and following preliminary and final inspections of the

Work. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Division 0 .2 Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals 1.3 CONTRACTOR'S INSPECTION FOR SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE .1 General Contractor shall conduct an inspection of Work, identify deficiencies and defects and

repair as required to conform to Contract Documents. .2 When the steps of clause 1.3.1 have been performed, make written application to the

Consultant for a Certificate of Substantial Performance in accordance with General Conditions. .3 Application shall include statements of the effect as follows: .1 Work has been completed and inspected for compliance with the Contract Documents. .2 Defects have been corrected and deficiencies have been completed. (Attach a

comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected.) .3 Equipment and systems have been tested, adjusted, balanced and are fully operational. .4 Certificates of approval, where applicable, have been submitted. .5 Work is ready for an inspection to determine Substantial Performance. .4 General Contractor shall submit the following documents to the Consultant prior to the

issuance of a Certificate of Substantial Performance. .1 A final statutory declaration stating that all liabilities incurred in carrying out the Work

have been paid, and that there are no claims, liens, garnishees or attachments relating to the Work.

.2 Clearance from Saskatchewan Workers' Compensation Board. .3 Clearance from Saskatchewan Finance Revenue Division. .4 Other documents as required by the Builders' Lien Act in the Province of Saskatchewan. 1.4 CONSULTANT'S INSPECTION FOR SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE .1 Upon receipt of an application, Consultant will arrange an inspection in accordance with

General Conditions. .2 The inspection team shall consist of Consultant, Owner, General Contractor and Trade

Contractor.

Stantec Architecture Ltd. June 27,2014

Section 01 77 00 L.F. McIntosh Building CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Second Floor Renovation Page 2 of 2 Project No. 144401282 .3 If Work is deemed incomplete by the Consultant, complete all outstanding items and request

re-inspection. Re-inspection will only occur one time. 1.5 CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE .1 On approving an application, the Consultant shall issue a Certificate of Substantial

Performance in conformance with General Conditions. .2 The Certificate of Substantial Performance shall establish the date for commencement of the

lien period as set forth in the Builders' Lien Act of the Province of Saskatchewan. 1.6 CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT OF HOLDBACK MONIES .1 Refer to General Conditions. .2 The Consultant's Certificate for Payment of the holdback monies shall be in the amount

approved at the time of the application for the Certificate of Substantial Performance. 1.7 FINAL PAYMENT .1 Refer to General Conditions. 1.8 WARRANTY .1 The date the Work is deemed to be substantially performed shall be the date of

commencement for the warranty period. .2 During the month prior to the end of the warranty period Consultant, Owner and General

Contractor shall conduct an inspection of the project. .3 General Contractor shall promptly remedy and correct any defects due to or resulting from

faulty materials or workmanship which appear prior to and during the period of one year from the date of substantial performance of the Work.

.4 Warranty periods on remedied items are to commence on acceptance. PART 2 Products 2.1 NOT USED PART 3 Execution 3.1 NOT USED

END OF SECTION


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 01 78 00 Second Floor Renovation CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 6

PART 1 General


.1 As-built, samples, and specifications.

.2 Equipment and systems.

.3 Product data, materials and finishes, and related information.

.4 Operation and maintenance data.

.5 Spare parts, special tools and maintenance materials.

.6 Warranties and bonds.

.7 Final site survey.



.2 Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.

.3 Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures.

1.3 SUBMISSIONS

.1 Prepare instructions and data using personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described products.

.2 Copy will be returned after final inspection, with Consultant's comments.

.3 Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal.

.4 Two weeks prior to Substantial Performance of the Work, submit to the Consultant, final copies of Operating and Maintenance Manuals in English.

.5 Ensure spare parts, maintenance materials and special tools provided are new, undamaged or not defective, and of same quality and manufacture as products provided in Work.

.6 If requested, furnish evidence as to type, source and quality of products provided.

.7 Defective products will be rejected, regardless of previous inspections. Replace products at own expense.

.8 Pay costs of transportation.

1.4 FORMAT

.1 Organize data in the form of an instructional manual compiled of operating and maintenance data including detailed technical information, documents and records describing operation and maintenance of individual products or systems as specified in


Section 01 78 00 L.F. McIntosh Building CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Second Floor Renovation Page 2 of 6 Project No. 144401282

individual sections of Divisions 02-49 and in accordance with GC40 of General Conditions.

.2 Binders: vinyl, hard covered, 3 'D' ring, loose leaf 219 x 279 mm with spine and face pockets.

.3 When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. Identify contents of each binder on spine.

.4 Cover: Identify each binder with type or printed title 'Project Record Documents'; list title of project and identify subject matter of contents.

.5 Arrange content by systems, under Section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents shall follow GC40 outline in General Conditions.

.6 Provide 1:1 scaled CAD files in “AutoCAD” “dwg” format on CD (compact disc).

1.5 CONTENTS-EACH VOLUME

.1 Binder 1: .1 Cover sheet containing:

.1 Date submitted.

.2 Project title, location and project number.

.3 Names and addresses of Contractor, and all Sub-contractors. .2 Table of Contents of all binders. .3 List of maintenance materials. .4 List of special tools. .5 List of spare parts. .6 Warranties,guarantees. .7 Copies of approvals, and certificates.

.2 Remaining binders: .1 Cover sheet containing:

.1 Date submitted.

.2 Project title, location and project number. .2 Table of Contents of individual binder. .3 Provide data as specified in individual sections of Divisions 02 to 16.

.1 List of equipment including service depot.

.2 Nameplate information including equipment number, make, size, capacity, model number and serial number.

.3 Parts list.

.4 Installation details.

.5 Operating instructions.

.6 Maintenance instructions for equipment.

.7 Maintenance instructions for finishes.

.3 Shop drawings: .1 Bind separately one complete set of reviewed final shop drawings and product

data.

1.6 AS-BUILTS AND SAMPLES

.1 In addition to requirements in General Conditions, maintain at the site for Consultant one record copy of: .1 Contract Drawings. .2 Specifications.



.3 Addenda.

.4 Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.

.5 Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.

.6 Field test records.

.7 Inspection certificates.

.8 Manufacturer's certificates.

.2 Store record documents and samples in field office apart from documents used for construction. Provide files, racks, and secure storage.

.3 Label record documents and file in accordance with Section number listings in List of Contents of this Project Manual. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat, large, printed letters.

.4 Maintain record documents in clean, dry and legible condition. Do not use record documents for construction purposes.

.5 Keep record documents and samples available for inspection by Consultant.

1.7 RECORDING ACTUAL SITE CONDITIONS

.1 Record information on set of hard copy drawings, and in copy of Project Manual, provided by Consultant.

.2 Provide felt tip marking pens, maintaining separate colours for each major system, for recording information.

.3 Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal Work until required information is recorded.

.4 Contract Drawings and shop drawings: legibly mark each item to record actual construction, including: .1 Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances, referenced to visible

and accessible features of construction. .2 Field changes of dimension and detail. .3 Changes made by change orders. .4 Details not on original Contract Drawings. .5 References to related shop drawings and modifications.

.5 Specifications: legibly mark each item to record actual construction, including: .1 Manufacturer, trade name, and catalogue number of each product actually

installed, particularly optional items and substitute items. .2 Changes made by Addenda and change orders.

.6 Other Documents: maintain manufacturer's certifications, inspection certifications, field test records, required by individual specifications sections.

1.8 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

.1 Each Item of Equipment and Each System: include description of unit or system, and component parts. Give function, normal operation characteristics, and limiting conditions. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.

.2 Panel board circuit directories: provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and communications.



.3 Include installed colour coded wiring diagrams.

.4 Operating Procedures: include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.

.5 Maintenance Requirements: include routine procedures and guide for trouble-shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.

.6 Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.

.7 Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.

.8 Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.

.9 Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance.

.10 Provide installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer.

.11 Provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with installed colour coded piping diagrams.

.12 Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams.

.13 Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.

.14 Include test and balancing reports as specified in technical Sections 01 45 00 - Quality Control and 01 91 00 - Commissioning.

.15 Additional requirements: As specified in individual specification sections.

1.9 MATERIALS AND FINISHES

.1 Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: include product data, with catalogue number, size, composition, and colour and texture designations. Provide information for re-ordering custom manufactured products.

.2 Instructions for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.

.3 Moisture-protection and Weather-exposed Products: include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.

.4 Additional Requirements: as specified in individual specifications sections.

1.10 SPARE PARTS

.1 Provide assembled spare parts, in quantities specified in individual specification sections.

.2 Provide items of same manufacture and quality as items in Work.

.3 Assemble spare parts as specified.



.4 Include the following: .1 Part number. .2 Identification of equipment or system for which parts are applicable. .3 Installation instructions as applicable. .4 Name and address of nearest supplier.

.5 Identify spare parts to indicate equipment or system for which parts are applicable.

1.11 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

.1 Provide maintenance and extra materials, in quantities specified in individual specification sections.

.2 Provide items of same manufacture and quality as items in Work.

.3 Deliver to location as directed; place and store.

.4 Receive and catalogue all items. Submit inventory listing to Consultant. Include approved listings in Maintenance Manual.

.5 Obtain receipt for delivered products and submit prior to final payment.

1.12 SPECIAL TOOLS

.1 Provide assembled special tools, in quantities specified in individual specification section.

.2 Assemble special tools as specified.

.3 Include following: .1 Identification tag reference. .2 Identification of equipment or system for which tools are applicable. .3 Instruction on intended use of tool.

.4 Identify special tools to indicate equipment or system for which tools are intended.

1.13 STORAGE, HANDLING AND PROTECTION

.1 Store spare parts, maintenance materials, and special tools in manner to prevent damage or deterioration.

.2 Store in original and undamaged condition with manufacturer's seal and labels intact.

.3 Store components subject to damage from weather in weatherproof enclosures.

.4 Store paints and freezable materials in a heated and ventilated room.

.5 Remove and replace damaged products at own expense and to satisfaction of Consultant.

1.14 WARRANTIES AND BONDS

.1 Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to Table of Contents listing.

.2 List subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal.



.3 Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of the applicable item of work.

.4 Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial Performance is determined.

.5 Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.

.6 Co-execute submittals when required.

.7 Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.

PART 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 02 41 19 Second Floor Renovation SELECT STRUCTURE DEMOLITION Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 6

Part 1 General

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 This section includes the following: .1 Demolition and removal of selected portions of interior building components and

finishes including ceramic floor tile and grout bed where indicated.

.2 This section does not include the following: .1 Demolition of exterior building components or structural elements.



.2 Divisions 2 through 49 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to demolition.

1.3 DESCRIPTION

.1 This section of the Work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: .1 Removal of Owner’s equipment noted and furniture, which is not connected to

services, or fixed to structure, required to be moved due to work of this contract by others. Coordinate with Owner.

.2 Demolition, removal completely from site, and disposal of all identified components, materials, equipment and debris.

.3 Selective demolition to allow new walls, bulkheads, ceilings and other materials to meet existing construction as indicated.

.4 All material from demolition shall be removed from site immediately with no salvage, selling, sorting or burning permitted on site.

.5 Retain items indicated on drawings for re-use in new construction.

1.4 REFERENCES

.1 ANSI A10.8-2001, Safety Requirements for Scaffolding.

.2 CSA S350- M1980, Code of Practice for Safety in Demolition of Structures.

.3 NFPA 241-96, Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations.

.4 Saskatchewan Occupational Health and Safety Act.

.5 All municipal regulations.

1.5 DEFINITIONS

.1 Demolish: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

.2 Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner ready for reuse.


Section 02 41 19 L.F. McIntosh Building SELECT STRUCTURE DEMOLITION Second Floor Renovation Page 2 of 6 Project No. 144401282

.3 Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated.

.4 Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

1.6 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

.1 Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, demolished, surplus or rejected materials shall be removed from Project site, when notified in writing to do so by the Consultant.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project:

.2 Conform to the Saskatchewan Occupational Health and Safety Act and Regulations.

.3 Conform to Workers' Compensation Board Regulations.

.4 Conform to the City of Saskatoon bylaws and regulations governing this type of work.

.5 Comply with governing environmental notification requirements and regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

.6 Comply with regulations of local authorities having jurisdiction and standards referenced in 1.4 above. Where differences occur between the local regulations and referenced standards, the most restrictive requirement shall govern.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

.1 Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area: .1 Conduct selective demolition so that Owner's operations will not be disrupted. .2 Provide not less than 72 hours notice to Owner of activities that will affect

Owner's operations.

.2 Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction.

.3 Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished. Conditions existing at time of Pre-Bid Site Review will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

.4 Hazardous Materials: It is expected that hazardous materials may be encountered in the Work: .1 Asbestos materials may be present on mechanical piping insulation. .2 If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not

disturb; immediately notify Consultant and Owner. .3 Hazardous materials will be removed as part of this contract in conformance with

all Federal, Provincial and Municipal codes and bylaws. Verify all conditions on site.


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 02 41 19 Second Floor Renovation SELECT STRUCTURE DEMOLITION Project No. 144401282 Page 3 of 6 Part 2 Products

2.1 DEBRIS

.1 Make all arrangements for transport and disposal of all demolished materials from the site. Recycle, reuse or donate materials as available to divert from landfill.

2.2 EQUIPMENT

.1 Provide all equipment required for safe and proper demolition of the building.

2.3 REPAIR MATERIALS

.1 Comply with material and installation requirements.

.2 Gypsum Board Patching Compounds: Joint compound to ASTM C475, bedding and finishing types thinned to provide skim coat consistency to patch and prepare existing gypsum board walls ready for new finishes in accordance with Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Board Assemblies.

2.4 EXISTING MATERIALS

.1 Items to be retained for re-use are indicated on the Drawings.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.

.2 Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.

.3 Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged.

.4 Notify the Consultant where existing mechanical, electrical, or structural elements conflict with intended function or design: .1 Investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict and submit a written

report to Consultant. .2 Consultant will issue additional instructions or revise drawings as required to

correct conflict.

.5 Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.

3.2 SERVICES

.1 Coordinate existing services indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

.2 Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated services in areas being selectively demolished. .1 If services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before

proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary utilities that bypass area


Section 02 41 19 L.F. McIntosh Building SELECT STRUCTURE DEMOLITION Second Floor Renovation Page 4 of 6 Project No. 144401282

of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of service to other parts of building.

.2 Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.

.3 Cut off pipe or conduit to a minimum of 25 mm (1”) below slab, remove concrete mound and make top of slab level. Patch concrete.

.3 Coordinate with Division 15 and 16 Sections for shutting off, disconnecting, removing, and sealing or capping utilities.

.4 Do not start selective demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified in writing.

3.3 PREPARATION

.1 Identify and mark all equipment and materials identified to be retained by Owner or to be re-used in subsequent construction. Separate and store items to be retained in an area away from area of demolition and protect from accidental disposal.

.2 Post warning signs on electrical lines and equipment that must remain energized to serve other areas during period of demolition.

.3 Confirm that all electrical and telephone service lines entering buildings are not disconnected.

.4 Do not disrupt active or energized utilities crossing the demolition site.

.5 Provide and maintain barricades, warning signs, protection for workmen and the public during the full extent of the Work. Read drawings carefully to ascertain extent of protection required.

.6 Mark all materials required to be re-used, store in a safe place until ready for re-installation.

.7 Adjust all junction boxes, receptacles and switch boxes flush with new wall construction where additional layers to existing construction are indicated.

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

.1 Demolish and dismantle work in a neat and orderly manner and in strict accordance with all regulations.

.2 At end of each day's work, leave Work in safe condition so that no part is in danger of toppling or falling.

.3 Demolish in a manner to minimize dusting and to prevent migration of dust.

.4 Selling or burning of materials on the site is not permitted.

.5 Fill all openings in concrete block walls with concrete masonry units, coursing to match existing, prepare ready to receive new finishes to match existing. .1 Provide bond beams in new openings cut into existing concrete masonry unit

walls. .2 Provide finished end masonry units to patch and repair for new jamb sections in

existing concrete masonry unit walls.


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 02 41 19 Second Floor Renovation SELECT STRUCTURE DEMOLITION Project No. 144401282 Page 5 of 6

.6 Fill all openings in gypsum board walls with gypsum board and steel framing to match existing.

.7 Demolish existing carpet and resilient floor finishes. Remove adhesive to the greatest extent possible using scrapping tools and as follows: .1 Do not use solvent based cleaners to remove adhesive remnants. .2 Lightly shot blast or grind floor to remove adhesive remnants and leave ready for

application of patching compound coating. .3 Vacuum floor ready for application of patching compound coating. .4 Repair slabs as noted in Sections 09 65 00 – Resilient Sheet Flooring, Section 09

31 00 – Tiling and 09 68 00 – Carpeting.

.8 Demolish existing ceramic tile finishes. Remove setting bed or adhesive to the greatest extent possible using mechanical scraping tools and as follows: .1 Saw cut edge of tile for clean and even transition joint between existing tile to

remain and new flooring materials. .2 Lightly shot blast or grind floor to remove remnants of setting materials. .3 Vacuum floor ready for application of skim coating. .4 Repair all slab depressions and damage with cementituous patching compound.

Skim coat floor with minimum 1 mm thick cementituous floor underlayment compatible with new flooring materials.

.9 Remove all paint finish from existing floor slab by lightly shot blasting or grinding.

.10 Demolish completely all ceiling panels and grid as indicated.

.11 Remove all wall coverings scheduled for demolition. Patch and repair wall surfaces with skim coat of gypsum board joint compound leaving wall surfaces smooth and even ready for new wall finishes.

.12 Patch and repair all remaining walls, floor and ceilings damaged during demolition to prepare for new finishes.

.13 Refer to mechanical and electrical demolition plans and specifications for additional demolition requirements.

3.5 PATCHING AND REPAIRING

.1 Floors and Walls: .1 Provide a level and smooth surface having uniform finish colour, texture, and

appearance. .2 Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other

Sections of these Specifications. Refer to Construction Document A801 – Room Finish Schedule.

.3 Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation.

.2 Ceilings: Patch and repair existing ceiling space as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance in preparation for new ceiling grid and ceiling tile installation.


Section 02 41 19 L.F. McIntosh Building SELECT STRUCTURE DEMOLITION Second Floor Renovation Page 6 of 6 Project No. 144401282 3.6 PROTECTION

.1 Prevent debris from blocking drainage inlets and systems and ground draining, and protect material and electrical systems and services that must remain in operation.

.2 Arrange demolition and shoring work so that interference with the use of adjoining areas by the Owner and users is minimized.

.3 Maintain safe access to and egress from occupied areas adjoining.

.4 Provide and maintain fire prevention equipment and alarms accessible during demolition.

3.7 CLEANUP

.1 Promptly as the Work progresses, and on completion, clean up and remove from the site all rubbish and surplus material. Remove rubbish resulting from demolition work daily.

.2 Maintain access to exits clean and free of obstruction during removal of debris.

.3 Keep surrounding and adjoining roads, lanes, sidewalks, municipal rights-of-way clean and free of dirt, soil or debris that may be a hazard to vehicles or persons.

END OF SECTION


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 02 80 00 Second Floor Renovation HAZARDOUS MATERIALS Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 4

PART 1 General



.2 Section 02 41 19 - Selective Structure Demolition

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Export and Import of Hazardous Waste Regulations (EIHW Regulations), SOR/92-637.

.2 National Fire Code of Canada 2005.

.3 National Fire Protection Association 2013

.4 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act (TDG Act) 1992, (T-19.01).

.5 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Regulations (TDGR), (SOR/85-77, SOR/85-585, SOR/85-609, SOR/86-526).

1.3 DEFINITIONS

.1 Dangerous Goods: Product, substance, or organism that is specifically listed or meets the hazard criteria established in Transportation of Dangerous Goods Regulations.

.2 Hazardous Material: Product, substance, or organism that is used for its original purpose; and that is either dangerous goods or a material that may cause adverse impact to the environment or adversely affect health of persons, animals, or plant life when released into the environment.

.3 Hazardous Waste: Any hazardous material that is no longer used for its original purpose and that is intended for recycling, treatment or disposal.

.4 Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS): A Canada-wide system designed to give employers and workers information about hazardous materials used in the workplace. Under WHMIS, information on hazardous materials is to be provided on container labels, material safety data sheets (MSDS), and worker education programs. WHMIS is put into effect by a combination of federal and provincial laws.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.2 Submit to Consultant current Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each hazardous material required prior to bringing hazardous material on site.

.3 Submit hazardous materials management plan to Consultant that identifies all hazardous materials, their use, their location, personal protective equipment requirements, and disposal arrangements.

1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 Coordinate storage of hazardous materials with Consultant and abide by internal requirements for labelling and storage of materials and wastes.


Section 02 61 33 L.F. McIntosh Building HAZARDOUS MATERIALS Second Floor Renovation Page 2 of 4 Project No. 144401282

.2 Store and handle hazardous materials and wastes in accordance with applicable federal and provincial laws, regulations, codes, and guidelines.

.3 Store and handle flammable and combustible materials in accordance with current National Fire Code of Canada requirements.

.4 Keep no more than 45 litres of flammable and combustible liquids such as gasoline, kerosene and naphtha for ready use. Store all flammable and combustible liquids in approved safety cans bearing the Underwriters' Laboratory of Canada or Factory Mutual seal of approval. Storage of quantities of flammable and combustible liquids exceeding 45 litres for work purposes requires the written approval of the Consultant.

.5 Transfer of flammable and combustible liquids is prohibited within buildings.

.6 Transfer of flammable and combustible liquids will not be carried out in the vicinity of open flames or any type of heat-producing devices.

.7 Flammable liquids having a flash point below 38oC, such as naptha or gasoline, will not be used as solvents or cleaning agents.

.8 Store flammable and combustible waste liquids for disposal in approved containers located in a safe, ventilated area. Keep quantities to a minimum.

.9 Observe smoking regulations at all times. Smoking is prohibited in any area where hazardous materials are stored, used, or handled.

.10 Abide by the following storage requirements for quantities of hazardous materials and wastes in excess of 5 kg for solids, and 5 litres for liquids:

.1 Store hazardous materials and wastes in closed and sealed containers, which are in good condition.

.2 Label containers of hazardous materials and wastes in accordance with WHMIS.

.3 Store hazardous materials and wastes in containers compatible with that material or waste.

.4 Segregate incompatible materials and wastes.

.5 Ensure that different hazardous materials or hazardous wastes are not mixed.

.6 Store hazardous materials and wastes in a secure storage area with controlled access.

.7 Maintain a clear egress from storage area.

.8 Store hazardous materials and wastes in a manner and location, which will prevent them from spilling into the environment.

.9 Have appropriate emergency spill response equipment available near the storage area, including personal protective equipment.

.10 Maintain an inventory of hazardous materials and wastes, including product name, quantity, and date when storage began.

.11 Ensure personnel have been trained in accordance with Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) requirements.

.12 Report spills or accidents immediately to Consultant. Submit a written spill report to Consultant within 24 hours of incident.


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 02 80 00 Second Floor Renovation HAZARDOUS MATERIALS Project No. 144401282 Page 3 of 4 1.6 TRANSPORTATION

.1 Transport hazardous materials and wastes in accordance with federal Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act, Transportation of Dangerous Goods Regulations, and applicable provincial regulations.

.2 If exporting hazardous waste to another country, ensure compliance with federal Export and Import of Hazardous Waste Regulations.

.3 If hazardous waste is generated on site:

.1 Coordinate transportation and disposal with Consultant.

.2 Ensure compliance with applicable provincial laws and regulations for generators of hazardous waste.

.3 Use only a licensed carrier authorized by provincial authorities to accept subject material.

.4 Prior to shipping material, obtain written notice from intended hazardous waste treatment or disposal facility that it will accept material and that it is licensed to accept this material.

.5 Label container[s] with legible, visible safety marks as prescribed by federal and provincial regulations.

.6 Ensure that only trained personnel handle, offer for transport, or transport dangerous goods.

.7 Provide a photocopy of all shipping documents and waste manifests to Consultant.

.8 Track receipt of completed manifest from consignee after shipping dangerous goods. Provide a photocopy of completed manifest to Consultant.

.9 Report any discharge, emission, or escape of hazardous materials immediately to Consultant and appropriate provincial authority. Take reasonable measures to control release.

1.7 COOPERATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS .1 The Owner will hire an independent Asbestos Abatement Contract to remove asbestos

contamination as noted in the Asbestos Audit Report. This work will include removal of: asbestos cement transit pipes from roof drain, and asbestos shorts around some plumbing, asbestos bearing acoustic ceiling tile, vinyl asbestos sheet and tile flooring.

.2 Cooperate with the independent Contractor to develop a schedule for removal and replacement of roof drain system components to prevent any damage from a system left open.

.3 Cooperate with the independent Contractor to coordinate and schedule the timely removal of asbestos bearing finish materials, to avoid any extension of the Contract Time.

PART 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Only bring on site the quantity of hazardous materials required to perform work.

.2 Maintain MSDSs in proximity to where the materials are being used. Communicate this location to personnel who may have contact with hazardous materials.


Section 02 61 33 L.F. McIntosh Building HAZARDOUS MATERIALS Second Floor Renovation Page 4 of 4 Project No. 144401282 PART 3 Execution

3.1 DISPOSAL

.1 Dispose of hazardous waste materials in accordance with applicable federal and provincial acts, regulations, and guidelines.

.2 Recycle hazardous wastes for which there is an approved, cost effective recycling process available.

.3 Send hazardous wastes only to authorized hazardous waste disposal or treatment facilities.

.4 Burning, diluting, or mixing hazardous wastes for purpose of disposal is prohibited.

.5 Disposal of hazardous materials in waterways, storm or sanitary sewers, or in municipal solid waste landfills is prohibited.

.6 Dispose of hazardous wastes in a timely fashion in accordance with applicable provincial regulations.

END OF SECTION


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 05 50 00 Second Floor Renovation METAL FABRICATIONS Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 3

PART 1 General

1.1 DESCRIPTION

.1 The work of this section consists of the supply and installation of Metal Fabrications herein specified and as shown on the accompanying drawings.

1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE


.2 Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry

.3 Section 09 90 00 - Painting


.1 Complete welding work to requirements of CSA W59-1998 unless specified otherwise in Contract.

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit Contractor's drawings to Consultant in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract.

.2 Clearly indicate on Contractor's drawings metal core thicknesses, finishes, connections, joints, method of anchorage, number of anchors, supports, reinforcement, details and accessories.

1.5 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

.1 Thoroughly clean and prime iron and steelwork on all surfaces, unless otherwise specified herein, before delivery to job site.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIAL

.1 Steel sections and plates: to requirements of CSA G40.21-M81, Grade 300W.

.2 Steel pipe: to requirements to ASTM A53-84a standard weight black finish.

.3 Stainless steel: to requirements of CSA G110.6-1968, Type 302, exposed surfaces to have No. 4 polish finish, unless otherwise noted.

.4 Welding Material: to requirements of CSA W59-1998.

.5 Bolts and anchor bolts: to requirements of ASTM A307-84a.

.6 Galvanizing: hot dipped galvanizing with minimum zinc coating of 600 g/m2 to requirements of CSA G164-M1981.


Section 05 50 00 L.F. McIntosh Building METAL FABRICATIONS Second Floor Renovation Page 2 of 3 Project No. 144401282

.7 Chromium plating: chrome on steel with plating sequence of 9 micrometres thickness of copper, 10 micrometres thickness of nickel and 2.5 micrometres thickness of chromium.

.8 Shop coat primer: oil alkyd type to requirements of CGSB 1-GP-40m.

.9 Galvanized primer: zinc rich, ready mix to requirements of CGSB 1-GP-181 M + Amdt-Mar-78.

.10 Grout: non-shrink, non-metallic, flowable, 24h, MPa 15, pullout strength 7.9 MPa.

2.2 FABRICATION

.1 Fabricate work in accordance with shop drawings reviewed by the Consultant.

.2 Build work square, true, straight and accurate to required size, with joints cleanly fitted and properly secured.

.3 Fabricate items from steel unless otherwise noted in Contract.

.4 Use self-tapping shake-proof countersunk flat headed screws on items required to be assembled by screws or as indicated herein.

.5 Where possible, work to be fitted and shop assembled, ready for erection.

.6 Exposed welds to be continuous for length of each joint. File or grind exposed welds smooth and flush.

.7 Exposed screws, bolts, washers to match work in which they occur in material and finish.

.8 Provide all components complete with anchors at maximum 400 mm O.C. for fixing to other material and provide holes for connections.

2.3 SHOP PAINTING

.1 Apply one shop coat of primer to metal items, with exception of stainless steel, aluminum, and those to be galvanized or encased in concrete.

.2 Use primer unadulterated, as prepared by manufacturer. Paint on dry surfaces, free from rust, scale, grease. Do not paint when temperature is lower than 7° C.

.3 Clean surfaces to be field welded, do not paint.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 ERECTION

.1 Erect metal work square, plumb, straight, and true, accurately fitted, with tight joints and intersections.

.2 Provide suitable and acceptable means of anchorage, such as dowels, anchor clips, bar anchors, expansion bolts and shields, toggles.

.3 Make field connections with high tensile bolts to CAN3-S16.1-M84, or weld.

.4 Hand items to be installed on elevator doors over to elevator supplier for completion.


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 05 50 00 Second Floor Renovation METAL FABRICATIONS Project No. 144401282 Page 3 of 3

.5 Touch-up rivets, field welds, bolts and burnt or scratched surfaces after completion of erection.

.6 Touch-up galvanized surfaces with zinc primer where burned by field welding.

.7 All welds shall be ground smooth to be even and uniform with entire exposed surface of all fabrications.

3.2 ITEMS REQUIRED

.1 Items listed herein are given in good faith, but shall not be considered as a complete listing of all items. .1 Anchor Bolts:

.1 Supply and install anchor bolts for work not connected with Structural work.

.2 Vanity Supports: .1 Shall be galvanized steel construction as detailed on drawings.

.1 Final paint finish by Section 09 90 00 - Painting. .3 Elevator Door Facings:

.1 Gauge Metal – Eco-Nor #004 Pre-decorated Door Facings. .1 18 gauge stainless steel standard 1066 mm x 2134 mm (42” x

84”). EC004 Non-directional field with #4 satin wave pattern and #4 satin stainless steel frames with pre-formed L or J breaks as required for clean finish.

END OF SECTION


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 06 10 00 Second Floor Renovation ROUGH CARPENTRY Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 3

PART 1 General


.1 Section 01 74 00 – Cleaning and Waste Management


.3 Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry

.4 Section 08 71 00 - Finish Hardware

.5 Section 10 28 00 - Toilet and Bath Accessories

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA B111-1974(R1998), Wire Nails, Spikes and Staples. .2 CAN/CSA-G164-M92(R1998), Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles. .3 CSA O121-M1978(R1998), Douglas Fir Plywood. .4 CAN/CSA-O141-91(R1999), Softwood Lumber. .5 CSA O151-M1978(R1998), Canadian Softwood Plywood. .6 CAN/CSA-O325.0-92(R1998), Construction Sheathing.

.2 National Lumber Grades Authority (NLGA) .1 Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber 2000.

.3 Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada (AWMAC) .1 AWMAC Quality Standards for Architectural Woodwork, most recent edition,

version 1.0, 2003.


.1 Lumber identification: by grade stamp of an agency certified by Canadian Lumber Standards Accreditation Board.

.2 Plywood identification: by grade mark in accordance with applicable CSA standards.

.3 Plywood, OSB and wood based composite panel construction sheathing identification: by grademark in accordance with applicable CSA standards.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

.1 Protect materials against dampness during and after delivery.

.2 Store materials in ventilated areas, protected from extreme changes of temperature or humidity.

1.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1 Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 00 – Cleaning and Waste Management.


Section 06 10 00 L.F. McIntosh Building ROUGH CARPENTRY Second Floor Renovation Page 2 of 3 Project No. 144401282

.2 Set aside damaged wood for acceptable alternative uses (e.g. bracing, blocking, cripples, bridging, finger-joining, or ties). Store separated reusable wood waste convenient to cutting station and area of work.

PART 2 Products

2.1 LUMBER MATERIAL

.1 Lumber: unless specified otherwise, softwood, S4S, moisture content 19% or less in accordance with following standards: .1 CAN/CSA-O141. .2 NLGA Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber.

.2 Glued end-jointed (finger-jointed) lumber is not acceptable.

.3 Framing and board lumber: in accordance with NBC, except as follows: .1 Construction grade fir or spruce or better, sizes as indicated on drawings.

.4 Furring, blocking, nailing strips, grounds, rough bucks, cants, curbs, fascia backing and sleepers: .1 S2S or S4S is acceptable for all applications. .2 Board sizes: Construction grade fir or spruce, sizes as indicated on drawings. .3 Dimension sizes: "Standard" light framing or better grade.

2.2 PANEL MATERIALS

.1 Douglas fir plywood (DFP): to CSA O121, standard construction.

.2 Canadian softwood plywood (CSP): to CSA O151, standard construction.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

.1 Nails, spikes and staples: to CSA B111.

.2 Bolts: 12.5 mm diameter unless indicated otherwise, complete with nuts and washers.

.3 Proprietary fasteners: toggle bolts, expansion shields and lag bolts, screws and lead or inorganic fibre plugs or explosive actuated fastening devices recommended for purpose by manufacturer.

2.4 FINISHES

.1 Galvanizing: to CAN/CSA-G164, use galvanized fasteners for exterior work, interior highly humid areas and for pressure-preservative and fire-retardant treated lumber.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Comply with requirements of NBC, supplemented by the following paragraphs.

.2 Install members true to line, levels and elevations, square and plumb.


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 06 10 00 Second Floor Renovation ROUGH CARPENTRY Project No. 144401282 Page 3 of 3

.3 Construct continuous members from pieces of longest practical length.

.4 Install interior wall sheathing in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.

.5 Install furring and blocking as required to space-out and support casework, cabinets, wall and ceiling finishes, facings and other work as required by AWMAC standards.

.6 Align and plumb faces of furring and blocking to tolerance of 1:600.

.7 Install rough bucks, nailers and linings to rough openings as required to provide backing for frames and other work.

.8 Use caution when working with particle board. Use dust collectors and high quality respirator masks.

3.2 ERECTION

.1 Frame, anchor, fasten, tie and brace members to provide necessary strength and rigidity.

.2 Countersink bolts where necessary to provide clearance for other work.

3.3 SCHEDULES

.1 Provide electrical equipment backboards for mounting electrical equipment as indicated. Use 19 mm thick DFP/G1S plywood on 19 x 38 mm furring around spacing, perimeter and at maximum 300 mm intermediate.

END OF SECTION


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 06 20 00 Second Floor Renovation FINISH CARPENTRY Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 7

PART 1 General

1.1 DESCRIPTION

.1 Work of this section consists of the supply only of Finish Carpentry specified herein and as shown on accompanying drawings. .1 See Section 02 41 19 - Select Structure Demolition for any additional work

required of this section.



.2 Section 01 74 00 – Cleaning and Waste Management



.5 Section 07 92 10 – Joint Sealing

.6 Section 08 71 00 - Finish Hardware


1.3 REFERENCES

.1 American National Standards Institute (ANSI) .1 ANSI A208.1-99, Particleboard. .2 ANSI A208.2-94, Medium Density Fibreboard (MDF).

.2 Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada (AWMAC) .1 AWMAC Quality Standards for Architectural Woodwork, most recent edition,

version 1.0, 2003.

.3 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-11.3-M87, Hardboard.

.4 Canadian Standards Association (CSA) .1 CAN/CSA-A247-M86(R1996), Insulating Fibreboard. .2 CSA B111-74(R1998), Wire Nails, Spikes and Staples. .3 CAN/CSA-G164-M92(R1998), Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles. .4 CSA O115-M82(R2001), Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. .5 CSA O121-M78(R1998), Douglas Fir Plywood. .6 CAN/CSA O141-91(R1999), Softwood Lumber. .7 CSA O151-M78 (R1998), Canadian Softwood Plywood. .8 CSA O153-M80 (R1998), Poplar Plywood.

.5 National Hardwood Lumber Association (NHLA) .1 Rules for the Measurement and Inspection of Hardwood and Cypress January

1996. Stantec Architecture Ltd. June 27, 2014

Section 06 20 00 L.F. McIntosh Building FINISH CARPENTRY Second Floor Renovation Page 2 of 7 Project No. 144401282

.6 National Lumber Grades Authority (NLGA) .1 Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber 2000.

.7 Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN4-S104-80(R1985), Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. .2 CAN4-S105-85(R1992), Fire Door Frames, meeting the Performance Required

by CAN4-S104.

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.2 Indicate details of construction, profiles, jointing, fastening and other related details.

.3 Indicate materials, thicknesses, finishes and hardware.

1.5 SAMPLES

.1 Submit samples where requested by Consultant in accordance with the General Conditions and Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures for approval by Consultant prior to manufacture.


.1 Protect materials against dampness during and after delivery.

.2 Store materials in ventilated areas, protected from extreme changes of temperature or humidity.


.1 Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 00– Cleaning and Waste Management.

.2 Set aside damaged wood for acceptable alternative uses (e.g. bracing, blocking, cripples, bridging, finger-joining, or ties). Store separated reusable wood waste convenient to cutting station and area of work.

1.8 WARRANTY

.1 For the work of this section, the 12 month warranty period prescribed in GC 32.1 of the General Conditions is extended to 5 years.

PART 2 Products

2.1 MATERIAL

.1 Softwood lumber: to requirements of CSA 0141-1970 and National Lumber Grades Authority requirements, and to AWMAC custom grade.

.2 Hardwood Lumber: Select maple (to match Haworth doors), graded in accordance with requirements of AWMAC; maximum moisture content of 6%.



.3 Hardwood plywood: to CSA 0115-1967 of thickness indicated, maple species veneer, particleboard core to meet ANSl/A208.1-1993 Type M3, minimum density 690 kg/m3 low formaldehyde emission (max. 0.3 ppm when tested in conformance with FTM-2).

.4 Douglas fir plywood (DFP): to CSA 0121, G1S good one side.

.5 Nails and staples: to requirements of CSA B111-1974, galvanized for exterior work, interior highly humid areas, and plain finish elsewhere.

.6 Proprietary Fasteners: screws, etc. shall be size as required, galvanized for all areas.

.7 Plastic Laminate: Conforming to requirements of CAN3-A172-M79 general purpose of regular type unless specified otherwise (suede) finish Solid colour and patterns as selected by Consultant. Backing sheet same manufacturer as facing sheet material. (Refer to Construction Documents –A801 Room Finish Schedule.)

.8 Adhesive: Contact type to suit usage and conforming to requirements of CGSB 71-GP-20.

.9 Particleboard: .1 To meet ANSI/A208.1 1993 Type M3 minimum density 690 kg/m3 low

formaldehyde emission: (Max. 0.3 ppm when tested in accordance with FTM-2) .2 Maximum moisture content 7%.

.10 Medium Density Fibreboard (MDF) .1 Industrial grade to meet ANSI 208.2-2002, medium density 700 - 752 kg/m3

moisture resistant, no-added formaldehyde. .2 Moisture content 4 - 6%. .3 Maximum 24 hr. thickness swell 2.5% for 25 mm thickness material .4 Maximum 24 hr. water absorption factor 5.5% for 25 mm thickness material. .5 Medex, as manufactured by Sierra Pine.

.11 High Pressure Laminate Cabinet Liner: 0.70 mm thick minimum. Locations as specified. Colour as selected by Consultant.

.12 Countertops: .1 1.6 mm thick high pressure plastic laminate over plywood as detailed. Provide

backing sheet 0.075 mm at underside of all countertops, except where sinks are installed use plywood substrate.

.2 Fabricate countertops and back splash as indicated. Provide 100 splash at back and sides.

.3 Fabricate countertop and back splash sections in as long a length as practicable.

.4 Cut holes for fittings, accessories and equipment.

.13 Low pressure laminate panels: thermally fused melamine decorative panels to meet ALA l988 minimum requirements, particleboard core to meet ANSI/A208.1-1993 Type M3 min. density 690 kg/m3 low formaldehyde emission (max. 0.3 ppm when tested in accordance with FTM-2).

.14 Prefinished Hardboard: .1 Wood fibre hardboard, conforming to requirements of CGSB 11.3-M87, 6.35 mm

thick, with one side prefinished to match interior of cupboard.



.15 Plastic Edging: .1 Heavy duty3 mm PVC edge banding to all exposed countertop, drawer, and door

edges to be heat bonded PVC Wood Tape as manufactured by Canada Wood Tape Inc., Mississauga, Ont. unless specified otherwise.

.2 Edge banding to cabinet body and shelf edges to be 0.6 mm PVC Wood Tape as manufactured by Canada Wood Tape Inc., Mississauga, ON.

.3 Colour: As scheduled on drawings or as selected by Consultant from manufacturer's standard range of colours. Submit samples.

.16 Hardware: .1 Door, drawers pulls: Metal with Nickel finish Richelieu #K58192196, 192 mm (7-

9/16”) .2 Door hinges: Hettich Euromat Plus #9956- TB43 & MPL 9000/Blum #71653-180

& 173L810-180, 165% opening typically. .3 Adjustable shelf clips: Richelieu #340.040.11with 32005-30 shelf support with 5

mm dia. steel pivots designed and built to fit predrilled holes in cabinet ends and gables at 32 mm on centre;2 pins per shelf per end.

.4 Drawer slides: .1 Hettich FR602/Blum BS230M 314 extension typically. Grant side mount

drawer slides may be used, capacity to suit application. .2 File drawer: Accuride 3832-2G full extension ball bearing 45 kg capacity. .3 Lateral file or pan drawer: Accuride 417-2G full extension heavy duty ball

bearing 68 kg capacity with 25 mm over travel. Provide heavier slides as required.

.5 Locks (where indicated on drawings) to suit application, 3 keys per lock, keyed differently/keyed alike. Confirm requirements with Owner.

.6 See drawings for any additional hardware required.

.17 Sealants .1 See Section 07 92 10 – Joint Sealing.

2.2 FABRICATION

.1 Fabricate wood cabinet work as detailed on drawings and in accordance with Custom Grade AWMAC Standards. Refer to drawings for locations, and to drawings and Room Finish Schedule for plastic laminate colours.

.2 Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes and other fixtures.

.3 Fit wall mounted wood shelves with hardwood edging. Fit MCP & cabinet shelves with P.V.C. edge banding.

.4 Cabinet Joinery: .1 Tops and bottoms shall be joined to cabinet ends using a minimum of 8 dowels

for 610 deep unit and minimum of 5 for 305 mm unit. .2 Dowels to be hardwood, laterally fluted, chamfered ends and minimum diameter

of 8 mm. .3 Internal cabinet components to be dowelled into place. Dowels to be glued and

clamped in place under pressure during assembly to assure secure joints and cabinet squareness.

.5 Bases



.1 All base units to have plywood support for rubber base.

.6 Cabinet Body & Shelves: .1 Low Pressure laminate panels, 19 mm thick. .2 Interior surface of sink units to be high pressure laminate cabinet liner. .3 Floors/bottoms in open floor cabinets and shelves in units to be high pressure

plastic laminate. .4 Cabinet edges to be (0.6 mm) PVC edging, colour to match adjacent material

unless scheduled otherwise. .5 Holes for adjustable shelving at 32 mm O.C. on cabinet ends. .6 All shelf edges to have (0.6 mm) PVC banding. .7 Shelves up to 780 wide to be 19 mm thick; over 780 mm wide to be 25 mm thick. .8 Recessed 6 mm thick prefinished hardboard, cabinet back, colour to match

interior of cabinet at lower cabinets with doors. Provide 12 mm thick recessed low pressure laminate panel backs at all upper cabinets and open cabinets without doors.

.7 Cabinet Doors and Drawer Fronts: - (See Drawings for Type Locations) .1 Laminate Type:

.1 Particleboard, 19 mm thick.

.2 High pressure light duty type laminate on exposed face and high pressure liner on interior face.

.3 Edges to be heavy duty (3 mm) PVC edge banding.

.4 Use double doors on all cabinets exceeding 610 width. .2 Wood Veneer type:

.1 Maple veneer G2S (to match Haworth doors), 19mm thick.

.2 Edges to be 6 mm S4S maple hardwood.

.3 Use double doors on all cabinets exceeding 610 width.

.4 See Construction Document drawings – Room Finish Schedule for final finishes.

.8 Drawers: .1 Sides, back, sub-front, to be low pressure laminate panels 12.5 mm thick. .2 Back and sub-front to be dowelled and glued to sides. Dowels to be placed at 32

mm O.C. .3 Dowels to be hardwood, laterally fluted, chamfered edges and minimum 8 mm

diameter. .4 All edges to have 0.6 mm PVC banding. .5 Drawer bottom to be 6 mm prefinished hard board screwed to drawer edges and

supported by drawer slides.

.9 Countertops: .1 High Pressure Plastic Laminate Countertops

.1 In line base cabinets shall have continuous top of MDF, laminated with high pressure laminate of standard duty type and typically edged with 3 mm P.V.C. banding. (Provide 28 mm deep edge to countertop). Undersides to be laminated with backer sheet laminate.

.2 Provide plywood substrate where sinks are installed.

.3 Fabricate countertops with 100 mm high back splash at back and sides.



.4 Fabricate countertop and back splash sections in as long a length as practical.

.5 Cut holes for fittings, accessories, equipment.

.10 Assembly: .1 Shop assemble work for delivery to site in size easily handled and to ensure

passage through building openings.

2.3 FINISH

.1 Fill and sand all exposed wood surfaces ready to receive finish.

2.4 HARDWARE

.1 Where not otherwise shown herein, provide and install hinges, catches, and hardware in accordance with hardware list indicated within specifications and on drawings. All screws and fittings to match fixtures.

.2 Install and adjust cabinet hardware for shelves, doors and drawers. Recess shelf supports unless otherwise noted.

2.5 CUPBOARDS/COUNTERS/CABINETS - (See Drawings for Scheduled Locations)

.1 Shall be as detailed on drawings complete with countertops, adjustable shelving standards and brackets as required. .1 Plastic Laminate or Melamine Colours: as scheduled on drawings.

2.6 VANITIES AT WASHROOMS – (See Drawings for Locations)

.1 Shall be as detailed on drawings: .1 See drawings for finish colours. .2 Provide backsplashes to all sides adjacent walls/partitions, etc. .3 Provide plastic laminate edges to all vanities/splashes as detailed on drawings.

2.7 SHELVING - FIXED & ADJUSTABLE UNITS

.1 Shall be as detailed on drawings complete with all heavy duty standards, brackets and fasteners. .1 Locations: See drawings. .2 Plastic Laminate or Melamine Colours: As scheduled on Construction

Documents drawings or "as selected by Consultant". .3 Adjustable shelving wall standards shall be 'Knapt & Vogt' heavy duty Series 25

mm (1") reinforced single slot, clear anodized finish. Shelf brackets at 400 mm O.C. maximum, sized to suit shelves scheduled.

.4 Provide hardwood edges to any/all plywood shelving. .1 Final paint finish as per Room Finish Schedule – Drawing A801.

2.8 SEALANT .1 See Section 07 92 10 – Joint Sealing for sealant type.


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 06 20 00 Second Floor Renovation FINISH CARPENTRY Project No. 144401282 Page 7 of 7 PART 3 Execution

3.1 ERECTION

.1 Set and secure material and components in place, rigid plumb and square.

.2 Provide heavy duty fixture attachments for wall-mounted work.

.3 Prepare external exposed and semi-exposed surfaces ready for sealing, staining, and varnishing or painting.

.4 At junction of plastic laminate counter backsplash and adjacent wall finish, apply small bead of sealant.

.5 After installation, fit and adjust operating hardware.

.6 Construction joining and prefinishing of all assemblies or items is to be of Custom Grade, as established by AWMAC.

.7 Ensure all mechanical and electrical items affecting this Section of work are properly placed, complete and have been inspected by Consultant prior to commencement.

.8 Work to be set accurately in place, scribed, and permanently secured to wall or floor. All work to be completely cleaned at completion of installation.

.9 All exposed edge banding is to be P.V.C. (unless otherwise specified) in colour as scheduled or as selected by Consultant.

.10 All shelves to be edge banded on all faces.

.11 Prepare exposed and semi-exposed surfaces ready for sealing, staining, and varnishing or painting.

.12 Apply water resistant building paper or bituminous coating over wood framing members in contact with masonry or cementitious construction.

.13 Seal edges of sink cutouts in countertops.

END OF SECTION


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 06 47 00 Second Floor Renovation PLASTIC LAMINATE FINISHING Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 2

PART 1 General



1.2 PRODUCT HANDLING

.1 Cover finished laminated plastic surfaces with heavy craft paper or put in cartons during shipment. Protect installed laminated surfaces by means approved by product manufacturer. Do not remove until immediately before final inspection.

.2 Do not store or install material in areas where relative humidity is less than 25% or greater than 60% at 22º C.

1.3 SAMPLES

.1 Submit samples in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract.

.2 Submit duplicate samples of joints, edging, cutouts and postformed profiles.

1.4 MAINTENANCE DATA

.1 Provide maintenance data for plastic laminate work.

PART 2 Products

2.1 TILE MATERIALS

.1 Refer to Construction Document Drawings A801 – Room Finish Schedule.

2.2 MATERIAL

.1 Typical laminated plastic for flatwork: to requirements of CSA A172-1974 Type GP REG (unless specified otherwise), manufactured laminates are to be as scheduled. Colour to be as selected by Consultant - See drawings & Room Finish Schedule for scheduled colours and locations.

.2 Laminated plastic adhesive: contact adhesive to requirements of CGSB 71-GP-20.

.3 Medium Density Fibreboard (MDF) or Plywood core: to CAN3-0188.1-M78, Grade R, sanded faces, of thickness indicated.

.4 Sealer: water resistant sealer or glue acceptable to laminate manufacturer.

.5 Balance laminate sheet: Laminated plastic backing sheet supplied by same manufacturer as face sheet; not less than 0.5 mm thick in colour to be selected by Consultant.

.6 Sealant: silicone - Tremco or equal, colour to be selected by Consultant.

.7 Draw bolts and splines: as recommended by fabricator.


Section 06 47 00 L.F. McIntosh Building PLASTIC LAMINATE FINISHING Second Floor Renovation Page 2 of 2 Project No. 144401282 2.3 SHOP FABRICATION

.1 Shop fabrication to comply with requirements of CSA Al72-1974, Appendix A.

.2 Obtain governing dimensions for drawings and shop drawings before fabricating items which are to accommodate or butt to appliances, equipment and other material.

.3 Ensure adjacent parts of continuous laminate work match in colour and pattern.

.4 Apply veneer laminated plastic to core material in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's instruction. Ensure core and laminate profiles coincide to provide continuous support and bond over entire surface. Use continuous lengths of 3000 mm. Keep joints 600 mm from sink cutouts. Provide balance sheet of laminate to other side of core material from laminate tops, etc.

.5 Use straight self-edging laminate strip for flatwork to cover exposed edge of core material. Chamfer exposed edges uniformly at approximately 20 degrees. Do not mitre laminate edges.

.6 Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of core of plastic laminate work.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install work plumb, true and square, neatly scribed to adjoining surfaces.

.2 Make allowances around perimeter where fixed objects pass through or project into laminated plastic work to permit normal movement without restriction.

.3 Use draw bolts and spline in countertop joints. Maximum spacing 450 mm o.c. 75 mm from edge. Make flush hairline joints.

.4 Provide cutouts for inserts, grilles, appliances, outlet boxes, etc. Round internal corners, chamfer edges and seal exposed core. Seal all raw edges at cutouts for sinks.

.5 At junction of laminated plastic counter back splash and adjacent wall finish, apply small bead of sealant.

.6 Factory apply laminated plastic to units as indicated. Adhere laminated plastic over entire surface. Make corners with hairline joints. Use full sized laminate sheets. Make joints only where approved by Consultant. Slightly bevel arises.

.7 For job site application, offset joints in plastic laminate facing from joints in core.

END OF SECTION


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 07 21 16 Second Floor Renovation BLANKET INSULATION Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 2

PART 1 General


.1 Section 09 22 16 – Non-Structural Metal Framing

.2 Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM C553-02 Specification for Mineral Fibre Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications.

.2 ASTM C665-01e1, Specification for Mineral Fibre Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing.

.3 ASTM C1320-99, Standard Practice for Installation of Mineral Fibre Batt and Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction. Canadian Gas Association (CGA).

.4 CSA B111-1974 (R1988), Wire Nails, Spikes and Staples.

.5 CCD-016-97, Thermal Insulation.

.6 CAN/ULC-S702 (1997), Standard for Mineral Fibre Insulation.

PART 2 Products

2.1 INSULATION

.1 Batt and blanket mineral fibre: to CAN/ULC-S702-97, Type 1, EcoLogo certified with minimum 50% recycled content, formaldehyde free, thickness as indicated.

.1 Acceptable material: Johns Manville Standard Frame thermal and sound control batts or approved equal.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

.1 Insulation clips: .1 Impale type, perforated 50 x 50 mm cold rolled carbon steel 0.8 mm thick,

adhesive back, spindle of 2.5 mm diameter annealed steel, length to suit insulation, 25 mm diameter washers of self locking type.

.2 Nails: galvanized steel, length to suit insulation plus 25 mm, to CSA B111.

.3 Staples: 12 mm minimum leg.

.4 Tape: as recommended by manufacturer.


Section 07 21 16 L.F. McIntosh Building BLANKET INSULATION Second Floor Renovation Page 2 of 2 Project No. 144401282 PART 3 Execution

3.1 INSULATION INSTALLATION

.1 Install insulation to maintain continuity of thermal protection to building elements and spaces.

.2 Install insulation to locations indicated. Retain in position with staples or insulation clips installed as recommended by manufacturer.

.3 Fit insulation closely around electrical boxes, pipes, ducts, frames and other objects in or passing through insulation.

.4 Do not compress insulation to fit into spaces.

.5 Keep insulation minimum 75 mm from heat emitting devices such as recessed light fixtures, and minimum 50 mm from sidewalls of CAN/ULC-S604 Type A chimneys and CAN/CGA-B149.1 and CAN/CGA-B149.2 Type B and L vents.

.6 Do not enclose insulation until it has been inspected and approved by Consultant.

END OF SECTION


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 07 84 00 Second Floor Renovation FIRESTOPPING Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 3

PART 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK

.1 All fire stopping and smoke seal work required under this contract shall be carried out by a single, fully qualified contractor.

.2 Fire stopping and smoke seals within mechanical assemblies (i.e. inside ducts, dampers) and electrical assemblies (i.e. inside cable trays) are specified in Divisions 21, 22, 23 and 26 respectively, but shall be supplied and installed by this contractor.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Underwriter’s Laboratories of Canada (ULC)

.1 ULC-S115-2011, Fire Tests of Firestop Systems.

1.3 SAMPLES

.1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures, if requested by Consultant.

.2 Submit duplicate 300 x 300 mm samples showing actual firestop material proposed for project.

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.2 Submit shop drawings to show proposed material, reinforcement, anchorage, fastenings and method of installation. Construction details should accurately reflect actual job conditions.

.3 Submit manufacturer's product data for materials and prefabricated devices, providing descriptions are sufficient for identification at job site. Include manufacturer's printed instructions for installation.

1.5 PRODUCT DATA


.2 Submit manufacturer's product data for materials and prefabricated devices, providing descriptions are sufficient for identification at job site. Include manufacturer's printed instructions for installation.




Section 07 84 00 L.F. McIntosh Building FIRESTOPPING Second Floor Renovation Page 2 of 3 Project No. 144401282 PART 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Fire stopping and smoke seal systems: in accordance with ULC-S115.

.1 Asbestos-free materials and systems capable of maintaining an effective barrier against flame, smoke and gases in compliance with requirements of ULC-S115 and not to exceed opening sizes for which they are intended.

.2 Firestop system rating: 60 minutes, 90 minutes as required.

.2 Service penetration assemblies: certified by ULC in accordance with ULC-S115 and listed in ULC Guide No.40 U19.

.3 Service penetration firestop components: certified by ULC in accordance with ULC-S115 and listed in ULC Guide No.40 U19.13 and ULC Guide No.40 U19.15 under the Label Service of ULC.

.4 Fire-resistance rating of installed fire stopping assembly in accordance with NBC.

.5 Fire stopping and smoke seals at openings intended for ease of re-entry such as cables: elastomeric seal.

.6 Fire stopping and smoke seals at openings around penetrations for pipes, ductwork and other mechanical items requiring sound and vibration control: elastomeric seal.

.7 Primers: to manufacturer's recommendation for specific material, substrate, and end use.

.8 Water (if applicable): potable, clean and free from injurious amounts of deleterious substances.

.9 Damming and backup materials, supports and anchoring devices: to manufacturer's recommendations, and in accordance with tested assembly being installed as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

.10 Sealants for vertical joints: non-sagging.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 PREPARATION

.1 Examine sizes and conditions of voids to be filled to establish correct thicknesses and installation of materials. Ensure that substrates and surfaces are clean, dry and frost free.

.2 Prepare surfaces in contact with fire stopping materials and smoke seals to manufacturer's instructions.

.3 Maintain insulation around pipes and ducts penetrating fire separation without interruption to vapour barrier.

.4 Mask where necessary to avoid spillage and over coating onto adjoining surfaces; remove stains on adjacent surfaces.


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 07 84 00 Second Floor Renovation FIRESTOPPING Project No. 144401282 Page 3 of 3 3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Install fire stopping and smoke seal material and components in accordance with ULC certification and manufacturer's instructions.

.2 Seal holes or voids made by through penetrations, poke-through termination devices, and unpenetrated openings or joints to ensure continuity and integrity of fire separation are maintained.

.3 Provide temporary forming as required and remove forming only after materials have gained sufficient strength and after initial curing.

.4 Tool or trowel exposed surfaces to a neat finish.

.5 Remove excess compound promptly as work progresses and upon completion.

3.3 INSPECTION

.1 Notify Consultant when ready for inspection and prior to concealing or enclosing firestopping materials and service penetration assemblies.

3.4 SCHEDULE

.1 Firestop and smoke seal at:

.1 Penetrations through fire-resistance rated masonry, concrete, and gypsum board partitions and walls.

.2 Edge of floor slabs at curtain wall and precast concrete panels.

.3 Top of fire-resistance rated masonry and gypsum board partitions.

.4 Intersection of fire-resistance rated masonry and gypsum board partitions.

.5 Control and sway joints in fire-resistance rated masonry and gypsum board partitions and walls.

.6 Penetrations through fire-resistance rated floor slabs, ceilings and roofs.

.7 Openings and sleeves installed for future use through fire separations.

.8 Around mechanical and electrical assemblies penetrating fire separations.

.9 Rigid ducts: greater than 129 cm2: fire stopping to consist of bead of fire stopping material between retaining angle and fire separation and between retaining angle and duct, on each side of fire separation.

3.5 CLEAN UP

.1 Remove excess materials and debris and clean adjacent surfaces immediately after application.

.2 Remove temporary dams after initial set of fire stopping and smoke seal materials.

END OF SECTION


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 07 92 10 Second Floor Renovation JOINT SEALANTS Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 4

PART 1 General

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 This Section specifies caulking and sealants not specified in other Sections.

.2 Refer to other sections for other caulking and sealants.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 CGSB 19-GP-5M-1984, Sealing Compound, One Component, Acrylic Base, Solvent Curing, (Issue of 1976 reaffirmed, incorporating Amendment No.1)

.2 Can/CGSB-19.13-M87, Sealing Compound, One-component, Elastomeric, Chemical Curing.

.3 CGSB19-GP-14M(1984), Sealing Compound, One Component, Butyl-Polyisobutylene Polymer Base, Solvent Curing (Reaffirmation of April 1976)

.4 CAN/CGSB-19.17-M90, One Component Acrylic Emulsion Base Sealing Compound.

.5 CAN/CGSB-19.24-M90, Multi Component, Chemical Curing Sealing Compound.

1.3 WARRANTY

.1 The Contractor shall warranty all work of this contract against leakage and displacement for a period of three (3) years from the date of substantial completion of the project.

1.4 SAMPLES

.1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

.2 Submit duplicate samples of each type of material and colour.


.1 Deliver and store materials in original wrappings and containers with manufacturer's seals and labels, intact. Protect from freezing, moisture, water and contact with ground or floor.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

.1 Comply with requirements of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) regarding use, handling, storage, and disposal of hazardous materials; and regarding labeling and provision of material safety data sheets acceptable to Labour Canada.

.2 Conform to manufacturer's recommended temperatures, relative humidity, and substrate moisture content for application and curing of sealants including special conditions governing use.

.3 Ventilate area of work by use of approved portable supply and exhaust fans.


Section 07 92 10 L.F. McIntosh Building JOINT SEALANTS Second Floor Renovation Page 2 of 4 Project No. 144401282 PART 2 Products

2.1 SEALANT MATERIALS

.1 Sealants acceptable for use on this project except CAN/CGSB-19.1 and CAN/CGSB-19.18 must be listed on CGSB Qualified Products List issued by CGSB Qualification Board for Joint Sealants. Where sealants are qualified with primers use only these primers.

2.2 SEALANT MATERIAL DESIGNATIONS

.1 Urethanes Two Part. .1 Self-Leveling to CAN/CGSB-19.24, Type 1, Class B, custom colour. .2 Acceptable material: Tremco, Dymeric.

.2 Urethanes One Part. .1 Non-Sag to CAN/CGSB-19.13, Type 2, MCG-2-25, custom colour. .2 Acceptable material: Tremco, Dymeric.

.3 Silicones One Part. .1 To CAN/CGSB-19.13. .2 To CAN/CGSB-19.22 (Mildew resistant).

.4 Acrylic Latex One Part. .1 To CAN/CGSB-19.17.

.5 Acoustical Sealant. .1 To CAN/CGSB-19.21.

.6 Butyl. .1 To CGSB 19-GP-14M.

.7 Preformed Compressible and Non-Compressible back-up materials. .1 Polyethylene, Urethane, Neoprene or Vinyl Foam.

.1 Extruded closed cell foam backer rod.

.2 Size: oversize 30 to 50%. .2 Neoprene or Butyl Rubber.

.1 Round solid rod, Shore A hardness 70. .3 Bond Breaker Tape.

.1 Polyethylene bond breaker tape, which will not bond to sealant.

2.3 SEALANT SELECTION

.1 Interior control and expansion joints in floor surfaces: Sealant type: 2.

.2 Perimeters of interior frames, as detailed and itemized: Sealant type: 2.

.3 Perimeter of bath fixtures (e.g. sinks, urinals, stools, water closets, basins, vanities): Sealant type: 3.

.4 Exposed interior control joints in drywall: Sealant type: 2.


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 07 92 10 Second Floor Renovation JOINT SEALANTS Project No. 144401282 Page 3 of 4 2.4 JOINT CLEANER

.1 Non-corrosive and non-staining type, compatible with joint forming materials and sealant recommended by sealant manufacturer.

.2 Primer: as recommended by manufacturer.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 PROTECTION

.1 Protect installed work of other trades from staining or contamination.

3.2 PREPARATION OF JOINT SURFACES

.1 Examine joint sizes and conditions to establish correct depth to width relationship for installation of backup materials and sealants.

.2 Clean bonding joint surfaces of harmful matter substances including dust, rust, oil grease, and other matter which may impair work.

.3 Do not apply sealants to joint surfaces treated with sealer, curing compound, water repellent, or other coatings unless tests have been performed to ensure compatibility of materials. Remove coatings as required.

.4 Ensure joint surfaces are dry and frost free.

.5 Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's directions.

3.3 PRIMING

.1 Where necessary to prevent staining, mask adjacent surfaces prior to priming and caulking.

.2 Prime sides of joints in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions immediately prior to caulking.

3.4 BACKUP MATERIAL

.1 Apply bond breaker tape where required to manufacturer's instructions.

.2 Install joint filler to achieve correct joint depth and shape, with approximately 30% compression.

3.5 MIXING

.1 Mix materials in strict accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions.

3.6 APPLICATION

.1 Sealant. .1 Apply sealant in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. .2 Mask edges of joint where irregular surface or sensitive joint border exists to

provide neat joint.


Section 07 92 10 L.F. McIntosh Building JOINT SEALANTS Second Floor Renovation Page 4 of 4 Project No. 144401282

.3 Apply sealant in continuous beads.

.4 Apply sealant using gun with proper size nozzle.

.5 Use sufficient pressure to fill voids and joints solid.

.6 Form surface of sealant with full bead, smooth, free from ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets, embedded impurities.

.7 Tool exposed surfaces before skinning begins to give slightly concave shape.

.8 Remove excess compound promptly as work progresses and upon completion.

.2 Curing. .1 Cure sealants in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions. .2 Do not cover up sealants until proper curing has taken place.

.3 Cleanup. .1 Clean adjacent surfaces immediately and leave work neat and clean. .2 Remove excess and droppings, using recommended cleaners as work

progresses. .3 Remove masking tape after initial set of sealant.

END OF SECTION


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 08 11 00 Second Floor Renovation METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 4 PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Steel frames for wood doors.

.2 Steel glazing frames.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

.1 Section 08 80 50 - Glazing


.1 ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2003.

.2 ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2003.

.3 ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 1998 (R2004).

.4 ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2007.

.5 BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames; 2006.

.6 NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2007.

.7 NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association; 2007.

.8 UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.

.9 UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; 1998.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.

.2 Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one copy of referenced grade standard.


Section 08 11 13 L.F. McIntosh Building METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Second Floor Renovation Page 2 of 4 Project No. 144401282

.3 Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and identifying location of different finishes, if any.


.1 Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

.2 Maintain at the project site a copy of all reference standards dealing with installation.


.1 Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840.

.2 Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

.1 Steel Frames:

.1 Assa Abloy Ceco, Curries, or Fleming

.2 Windsor Republic Doors

.3 Steelcraft;

2.2 DOORS AND FRAMES

.1 Requirements for All Doors and Frames:

.1 Accessibility: Comply with ANSI/ICC A117.1.

.2 Glazed Lights: Non-removable stops on non-secure side; sizes and configurations as indicated on drawings.

.3 Hardware Preparation: In accordance with BHMA A156.115, with reinforcement welded in place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard.

.4 Galvanizing for Units in Wet Areas: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed), manufacturer's standard coating thickness.

.5 Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.

June 27, 2014

L.F. McIntosh Building Section 08 11 00 Second Floor Renovation METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Project No. 144401282 Page 3 of 4

.2 Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent.

2.3 STEEL FRAMES

.1 General:

.1 Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door.

.1 ANSI A250.8 Level 3 Doors: 14 gauge frames.

.2 Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI A250.8 for Level 1, 18 gauge.

.2 Finish: Same as existing frames.

.3 Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted.

.4 Frames Wider than 1200 mm: Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top.

.2 Interior Door Frames: Face welded type.

.3 Frames for Interior Glazing or Borrowed Lights: Construction and face dimensions to match door frames, and as indicated on drawings.

2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

.1 Glazing: Factory installed.

.2 Removable Stops: Formed sheet steel, shape as indicated on drawings, mitered or butted corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws.

.3 Grout for Frames: Portland cement grout of maximum 4-inch slump for hand troweling; thinner pumpable grout is prohibited.

.4 Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions.

.5 Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory- or shop-assembled frames.

2.5 FINISH MATERIALS


Section 08 11 13 L.F. McIntosh Building METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Second Floor Renovation Page 4 of 4 Project No. 144401282

.1 Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard.

.2 Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high-build, water-resistant, resilient coating.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Verify existing conditions before starting work.

.2 Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.

3.2 PREPARATION

.1 Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior to installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION

.1 Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM HMMA 840.

.2 In addition, install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80.

.3 Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.

.4 Grout frames in masonry construction, using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that pressure of grout before setting will not deform frames.

.5 Coordinate installation of hardware.

.6 Coordinate installation of glazing.

3.4 TOLERANCES

.1 Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8.

.2 Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1.5 mm measured with straight edge, corner to corner.

3.5 ADJUSTING

.1 Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.

END OF SECTION

June 27, 2014

L.F. McIntosh Building Section 08 14 16 Second Floor Renovation FLUSH WOOD DOORS Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 2 Part1 General


.1 Flush wood doors.


.1 Section 08 11 00 – Metal Doors & Frames

.2 Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware

.3 Section 09 90 00 – Painting

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 ANSI A135.4-2004 - Basic Hardboard.

.2 AWMAC (Quality Standards for Architectural Woodwork).

.3 CAN/CSA O132.2 Series-90(R2003) - Wood Flush Doors.

.4 CHPVA (Canadian Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association).

.5 HPVA (Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association).

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

.1 Coordination: Coordinate with other work having a direct bearing on work of this section. .1 Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door

hardware installation.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

.1 Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures.

.2 Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics.

.3 Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts required and special blocking for hardware.

.4 Samples: .1 Submit two (2) samples of door veneer mounted on substrate, 100 x 100 mm in

size.


.1 Products of This Section: Manufactured to ISO 9000 and 14000 certification requirements.

.2 Perform work in accordance with AWMAC Quality Standard, Custom Grade.

.3 Finish doors in accordance with AWMAC Quality Standard.

.4 Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

.1 Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.

1.8 WARRANTY

.1 Provide warranty to include coverage for failure to meet specified requirements, for the life of installation of the interior doors.

.2 Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials and telegraphing core construction.


Section 08 14 00 L.F. McIntosh Building FLUSH WOOD DOORS Second Floor Renovation Page 2 of 2 Project No. 144401282 PART 2 Products

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

.1 CP Distributors

.2 Shanahans

2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION .1 Solid core: to CAN/CSA-O132.2.1.

.1 Construction: .1 Core (Solid): AWMAC Section 1300, Type PC - Particleboard or SCLC -

Structural Composite Lumber, standard and fire-rated. .2 Stile and rail frame bonded to 7 ply particleboard core with wood lock

blocks. Top rail blocking at closers, mid-rail blocking at exit devices, and bottom rail blocking at kick plates.

.3 Veneer: Maple finish and grain to match Architect’s sample for Haworth Wood doors, stain grade

.4 Adhesive: Type II (water resistant) for interior doors.

2.3 FABRICATION .1 Vertical edge strips to match face veneer. .2 Bevel vertical edges of single acting doors 3 mm in 50 mm on lock side and 1.5 mm in 50

mm on hinge side. .3 Radius vertical edges of double acting doors to 60 mm radius. .4 Finish laminated plastic smooth and flush with stile edges of door and bevel at

approximately 20 degrees.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Verify existing conditions before starting work.

.2 Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.

.3 Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Install non-rated doors in accordance with AWMAC Quality Standards requirements.

.2 Trim non-rated door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges.

.3 Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum of 19 mm.

.4 Machine cut for hardware.

.5 Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames specified in Section 08 11 00 and hardware specified in Section 08 71 00.

3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

.1 Conform to AWMAC requirements for fit and clearance tolerances.

.2 Conform to AWMAC requirements for maximum diagonal distortion.

3.4 ADJUSTING

.1 Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.

.2 Adjust closers for full closure.

END OF SECTION


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 08 71 00 Second Floor Renovation FINISH HARDWARE Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 9

PART 1 General

1.1 SCOPE

.1 Work of this section consists of the complete supply of all Finish Hardware and other related work shown on the accompanying drawings and door schedule and as specified herein.

1.2 WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE


.2 Section 08 11 00 – Metal Doors and Frames.

.3 Section 08 14 16 – Flush Wood Doors.

.4 Section 10 80 00 - Miscellaneous Specialties

1.3 REFERENCES .1 NFPA - National Fire Protection Agency:

.1 NFPA80 Standard for Fire Doors and Other Protectives (2013)

.2 DHI - Door and Hardware Institute:

.1 Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule (1996)

.2 Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors (1993)

.3 Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors (1993)

.4 DHI Handbook, Keying Systems and Nomenclature

1.4 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

.1 Use ULC listed and labelled hardware for doors in fire separations and exit doors.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

.1 Product Data:

.1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data sheet in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittals Procedures.

.2 Samples:

.1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittals Procedures.

.2 Identify each sample by label indicating applicable specification paragraph number, brand name and number, finish and hardware package number.

.3 After approval samples will be returned for incorporation in the Work.

.3 Schedules:

.1 Submit contract hardware list in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittals Procedures.

.2 Schedules shall reference architectural openings as identified on architectural plans and specifications.


Section 08 71 00 L.F. McIntosh Building FINISH HARDWARE Second Floor Renovation Page 2 of 9 Project No. 144401282

.3 Indicate specified hardware, including make, model, material, function, size, finish and other pertinent information.

.4 Detailed Hardware Schedules shall be submitted as per "Sequence and Format For The Hardware Schedule" vertical format as published by DHI.

.5 Submit proposed keying schedule for locks and cylinders Architects Consultant for approval.

.6 Incomplete or non-compliant submittals will be returned for correction prior to completed review.

.4 Inspections:

.1 Suppliers consultant to provide a written inspection stating completed installations and applications comply with manufacturers’ warranty and recommended installation instructions.

.2 Submit written record of initial inspection of fire rated openings in conformance with NFPA 80 Standard for Fire Doors and Other Protectives-2013 - 5.2

.5 Electrified Hardware:

.1 Submit riser diagrams and detailed method of operation for electrified hardware, including correct wire runs, back boxes,120 VAC requirements and fire alarm connections, gauge, quantity, type of wire, and termination points. Termination points to be molded modular snap-in connectors where possible.

.2 Submit point-to-point diagrams on electrified hardware.

.6 Manufacturer's Instructions:

.1 Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

.7 Closeout Submittals

.1 Provide operation and maintenance data for door closers, locksets, door holders electrified hardware and fire exit hardware for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals.

.2 Project Record Documents: .1 Record installed locations of keyed cylinders and their corresponding key

code. .3 Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication

requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. .4 Keys: Deliver with identifying tags to Owner by secured shipment direct from

hardware supplier.

.8 Provide maintenance data, parts list, and manufacturer's instructions for each type door closers, locksets, and fire exit hardware for incorporation into maintenance manual specified in General Conditions of the Contract.

.9 Brief maintenance staff regarding proper care, cleaning, and general maintenance.


.1 Supply two sets of wrenches for door closers, locksets and fire exit hardware.


.1 Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading:



.1 Deliver, store, handle and protect materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Basic Product Requirements.

.2 Package each item of hardware including fastenings, separately or in like groups of hardware, label each package as to item definition and location.

.3 Hardware items to be delivered in factory packaging to provide protection from damage in transit.

.2 Storage and Protection:

.1 Provision of secured storage area on site is required to prevent loss, damage or theft.

.2 Storage shall provide protection of hardware items from damage due to moisture or extreme temperature.

.3 Protect hardware from impact, abrasives, chemicals, cleaners and solvents during construction process.

PART 2 Materials

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 All hardware shall be supplied as specified. If equals are requested, a detailed list showing each specified item, function and the alternate item requested shall be shown. These requests must be made complete with samples. Applications shall be made no later than five (5) working days before Sub-contractor Tender Closing.

2.2 HARDWARE ITEMS

.1 Hardware listed in 3.6 shall provide minimum standard of acceptance, provide hardware in conformance with design and function as specified herein.

2.3 DOOR HARDWARE

.1 Butts and hinges:

.1 Butts and hinges: to CAN/CGSB-69.18 ANSI/BHMA156.1.

.2 Interior doors to receive 3 knuckle concealed ball bearing, steel or stainless steel.

.3 Exterior doors to receive 3 knuckle concealed ball bearing, non-ferrous material.

.4 Electrified hinges shall provide sufficient gauge and quantity of conductors to operate specified electrical devices.

.5 Hinges shall be located as follows: .1 2 Hinges per door or dutch door leaf up to 1525mm .2 3 Hinges Per Door up to 2285mm in height, 1 additional hinge for each

additional 760mm of door height. .3 4.5” (114mm) tall hinges for doors up to 914mm in width, 5” (127mm) tall

hinges for doors 915-1220mm in width. .4 Secured openings with barrel of hinge exposed on the secured side shall

be of non- removable pin type. .5 Acceptable Manufacturers: Ives, Hager, Stanley.

.6 Provide Hinges as scheduled in 3.6

.2 Locks and Latches:



.1 Bored and preassembled locks and latches: to CAN/CGSB-69.17, series 4000 bored lock, designed for function and keyed as stated in Hardware Schedule.

.2 Lock levers shall be non-handed solid material, plain design.

.3 Roses: round.

.4 Normal strikes: box type, lip projection not beyond jamb.

.5 Cylinders: key into keying system as noted.

.6 Acceptable Manufacturers: Sargent 7 Line Schlage AL

.3 Door Closers and Accessories:

.1 Door Closers .1 Door Controls (Closers): To CAN/CGSB-69.20 ANSI/BHMA A156.4 .2 Closers shall be adjustable to provide sizes 1 through 6 and comply with

ADA with full rack and pinion construction, closing speed, latch speed and back-check controlled by key operated valves. Delayed action feature as scheduled shall be available and controlled by a separate valve.

.3 Closer covers as listed shall be of high impact plastic, finish to match adjacent hardware.

.4 Closers shall be non-handed to meet a variety of door conditions and design requirements.

.5 Supply as Scheduled in 3.6

.6 Acceptable Manufacturers: LCN1460 Series Sargent 1430 Series

.4 Auxiliary hardware: to CAN/CGSB-69.32, listed in Hardware Schedule 3.6

.1 Stops: .1 Wall Stops shall be of wrought material with concave or convex rubber

insert to suit lock function. .2 Overhead mounted stop and hold mechanisms shall be non-handed,

slide track design providing spring actuated cushion prior to dead stop and sized to suit door opening. .1 Acceptable Manufacturers: Glynn Johnson 90/100 Series

Rixson 1/9 Series .2 Silencers

.1 Door frames shall receive 3 silencers for single door openings and 2 in paired openings.

.2 Silencers will be tamperproof and of rubber composition with built in acoustic chambers to absorb impact and reduce noise.

.5 Weatherstripping:

.1 Head and jamb seal: .1 Extruded aluminum frame and solid, closed cell neoprene, clear

anodized finish. .2 Smoke seal shall be self-adhesive silicon seal bulb, rated for smoke and

fire as required. .2 Door bottom seal:



.1 Automatic Door Bottom shall be equipped with release mechanism allowing gasket in channel to drop to surface of floor. Endplates and jamb protective plates as required to protect finishes.

2.4 FASTENINGS

.1 Supply screws, bolts, expansion shields and other fastening devices required for satisfactory installation and operation of hardware.

.2 Exposed fastening devices to match finish of hardware.

.3 Where pull is scheduled on one side of door and push plate on other side, supply fastening devices and install so pull can be secured through door from reverse side. Install push plate to cover fasteners.

.4 Use fasteners compatible with material through which they pass.

2.5 KEYING

Supply 4 master keys for each master. Key Code stamped on locks and keys. Existing Grand Master Key System.

.1 Key all locksets and cylinders to existing Master Key System. All keying to be done by factory; local keying will not be accepted. Key to suit 6-pin LA Keyway building key system..

.2 Provide 4 keys per lock keys for all locks.

.3 Provide detailed keying list containing key code numbers for all locksets and cylinders supplied with cross reference to Master Keying, Hardware Schedule Item, Door Number and Door Location.

.4 Keys to be complete with Lund Model #508-A Security Key tag securely affixed to key and clearly indicating room for which key is to be used. (Co-ordinate identification system with Owner).

.5 Section 08 71 00 – Finish Hardware will provide new permanent/individually keyed cores to all locksets provided by Partition System hardware under Section 10 80 00 – Miscellaneous Specialties.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Examine doors, frames, and related items for conditions affecting proper

installation and application of finish hardware.

3.2 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

.1 Furnish metal door and frame manufacturers with complete instructions and templates for preparation of their work to receive hardware.

.2 Location of locks latches and operating trim shall be established in accordance with DHI (Door and Hardware Institute) "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors" and "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Flush Wood Doors"



.3 Install hardware to standard hardware location dimensions in accordance with Canadian Metric Guide for Steel Doors and Frames (Modular Construction) prepared by Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers' Association.

.4 Pre-fit hardware prior to application of final finishes, remove and reinstall hardware once finish is complete ensuring proper fit and function.

.5 Locate surface mounted door closers on the room side of door opposite corridors where possible. Method of installation shall provide positive latching and ease of operation without conflicting with other hardware installed at opening.

.6 Surface mounted hardware shall be installed with fasteners as supplied by the manufacturer where proper reinforcing is sufficient to securely attach. Self-threading fasteners shall be permitted only as indicated in manufacturers printed instructions and included in standard packaging for items. Pre-drill wood doors to accept fasteners and provide secure installation. Failure to comply may void manufacturer's warranties and applicable licensed labels.

.7 Where door stop contacts door pulls, mount stop to strike bottom of plate.

.8 Install key control cabinet as directed by owner, as provided in Schedule 3.6

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Hardware Supplier’s Architectural Hardware Consultant and Electrified Hardware Consultant will inspect installation at initial installation stages and certify that hardware and installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and as specified.

.2 Final inspection of installed assemblies shall be completed prior to certificate of occupancy with all building systems functional.

3.4 ADJUSTING

.1 Adjust door hardware, operators, closures and controls for optimum, smooth operating condition, safety and for weather tight closure.

.2 Lubricate hardware, operating equipment and other moving parts.

.3 Adjust door hardware to provide tight fit at contact points with frames.

3.5 CLEANING .1 Perform cleaning after installation to remove construction and accumulated

environmental dirt.

.2 Clean hardware with damp rag and approved non-abrasive cleaner, and polish hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

.3 Remove protective material from hardware items where present.

.4 Upon completion of installation, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment barriers.


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 08 71 00 Second Floor Renovation FINISH HARDWARE Project No. 144401282 Page 7 of 9 3.6 HARDWARE SCHEDULE

.1 SCHEDULE .1 The door hardware schedule is furnished for whatever assistance it may afford

contractors. Examine drawings and specification, determine extent and hardware quality required. Should any particular door or item be omitted in any schedule hardware group, provide such a door or item with hardware same as required for similar purposes.

Hardware Set No. 01

RE-USE EXISTING HARDWARE

Hardware Set No. 02

3 EA HINGE 3CB1 114 X 102 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA OFFICE LOCK 28-7G05-LL 626 SAR 1 EA OH STOP 450S 630 GLY 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 RW/62A ST-2777 689 LCN 1 SET WEATHERSTRIP W-15 1/36" 2/84" 628 KNC 1 EA DOOR BOTTOM CT-51F 36" 627 KNC 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE

Hardware Set No. 03

1 EA CYLINDRICAL LOCK Alarm Lock Trilogy PDL 3000 626 BALANCE OF HARDWARE RE-USE EXISTING

Hardware Set No. 04

3 EA HINGE 3CB1 114 X 102 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA CYLINDRICAL LOCK Alarm Lock Trilogy PDL 3000 626 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 RW/PA TOP JAMB MOUNT 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 254MM X 40MM LDW 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406CVX 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE

Hardware Set No. 05

3 EA HINGE 3CB1 114 X 102 652 IVE 1 EA PASSAGE SET 28-7U15-LL 626 SAR 1 EA WALL STOP WS406CVX 630 IVE 1 EA COAT AND HAT HOOK 572 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE


Section 08 71 00 L.F. McIntosh Building FINISH HARDWARE Second Floor Renovation Page 8 of 9 Project No. 144401282 Hardware Set No. 06

8 EA HINGE 3CB1 114 X 102 652 IVE 2 EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT FB458 BOTTOM BOLT 626 IVE 1 EA CONST LATCHING BOLT FB51T 630 IVE 1 EA CYLINDRICAL LOCK Alarm Lock Trilogy PDL 3000 626 2 EA OH STOP 450S 630 GLY 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 DEL 689 LCN 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 254MM X 40MM LDW 630 IVE 1 SET WEATHERSTRIP W-21 BLK KNC 1 EA ASTRAGAL W-8P 96" 627 KNC

Hardware Set No. 07

3 EA HINGE 3CB1 114 X 102 652 IVE 1 EA OFFICE LOCK 28-7G05-LL 626 SAR 1 EA WALL STOP WS406CCV 630 IVE 1 EA COAT AND HAT HOOK 572 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE

Hardware Set No. 08

3 EA HINGE 3CB1 114 X 102 652 IVE 1 EA PASSAGE SET 28-7U15-LL 626 SAR 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 DEL 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 254MM X 40MM LDW 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406CVX 630 IVE 1 SET WEATHERSTRIP W-15 1/36" 2/84" 628 KNC 1 EA DOOR BOTTOM CT-51F 36" 627 KNC 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE

Hardware Set No. 09

3 EA HINGE 3CB1 114 X 102 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK 28-7G04-LL 626 SAR 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 254MM X 40MM LDW 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406CVX 630 IVE 1 SET WEATHERSTRIP W-21 BLK KNC 1 EA DOOR BOTTOM CT-51F 36" 627 KNC

Hardware Set No. 10

3 EA HINGE 3CB1 114 X 102 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK 28-7G04-LL 626 SAR 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 RW/PA

TOP JAMB MOUNT 689 LCN

1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 254MM X 40MM LDW 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406CVX 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 08 71 00 Second Floor Renovation FINISH HARDWARE Project No. 144401282 Page 9 of 9 Hardware Set No. 11

3 EA HINGE 3CB1 114 X 102 652 IVE 1 EA PASSAGE SET 28-7U15-LL 626 SAR 1 EA OH STOP 450S 630 GLY 1 SET WEATHERSTRIP W-21 BLK KNC 1 EA DOOR BOTTOM CT-51F 36" 627 KNC 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE

Hardware Set No. 12

3 EA HINGE 3CB1 114 X 102 652 IVE 1 EA PASSAGE SET 28-7U15-LL 626 SAR 1 EA WALL STOP WS406CVX 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE

END OF SECTION


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 08 80 50 Second Floor Renovation GLAZING Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 2

PART 1 General

1.1 SCOPE

.1 Work of this section consists of the supply and installation of all Glazing except for glazing of Premanufactured Wall System which shall remain the responsibility of Section 10 80 00 – Miscellaneous Specialties. .1 Refer to Door & Hardware Schedule on drawings and Finish Hardware in Section

08 71 00 – Finish Hardware.




.3 Section 10 80 00 - Miscellaneous Specialties

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Produce shop drawings, showing all pertinent sections including connection details with adjoining work, for approval, before fabrication.

1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

.1 Store packaged material in original, undamaged condition with manufacturer's labels and seals intact.

.2 Label each light of glass to indicate quality and thickness.

.3 Store material on level base, off ground and protected from weather.

PART 2 Materials

2.1 PRODUCTS

.1 Interior Glazing .1 Typical Interior Door:

.1 Shall be single sheet of 6 mm clear tempered glass unless otherwise scheduled.

.2 Provide single sheet of 6 mm thick Georgian wire plate glass to doors with fire resistance rating.

.2 Typical Interior Window/Lite .1 Shall be single sheet of 6 mm clear tempered glass unless otherwise

scheduled. .2 Provide single sheet of 6 mm thick Georgian wire plate glass to locations

with fire resistance ratings.

.3 Reception Glazing .1 Shall be clear tempered glass to profiles as detailed on drawings. Grind

all exposed glass edges. Stantec Architecture Ltd. June 27, 2014

Section 08 80 50 L.F. McIntosh Building GLAZING Second Floor Renovation Page 2 of 2 Project No. 144401282

.2 Opaque Graphic Film: .1 Shall be "CGI Architectural Graphic Film" as distributed by JCP Conservation

Systems Ltd., at toll free 1-800-805-8882 - Colour to be: CGI Sandblast Graphic Film. .1 Patterns of graphic film shall be as indicated on drawings.

.3 Sealants: .1 Refer to Section 07 92 10 – Joint Sealing for sealant type.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 GLAZING INSTALLATION

.1 Set glass in accordance with manufacturer's directions, properly centered with uniform bite and face edge clearance.

.2 Commence glazing only when surrounding air temperature is above 50C. Clean glass of excess glazing compounds as work proceeds.

.3 Use setting blocks and spacer strips to maintain minimum 3 mm (1/8") face clearance and 6 mm (1/4") edge clearance of glazing.

.4 Glazing shall be set according to manufacturer's directions and frame type used.

.5 Interior borrowed light set in metal specialty or wood frames to be set in glazing compound.

.6 NOTE: Some metal sections will require special glazing techniques using neoprene beads to suit frames.

3.2 GRAPHIC FILM INSTALLATION

.1 Installation of Graphic Films to glazing locations shall be by factory approved technicians in accordance with Product Manufacturer's written instructions for a first class installation.

END OF SECTION

February 21, 2014 Stantec Architecture Ltd.

L.F. McIntosh Building Section 09 21 16 Second Floor Renovation GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 9 PART 1 General 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry .2 Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping .3 Section 07 92 10 – Joint Sealing .4 Section 09 22 16 – Non-Structural Metal Framing .5 Section 09 31 00 - Tiling .6 Section 09 51 13 - Acoustic Panel Ceilings .7 Section 09 65 00 - Resilient Sheet Flooring .8 Section 09 90 00 - Painting

.9 Division 21 – Fire Supression .10 Division 22 – Plumbing .11 Division 23 – Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning .12 Division 26 - Electrical

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Aluminum Association .1 Designation for Aluminum Finishes, 1997.

.2 American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM) .1 ASTM C36/C36M-01, Specification for Gypsum Wallboard. .2 ASTM C79/C79M-01, Standard Specification for Treated Core and Non-treated

Core Gypsum Sheathing Board. .3 ASTM C442/C442M-01, Specification for Gypsum Backing Board, Gypsum

Coreboard, and Gypsum Shaftliner Board. .4 ASTM C475-01, Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing

Gypsum Board. .5 ASTM C630/C630M-01, Specification for Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing

Board. .6 ASTM C840-01, Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.

.7 ASTM C954-00, Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum

Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 in (0.84mm) to 0.112 in (2.84mm) in thickness.

.8 ASTM C960/C960M-01, Specification for Pre-decorated Gypsum Board.


Section 09 21 16 L.F. McIntosh Building GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Second Floor Renovation Page 2 of 9 Project No. 144401282

.9 ASTM C1278/C1278M-06 - Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Panel. .10 ASTM C1002-01, Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the

Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs.

.11 ASTM C1047-99, Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and

Gypsum Veneer Base. .12 ASTM C1280-99, Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing Board. .13 ASTM C1177-01, Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as

Sheathing. .14 ASTM C1178/C1178M-01, Specification for Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum

Backing Board. .3 Association of the Wall and Ceilings Industries International (AWEI) .4 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)

.1 CAN/CGSB-51.34-M86 (R1998), Vapour Barrier, Polyethylene Sheet for Use in Building Construction.

.2 CAN/CGSB-71.25-M88, Adhesive for Bonding Drywall to Wood Framing and

Metal Studs. .5 Underwriter’s Laboratories of Canada (ULC)

.1 Can/ULC-S102-1988 (R2000), Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies.


.1 Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 00 – Cleaning

and Waste Management. .2 Divert unused metal materials from landfill to designated metal recycling facility.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING .1 Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing manufacturers

brand name and identification. .2 Store materials inside, level, under cover. Keep dry. Protect from weather, other elements

and damage from construction operations and other causes. .3 Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends or surfaces. Protect metal

accessories and trim from being bent or damaged.

1.5 SITE ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS .1 Maintain temperature minimum 10 degrees Celsius, maximum 21 degrees C for 48 hours

prior to and during application of gypsum boards and joint treatment, and for at least 48 hours after completion of joint treatment.

.2 Apply board and joint treatment to dry, frost free surfaces.


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 09 21 16 Second Floor Renovation GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Project No. 144401282 Page 3 of 9

.3 Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to remove excess moisture that would prevent drying of joint treatment material immediately after its application.

PART 2 Products 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

.1 Canadian Gypsum Company (CGC). .2 Georgia-Pacific Canada, Inc. .3 CertainTeed BPB Canada

2.2 MATERIALS - GYPSUM BOARD

.1 Gypsum Board: To ASTM C36/C36M; standard and Type X ULC fire rating; as indicated, maximum permissible length and width; end square cut, taper edges; paper/paper faces. Thickness as indicated, but not less than 12.7 mm anywhere.

.2 Ceiling Board: To ASTM C36/C36M; sag resistant non-rated; maximum permissible

length and width; ends square cut, taper edges; paper/paper faces. Thickness 12.7 mm Acceptable materials: Georgia Pacific Gyproc CD, Westroc SR Board or CGC Sheetrock Interior Ceiling Board.

.3 Abuse Resistant Gypsum Board: To ASTM C1278, and CCMC 12370-R listing,

paperless, glass fibre-reinforced, impact resistant, maximum available length in place; tapered edges, ends square cut. Thickness 16 mm. Acceptable material: CGC Fiberock VHI Panels, or approved equal, submit substitute product data to the Consultant prior to close of bid with all supporting information.

.4 Water Resistant Gypsum Board for use on ceilings and wall in washrooms and

housekeeping areas: To ASTM C630; maximum permissible length and width; ends square cut; paper/paper water repellent face; ULC or UL rated. Thickness as indicated.

.5 Tile backer board: mold resistant exterior gypsum panels, thickness 12.7 mm.

Acceptable product: DensGlass Gold as manufactured by Georgia-Pacific BPB GlasRoc, or approved equal.

2.3 MATERIALS - METAL FRAMING AND FURRING

.1 Furring channels: To ASTM C645-83, 0.531 mm metal core thickness (0.20”)(25 gauge)

(minimum), galvanized sheet steel to ASTM A526 with Z275 designation zinc coating; 19 mm deep; hat shaped x 65 mm wide (minimum); knurled face; maximum lengths.

.2 Carrying channels: To ASTM C645-83, galvanized cold rolled steel to ASTM A526 with

Z275 designation zinc coating; 19 mm weighing not less than 446 kg per 1000 lineal metres and 38 mm weighing not less than 657.7 kg per 1000 lineal metres.

.3 Fastening devices: Screws to ASTM C1002 type S or other approved devices of type and

size to suit application and to rigidly secure furring, framing and boards in place; 3 mm clips for attaching furring to ceiling carrying channels.

.4 Fastening devices: Screws to ASTM C1002 type S or other approved devices of type and

size to suit application and to rigidly secure furring, framing and boards in place; 3 mm clips for attaching furring to ceiling carrying channels.



.5 Wall channel mouldings, exterior walls adjacent to radiant heat panels: channel or angle shape with 25 mm exposed face.

2.4 MATERIALS - ACCESSORIES

.1 Joint tape: To ASTM C475, perforated paper with tapered edges as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer, or glass fibre mesh tape.

.2 Joint compound: To ASTM C475, bedding and finishing types recommended by gypsum

board manufacturer; casein, vinyl or latex base. .3 Plaster coating: Commercial premixed, wear resistant, interior plaster finish and bonding

coat. Acceptable material: CGC Diamond Interior Finish Plaster System, substitutions shall submit product data to the Consultant prior to close of bid with all supporting information.

.4 Wall smoothing coating: sandable, high solid content, flat latex base coat designed to

minimize surface texture differences between gypsum board face paper and joint compound. Acceptable materials: Synko Synkaloid Pre-Coat.

.5 Corner and casing beads, edge trim: To ASTM 1047, Minimum 0.455 mm metal core

thickness (26 gauge) galvanized sheet steel with Z275 zinc finish to ASTM A525M-86, type with perforated flanges, of type to be finished with joint compound.

.6 Control / Expansion Joints: To ASTM C1047, Control joint #093, 3 m lengths, roll-formed

zinc with a tape protected 6 mm opening, 11 mm deep. .7 Adhesive: Type as recommended by gypsum board manufacturers.

.8 Tie Wire: To ASTM C645, 1.519 mm (16 gauge) annealed galvanized wire with Z275

zinc finish to ASTM A525M-86. .9 Hangers: To ASTM C645, 4 mm and 6 mm diameter steel rods; galvanized with Z275

zinc finish to ASTM A525M-86. .10 Batt and blanket glass fibre insulation: to CAN/ULC-S702-97, Type 1, EcoLogo certified

with minimum 50% recycled content formaldehyde free, thickness as indicated. As specified in Section 07 21 16 - Blanket Insulation.

.11 Reglets: Fry Reglet model DRM-50-25 .12 Sealant: (acoustic purposes only.) To CAN/CGSB-19.21, as recommended by gypsum

board manufacturer for specific end use. Sealant shall be non- skinning, non-hardening as specified in Section 07 92 10 – Joint Sealing.

.13 Sealant: (fire rated for rated walls): ULC labeled, as specified in Section 07 84 00 -

Firestopping. .14 Insulating strip: rubberized, moisture resistant 3 mm thick closed cell neoprene strip

92 mm wide with self sticking permanent adhesive on one face lengths as required. .15 F-Channel Shadow Joints: Provide 13mm F-channel shadow joints where concrete

columns abut gypsum board ceilings. Provide similar channels where gypsum board abuts concrete masonry or architectural concrete, and at miscellaneous locations where directed, up to 20 linear meters.


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 09 21 16 Second Floor Renovation GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Project No. 144401282 Page 5 of 9 2.5 CEILING / WALL ACCESS DOORS

.1 Supplied by Divisions 21, 22, 23 and 26, installed in this Section.

PART 3 Execution 3.1 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION

.1 All partitions must be reviewed by the Consultant prior to the installation of gypsum board. If gypsum board is installed prior to Consultant review, contractor may be directed to remove gypsum board and reinstall at his expense. Schedule review to coincide with regular site meeting.

.2 Inspect areas and surfaces and ensure all required metal backing for equipment is in place before commencing gypsum board application.

.3 Verify stud framing securely and rigidly erected, all services, lines, outlets and insulation. .4 Vacuum clean all debris from sill tracks prior to installation of wallboard. .5 Inspect all pressed steel frames and correct out-of-plumb frames for true alignment.

3.2 ERECTION

.1 Do application and finishing of gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C840 except where specified otherwise.

.2 Do application of gypsum sheathing in accordance with ASTM C1280. .3 Erect hangers and runner channels for suspended gypsum board ceilings in accordance

with ASTM C840 except where specified otherwise. .4 Support light fixtures by providing additional ceiling suspension hangers within 150 mm of

each corner and at maximum 600 mm around perimeter of fixture. .5 Install work level to tolerance of 1:1200. .6 Frame with furring channels, perimeter of openings for access panels, light fixtures,

diffusers, grilles and other ceiling mounted equipment. .7 Install 19 x 64 mm furring channels parallel to, and at exact locations of steel stud

partition header track. .8 Furr for gypsum board faced vertical bulkheads within and at termination of ceilings. .9 Furr above suspended ceilings for gypsum board fire and sound stops and to form

plenum areas as indicated. .10 Install wall furring for gypsum board wall finishes in accordance with ASTM C840, except

where specified otherwise. .11 Furr openings and around built-in equipment, cabinets, and access panels, on four sides.

Extend furring into reveals. Check clearances with equipment suppliers. .12 Furr duct shafts, beams, columns, pipes and exposed services where indicated.



.13 Erect drywall resilient furring transversely across studs between the layers of gypsum

board, spaced maximum 600 mm on centre and not more than 150 mm from ceiling/wall juncture. Secure to each support with 25 mm drywall screw.

.14 Install 150 mm continuous strip of 12.7 mm gypsum board along base of partitions where

resilient furring installed.

3.3 APPLICATION: INTERIOR

.1 Do not apply gypsum board until bucks, anchors, blocking, sound attenuation, electrical and mechanical work are approved.

.2 Apply single layer gypsum board to furring or framing using screw fasteners for first layer,

laminating adhesive or screw fasteners for second layer. Maximum spacing of screws 300 mm on centre. .1 Single-Layer Application: .1 Apply gypsum board on ceilings prior to application of walls in

accordance with ASTM C840. .2 Apply gypsum board vertically or horizontally, providing sheet lengths that

will minimize end joints. .2 Double-Layer Application: .1 Install gypsum board for base layer and exposed gypsum board for face

layer. .2 Apply base layer to ceilings prior to base layer application on walls; apply

face layers in same sequence. Offset joints between layers at least 250 mm.

.3 Apply base layers at right angles to supports unless otherwise indicated. .4 Apply base layer on walls and face layers vertically with joints of base

layer over supports and face layer joints offset at least 250 mm with base layer joints.

.3 Apply single layer gypsum board to [concrete block surfaces, where indicated, using

laminating adhesive. .1 Comply with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations. .2 Brace or fasten gypsum board until fastening adhesive has set. .3 Mechanically fasten gypsum board at top and bottom of each sheet.

.4 Apply 12 mm diameter bead of acoustic sealant continuously around periphery of each

face of partitioning to seal gypsum board/structure junction where partitions abut fixed building components. Seal full perimeter of cut-outs around electrical boxes, ducts, in partitions where perimeter sealed with acoustic sealant.

.5 Install ceiling boards in direction that will minimize number of end-butt joints. Stagger end

joints at least 250 mm.

.6 Install gypsum board on walls vertically to avoid end-butt joints. At stairwells and similar high walls, install boards horizontally with end joints staggered over studs, except where local codes or fire-rated assemblies require vertical application.

.7 Install gypsum board with face side out.

.8 Do not install damaged or damp boards.



.9 Locate edge or end joints over supports. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of wall.

.10 Kerf cut gypsum board at curved walls followed by plaster fill system to present smooth

even curve showing no facetting and blending smoothly into adjacent straight wall sections.

.11 Install ULC rated gypsum board at all locations indicated on drawings. Also install behind

and around fire hose cabinet recesses and other recessed items larger than a double-gang switch box to maintain wall fire rating.

.12 Install water resistant gypsum board to walls and ceilings in all washrooms (without

showers or bathtubs) and in housekeeping rooms. .13 Install cementitious board in lieu of gypsum board in all washrooms with showers and

bathtubs, and behind ceramic tile finish. Board to extend 600mm beyond shower on walls. Install cement board to entire ceiling. Install cementitious boards in accordance with manufacturers written instructions. Use non-corrosive fasteners, (drywall screws not permitted.)

.14 Attach gypsum board to vertical studs, not to ceiling track, to allow for deflection.

.15 Where metal reinforcement backing is required for partition, install sheet metal

continuously, butt joints, between metal 150mm around wall and ceiling corners without joints. Fasten with 2 screws per stud.

3.4 INSTALLATION

.1 Erect accessories straight, plumb or level, rigid and at proper plane. Use full length pieces

where practical. Make joints tight, accurately aligned and rigidly secured. Mitre and fit corners accurately, free from rough edges. Secure at 150 mm on centre.

.2 Install casing beads around perimeter of suspended ceilings. .3 Install casing beads where gypsum board butts against surfaces having no trim

concealing junction and where indicated. Seal joints with sealant. .4 Install insulating strips continuously at edges of gypsum board and casing beads abutting

metal window and exterior door frames, to provide thermal break. .5 Install reglets at gypsum board as indicated. Minimize joints; use corner pieces and

splicers. .6 Construct control joints of two back-to-back casing beads set in gypsum board facing and

supported independently on both sides of joint. .7 Provide continuous polyethylene dust barrier behind and across control joints. .8 Locate control joints where indicated, at changes in substrate construction and at

approximate 10 m spacing on long corridor runs. .9 Install control joints straight and true. .10 Construct expansion joints as detailed, at building expansion and construction joints.

Provide continuous dust barrier. .11 Install expansion joint straight and true.



.12 Install cornice cap where gypsum board partitions do not extend to ceiling. .13 Fit cornice cap over partition, secure to partition track with two rows of sheet metal screws

staggered at 300 mm on centre. .14 Splice corners and intersections together and secure to each member with 3 screws. .15 Install access doors to electrical and mechanical fixtures specified in respective sections.

.1 Rigidly secure frames to furring or framing systems. .16 Finish face panel joints and internal angles with joint system consisting of joint compound,

joint tape and taping compound installed according to manufacturer's directions and feathered out onto panel faces.

.17 Gypsum Board Finish: finish gypsum board walls and ceilings to following levels in

accordance with Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries (AWCI) International Recommended Specification on Levels of Gypsum Board Finish: .1 Levels of finish:

.1 Level 0: No tapping, finishing or accessories required.

.2 Level 1: Embed tape for joints and interior angles in joint compound. Surfaces to be free of excess joint compound; tool marks and ridges are acceptable.

.3 Level 2: Embed tape for joints and interior angles in joint compound and apply one separate coat of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads and accessories; surfaces free of excess joint compound; tool marks and ridges are acceptable.

.4 Level 3: Embed tape for joints and interior angles in joint compound and apply two separate coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads and accessories; surfaces smooth and free of tool marks and ridges.

.5 Level 4: Embed tape for joints and interior angles in joint compound and apply three separate coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads and accessories; surfaces smooth and free of tool marks and ridges.

.6 Level 5: Embed tape for joints and interior angles in joint compound and apply three separate coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads and accessories; apply a thin skim coat of joint compound to entire surface; surfaces smooth and free of tool marks and ridges.

.18 Finish corner beads, control joints and trim as required with two coats of joint compound and one coat of taping compound, feathered out onto panel faces.

.19 Fill screw head depressions with joint and taping compounds to bring flush with adjacent

surface of gypsum board so as to be invisible after surface finish is completed. .20 Sand lightly to remove burred edges and other imperfections. Avoid sanding adjacent

surface of board. .21 Completed installation to be smooth, level or plumb, free from waves and other defects

and ready for surface finish. .22 Apply one coat of white primer sealer over surface to be textured. When dry apply

textured finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. .23 Mix joint compound slightly thinner than for joint taping. .24 Apply thin coat to entire surface using trowel or drywall broadknife to fill surface texture

differences, variations or tool marks.



.25 Allow skim coat to dry completely. .26 Remove ridges by light sanding or wiping with damp cloth. .27 Provide protection that ensures gypsum drywall work will remain without damage or

deterioration at time of substantial completion. 3.5 SEALANT - SOUND RATINGS

.1 Caulk sound rated partitions strictly in accordance with gypsum board manufacturer's instructions for the specific sound rating requirements. Locate sealant to ensure it is covered at completion of partition when finishes applied. Seal top and bottom tracks, and seal studs where they abut adjacent wall construction to ensure that no sound flanking occurs.

.2 Seal around mechanical and electrical work and other work in walls to ensure proper

sound ratings. Provide gaskets where partitions abut a finished surface or material as per details and where partitions meet exterior wall furring.

.3 Build in all door and borrowed light frames and equipment to best practice to provide a

neat, cleanly finished system. .4 In fire rated partitions install fire-stopping sealant before installing acoustic sealant.

3.6 SEALANT - FIRE RATINGS

.1 Coordinate requirements for fire sealants with General Contractor.

.2 Caulking and sealing of fire and smoke rated partitions and separations specified under Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping.

3.7 ACCESS DOORS

.1 Install flush mounted, recessed cover access doors in locations required. Insert gypsum board into recessed frame. Adhere with mastic. Insert plastic grommets in line with latches.

.2 Install all access doors provided by other trades. Exact locations of these doors will be

verified on site. 3.8 CLEANING

.1 All gypsum board debris and dust shall be cleaned up and disposed of daily.

.2 Cleaning shall consist of brushing down wall and ceiling and sweeping floors daily.

.3 As areas are completed, thoroughly vacuum ceilings, walls and floors of all dust. .4 All gypsum board that has been in contact with moisture shall be removed and replaced.

END OF SECTION


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 09 22 16 Second Floor Renovation NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 3

PART 1 General






1.2 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM C 645-99, Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members.

.2 ASTM C 754-98a, Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products.

.3 CAN/CGSB-1.40-97, Primer, Structural Steel, Oil Alkyd Type.

.4 CAN/CGSB-19.21-M87, Sealing and Bedding Compound Acoustical.

.5 ECP-50-93, Gypsum Wallboard.



1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 Store materials flat, blocked off the ground in a manner to prevent kinking or permanent set.

PART 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS: TYPICAL INTERIOR PARTITIONS

.1 Interior stud framing: To ASTM C645, 0.457 mm (18 mils) metal core thickness galvanized steel, unless otherwise noted, roll-formed with knurled flanges, service and bracing cut-outs; spacing at 406 mm on centre.

.2 Interior floor/ceiling tracks: To ASTM C645-88, metal core thickness to match stud and widths to suit stud size, 33 mm flanges for floor track. Ceiling top tracks to u/s of structure shall be single track system, with 50 mm flanges.

.3 Channel stiffener: 19 mm cold-rolled channel of 2.464 mm (97 mils) metal core thickness steel with rust-resistive coating.

.4 Fasteners: To ASTM C1002, steel, self-drilling, self-threading case hardened shallow Phillips type heads with integral washer, 25 mm minimum length.


Section 09 22 16 L.F. McIntosh Building NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Second Floor Renovation Page 2 of 3 Project No. 144401282 2.2 ACCESSORIES

.1 Acoustical sealant: Non-hardening, non-skinning type as specified in Section 07 92 10 – Joint Sealing.

.2 Metal backing: Galvanized steel sheet minimum thickness 1.092 mm metal core thickness x 406 mm wide or as indicated on drawings. Refer to partition types.

.3 Insulating strip: rubberized, moisture resistant 3 mm thick foam strip, 12 mm wide self-sticking adhesive on one face, lengths as required.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 INSPECTION/PREPARATION

.1 Ensure all door and window frames placed and securely braced in proper location.

3.2 ERECTION: LIGHT GAUGE STUDS

.1 Align partition tracks at floor and underside of deck above, and secure. Maximum fastening spacing 610 mm on centre.

.2 Place interior studs vertically at not over 406 mm on centre and not more than 50 mm from abutting walls, and at each side of openings and corners. Position studs in tracks at floor and ceiling.

.3 Cross-brace and splice steel studs as required to provide rigid installation. Provide two rows equally spaced in all partitions.

.4 Erect metal studding to tolerance of 3 mm in 3 m non-cumulative.

.5 Attach studs to ceiling track using sheet metal screws.

.6 Co-ordinate simultaneous erection of studs with installation of service lines. When erecting studs ensure web openings are aligned.

.7 Co-ordinate erection of studs with installation of door / window frames and special supports or anchors for Work specified in other Sections.

.8 Provide two studs extending from floor to ceiling at each side of openings wider than stud centers specified. Secure studs together, 50 mm apart using column clips or other approved means of fastening placed alongside frame anchor clips. Provide additional studs as required by the Building Code.

.9 Erect track at head of door openings and sills of sidelight/window openings to accommodate intermediate studs. Secure track to studs at each end, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install intermediate studs above and below openings in same manner and spacing as wall studs.

.10 Provide 92 mm stud or furring channel secured between studs for attachment of fixtures behind lavatory basins, and washroom accessories, and other fixtures including grab bars and towel rails, handrails and kickrails, attached to steel stud partitions. Provide reinforcing for wall mounted door stops.

.11 Build-in continuous metal reinforcing detailed to receive cabinet work and equipment.


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 09 22 16 Second Floor Renovation NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Project No. 144401282 Page 3 of 3

.12 Install steel studs or furring channel between studs for attaching electrical and other boxes.

.13 Extend studding to underside of floor/roof deck over except where noted otherwise on drawings.

.14 Maintain 30 mm minimum deflection clearance under beams, structural slabs, interstitial decking to avoid transmission of structural loads to studs. Top track shall be a single track system to suit vertical deflection of 30 mm with 60 mm legs minimum.

.15 All horizontal joints in fire rated partitions shall have solid blocking in accordance with the Building Code.

.16 Install continuous insulating strips to isolate studs from uninsulated surfaces.

.17 Install two continuous beads of acoustical sealant behind studs and under studs around perimeter of sound control partitions and isolation partitions and other interior insulated partitions.

.18 Install one continuous bead of acoustic sealant under stud track to all partitions, except where sheet flooring is integrally coved on both sides of the partition and as noted in 3.2.17 above.

3.3 FIXTURE ATTACHMENT AND ACCESS PANELS

.1 Install all attachments within steel-stud partitions for fixtures being hung from or anchored to such partitions. Walls to receive cabinetwork, specialties and accessories reinforcing shall be reinforced as required to accept attachments and as indicated on drawings.

.2 Install access doors to electrical or mechanical fixtures supplied under respective Sections.

.3 Rigidly secure frames to furring or framing systems.

.4 Reinforce walls behind all doors for coat hook attachment.

3.4 DOUBLE-SERVICE WALLS

.1 Provide double-service walls for plumbing stacks, pipe spaces, ducts and at other locations as indicated on the drawings.

.2 Provide cross-ties between studs with stud or 13 mm thick gypsum wallboard, at least 200 mm in depth, minimum 3 ties, spaced not over 1220 mm on centre.

END OF SECTION


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 09 22 27 Second Floor Renovation ACOUSTICAL SUSPENSION Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 2 PART 1 General 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies. .2 Section 09 51 13 - Acoustical Panel Ceilings. .3 Division 15 - Mechanical. .4 Division 16 - Electrical. 1.2 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM C635-00, Specifications for the Manufacture, Performance and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings.

.2 ASTM C636-96, Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for

Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels. 1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

.1 Maximum deflection: 1/360th of span to ASTM C635 deflection test. 1.4 SAMPLES

.1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. .2 Submit one representative model of each type ceiling suspension system. .3 Ceiling system to show basic construction and assembly, treatment at walls, recessed

fixtures, splicing, interlocking, finishes, acoustical unit installation. PART 2 Product 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Suspension System at Ceiling Types ACT1 and ACT2 (Contractor Supplied & Installed): .1 Provide new suspension system to support ceiling assembly shown on drawings,

with maximum deflection of 1/360 of span. Ceiling pattern as shown on drawings. .1 Suspended ceiling system: Typically CGC-Donn DX Exposed Grid System as manufactured by CGC Inc., or approved equal with components formed from commercial quality cold-rolled steel, zinc coated. Exposed finish to be low sheen satin white. .2 Provide main tees, cross tees, wall mouldings and #12 galvanized wire hangers. .3 Provide hold down clips to all acoustic ceiling tiles within a 5 metre distance of an exterior door. .4 Provide #US edge trim complete with slotted holes to ceiling grid at/adjacent radiant heat panels. (See Mechanical Drawings for locations). Stantec Architecture Ltd. June 27, 2014

Section 09 22 27 L.F. McIntosh Building ACOUSTICAL SUSPENSION Second Floor Renovation Page 2 of 2 Project No. 144401282 PART 3 Execution 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Install material using crew experienced in this type of installation. Align suspension

members carefully, mitre cuts and joints neatly. .2 Install ceiling grid system at height indicated on Room Finish Schedule and drawings

continuously through room spaces. Consult mechanical subcontractor to ensure proper elevations for concealing ductwork.

.3 Suspend main beams at 1220 mm centres on #12 galvanized wire. Obtain permission

from Consultant before any hangers are fastened to mechanical system. .4 Install acoustical panels and tiles and clips in ceiling suspension system. NOTE: Do not install acoustical panels and tiles until work above ceiling has been

inspected by Consultant. .5 Set all tile butting to walls and columns in continuous wall angle. 3.2 CLEANING .1 Touch up scratches, abrasions, voids, and other defects in painted surfaces.

END OF SECTION


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 09 31 00 Second Floor Renovation TILING Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 4

PART 1 General






.1 Tile shall meet or exceed the requirements of CAN2-75.1-M88. All tile shall be Grade 1, any tile not Grade 1 will be rejected. Remove from site and replace with acceptable materials.

.2 Install tile in accordance with Installation Manual 300, Specification Guide 09300/2002, produced by Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association of Canada (TTMAC), except where specified otherwise.

.3 Work of this section shall be undertaken by a company who is a member in good standing of the Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association of Canada.

1.3 PRODUCT DATA

.1 Submit manufacturer's product data for each type of product specified. Data shall indicate compliance with specification and recommendations of manufacturer of products being used.

1.4 SAMPLES

.1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittals Procedures.

.2 Submit samples of specified material for approval. Ensure that approved products are available at time of installation.

1.5 HANDLING AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS

.1 Deliver packaged materials in original unopened containers.

.2 Keep delivered material dry and free from stains. Store cementitious material off damp surfaces.

1.6 JOB ENVIRONMENT

.1 Maintain minimum 13°C air temperature at tile installation area for 24 hours prior to, during and after installation.

.2 Ensure adequate ventilation where work of this Section generates toxic gases.


.1 Provide instructions for maintenance as recommended by product manufacturers.


Section 09 31 0 L.F. McIntosh Building TILING Second Floor Renovation Page 2 of 4 Project No. 144401282

.2 Provide minimum 1 - 4 litre container of cleaning products specified for maintenance cleaning of installed materials. Store as directed by Construction Manager.

.3 Provide copies of the current TTMAC Maintenance Guide.



.2 Separate metal, plastic, wood and corrugated cardboard-packaging in accordance with the Waste Management Plan and place in designated areas for recycling.

.3 Fold up metal banding, flatten, and place in designated area for recycling.

PART 2 Products

2.1 TILE MATERIALS

.1 Refer to Construction Document drawings A801 Room Finish Schedule.

2.2 MORTAR MATERIALS

.1 Thin-set Mortar: Interior thin-set floor system meeting the requirements of ANSIA118.1. .1 Acceptable Products

.1 Multi-Bond 9918 as manufactured by Chembond.

.2 Premium Plus Thin-Set Mortar as manufactured by Custom Building Products.

.3 Flextile 52 Versatile P.M. Thin Set Mortar as manufactured by Flextile Ltd.

.4 Drybond 272 as manufactured by Laticrete International Inc.

.5 KERABOND as manufactured by MAPEI Inc.

2.3 GROUT MATERIALS

.1 Latex-Portland Cement Grout: Factory blended stain resistant latex modifiers. Portland cement and graded silica sand to ANSIA118.6 dry set grout and A118.4 grout additive. .1 Acceptable Products

.1 Polyblend Unsanded Grout, Polyblend Sanded Grout as manufactured by Custom Building Products.

.2 Flextile 500 Unsanded or 600 Sanded Polymer Modified Sanded Floor Grout as manufactured by Flextile Ltd.

.3 Laticrete 500 or 600 Series Dryset Grout as manufactured by Laticrete International Inc.

.4 KER 200 Sanded Polymer-modified Portland Cement Grout as manufactured by MAPEI INC.

.5 Colour: refer to Section 09 99 90 – Interior Finishes List.

.2 Water: Clean fresh and free of deleterious substances.

.3 Mix and proportion mortar and grout materials in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

.1 Mix in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 09 31 00 Second Floor Renovation TILING Project No. 144401282 Page 3 of 4 2.5 ACCESSORIES

.1 Cementitious board for use as backer for tile: lightweight polymer-modified cement board reinforced with an alkali-resistant fiber mesh. Thickness: 12 mm. .1 Acceptable products: National Gypsum PermaBase Flex brand cement board.

.2 Self-leveling Concrete underlayment.

.3 Patching Compound: Acrylic modified Portland cement.

.4 Sealant: as recommended by manufacturer.

.5 Trims: extruded stainless steel in the following shapes and profiles: .1 Edge strip (straight): stainless steel extruded profile. Acceptable product: Schluter

SCHIENE - E. .2 Edge strip (straight): stainless steel extruded profile – for wall applications.

Acceptable product: Schluter JOLLY. .3 Edge strip (curved): stainless steel extruded profile with perforations to allow

curving. Acceptable product: Schluter SCHIENE – RE.

2.6 CLEANING MATERIALS

.1 Job Site Cleaner: phosphoric acid/nitric acid based cleaning solution mixed in accordance with cleaner manufacturers recommendations.

.2 Maintenance Cleaner: non-toxic, electrolytic, biodegradable, non-ammonia containing, pH controlled cleaning solution mixed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 WORKMANSHIP

.1 Perform all work in accordance with requirements of TTMAC Tile Installation Manual Specification Guide 09300/2012/2014 and manufacturer’s recommendations.

.2 Install mortar and tile in accordance with ANSI A108.5-1999 and install grout in accordance with ANSI A108.6-1999 and A108.10-1999.

.3 Apply tile or backing coats to non-frozen frost free surfaces.

.4 Fit tile units around corners, fitments, fixtures, drains and other built-in objects to maintain uniform joint appearance. Make cut edges smooth, even and free from chipping. Edges resulting from splitting not acceptable.

.5 Make joints between tiles uniform and approximately 1.5 mm (1/16”), plumb, straight, true, even and with adjacent tile flush. Ensure sheet layout not visible after installation.

.6 Align patterns.

.7 Lay out tiles so that perimeter tiles are minimum 1/2 size.

.8 Sound tiles after setting and replace hollow sounding units to obtain full bond.

.9 Clean installed tile surfaces after installation cured.

.10 Maintain building control and expansion joints. Keep free of mortar or grout. Install in accordance with TTMAC detail 301EJ-97 for interior tile applications.


Section 09 31 0 L.F. McIntosh Building TILING Second Floor Renovation Page 4 of 4 Project No. 144401282

.11 Make internal angles square, external angles bullnosed square. Use bullnose edged tiles to achieve bullnose effect. Use finished edge tiles for square external angles, or Schluter edge trim if finished profile is not available.

.12 Use bullnose edged or trim tiles at termination of tile panels except where panel butts a projecting surface or differing plane.

3.2 PREPARATION - FLOORING

.1 Ensure floor surfaces are smooth and flat to plus or minus 3 mm over 3 m.

.2 Ensure concrete floors have maximum 2.5% moisture content, exhibit normal alkalinity and no carbonization or dusting.

.3 Lightly shot blast or grind floor to remove remnants of setting materials, in accordance with Section 02 41 19.

.4 Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes and other defects with sub-floor filler. Use self-leveling floor underlayment to provide a smooth and level surface.

.5 Trowel and float sub-floor filler to leave smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler cured.

.6 Clean filled substrate for application of adhesive.

3.3 INSTALLATION - FLOORING

.1 Install tile on concrete floor substrates to TTMAC detail 311F-2002.

3.4 INSTALLATION - WALLS

.1 Install tile on concrete concrete and masonry walls to TTMAC details 303W-2002.

.2 Install tile on gypsum cementitious board to TTMAC details 305W-2002.

3.5 INSTALLATION - SHOWERS

.1 Install tile on substrate to TTMAC details.

3.6 CLEANING

.1 Clean in accordance with TTMAC 2012-2014 Maintenance Guide.

.2 Use job site cleaning solution to remove cementitious grout film as work progresses and prior to final cleaning.

.3 Use maintenance cleaning solution for final cleaning immediately prior to Final Inspection.

.4 Train Owner’s maintenance personnel in cleaning and maintenance methods of installed tile system and requirements of TTMAC Maintenance Guide.

END OF SECTION


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 09 51 13 Second Floor Renovation ACOUSTIC PANEL CEILINGS Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 2 PART 1 General 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 09 22 27 - Acoustical Suspension .2 Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies. 1.2 REFERENCES .1 ASTM E1264-98, Classification of Acoustic Ceiling Products. .2 CAN/CGSB-51.34-M86, Vapour Barrier, Polyethylene Sheet, for Use in Building

Construction. .3 CAN/CGSB-92.1-M89, Sound Absorptive Prefabricated Acoustical Units. .4 CSA B111-74 (R2000), Wire Nails, Spikes and Staples. .5 CAN/ULC-S102-M88 (R2000), Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.3 SAMPLES .1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. .2 Submit duplicate full size samples of each type acoustical units. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS .1 Fire-resistance rated floor/ceiling and roof/ceiling assembly: certified by a Canadian

Certification Organization accredited by Standards Council of Canada. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS .1 Permit wet work to dry before commencement of installation. .2 Maintain uniform minimum temperature of 15°C and humidity of 20 - 40% before and

during installation. .3 Store materials in work area 48 hours prior to installation. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS .1 Provide extra materials of acoustic units in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout

Submittals. .2 Provide acoustical units amounting to 2% of area for each pattern and type required for

project. .3 Extra materials to be from same production run as installed materials. .4 Clearly identify each type of acoustic unit, including colour and texture. .5 Deliver to Owner, upon completion of the work of this section. .6 Store where directed by Owner. Stantec Architecture Ltd. June 27, 2014

L.F. McIntosh Building Second Floor Renovation

Section 09 51 13 ACOUSTIC CEILINGS PANELS Page 2 of 2 Project No. 144401282

PART 2 Product

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Acoustic Tile units for suspended ceiling system - "Coded ACT1": .1 Material: shall be USG “F” Fissured Panels (#135). .2 Colour: White. .3 Size: 610 x 1220 x 19 mm - Class 'A' .4 Locations: See drawings & Room Finish Schedule.

.2 Acoustic Tile units for suspended ceiling system - "Coded ACT2”: .1 Material: shall be CGC -"Eclipse ClimaPlus - Panels # 76575. .2 Colour: White. .3 Size: 610 x 610 x 19 mm Class 'A' tile. .4 Locations: See drawings & Room Finish Schedule.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Do not install acoustical panels and tiles until work above ceiling has been inspected by Consultant.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Install acoustical panels and tiles in ceiling suspension system.

.2 Refer to Section 09 22 27 - Acoustical Suspension.

3.3 APPLICATION

.1 Install adhesive bonded stapled screwed nailed acoustic units to clean, dry and firm substrate.

.2 Refer to reflected ceiling plan.

.3 Scribe acoustic units to fit adjacent work. Butt joints tight terminate edges with moulding.

3.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER WORK

.1 Co-ordinate ceiling work to accommodate components of other sections, such as light fixtures, diffusers, speakers, sprinkler heads, to be built into acoustical ceiling components.

END OF SECTION


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 09 65 00 Second Floor Renovation RESILIENT FLOORING Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 8


PART 1 General


.1 Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications .2 Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry .3 Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants .4 Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies .5 Section 09 51 13 - Acoustic Panel Ceilings

1.2 SUMMARY

1. General Requirements: Conform with requirements of all Sections of Division 01, General Requirements, as it applies to the work of this Section.

2. Section Includes: Flooring and accessories as shown on the drawings and schedules and as indicated by the requirements of this section.

1.3 REFERENCES

1. Armstrong Technical Manuals a. Armstrong Guaranteed Installation Systems manual, F-5061

2. ASTM International:

a. ASTM E 648 Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source

b. ASTM E 662 Standard Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials

c. ASTM F 710 Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring

d. ASTM F 1482, Standard Guide to Wood Underlayment Products Available for Use Under Resilient Flooring

e. ASTM F 1861 Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base f. ASTM F 1869 Standard Test Method for Measuring Vapor Emission Rate of

Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride g. ASTM F 2034 Standard Specification for Sheet Linoleum Floor Covering h. ASTM F 2170 Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete

Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes

3. National Fire Protection Association: a. NFPA 253 Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering

Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source b. NFPA 258 Standard Test Method for Measuring the Smoke Generated by Solid

Materials

4. Canadian Standards: a. CAN/ULC-S102.2 Surface Burning Characteristics of Flooring, Floor Covering and

Miscellaneous Materials and Assemblies

5. Sustainability Standards:

Section 09 65 00 L.F. McIntosh Building RESILIENT FLOORING Second Floor Renovation Page 2 of 8 Project No. 144401282


a. ASTM E1347 - 06(2011) Standard Test Method for Color and Color-Difference Measurement by Tristimulus Colorimetry

b. ASTM D5116 - 10 Standard Guide for Small-Scale Environmental Chamber Determinations of Organic Emissions From Indoor Materials/Products and California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method V1.1-2010

c. ASTM D6866 - 12 Standard Test Methods for Determining the Biobased Content of Solid, Liquid, and Gaseous Samples Using Radiocarbon Analysis.

d. ISO 14001 Environmental management systems -- Requirements with guidance for use

e. ISO 14021 Environmental labels and declarations?Self-declared environmental claims (Type II environmental labeling)

f. ISO 14024 Environmental labels and declarations -- Type I environmental labeling -- Principles and procedures

g. ISO 14025 Environmental labels and declarations -- Type III environmental declarations -- Principles and procedures

h. NSF/ANSI 332: Sustainability Assessment for Resilient Floor Coverings

1.4 SITE SUPERVISION

.1 Site supervision for work of this section shall be full time. Supervisor shall be directly employed by the installer and shall have the authority to receive, represent and make decisions on behalf of the Trade Contractor.


.1 Qualifications: Perform work of this Section only by a Subcontractor of recognized standing who has adequate plant, equipment, and skilled workers to perform it expeditiously, and is known to have been responsible for satisfactory installations similar to that specified during a period of at least the immediate past five years. Subcontractor shall be trained and certified by material manufacturer.

.2 Testing: On site moisture vapour emission rate (MVER) or relative humidity testing to be performed by independent testing companies experienced with the specified testing procedures with the knowledge and practical experience to understand the limits of each test method as applicable to the particular project site conditions. Perform tests to comply with recommendations of particular adhesive manufacturer accepted for the work. Submit test results to the Contractor and Consultant for review prior to any flooring application.

3. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide resilient vinyl sheet flooring with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing material in accordance with ASTM test methods indicated below by a certified testing laboratory or other testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: .1 ASTM E 648 Critical Radiant Flux of 0.45 watts per sq.m. or greater, Class 1 .2 ASTM E 662 (Smoke Generation) Maximum Specific Optical Density of 450 or less

4. Mock-up: Install at the project site a mock-up using acceptable products and manufacturer approved installation methods, including concrete substrate testing. Complete finish sheet flooring in a Clinic Room (Contractor’s choice), exhibiting finished seams, for review by Consultant . Accepted mock-up shall be the minimum acceptable standard for the work. Mock-up may be incorporated into the final construction with Owner’s and Consultant’s approval.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

1. Submit shop drawings, seaming plan, and manufacturer’s technical data, installation and maintenance instructions (latest edition) for flooring and accessories.



2. Submit the manufacturer’s standard samples showing the required colours for flooring, welding rods, and applicable accessories.


.1 Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays.

.2 Deliver materials in good condition to the jobsite in the manufacturer’s original unopened containers that bear the name of the manufacturer, project identification, and shipping and handling instructions.

.3 Store materials in a clean, dry, enclosed space off the ground, protected from harmful weather conditions and temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer. Protect adhesives from freezing. Store flooring, adhesives and accessories in the spaces where they will be installed for at least 48 hours before beginning installation.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

.1 Ensure that adequate ventilation and spark-proof electrical equipment are provided, and smoking is prohibited. Store materials to prevent spontaneous combustion.

.2 Environmental Requirements:

.1 Except where more stringent requirements are specified by manufacturer, install resilient flooring only when surfaces and air temperatures have been maintained between 18

oC and 32

oC for 48 hours preceding installation, and will be so

maintained during installation and for 48 hours thereafter. Maintain a minimum temperature of 13

oC after above period.

.2 Protect all materials from the direct flow of heat from hot-air registers, radiators, or other heating fixtures and appliances.

.3 Provide ventilation during installation of flooring and curing of adhesive

1.9 WARRANTY

.1 Warrant work of this Section against defects and deficiencies in accordance with General Conditions of the Contract as amended by Supplementary Conditions for a period of 5 years for materials, and 5 years for installation. Promptly correct defects and deficiencies which become apparent within warranty period, including making good any work damaged by this work, satisfactory to Consultant and at no expense to Owner.

2. Armstrong Product is only valid if installed using the specific instructions from the Guaranteed Installation System warranty. If alternative product is used ensure installation is specific for that product ensuring warranty is valid.

1.10 MAINTENANCE

.1 Extra Materials: Deliver to Owner on completion of work, and as he directs, 2% of the quantity of flooring installed, of each material and colour, in labelled packages, with protective covering for storage. Furnish extra materials from same production run as products installed.



.2 Maintenance Instructions: Submit maintenance instructions for incorporation into Maintenance Manual.

PART 2 Product

2.1 MANUFACTURER

.1 Resilient sheet flooring, adhesives and accessories:

.1 Armstrong World Industries, Inc. http://www.armstrong.com/commflooringna/

.2 Or approved equal

.2 Provide each flooring material from same production run for one area, and from same manufacturer for entire Project.

2.2 FLOORING MATERIALS

.1 Product: Marmorette Linoleum Sheet Flooring, Armstrong Industries or approved alternative. .1 Description: The product shall consist of a polyurethane-coated homogeneous

mixture of linoleum cement (linseed oil, natural tree resins, drying oil catalysts), wood flour, limestone, colour pigments mixed and calendered onto a jute fabric backing. Colours and pattern detail shall be dispersed throughout the thickness of the wear layer.

.2 Linoleum sheet shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F 2034, Type I, ‘Standard Specification for Sheet Linoleum Floor Covering Without Backing’.

.3 Pattern and Colour: Refer to Construction Document drawings including A801 Room Finish Schedule.

.4 Width: 2.0m (6’-7”)

.5 Length: up to 30m (98.4’)

.6 Thickness: 2.5mm (0.100)

.2 Weld Rod: Linoleum Weld Rod: Provide solid colour linoleum weld rod and intended for heat welding of seams. Weld rod to be produced by same manufacturer as flooring. Colour shall be compatible with field colour of flooring. Provide sample for Consultant’s approval.

2.3 WALL BASE MATERIAL

.1 Product: Johnsonite or approved alternative Resilient Base.

.1 In accordance with ASTM F1861-08, rubber top set, fire rated with maximum flame spread of 150, flat, high grooved back.

.2 Size and colour as detailed and specified in Construction Document drawings and specification on drawings.

.2 Integral flash cove base not used in this project.

http://www.armstrong.com/commflooringna/



2.4 Underlayment:

.1 To smooth substrate: As recommended by manufacturer. Select product to suit thickness of levelling that is required. Provide slope to drain where indicated and where there is a drain in the room.

2.5 PRIMERS AND ADHESIVE

.1 Field Areas: Low VOC, high solids, waterproof type as recommended by manufacturer of each flooring material for each subfloor condition, except epoxy adhesive shall be used for floor area where plumbing fixtures or floor drains are installed in vestibules and floor area adjacent to an exit. Unless otherwise recommended by material manufacturer, use epoxy adhesive continuously at all seams for sheet applied flooring to a minimum of 150mm on both sides of seam and at terminations of material.


.1 Cleaner: Neutral chemical compound that will not damage tile of affect its colour.

.2 Sealant: As recommended by manufacturer.

.3 Floor Polish: As recommended by manufacturer.

2.7 ACCESSORIES

.1 Transition strip between carpet and linoleum; Johnsonite CTA-XX-H, adhesive applied, colour to be selected by Consultant.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 GENERAL

.1 Comply with manufacturer’s product data, including technical bulletins, product catalogue, installation instructions, and product carton instructions for installation and maintenance procedures as needed.

3.2 EXAMINATION

.1 Ensure that environmental conditions have been provided as requested and specified.

.2 Ensure that control joints have been filled and levelled. Examine all subfloors prior to installation to determine that surfaces are smooth and free from cracks, holes, ridges, and other defects (including residual adhesives or adhesive removers) that might prevent adhesive bond or impair durability or appearance of the flooring material.

.3 Defective work resulting from application and unsatisfactory surfaces shall be removed and reinstalled.

.4 Report conditions contrary to contract requirements that would prevent a proper installation. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Failure to call attention to defects or imperfections will be construed as acceptance and approval of the subfloor. Installation indicates acceptance of substrates with regard to conditions existing at the time of installation.



3.3 PREPARATION

.1 Remove dirt, soil, oil, grease, resins, concrete curing agents, and other deposits which would lessen the adhesive bond of flooring or affect the rate of moisture dissipation from the concrete, and which would telegraph through flooring. Use non-chemical methods for removal, such as abrasive cleaning or bead blasting. Avoid procedures that may cause dust to become air borne. Prepare substrates in accordance with ASTM F710. Also follow finish flooring manufacturers’ floor preparation instructions.

.2 Test substrate in accordance with ASTM F1869 (anhydrous calcium chloride) or ASTM F2170 (in situ probes) or ASTM F2420 (insulated hood) to ensure that moisture level and with ASTM F710 for acid-alkali balance; does not exceed limits recommended by flooring underlayment manufacturer, adhesive manufacturer and flooring manufacturer. Submit completed test documentation to Contractor and Consultant for review prior to beginning flooring installation.

.3 Perform pH tests on concrete floors regardless of their age or grade level. All test results shall be documented and retained.

.3 Grind down and sand irregularities in subfloor. Scour substrate with wire brushes. Fill cracks and depressions with filler and level to smooth surface.

.4 Fill minor defects such as cracks, depressions, and scars from damage with filler, and level to smooth surface. Vaccuum clean floor before spreading adhesive.

.5 Build-up floor with filler at all other floor finish surfaces edge, so that resilient flooring is flush with all other flooring.

.6 Prime subfloors in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations.

3.4 INSTALLATION

.1 General:

.1 Lay each material in accordance with manufacturer’s recommended installation and specification data as applicable.

.2 Lay flooring to provide a minimum number of seams. Avoid cross seams, filler pieces, and strips. Match edges for colour shading and pattern at the seams in compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

.3 Work from centre areas to perimeter.

.4 Lay flooring with joints closely butted. Scribe, cut, and fit around floor outlets and openings, door frames, and heavy equipment supports.

.5 Cut flooring and bases to fit within 0.40mm of abutting surfaces where exposed to view.

.6 Avoid abrupt variations in shades between adjacent flooring material. Do not install units that are off-colour or contain untypical pattern variations.

.7 Carry floor patterns through openings.

.8 Carry flooring materials continuous to walls beneath millwork, casework, and gables unless indicated with flash cove at face of millwork or case goods. Do not notch flooring materials around millwork cabinets unless indicated or otherwise accepted by Consultant.

.9 Maintain rollers clean and polished.

.2 Adhesive Application:



.1 Ensure that all safety requirements are imposed during work as recommended by adhesive manufacturer and as otherwise required.

.2 Apply adhesive uniformly over surfaces with a notched trowel, at rate recommended by manufacturer.

.3 Cover only an area into which flooring can be set during working time of adhesive. Do not lay flooring over hardened adhesive.

.4 Use only epoxy type adhesive in all areas where plumbing fixtures or floor drains are installed in vestibules and floor area adjacent to exit. Unless otherwise recommended by material manufacturer, use epoxy adhesive continuously at all seams for sheet applied flooring to a minimum of 150mm on both sides of seam and at terminations of material.

.5 Protect adjacent surfaces from soil by adhesive.

.6 Clean trowels and maintain profile of notches as work progresses to ensure a constant rate of application.

.3 Resilient Flooring:

.1 Allow flooring materials to relax unrolled for minimum 24 hours prior to adhering to substrate.

.2 Lay sheet immediately after adhesive has been spread. Adhere flooring to the subfloor without cracks, voids, raising and puckering at the seams.

.3 Roll sheet flooring immediately after laying, using a roller weighing at least 45kg in the field areas. Hand-roll flooring at the perimeter and the seams to ensure adhesion. Refer to specific rolling instructions from the rolling manufacturer.

.4 Caulk around perimeter of sheet floors with resilient base; applied as a continuous bead between the resilient sheet and the concrete slab at the outer edge of the sheet flooring.

.5 Finish all seams flush and free from voids, recesses, and raised areas.

.6 Apply flooring in one piece. Carefully cut edges to ensure a straight cut with consistent margins.

.4 Finishing Accessories:

.1 Install transition strips at terminations at flooring where edges are exposed to view.

.2 Install transition strips in straight lines and relate their terminations to significant building features, and within tolerance of 3mm in 3m.

.3 At door openings, install transition strips under doors.

.4 Cut and fit transition strip terminations to profile of abutting construction.

.5 Secure transition strips to substrate with contact bond adhesive to ensure complete bond.

.5 Resilient Bases:

.1 Install bases in lengths as long as possible; do not make runs of short lengths.

.2 In areas where bases are indicated, install them on walls, built-in fitments, and columns.

.3 Install bases on prefinished casework for all floor finishes unless indicated otherwise.

.4 Route back of resilient base at exterior corners and wrap around corner in



accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Cut and scribe internal corners.

.5 Double cut seams between adjoining lengths.

.6 Apply adhesive to wall, masked to prevent spreading above base, and firmly bed base in place.

.7 Press base down to force cove against flooring.

3.5 RE-INSTALLATION

.1 Replace defective work so that there is no discernible variation in appearance between installed and replaced materials.

3.5 CLEANING

.1 Clean off excess adhesive as work progresses and before it sets.

.2 Clean resilient flooring, but no sooner than 48 hours following installation. Use neutral floor cleaner where required, and proceed as recommended by manufacturer.

.3 Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor covering before applying liquid floor polish when recommended by flooring manufacturer. Apply the number of coats recommended by the flooring manufacturer.

3.9 PROTECTION

.1 Prevent traffic and work on newly laid floors by barricading until work has set.

.2 After materials have set, and until Project completion, coordinate work to ensure that floors are not damaged by traffic. Ensure that flooring is not subjected to any static loading during the week following installation.

.3 At completion of flooring installation, install floor protection in areas where finishing work, repairs and installation of equipment, and foot traffic will occur. Lap joints of material by 150mm and seal with non-asphaltic tape.

END OF SECTION

L.F. McIntosh Building Section 09 68 00 Second Floor Renovation CARPETING Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 2

PART 1 General

1.1 SCOPE

.1 Work under this section consists of the installation of all "Owner Supplied Carpet" and other related work as indicated on accompanying drawings and specified herein.


.1 Section 09 65 00 - Resilient Sheet Flooring

1.3 SAMPLES

.1 Submit samples, of all material specified. Samples of materials at least 0.6 meters square.

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Provide shop drawings for carpet layouts for review by the Owner & Consultant prior to any transporting and placement of carpet materials by this Section of Work.

PART 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Carpets: (See Room Finish Schedule & Drawings for Locations) .1 Carpet Coded C-I

.1 Carpet Product is: Shaw Contract "Imprint" Tile - Style #59592 - 24" x 24" Carpet tile, Ashlar installation. • Gauge: 1/12 • Primary backing: Synthetic • Secondary backing: ecoworx • Colour: 33549

.2 Transition Strip: Armstrong "Vinyl Transition Strip". Contractor Supplied & Installed. .1 Colour selected by Consultant.

.3 Adhesive: Use carpet manufacturer's recommended release adhesive to adhere all carpet tile to concrete floor substrates. .1 Adhesive shall be Contractor supplied & Installed.

.4 Floor filler/patching compound: shall be Ardex Plano "Cementitious" based product. (Note: Gypsum based floor patch/fillers will not be acceptable for use on this project). .1 Floor Filler/patching compound shall be Contractor Supplied and Installed.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Preparation Stantec Architecture Ltd. June 27, 2014

Section 09 68 00 L.F. McIntosh Building CARPETING Second Floor Renovation Page 2 of 2 Project No. 144401282

.1 Floors shall be dry and free of all foreign matter whether in liquid or solid state. All ridges, high spots and depressions to be ground smooth and filled, cracks and scaling should be filled and ground away. Curing or sealing components which are on the surface are to be sanded off. .1 Patch new and existing floor substrates at carpet locations as required to

provide smooth, even floor finish. (Maximum 3 mm in 3000 mm variance of floor finish will be accepted). Complete installation shall be in accordance with product manufacturer's written recommendations. *NOTE: EXTRA COSTS WILL NOT BE CONSIDERED OR ALLOWED for any patching/levelling required to existing floor substrates. Contractor shall verify and satisfy himself as to existing conditions where work of this section will be performed.

.2 Where flooring of different thicknesses abut, taper substrate with Ardex topping or approved equal to ensure top of finish floor surfaces are flush.

.3 Thoroughly vacuum and damp mop area to be carpeted and allow to thoroughly dry.

3.2 APPLICATION

.1 Application shall be done by skilled mechanics in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

.2 Install transition strips where carpet does not butt to wall. Install with contact adhesive. Transition strips shall be installed in the longest continuous lengths possible.

.3 Install carpet tiles in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions - utilize quick release adhesive.

.4 Vacuum carpet upon completion of installation.

.5 NOTE: Carpet shall run continuous beneath all fixtures and equipment within the rooms and areas where the specified carpet is scheduled.

3.3 CLEANING

.1 Remove all rubbish and surplus material from work of this section as work proceeds and upon completion.

END OF SECTION


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 09 72 16 Second Floor Renovation VINYL-COATED FABRIC WALL COVERINGS Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 3

PART 1 General



.2 Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals


1.2 REFERENCES

.1 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CGSB 41-GP-30M-82, Wall Coverings, Vinyl-Coated Fabrics.

.2 Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC-S102-88(R2000), Surface Characteristics of Building Materials and

Assemblies.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1.4 SAMPLES

.1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.2 Due to product lead times, order material immediately upon approval of wall covering from Consultant.

.3 Submit duplicate 280 x 215 mm samples of colours and textures of wall coverings together with complete written description, including total fabric weight, name of fabric backing, tensile strength, tear strength and fire rating and fire detection characteristics.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

.1 Provide maintenance data for vinyl-coated fabric wall covering in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 Temperature: Maintain air temperature and structural base temperature at wall covering installation area above 20°C and relative humidity below 40% for 72 hours before, during and 72 hours after installation.

.2 Ventilation: .1 Provide continuous ventilation during and after coating application. Coordinate

with Owner.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

.1 Provide extra materials of vinyl coated fabric wall covering, adhesives and cleaners in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.


Section 09 72 16 L.F. McIntosh Building VINYL-COATED FABRIC WALL COVERING Second Floor Renovation Page 2 of 3 Project No. 144401282

.2 Provide 5 m2 of full width material of each pattern, texture and colour of vinyl-coated fabric wall covering.

.3 Provide sufficient adhesive to install extra material vinyl-coated fabric wall covering provided.

.4 Extra materials to be from same production run/and or dye lot as installed materials.

.5 Clearly identify rolls of vinyl-coated fabric wall coverings and containers of adhesives.

.6 Deliver to Owner, upon completion of Work of this Section.

PART 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Wall covering: to CGSB 41-GP-30M, Surface burning characteristics in accordance with CAN/ULC-S102. .1 Refer to drawings including A801 – Room Finish Schedule.

.2 Sealer: type recommended by covering manufacturer.

.3 Sizing: type recommended by covering manufacturer.

.4 Adhesive: as recommended by covering manufacturer.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 PREPARATION

.1 Unwrap wall covering when ventilation conditions are accelerated. Allow 24 hours acclimation in installation before application.

.2 Prepare surfaces according to covering manufacturer's instructions.

.3 Work penetrating substrate to be completed before installing covering.

.4 Seal and size surfaces to receive covering.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Installation sequence: .1 Use rolls in consecutive numerical sequence of manufacture. .2 Place panels consecutively in exact order they are cut from roll; including spaces

above or below windows, doors or similar penetrations. .3 Reverse alternate strips except on match patterns.

.2 Trim additional salvage where required to achieve colour and pattern match at seams.

.3 Apply adhesive to fabric back as recommended by manufacturer.

.4 Hang non-matched patterns by overlapping edges and double cutting through both thicknesses with metal back-up strip to prevent cutting substrate.


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 09 72 16 Second Floor Renovation VINYL-COATED FABRIC WALL COVERINGS Project No. 144401282 Page 3 of 3

.5 Wrap fabric 150 mm beyond inside and outside corners. No cutting at corners permitted, unless pattern or colour changes.

.6 No horizontal seams permitted.

.7 Install covering before installation of plumbing fixtures, electrical equipment, casings, bases and cabinets.

.8 Remove excess adhesive along finished seams immediately after strips of wall covering are applied. As work progresses ensure clean warm water is used for final rinsing of wall covering and leave clean.

.9 Leave completed work smooth, clean, without wrinkles, gaps, overlaps or air pockets.

3.3 CLEANING

.1 Clean surfaces to covering manufacturer's written instructions.

.2 Dispose of wall covering packaging through appropriate recycling drop points.

3.4 PROTECTION

.1 Protect finished surfaces and exterior corners from damage until final inspection.

END OF SECTION


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 09 90 00 Second Floor Renovation PAINTING Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 11 PART 1 General 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications .2 Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry .3 Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies .4 Section 09 51 13 - Acoustic Panel Ceilings

1.2 SUMMARY

.1 All labour, materials, tools and other equipment, services and supervision required to complete all interior and exterior painting work as indicated on finish schedules and to the full extent of the drawings and specifications.

1.3 SITE SUPERVISION

.1 Site supervision for work of this section shall be full time. Supervisor shall be directly employed by the installer and shall have the authority to receive, represent and make decisions on behalf of the Trade Contractor.


.1 Painting Subcontractor shall have a minimum of five years experience as an independent contractor specializing in painting large institutional or commercial projects. When requested, provide a list of the last three comparable jobs, including job name, locations, specifying authority and project manager.

.2 Retain purchase orders, invoices and other documents to prove that all materials utilized in this contract meet requirements of the specifications. Produce documents when requested by Consultant.

.3 Conform to the standards contained in the Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting

Specification Manual, latest edition (hereafter referred to as MPI Manual) for all painting products including preparation and application of materials. MPI Manual as issued by the local MPI Accredited Quality Assurance Association having jurisdiction.

.4 All products used in exits shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less when tested in

accordance with ASTM-E84. .5 All paint applications shall be "premium grade" unless specified otherwise. .6 Only Qualified journeymen who have a “Tradesman Qualification Certificate of

Proficiency” shall be engaged in painting and decorating work. Apprentices may be employed provided they work under the direct supervision of a qualified Journeyman in accordance with trade regulations.

.7 Acceptable manufacturer’s materials, workmanship and all items affecting the work of this

section is to be in accordance with the specifications in the first instance and the MPI Manual.

.8 Standard of Acceptance: .1 Walls: No defects visible from a distance of 1000 mm at any angle to surface.


Section 09 90 00 L.F. McIntosh Building PAINTING Second Floor Renovation Page 2 of 11 Project No. 144401282

.2 Ceilings: No defects visible from floor at 45º to surface when viewed using final lighting source.

.3 Final coat to exhibit uniformity of colour and uniformity of sheen across full surface area.

1.5 REFERENCES

.1 Architectural Painting Specification Manual, Master Painter Institute (MPI). .2 Systems and Specifications Manual, SSPC Painting Manual, Volume Two, Society for

Protective Coatings (SSPC) .3 Test Method for Measuring Total Volatile Organic Compound Content of Consumer

Products, Method 24 (for Surface Coatings) of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA).

.4 National Fire Code of Canada. .5 Green Seal Organization, GS-03 and GS-11 paints.

.6 South Coast Air Quality Management District, rule #1113, November 1996.

1.7 SCHEDULING OF WORK

.1 Submit work schedule for various stages of painting to find and replace with General Contractor for approval. Submit schedule minimum of 72 hours in advance of proposed operations.

.2 Obtain written authorization from Construction Manager for any changes in work schedule.

.3 Schedule painting operations to prevent disruption of occupants in and about the building.

1.8 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit product data and manufacturer's installation/application instructions for each paint and coating product to be used in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.2 Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures.

.3 Upon completion, submit records of products used. List products in relation to finish system and include the following: .1 Product name, type and use. .2 Manufacturer's product number. .3 Colour numbers. .4 MPI Environmentally Friendly classification system rating. .5 Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).

1.9 SAMPLES

.1 Submit full range colour sample chips in accordance with Section 01 33 00- Submittal Procedures. Indicate where colour availability is restricted.

.2 Submit 200 x 300 mm sample panels of each paint and stain with specified paint or


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 09 90 00 Second Floor Renovation PAINTING Project No. 144401282 Page 3 of 11

coating in colours, gloss/sheen and textures required to MPI Painting Specification Manual standards submitted on the following substrate materials:

.1 3 mm plate steel for finishes over metal surfaces. .2 13 mm birch plywood for finishes over wood surfaces. .3 50 mm concrete block for finishes over concrete or concrete masonry surfaces. .4 13 mm gypsum board for finishes over gypsum board and other smooth surfaces.

.3 When approved, sample panels shall become acceptable standard of quality for appropriate on-site surface with one of each sample retained on-site.

1.10 QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Provide mock-up in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control/Quality Assurance.

.2 When requested by General Contractor and Paint Inspection Agency, prepare and paint designated surface, area, room or item (in each colour scheme) to requirements specified herein, with specified paint or coating showing selected colours, gloss/sheen, textures and workmanship to MPI Painting Specification Manual standards for review and approval. When approved, surface, area, room and/or items shall become acceptable standard of finish quality and workmanship for similar on-site work.

1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS

.1 Submit one - four litre can of each type and colour of finish coating. Identify colour and paint type in relation to established colour schedule and finish system.

.2 Deliver to General Contractor and store where directed.

1.12 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE

.1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions.

.2 Labels shall clearly indicate: .1 Manufacturer's name and address. .2 Type of paint or coating. .3 Compliance with applicable standard. .4 Colour number in accordance with established colour schedule.

.3 Remove damaged, opened and rejected materials from site.

.4 Provide and maintain dry, temperature controlled, secure storage.

.5 Store materials and supplies away from heat generating devices.

.6 Store materials and equipment in a well ventilated area with temperature range 7ºC to 30ºC.

.7 Store temperature sensitive products above minimum temperature as recommended by manufacturer.

.8 Keep areas used for storage, cleaning and preparation, clean and orderly to approval of Construction Manager. After completion of operations, return areas to clean condition to approval of Construction Manager.

.9 Remove paint materials from storage only in quantities required for same day use.



.10 Comply with requirements of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) regarding use, handling storage, and disposal of hazardous materials.

.11 Fire Safety Requirements: .1 Provide one 9 kg dry chemical fire extinguisher adjacent to storage area. .2 Store oily rags, waste products, empty containers and materials subject to

spontaneous combustion in ULC approved, sealed containers and remove from site on a daily basis.

.3 Handle, store, use and dispose of flammable and combustible materials in accordance with the National Fire Code of Canada.

1.13 SITE REQUIREMENTS

.1 Heating, Ventilation and Lighting:

.1 Ventilate enclosed spaces.

.2 Perform no painting work unless adequate and continuous ventilation and sufficient heating facilities are in place to maintain ambient air and substrate temperatures above 10ºC for 24 hours before, during and after paint application until paint has cured sufficiently.

.3 Where required, provide continuous ventilation for seven days after completion of application of paint.

.4 Coordinate use of ventilation system with General Contractor and ensure its operation during and after application of paint as required.

.5 Provide temporary ventilating and heating equipment where permanent facilities are not available or supplemental ventilating and heating equipment if ventilation and heating from existing system is inadequate to meet minimum requirements.

.6 Perform no painting work unless a minimum lighting level of 323 Lux is provided on surfaces to be painted. Adequate lighting facilities shall be provided by General Contractor.

.2 Temperature, Humidity and Substrate Moisture Content Levels:

.1 Perform no painting work when: .1 Ambient air and substrate temperatures are below 10ºC.

.2 Substrate temperature is over 32ºC unless paint is specifically formulated for application at high temperatures.

.3 Substrate and ambient air temperatures are expected to fall outside MPI or paint manufacturer's prescribed limits.

.4 The relative humidity is above 85% or when the dew point is less than 3ºC variance between the air/surface temperature.

.3 Surface and Environmental Conditions:

.1 Apply paint finish only in areas where dust is no longer being generated by related construction operations or when wind or ventilation conditions are such that airborne particles will not affect quality of finished surface.

.2 Apply paint only to adequately prepared surfaces and to surfaces within moisture limits noted herein.

.3 Apply paint only when previous coat of paint is dry or adequately cured.


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 09 90 00 Second Floor Renovation PAINTING Project No. 144401282 Page 5 of 11 1.14 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

.1 Paint Manufacturer’s products (for interior use) are considered acceptable, notwithstanding other requirements specified herein, provided:

.1 VOC emissions from paints must not exceed the VOC and chemical component limits of Green Seal’s Standards GS-11, July 2013 requirements, and

.2 The VOC content of anti-corrosive coatings must be less than the current VOC content limits of Green Seal Standard GS-03, July 2013 requirements and

.3 For interior paints and coatings not already covered by GS-11 and GS-03, the VOC content of primers under-coatings, sealers and wood finishes used must be less than the current VOC content limits of South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule #1113, June 2011 requirements.

.2 Provide cut sheets, Material Safety Data sheets, signed attestations, or other official literature from manufacturers listing all paints and coatings used in the building that are addressed by Green Seal Standard GS-03 and the SCAQMD Rule #1113. State that they comply with the VOC and chemical component limits and/or chemical component restrictions of each standard.

PART 2 Product

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Paint materials listed in the MPI Approved Products List (APL) are acceptable for use on this project, provided they also meet requirements as specified in Article 1.4 this Section.

.2 Paint materials for paint systems shall be products of a single manufacturer.

.3 Paints, coatings, adhesives, solvents, cleaners, lubricants, and other fluids, shall:

.1 be water-based.

.2 be non-flammable biodegradable.

.3 be manufactured without compounds which contribute to ozone depletion in the upper atmosphere.

.4 be manufactured without compounds which contribute to smog in the lower atmosphere.

.5 do not contain methylene chloride, chlorinated hydrocarbons, toxic metal pigments.

.4 Water-borne surface coatings must be manufactured and transported in a manner that steps of process, including disposal of waste products arising therefrom, will meet requirements of applicable governmental acts, by-laws and regulations including, for facilities located in Canada, Fisheries Act and Canadian Environmental Protection Act (CEPA).

.5 Water-borne surface coatings must not be formulated or manufactured with aromatic solvents, formaldehyde, halogenated solvents, mercury, lead, cadmium, hexavelant chromium or their compounds.

.6 Water-borne surface coatings and recycled water-borne surface coatings must have a flash point of 61.0 °C or greater.

.7 Both water-borne surface coatings and recycled water-borne surface coatings must be made by a process that does not release:



.1 Matter in undiluted production plant effluent generating a 'Biochemical Oxygen Demand' (BOD) in excess of 15 mg/L to a natural watercourse or a sewage treatment facility lacking secondary treatment.

.2 Total Suspended Solids (TSS) in undiluted production plant effluent in excess of 15 mg/L to a natural watercourse or a sewage treatment facility lacking secondary treatment.

2.2 COLOURS

.1 Refer to Construction Document drawing A801 Room Finish Schedule.

2.3 MIXING AND TINTING

.1 Perform colour tinting operations prior to delivery of paint to site. On-site tinting of painting materials is not allowed.

.2 Paste, powder or catalyzed paint mixes shall be mixed in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

.3 Where thinner is used, addition shall not exceed paint manufacturer's recommendations. Do not use kerosene or any such organic solvents to thin water-based paints.

.4 Thin paint for spraying according in strict accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions. If directions are not on container, obtain instructions in writing from manufacturer and provide copy of instructions to Consultant.

.5 Re-mix paint in containers prior to and during application to ensure break-up of lumps, complete dispersion of settled pigment, and colour and gloss uniformity.

2.4 GLOSS/SHEEN RATINGS

.1 Paint gloss shall be defined as the sheen rating of applied paint, in accordance with the following values:

Gloss Level Category Units @ 60º Units @ 85º G1 - matte finish 0 to 5 max. 10

G2 - velvet finish 0 to 10 10 to 35

G3 - eggshell finish 10 to 25 10 to 35

G4 - satin finish 20 to 35 min. 35

G5 - semi-gloss finish 35 to 70

G6 - gloss finish 70 to 85

G7 - high gloss finish > 85

.2 Gloss level ratings of painted surfaces shall be as specified herein and as noted on Finish Schedule except where noted otherwise:

.1 Walls: eggshell

.2 Doors/frames: semi-gloss

.3 Ceilings: matte

2.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SYSTEMS

.1 Cementitious Composition Board Surfaces:



.1 INT 3.3G Institutional low odour/low VOC semi-gloss finish. Acceptable product: General Paint 2 coat acrylic semi-gloss latex.

.2 Concrete Masonry Units: smooth and split face block and brick (if unfinished)

.1 INT 4.2E Institutional low odour/low VOC. Semi gloss finish. Acceptable product: General paint 2-coat acrylic semi-coat latex.

.3 Galvanized Metal: doors, frames, railings, misc. steel, pipes, overhead decking, ducts,etc.

.1 INT 5.3M High performance architectural latex gloss finish. Acceptable product General Paint Hi-Performance semi-gloss.

.4 Wood panelling & wood doors:

.1 Water based varnish, clear. Acceptable product: ICI Woodpride Interior Acrylic Satin Varnish.

.5 Plaster and Gypsum Board: gypsum wallboard, drywall, "sheet rock type material", etc., and textured finishes

.1 INT 9.2M Institutional low odour/low VOC eggshell finish. Acceptable product. General Paint 2-coat acrylic eggshell latex.

.6 Plaster and gypsum board in wet areas such as showers, washrooms, housekeeping rooms:

.1 INT 4.2E Institutional low/odour/low VOC. Acceptable product: General Paint 2-coat acrylic semi-gloss latex.

2.6 Finish Systems Schedule for Interior Mechanical and Electrical Work, select only systems, which

are applicable to substrates being painted. Confirm gloss and MPI Product Code with Consultant prior to applying finishes:

.1 Canvas and Cotton Insulated Piping, Ductwork and Equipment:

Apply 2 coats GP 2-coat sealer.

.2 Iron and Steel Piping, and Equipment: INT 5.1E Alkyd Finish

Apply 1 coat Enviroguard Primer Apply 2 coats GP 2-coat eggshell

.3 Galvanized Metal Piping, Ductwork, Conduit and Equipment: INT 5.3C Alkyd Finish

Apply 1 coat GP 2-coat primer Apply 2 coats 2-coat eggshell

.4 Plastic Piping:

Apply 1 coat X-terminator latex primer Apply 2 coats General Paint 2-coat eggshell.


Section 09 90 00 L.F. McIntosh Building PAINTING Second Floor Renovation Page 8 of 11 Project No. 144401282 PART 3 Execution

3.1 GENERAL

.1 Perform preparation and operations for interior painting in accordance with MPI Painting Specifications Manual except where specified otherwise.

.2 Apply paint materials in accordance with paint manufacturer’s written application instructions.

3.2 EXISTING CONDITIONS

.1 Investigate existing substrates for problems related to proper and complete preparation of surfaces to be painted. Report to Construction Manager damages, defects, unsatisfactory or unfavourable conditions before proceeding with work.

.2 Conduct moisture testing of surfaces to be painted using a properly calibrated electronic moisture meter, except test concrete floors for moisture using a simple "cover patch test" and report findings to Construction Manager. Do not proceed with work until conditions fall within acceptable range as recommended by manufacturer.

.3 Maximum moisture content as follows:

.1 Stucco, Plaster and Gypsum Board: 12%.

.2 Concrete: 12%.

.3 Clay and Concrete Block/Brick: 12%.

.4 Wood: 15%.

3.3 PROTECTION

.1 Protect existing building surfaces and adjacent structures from paint spatters, markings and other damage by suitable non-staining covers or masking. If damaged, clean and restore such surfaces as directed by General Contractor.

.2 Protect items that are permanently attached such as Fire Labels on doors and frames.

.3 Protect factory finished products and equipment.

.4 Protect passing pedestrians, building occupants and general public in and about the building.

.5 Removal of electrical cover plates, light fixtures, surface hardware on doors, bath accessories and other surface mounted equipment, fittings and fastenings shall be done by Construction Manager prior to undertaking any painting operations. Items shall be securely stored and re-installed by General Contractor after painting is completed.

.6 Move and cover furniture and portable equipment as necessary to carry out painting operations. Replace as painting operations progress.

7 As painting operations progress, place "WET PAINT" signs in occupied areas to approval of General Contractor.

3.4 CLEANING AND PREPARATION

.1 Clean and prepare surfaces in accordance with MPI Painting Specification Manual requirements. Refer to MPI Manual in regard to specific requirements and as follows:



.1 Remove dust, dirt, and other surface debris by vacuuming, wiping with dry, clean cloths or compressed air.

.2 Wash surfaces with a biodegradable detergent and bleach where applicable and clean warm water using a stiff bristle brush to remove dirt, oil and other surface contaminants.

.3 Rinse scrubbed surfaces with clean water until foreign matter is flushed from surface.

.4 Allow surfaces to drain completely and allow to dry thoroughly.

.5 Prepare surfaces for water-based painting, water-based cleaners should be used in place of organic solvents.

.6 Use trigger operated spray nozzles for water hoses.

.7 Many water-based paints cannot be removed with water once dried. However, minimize the use of kerosene or any such organic solvents to clean up water-based paints.

.2 Prevent contamination of cleaned surfaces by salts, acids, alkalis, other corrosive chemicals, grease, oil and solvents before prime coat is applied and between applications of remaining coats. Apply primer, paint, or pre-treatment as soon as possible after cleaning and before deterioration occurs.

.3 Where possible, prime surfaces of new wood surfaces before installation. Use same primers as specified for exposed surfaces.

.1 Apply vinyl sealer to MPI #36 over knots, pitch, sap and resinous areas.

.2 Apply wood filler to nail holes and cracks.

.3 Tint filler to match stains for stained woodwork.

.4 Sand and dust between coats as required to provide adequate adhesion for next coat and to remove defects visible from a distance up to 1000 mm.

.5 Clean metal surfaces to be painted by removing rust, loose mill scale, welding slag, dirt, oil, grease and other foreign substances in accordance with MPI requirements. Remove traces of blast products from surfaces, pockets and corners to be painted by brushing with clean brushes blowing with clean dry compressed air, or vacuum cleaning.

.6 Touch up of shop primers with primer as specified in applicable section. Major touch-up including cleaning and painting of field connections, welds, rivets, nuts, washers, bolts, and damaged or defective paint and rusted areas, shall be by supplier of fabricated material.

3.5 APPLICATION

.1 Conform to manufacturer's application instructions unless specified otherwise.

.2 Brush and Roller Application:

.1 Apply paint in a uniform layer using brush and/or roller of types suitable for application.

.2 Work paint into cracks, crevices and corners.

.3 Paint surfaces and corners not accessible to brush using spray, daubers and/or sheepskins. Paint surfaces and corners not accessible to roller using brush, daubers or sheepskins.

.4 Brush and/or roll out runs and sags, and over-lap marks. Rolled surfaces shall be free of roller tracking and heavy stipple unless approved by Consultant Engineer.



.5 Remove runs, sags and brush marks from finished work and repaint.

.3 Spray application:

.1 Provide and maintain equipment that is suitable for intended purpose, capable of properly atomizing paint to be applied, and equipped with suitable pressure regulators and gauges.

.2 Keep paint ingredients properly mixed in containers during paint application either by continuous mechanical agitation or by intermittent agitation as frequently as necessary.

.3 Apply paint in a uniform layer, with overlapping at edges of spray pattern.

.4 Brush out immediately all runs and sags.

.5 Use brushes to work paint into cracks, crevices and places which are not adequately painted by spray.

.6 Use dipping, sheepskins or daubers only when no other method is practical in places of difficult access and only when specifically authorized by Construction Manager.

.7 Apply coats of paint as a continuous film of uniform thickness. Repaint thin spots or bare areas before next coat of paint is applied.

.8 Allow surfaces to dry and properly cure after cleaning and between subsequent coats for minimum time period as recommended by manufacturer.

.9 Sand and dust between coats to remove visible defects.

.10 Finish surfaces both above and below sight lines as specified for surrounding surfaces, including such surfaces as tops of interior cupboards and cabinets and projecting ledges.

.11 Finish inside of cupboards and cabinets as specified for outside surfaces.

.12 Finish closets and alcoves as specified for adjoining rooms.

.13 Finish top, bottom, edges and cutouts of doors after fitting as specified for door surfaces.

3.6 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

.1 Paint mechanical and electrical equipment, conduit and piping, including hangers and supports as specified in Divisions 21, 22, 23 and 26.

3.7 PAINTING MISCELLANEOUS MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL ITEMS

.1 The inside of light valances shall be painted gloss white. .2 Paint inside of ducts at grilles and diffusers back a sufficient distance so that duct interior

is not visible when grilles and diffusers are installed. Apply one coat Etch Type Primer and one coat Alkyd Enamel, flat black colour, before grilles and diffusers are installed.

.3 Paint concrete machine and equipment bases in coded colours and with 100 mm wide

diagonal stripes. Do not paint spring isolators. .4 Paint steel bollards in coded colours and with 50 mm wide vertical stripes as detailed in

Colour Coding Requirements. .5 Back-prime and paint surfaces and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and

telephone equipment with one coat Alkyd Wood Primer, white colour, and two coats Alkyd Porch and Floor Enamel, grey colour, applied before backboards are installed.

.6 Keep sprinkler heads free of paint.

.7 Paint inside of ductwork where visible with primer and one coat of matte black paint. June 27, 2014 Stantec Architecture Ltd.


.8 Paint disconnect switches for fire alarm system and exit light systems in red enamel.

.9 Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for equipment before installation. Leave equipment in original finish except for touch-up as required, and paint conduits, mounting accessories and other unfinished items.

3.8 RESTORATION

.1 Clean and re-install all hardware items removed before undertaken painting operations.

.2 Remove protective coverings and warning signs as soon as practical after operations cease.

.3 Remove paint splashings on exposed surfaces that were not painted. Remove smears and spatter immediately as operations progress, using compatible solvent.

.4 Protect freshly completed surfaces from paint droppings and dust to approval of Construction Manager. Avoid scuffing newly applied paint.

.5 Restore areas used for storage, cleaning, mixing and handling of paint to clean condition as approved by Construction Manager.

3.9 CLEAN-UP .1 Remove all paint where spilled, splashed, splattered, or sprayed as Work progresses

using means and materials that are not detrimental to affected surfaces. .2 Keep Work area free from unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus

materials and debris.

.3 Remove Combustible rubbish materials and empty paint cans each day and safely dispose of same in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction

.4 Clean equipment and dispose of wash water/solvents as well as all other cleaning and

protective materials (e.g.: dropcloths, masking papers, etc.), paints, thinners, paint removers/strippers, in accordance with the safety requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

END OF SECTION


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 10 14 00 Second Floor Renovation SIGNAGE Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 2

PART 1 General

1.1 DESCRIPTION

.1 Work of this section consists of the supply and installation of Identifying Devices and related accessories as specified herein and as indicated on accompanying drawings.




1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit shop drawings of signage in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

1.4 SAMPLES

.1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.2 Submit duplicate representative sample of each type sign, sign image and mounting method.

PART 2 Materials

2.1 INTERIOR ROOM SIGNS

.1 lnterior signage to be "lnsign Architectural Signage". Colour for frame and liner to be as scheduled below, letter and symbol colour to be white. Mounting to be to door entry unless noted otherwise. All Letter Type style to be Helvetica Medium. Letter sizes to be as per attached sketch. .1 Signs required: (Refer to 10 14 00-1 – Signage - Appendix for Sign Type

sketches) Room Located on Name Sign Door to Room(s) # (to read) Colour Type 201.1 Female symbol Taupe 4.4.1 Wheelchair symbol 247.1 Male symbol Taupe 4.4.1 Wheelchair symbol 203A.2 & 203C.1 Stairs Taupe 2.4.1


Section 10 14 00 L.F. McIntosh Building SIGNAGE Second Floor Renovation Page 2 of 2 Project No. 144401182 PART 3 Execution

3.1 FABRICATION

.1 "lnsign Architectural Signage" to be as per Section 10 14 00-1. Install with double sided adhesive strip room entry doors. Coordinate exact locations with Owner prior to placement of each sign.

END OF SECTION


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 10 14 00-1 Second Floor Renovation SIGNAGE – APPENDIX Project No. 144401182 Page 1 of 3

Typography Layout Sheet Plaque Format: 4.4.1 Liner Number: L-4.4.1

Door #201.1 Stantec Architecture Ltd. June 27, 2014

Section 10 14 00-1 L.F. McIntosh Building SIGNAGE – APPENDIX Second Floor Renovation Page 2 of 3 Project No. 144401282


Door #247.1 June 27, 2014 Stantec Architecture Ltd.

L.F. McIntosh Building Section 10 14 00-1 Second Floor Renovation SIGNAGE – APPENDIX Project No. 144401182 Page 3 of 3


Doors 203A.2 and 203C.1


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 10 21 13 Second Floor Renovation METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 3

PART 1 General



1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

.1 ASTM A 167-[99], Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.

.2 ASTM A 480/A 480M-[99b], Standard Specification for General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.

.2 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)

.1 CAN/CGSB-1.81-[M90], Air Drying and Baking Alkyd Primer for Vehicles and Equipment.

.2 CAN/CGSB-1.88-[92], Gloss Alkyd Enamel Air Drying and Baking.

.3 CAN/CGSB-1.104M-[91], Semigloss Alkyd, Air Drying and Baking Enamel.

.4 CAN/CSA-B651-[95], Barrier-Free Design.

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS


.2 Indicate fabrication details, plans, elevations, hardware, and installation details.

PART 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Approved Product:

.1 Shanahan’s Overhead braced model or approved equivalent.

.2 Sheet steel: commercial quality to ASTM A526M with ZF001 designation zinc coating.

.3 Minimum base steel thickness:

.1 Panels and doors: 0.8 mm.

.2 Pilasters: 1.0 mm.

.3 Reinforcement: 3.0 mm.

.4 Stainless steel sheet metal: to ASTM A167, Type 304.

.5 Headrails: 25 mm x 41 mm x 1.5 mm thick, clear anodized, extruded aluminum, anti grip design preformed socket brackets.

.6 Pilaster shoe: 0.8 mm stainless steel chrome plated non-ferrous, 75 mm high.

.7 Attachment: stainless steel tamperproof type sex bolts.


Section 10 21 13 L.F. McIntosh Building METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS Second Floor Renovation Page 2 of 3 Project No. 144401282 2.2 COMPONENTS

.1 Hinges:

.1 Heavy duty, non-lubricating nylon bushings.

.2 Material/finish: stainless steel or chrome plated non-ferrous anodized aluminum casting.

.3 Swing: inward or outward as indicated.

.4 Return movement: gravity.

.5 Adjustable door-open angle.

.6 Emergency access feature.

.2 Latch set: surface mounted slide type, combination latch, door-stop, keeper and bumper, chrome plated non-ferrous, or anodized aluminum, or stainless steel.

.3 Wall and connecting brackets: chrome plated non-ferrous or anodized aluminum or stainless steel extrusion or casting.

.4 Coat hook: combination hook and rubber door bumper, chrome plated non-ferrous or stainless steel.

.5 Door pull: Barrier-free type suited for outswinging doors, stainless steel.

2.3 FABRICATION

.1 Doors, panels and screens: 32 mm thick, two steel sheets faces pressure bonded to honeycomb core, to sizes required x 1460 mm high.

.2 Pilasters: 32 mm thick, constructed same as door, to sizes required x 1460 mm high.

.3 Provide formed and closed edges for doors, panels and pilasters. Miter and weld corners and grind smooth.

.4 Provide internal reinforcement at areas of attached hardware and fittings. Temporarily mark location of reinforcement for tissue holders and grab bars.

.5 Provide 0.8 mm thick type 316 stainless steel protective shields on urinal side of all partition panels next to urinals. Make protective shields 1000 mm high with top of shield 1200 mm above finished floor. Make shields 600 mm wide. Fasten with stainless steel screws.

2.4 FINISHES

.1 Clean, degrease and neutralize steel components with phosphate or chromate treatment.

.2 Spray apply primer to CAN/CGSB-1.81, 1 coat.

.3 Spray apply finish enamel to CGSB 1-GP-88M, type 2 gloss CGSB 1-GP-104Ma, Type 2, semi-gloss, 2 coats and bake to smooth, hard finish 0.025 mm thick.

.4 Finish: doors and pilaster/panels – Shanahan’s 908 black with chrome trim and stainless steel shoe or approved equivalent, as selected from manufacturers standard colours.


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 10 21 13 Second Floor Renovation METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS Project No. 144401282 Page 3 of 3 PART 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Ensure supplementary anchorage, if required, is in place.

.2 Do work in accordance with CAN/CSA-B651.

.3 Install all partitions in accordance with the manufacturers written instructions.

3.2 ERECTION

.1 Partition erection.

.1 Install partitions secure, plumb and square.

.2 Leave 12 mm space between wall and panel or end pilaster.

.3 Anchor mounting brackets to masonry/concrete surfaces using screws and shields: to hollow walls using bolts and toggle type anchors.

.4 Attach panel and pilaster to brackets with through type sleeve bolt and nut.

.5 Provide for adjustment of floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles made integral with pilaster. Conceal floor fixings with stainless steel shoes.

.6 Equip each door with hinges, latch set, and each stall with coat hook mounted on door. Adjust and align hardware for easy, proper function. Set door open position at 30º to front. Install door bumper wall or door mounting.

.7 Equip outswinging doors with door pulls on inside and outside of door in accordance with CAN/CSA-B651.

.8 Install hardware.

.2 Floor supported and overhead braced partition erection.

.1 Attach pilasters to floor with pilaster supports and level, plumb, and tighten installation with levelling device.

.2 Secure pilaster shoes in position.

.3 Secure headrail to pilaster face with not less than two fasteners per face.

.4 Set tops of doors parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position.

END OF SECTION


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 10 28 00 Second Floor Renovation TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 4

PART 1 General





.4 Section 09 31 00 –Tiling

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) .1 ASTM A167-99, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting

Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. .2 ASTM B456-95, Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper

Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium. .3 ASTM A653/A653M-99, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-coated

(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. .4 ASTM A924/A924M-99, Standard Specification for General Requirements for

Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

.2 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-1.81-M90, Air Drying and Baking Alkyd Primer for Vehicles and

Equipment. .2 CAN/CGSB-1.88-92, Gloss Alkyd Enamel, Air Drying and Baking. .3 Can/CGSB-12.5-M86, Mirrors, Silvered. .4 CGSB31-GP-107Ma-90, Non-inhibited Phosphoric Acid Base Metal Conditioner

and Rust Remover.

.3 Canadian Standards Association (CSA) .1 CAN/CSA-B651-95, Barrier-Free Design. .2 CAN/CSA-G164-M92, Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles.

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS


.2 Indicate size and description of components, base material, surface finish inside and out, hardware and locks, attachment devices, description of rough in-frame, building-in details of anchors for grab bars.


.1 Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 00 – Cleaning and Waste Management. .1 Divert unused adhesives and sealant materials from landfill to designated

hazardous material collections site.


Section 10 28 00 L.F. McIntosh Building TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES Second Floor Renovation Page 2 of 4 Project No. 144401282

.2 Do not dispose of unused adhesives and sealant materials into sewer systems, into lakes, streams, onto ground or in other locations where it will pose health or environmental hazard.

1.5 MANUFACTURER/QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 These specifications are based on products as manufactured by Bobrick Ltd. and Frost, except as noted otherwise.

.2 Products manufactured by Bobrick, or Frost conforming to specified products are acceptable for this product or approved equal.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

.1 Provide maintenance data for toilet and bath accessories for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

.1 Provide special tools required for accessing, assembly/disassembly or removal for toilet and bath accessories in accordance with requirements specified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

.2 Deliver special tools to Owner.

PART 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Sheet Steel - prime grade furniture steel, cold rolled stretcher levelled to ASTM A446, 38 grams/m2 galvanized coating.

.2 Stainless Steel Sheet - AISI, Type 304 commercial grade, O.792mm thick.

.3 Stainless Steel Tubing - AISI Type 304 commercial grade, seamless welded.

.4 Fasteners - screws and bolts hot dip galvanized. Expansion shields of fibre lead or rubber as recommended by manufacturer for component and substrates.

2.2 FINISHES

.1 Chrome/nickel plating - to ASTM B456 polished finish.

.2 Stainless Steel - to AISI satin finish.

.3 Shop primed ferrous metals – pre-treat and clean, spray one coat of baked primer.

2.3 FABRICATION

.1 Weld and grind smooth all joints of fabricated units.

.2 Form exposed surfaces from one sheet of stock, free from joints, and all surfaces flat without distortion. Main flat surfaces without scratches or dents.

.3 Back paint all components where contact is made with building finishes.


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 10 28 00 Second Floor Renovation TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES Project No. 144401282 Page 3 of 4

.4 Hot dip galvanized all ferrous metal anchors and fastening devices.

.5 Shop assemble all components and package complete with anchors and fittings.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 PREPARATION

.1 Preparation and installation under Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry and herein specified.

.2 Deliver inserts and rough in frames to job site at appropriate time for building in. Provide templates and/or rough in measurements as required.

.3 Verify with Consultant exact location of all units.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Install all fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

.2 Install true, plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate in a manner consistent with intended use.

.3 Use tamperproof fasteners for installation of all work in this Section.

.4 Provide backing in all walls to suit all accessory items.

3.3 SCHEDULES

.1 Refer to drawings for location of washroom accessories, which are identified by number and relate with those listed herein. (Mounting heights for all accessories are measured from finished floor, unless noted otherwise. Note: In Handicap Areas, all mounting heights shall conform to requirements of "The Uniform Building and Accessibility Standards Act" of Saskatchewan.)

DRAWING LEGEND CODE (NOT ALL ITEMS MAY BE SHOWN) PRODUCT # A1 Vertical grab bar (610 long) Frost Model # 1001-S24 A2 Horizontal grab bar (610 long) , stainless steel Frost Model # 1001-S36 Peened finish, concealed mounting A3 Horizontal grab bar (915 long) Frost Model # 1001-S36 Stainless Steel, peened finish, concealed mounting A4 Sanitary Napkin Disposal, Frost Model # 622 Stainless Steel type 304 no. 4 brushed finish, Surface-mounted A5 Toilet Tissue Dispenser. Frost Model # 150 Double roll, surface-mounted, polished chrome finish Stantec Architecture Ltd. June 27, 2014

Section 10 28 00 L.F. McIntosh Building TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES Second Floor Renovation Page 4 of 4 Project No. 144401282 A6 Combination Hands Free Paper Towel Dispenser / Frost Model # 427-70AC Waste Receptacle, Stainless steel type 304, Recessed 100 mm (4”), powered by AC adapter A7 Paper Towel Disposal Frost Model # 303-3 Surface-mount (with liner), Stainless steel type 304 A8 Unframed Mirror, supplied under Section 08 80 50 Frost Model # 941 Mounting height and sizes as indicated on drawings. A9 Single robe hook, (each stall) Frost Model # 1138S Stainless Steel A10 Touch Free Soap Dispenser Frost Model # 714S Surface-mounted, polished chrome finish, Powered by 3 ‘C’ alkaline batteries A11 Napkin/Tampon Vendor Frost Model #615.5 Semi-recessed 25 Cent Coin Mechanism for Each Item NOTE: All finishes to be satin or brushed stainless steel.

.2 Provide all necessary and appropriate manufacturers standard concealed anchorage and mounting devices, to suit installation of grab bars; such as steel plates (Bobrick series 2561) for steel stud construction or (Bobrick series 257) for masonry construction, and toggle bolts/expansion shields, threaded bolts and plates: series 257.

END OF SECTION


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 10 80 00 Second Floor Renovation MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 4

PART 1 General

1.1 SCOPE

.1 Work of this section consists of the supply and installation of all Miscellaneous Specialties and other related work shown on accompanying drawings and specified herein.




.3 Section 09 51 00 - Acoustic Panel Ceilings

.4 Division 26 - Electrical

1.3 EXAMINATION

.1 Examine work done under contract which would affect this section. Do no work until defects have been corrected.

1.4 PREPARATION

.1 Notify and instruct other sections in proper location of grounds fixing, etc, and supply metal fixings required to be built in at such times as will allow for proper installation.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 In each case where required produce for approval and use of others concerned, complete drawings and or description and photographs as may be required to accurately illustrate each item, and roughing in information, all in duplicate. Requirements are minimum and no extra charge may be made for additional accessories or equipment supplied as part of, or necessary for the proper operation of any item, but not particularly specified.

1.6 COMPLETION AND CLEANING

.1 Leave items with moving parts, installed under this section, lubricated, tested, adjusted and in perfect operation and order and leave clean and tidy at completion.

1.7 GUARANTEE AND SERVICE

.1 Items provided under this section must be unconditionally guaranteed against defects in materials, workmanship and operation for 12 months from date of acceptance by Owner, and shall be completely and properly serviced during this period.

Stantec Architecture Ltd. February 21, 2014

Section 10 80 00 L.F. McIntosh Building MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES Second Floor Renovation Page 2 of 4 Project No. 144401282 PART 2 Materials

2.1 HAWORTH SYSTEM WALLS. DOORS, FRAMES & HARDWARE (OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT)

.1 Shall be floor to ceiling high - Haworth - (SMED) "Lifespace" premanufactured portioning System c/w base, trim, frames, doors, sidelites, glazing and hardware as distributed by Haworth or approved equivalent. .1 Locations: to scheduled offices & areas of the 2nd floor. (See drawings for

scheduled partition locations.) .2 Fabric/Colour: Cameroon-Sand 1A-M15 or as selected by Consultant. .3 Trims: PVC - Lava LPVC24. .4 Doors: Ceiling height 1 3/4" solid core reversible pivot doors, maple veneer VP-

N. .5 Door Frames: Ceiling Height powdercoat finish complete with strike plate and

pivot hardware. .6 Glazing: Clear tempered typically - See Section 08 80 00. .7 Glazing Frames: Full powdercoat finish - Lava P24. .8 Hardware:

.1 Sargent KL Series Lockset 65G05, 626 Satin Chromium plated supplied with temporary construction cores. Section 08 71 00 will provide permanent individually/master keyed cores to all locksets provided by Haworth to Owner's existing building key system. Final keying requirements/schedule to be determined by Owner with supplier/Contractor of Section 08 71 00.

.2 Door stops, kickplates and closers shall be provided by this section of work to doors requiring same as determined by the Owner.

.9 Miscellaneous: .1 Electrical: Level 4 electrical consists of modular boxes & devices

(receptacles & switches) pre-wired in panel running from box to top of panel. The electrical whip (supplied by Haworth) extends 15' beyond the panel with a self-locking quick connector. A standard 10' whip with quick connector is provided for panels with switches. Switching as per plan. Lithonia Circuit Distributor Whips supplied by Haworth to be wired to junction box by others (junction box supplied by others). All receptacle whip ends to be labeled with corresponding Room number and Panel Circuit number.

.2 Final connection of Lifespace walls to zone boxes by Division 26 - Electrical.

.3 Data: Conduit, box and trim ring supplied by Haworth. Cable supply, final connection and face plates by others.

.4 All electrical equipment, including pre-manufactured wall and furniture system components, is to have 'ULC' or 'CSA' approval stickers. 'UL' approval stickers are not acceptable. Any equipment that does not have the required approval stickers will be rejected.

2.2 CORNER GUARDS

.1 Acrovyn Model “CO-8” 90° stainless steel corner guards with 89 mm (3 1/2“) standard legs, partial height guard to have an overall height from floor level to be 1220 mm (48”). Mount corner guards with construction adhesive to manufacturer’s recommendations.

.2 Stainless Steel Finish: To be type 304 alloy with #4 satin finish. February 21, 2014 Stantec Architecture Ltd.

L.F. McIntosh Building Section 10 80 00 Second Floor Renovation MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES Project No. 144401282 Page 3 of 4

.3 Locations: as shown on drawings.

2.3 SOUND MASKING SYSTEM

.1 Shall be a Vibra-sonic Digital Sound Masking System as distributed by Vibra Sonic Controls, #47 - 23 Glamis Drive S.W., Calgary, Alberta (Phone (403) 217-3555) - (Fax (403) 217-3547). See Appendix – Sound Masking Layout. .1 Performance Criteria

.1 To raise the ambient background sound level in the offices with speakers, a graphic equalizer, a noise generator and a power amplifier. The sound produced will reproduced will reproduce the masking spectrum that follows internationally accepted Noise Criteria Curves so that employees/ clients are not consciously aware that the airy sound the hear has been purposely added to the space to develop an acoustically balanced environment.

.2 To make voice communication less intelligible after 15 feet, enhancing speech privacy and reducing distraction due to overhead conversations. We will guarantee speech privacy in closed office.

.3 The sound masking system will feature "global volume control" with "centralized equalization" and "volume adjustment at each speaker". The entire sound masking system can be volume controlled and balanced from one centralized location.

.4 The central equalization for this sound masking system ensures that the sound generated meets the noise criteria curves for an appropriate sound-masking spectrum that is perfectly balanced over the entire system This facilitates an 'airy', pleasant sound that blends naturally with the other ambient background noises.

.5 The stepped volume control on each speaker allows fine-tuning to every 225 square foot area, catering to the personal preferences of individual employee or specific requirements for different zones within the office.

.6 The speaker system is 70 volt to make it compatible with all brands of amplifiers, equalizers and other standard input/output devices.

.2 Supply: .1 44 - M1000 Masking Speakers. .2 4 - ASP-MG24 Digital Signal Processors(s) - already on site .3 2 - CX108V 8 Channel Amplifier(s) - already on site .4 Plenum Rated Wire .5 Accessories .6 Power strip .7 Gator Travel Rack

.3 Design the system based on the floor plans - (See drawings for layout)

.4 Maintenance: Fine-tune the system for 1 year c/w parts & labour.

.5 Warranty: all components for five years.

Stantec Architecture Ltd. February 21, 2014

Section 10 80 00 L.F. McIntosh Building MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES Second Floor Renovation Page 4 of 4 Project No. 144401282 PART 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Installation of Haworth (SMED) Moveable Wall Partitioning System or approved equivalent complete with c/w all components and accessories shall be done by skilled factory approved mechanics. .1 Co-ordinate partitioning system with any Electrical and Mechanical Services.

.2 Install corner guards to scheduled locations in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s written recommendations, using only approved mounting procedures, and locating all components firmly into position, level and plumb.

.3 Installation of Sound Masking shall be by factory trained mechanics in accordance with product manufacturer's written literature. Division 26 - Electrical shall co-ordinate it's work to provide a complete operational installation with the supply/installation of sound masking materials specified in section of work.

END OF SECTION

February 21, 2014 Stantec Architecture Ltd.

L.F. McIntosh Building Section 12 21 00 Second Floor Renovation ROLLER BLINDS Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 1

PART 1 General

1.1 SCOPE

.1 Work of this section consists of the supply and installation of Roller Blinds complete with all required accessories and other related work shown on the accompanying drawings and specified herein.

1.2 EXAMINATION

.1 Examine work done under Contract which would affect this section. Do not work until defects have been corrected.

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract.

.2 Indicate dimensions in relation to window jambs, operator details, head (and sill) anchorage details, hardware and accessories details.

PART 2 Materials

2.1 SUN SHADE ROLLER BLINDS

.1 Shall be Sheerweave roller blind system - as manufactured by Hunter Douglas and shall be complete with valence & all required hardware, for a complete installation and operation of surface mount units to the following scheduled exterior windows: .1 Locations:

.1 All exterior windows at 2nd floor - (confirm quantity on site)

.2 Fabric: • Sheerweave - "Series 4000” • Colour - Greystone

.3 Sizes: verify all window opening sizes on site prior to manufacture of all roller blinds.

.4 Operation: Manual 'steel beaded' chain drives to all locations.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Installation shall be in accordance with the product manufacturer's written instructions for a first class installation and operation.

.2 Any required brackets, fasteners, components, etc. required to complete installation for operational vertical draperies other than as shown on drawings shall be the responsibility of this section of work.

END OF SECTION


L.F. McIntosh Building Section 21 00 00 Second Floor Renovation FIRE SUPPRESSION Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 11

Stantec Consulting Ltd. February 21, 2014

General PART 1

GENERAL 1.1

This section is common to all sections of Division 21 and supplements the requirements .1of Division 0 and Division 01.

Where errors or discrepancies appear in catalogue numbers, provide the article in .2accordance with the system requirements and to the standard of specifications.

INTENT 1.2

Provide complete and fully operational fire suppression systems with facilities and .1services to meet requirements described herein and in complete accord with applicable codes and ordinances.

Contract documents of this division are diagrammatic and approximately to scale unless .2detailed otherwise. They establish the scope, material and installation quality and are not detailed installation instructions.

The sprinkler drawings are intended only to show the scope of the sprinkler layout. The .3Sprinkler Contractor shall be responsible for inspecting the site and studying the architectural, structural, mechanical and electrical drawings and shall prepare approval drawings. See also plumbing drawings for water supply.

This Contractor shall include the supply of labour, materials, equipment and services .4necessary for the completion of the sprinkler and fire protection Work as hereinafter specified or shown on drawings. Any materials not specified or shown on the plans required to complete the Work must be supplied by the Contractor as part of his Contract, it being understood that the bid amount covers everything necessary for a complete first class job.

The Contractor's price shall be based upon a complete sprinkler system for the building, .5based upon the Contractor's layout. The number of heads as shown on drawings are not necessarily to be considered as the base number. However, the Contractor shall follow the pattern and general layout of the heads and the area coverage.

Generally the Contract consists of: .6

Modifications to existing wet pipe sprinkler systems on Second Floor of McIntosh .1Building. Light hazard requirement except the following rooms which shall be sprinklered to Ordinary Hazard Group 1:

Mechanical and Electrical Rooms. .1

Antifreeze systems if shown. .2

Alarm Systems. .3

Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets where shown. .4

DRAWINGS 1.3

Drawings for this division do not indicate exact architectural, structural, or electrical .1features. Examine drawings prior to laying out, fabricating, installing or commencing work to ensure no interference exists. Report conflicts to Consultant before proceeding. Any information involving accurate measurement of building shall be taken at building.

Section 21 00 00 L.F. McIntosh Building FIRE SUPPRESSION Second Floor Renovation Page 2 of 11 Project No. 144401282

February 21, 2014 Stantec Consulting Ltd.

Drawings indicate general location and route to be followed by pipes which are to be .2installed under this Contract. Where pipes are not shown on plans or are shown only diagrammatically, they shall be installed parallel to building lines and in such a way as to conserve head room and interfere as little as possible with free use of space through which they pass.

CODES, REGULATIONS, PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS 1.4

Conform to the latest edition and supplements of the following for all materials and .1installations:

National Building Code of Canada, as amended by local Bylaws and Provincial .1Statutes.

Codes, Standards, Bylaws, Statutes and Manufacturer's Association .2Specifications or instructions mentioned in Division 21 sections, refer to latest revisions thereof at time of calling of bids, unless specifically designated otherwise.

In no instance shall the standard established by the drawings and specifications .3be reduced by Code or otherwise.

Furnish all notices; obtain all necessary permits related to Division 21 works. .4

Employ tradesmen fully qualified under Provincial and local regulations pertaining .5to licensing and qualifications for tradesmen for this work.

APPROVALS 1.5

The complete system shall be in accordance with the standards for the installation of .1sprinkler systems as recommended by the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). Upon completion of the Work, the Contractor shall present the Owner with a certificate from the Insurance Underwriters, or their Agents.

The successful Sprinkler Contractor shall submit three copies of intended sprinkler .2drawings to the Consultant for approval before installation commences.

Drawings shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered with the .3Association of Professional Engineers of Saskatchewan; also be approved by the Fire Commissioner and the Insuring Company, if any.

PERMITS AND TESTING 1.6

This Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits necessary for the execution of his .1Work.

The completed system shall be tested in accordance with Sections 1-11, 1-12 of latest .2Canadian Underwriters Association pamphlet #13 (NFPA #13).

EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION 1.7

Follow manufacturer's recommended installation details and procedures for equipment, .1supplemented by details given herein and on plans subject to approval of the Consultant.

Install equipment generally in locations and routes shown, close to building structure with .2minimum interference with other services or free space. Remove and replace improperly installed equipment to satisfaction of the Consultant at no extra cost.



Provide labour, material and tools required to install, test and place into operation a .3complete mechanical system. Provide material for modifications required to correct minor job confliction.

Locate distribution systems, access doors, equipment and materials for maximum usable .4space to satisfaction of the Consultant.

EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 1.8

Replace materials or workmanship below specified quality and relocate work wrongly .1placed.

Materials and equipment installed to be new, full weight and of the best quality specified. .2Use same brand or manufacturer for each specific application. Provide statically and dynamically balanced rotating equipment for minimum vibration and low operating noise levels. Provide balancing certificates if requested by the Consultant.

Each major component of equipment to have manufacturer's name, address, catalogue .3and serial number in a conspicuous place.

Install materials and equipment in a neat and workmanlike manner by competent .4specialists. At the request of the Consultant, provide certificates proving competency of specialists employed. Certificates shall be from recognized, related governing associations. The Owner reserves the right to terminate any specific person's employment on this Project for failure to prove adequate qualifications and/or workmanship.

ABBREVIATIONS 1.9

Abbreviations used in this specification are common to and in general use within the .1related trades.

CUTTING AND PATCHING 1.10

Locate and provide holes and sleeves, cutting and fitting required for mechanical work. .1Relocate improperly located holes and sleeves at no extra cost.

Obtain approval from Consultant prior to any cutting of structural assemblies. Thoroughly .2co-ordinate cutting methods, processes and locations prior to cutting operations.

Cutting practices shall be limited to neat openings created through recognized drilling or .3coring practices.

Fill excess voids at openings with materials and practices as described in Section 07 84 .400 - Firestops.

Drill for expansion bolts, hanger rods, brackets and supports. .5

Patching of finished surfaces shall be consistent with sections of the Contract .6specifications identifying such construction.

Where piping passes through walls, steel pipe sleeves shall be supplied and installed. .7Where exposed piping passes through walls or floor in finished areas this Contractor shall provide chromium plated escutcheons.



STARTUP AND OPERATION OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS 1.11

The Contractor shall be responsible for the startup of all equipment and systems and .1shall place all equipment and systems in operating condition and in operation.

It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to make all necessary arrangements with the .2manufacturers of the various equipment and materials to have them available as required and as necessary to assist in startup and operation of their equipment.

All systems of every description that are part of the Division 21 Contract shall be tested .3and trial operated and adjusted and corrected until they function as designed.

PROGRESS OF WORK 1.12

Work is to be started as soon as possible after the Contract has been awarded and shall .1be carried on continuously so as to not interfere with or delay the completion of the Work.

APPROVAL OF CONTRACTOR 1.13

The Work shall be done by an experienced and recognized Sprinkler Contractor who has .1completed at least one installation of this size, to the approval of the Insurance Underwriters.

COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES 1.14

Sprinkler Contractor shall consult with and cooperate with all other trades, in both .1planning and executing his Work, to avoid conflict with other pipes, ducts, electrical fixtures and structural features, and to secure a neat and workmanlike appearance to the finished job. This Contractor shall note that it will be necessary in some cases to jog pipes around ducts. Large trunk ductwork has priority and the Sprinkler Contractor is expected to jog his piping as necessary. This requirement is to be insisted upon and problems of slope drainage, etc. are secondary.

CLASSIFICATION OF SPRINKLER SYSTEM 1.15

The system shall be of the automatic wet pipe type and shall be for Light Hazard as .1outlined by NFPA #13, except for any areas requiring Ordinary Hazard spacing.

The sprinkler system shall be hydraulically designed. .2

Special high density heads, if used, must have adequate pressure available. Hydraulic .3design must allow for this pressure.

CONTRACT CLOSE OUT 1.16

Refer to Division 01. .1

Perform the following items prior to Substantial Performance of the Work: .2

Fire Suppression systems capable of operation with alarm systems functional. .1

Necessary tests on equipment made including those required by authorities and .2certificates of approval obtained.

Valve tagging completed and equipment identified. Equipment and piping .3painted and escutcheons installed.

Warranty forms have been mailed to manufacturer. Provide copy of original .4warranty for equipment which has warranty period longer than one (1) year.



Submit sample of Operating/Maintenance Manuals. Arrange Operating and .5Maintenance Instructions and submit schedule for approval to Consultant.

Review and ensure access doors are suitably located and equipment easily .6accessible.

Submit record drawings. .7

The Sprinkler Contractor, at the completion of the job, shall provide the Owner .8with:

Instruction charts describing operation and proper maintenance of .1sprinkler devices.

Published pamphlet on Care and Maintenance of Sprinkler System. .2

Completed and signed Contractors' Material and Test Certificate. .3

Prior to Substantial Performance of the Work, provide complete list of items which are .3either not finished or deficient at the time of the inspection.

Provide declaration in writing that Substantial Performance of the Work deficiencies and .4the following items have been completed prior to the total performance inspection:

Equipment cleaned inside, outside and lubricated. .1

Instructions to Owners. .2

SHOP DRAWINGS 1.17

Provide shop drawings in accordance with Division 01 Submittals and this Section. .1

All shop drawings submitted for approval shall be certified by the manufacturer and .2carefully checked by this Contractor, noting all changes required, and shall bear the Contractor's approval stamp signature; drawings will not be considered if not previously checked by this Contractor.

Shop drawings shall include all information necessary to indicate the following: .3

Dimensional data for roughing-in and installation. .1

Technical data to enable the Consultant to check that the equipment meets the .2requirements of drawings and specifications.

Wiring, piping and service connection data for all trades. .3

All motor sizes complete with voltage rating. .4

Job name, Mechanical Contractor, Supplier or agent, Manufacturer, Consultant. .5

All pump curves. .6

Sound data, where applicable. .7

This Contractor shall accept full responsibility for any equipment ordered where this .4procedure has not been followed and no charges for cancellations, handling, restocking, etc. will be accepted for failure to carry out this procedure.

A complete file of approved shop drawings shall be kept on site at all times and no shop .5drawings shall be used which do not bear the signed review stamp of the Consultant.

Submittals to be made in both Metric and English units. .6

Shop drawings that are unclear or illegible will not be accepted. Faxed shop drawings .7are not acceptable.



OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 1.18

This project will require the preparation of Operation and Maintenance Manuals in .1accordance with Division 01 - Contract Close Out and this section. The Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be a compilation that includes fire suppression, plumbing, HVAC, controls and mechanical site services. The documentation that is required for this Division is to be turned over to the Division 23 Contractor for assembly into the final O&M manuals. The number of copies of O&M manual information shall satisfy the number specified in Division 01 plus one (1) additional copy for the Consultant.

Provide services of qualified and experienced personnel to prepare proper .2documentation and to instruct Owner in the operation and preventative maintenance of each piece of equipment and system supplied and installed. Complete and turn over documentation prior to Substantial Performance inspection.

The operating and maintenance information shall be fully indexed with table of contents .3(with clear plastic cover) at beginning and contain material according to the following indexing system:

Tab 1.0 Mechanical Systems: Title page with clear plastic protection cover. .1

Tab 1.1 List of Mechanical Drawings. .2

Tab 1.2 Description of Systems: Provide complete description of each system. .3Include detailed system description and components comprising that system, explanation of how each component interfaces with others to complete the system. Include complete and detailed operation of each major component. Include exact location of valves, switches and controls, operational sequence, troubleshooting sequence and safeguards to check if equipment goes off line. With each system description, include list of major equipment with make, model and serial numbers.

Tab 1.3 Maintenance and Lubrication Division: Provide detailed preventative .4maintenance and lubrication schedule for each of the major components to include daily, weekly, monthly, semi-annual and yearly checks and tasks.

Explain how to proceed with each task required for each piece of typical equipment such as bearings, drives and motors. Compile this information for each typical piece of equipment separate from the shop drawings section.

Tab 1.4 List of Equipment Suppliers and Contractors: Provide complete list of .5equipment Suppliers and Contractors, including address, telephone number, facsimile number and email address. Outline procedures for purchasing parts and equipment. Include steps to take in order to purchase new parts.

Tab 1.5 Guarantees: Include in this section all written guarantees and .6performance certificates for work under Division 21 including extended manufacturer warranties.

Tab 2.0, 2.1, etc. Certification: Include copy of test data: hydrostatic or air tests .7performed on piping systems, equipment alignment certificates, copy of valve tag identification and pipe colour code, inspection approval certificates for fire system. Include with major equipment makes, models and serial numbers.

Tab 3.0, 3.1, etc. Shop Drawings and Maintenance Bulletins: A complete set of .8manufacturer's shop drawings duly approved by Consultant, a complete set of manufacturer's operating and maintenance brochures parts list for all equipment.

The divider tabs shall be laminated mylar plastic, and coloured according to .9section. The colouring is as follows:

Mechanical Systems - 1.0 to 1.5 - Orange.

Certification - 2.0 to 2.4 - Green.

Shop Drawings and Maintenance - 3.0 to 3.17 - Yellow.



Plastic tabs with type insertions will not be accepted.

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS DEMONSTRATIONS 1.19

Provide mechanical systems demonstrations in accordance with Division 1. .1

Include in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals all instructions and information given .2to Owner's staff and instructions and information given by equipment manufacturer's representatives.

The Contractor shall ensure that he has included an adequate allowance in his bid for .3these instructions. Proper and thorough instructions will be insisted upon and adequate money will be held back until satisfactory instructions have been provided. Record instruction date, topic and attendance. Submit records to Consultant at completion of Project.

RECORD DRAWINGS 1.20

Refer to Division 01 for As-Built drawing requirements. .1

Keep on site an extra set of white prints and specifications recording changes and .2deviations daily. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to mark up as-built white prints and specifications to show addenda corrections and Owner initiated construction changes.

The As-Built white prints are to be turned over to the Owner and final payment may be .3held up by the Owner pending receipt of these drawings.

Record drawings shall locate and identify location of access doors, tagged valves and .4actual room names and numbers. Tagged valves shall be identified on drawings in accordance with valve directory. Particular attention shall be paid to buried or concealed work.

EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND CLEANUP 1.21

Protect equipment and materials in storage on site, during and after installation until final .1acceptance. Leave factory covers in place and take special precautions to prevent entry of foreign material into any working parts or into piping and duct systems.

Piping, ducts and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, cuttings and other .2foreign substances. Disconnect, clean and reconnect whenever necessary for purposes of locating and removing obstructions. Flush and clean heating systems as specified elsewhere prior to use for temporary or permanent heat. Note that use of heating systems for temporary heat is permissible only if approved by Consultant.

Contractor shall be entirely responsible for cleaning up and removing his debris after .3completion of this Contract.

All equipment throughout the Project shall be lubricated as per manufacturer's .4instructions prior to Substantial Performance of the Work.

TEMPORARY OR TRIAL USAGE 1.22

Temporary or trial usage by the Owner of mechanical equipment supplied under this .1Contract before final acceptance shall not represent acceptance.



Repair or replace permanent equipment used temporarily where any parts are worn or .2damaged.

Take responsibility for damage caused by defective materials or workmanship during .3temporary or trial usage.

ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 1.23

Refer to Division 0 which outlines criteria for approval of Equivalents/Alternatives. .1

Approvals are of manufacturer only. This Contractor shall be fully responsible for any .2additional work or materials required by the mechanical trades or other Contractors to accommodate approved alternate materials or equipment. Extras will not be approved to cover such work.

Manufacturers/Suppliers which are noted in individual sections as "Acceptable .3Manufacturers" are automatically approved for bidding and are not required to follow the approval process. All other Manufacturers/Suppliers must follow the approval process.

"Acceptable Manufacturers" must meet all requirements of specified equipment.

EXTENDED WARRANTY 1.24

For all mechanical components, provide warranty as described in General Conditions. .1

This general warranty is not to act as a waiver to any warranty specifying longer period. .2

IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT AND COLOUR CODING OF PIPING 1.25

All pieces of equipment (valves, switches, pumps, etc.) shall be numbered or named and .1indexed by this Contractor. Index shall state location of equipment, its name and its number. Number or name to be applied using black lamacoid plastic plates with white lettering screwed or adhered to the apparatus.

In case of valves and such pieces of equipment that do not have sufficient area to attach nameplates, a tag shall be attached securely with brass "S" hooks or chain. Tags shall be polished or lacquered brass or aluminum, 40 mm round or octagonal, with stamped letters or numbers, 15 mm high, filled with black paint. Use plates with 25 mm lettering on large equipment such as pumps, etc.

One copy of index shall be inserted into each copy of maintenance manuals. .2

All piping installed as part of this division shall be colour banded using manufactured pipe .3markers equivalent to W. H. Brady Company. Piping markings must comply with ANSI and CSA.

All markers must be in compliance with respect to: .1

Proper letter colour. .1

Proper letter size. .2

Correct background colour. .3

Proper marker size (length). .4

Pipe shall be marked as follows. .2

At valve stations (shut off valves). .1

At branch take-off and valves. .2

On pipe that passes through walls, floors and ceilings. .3



On pipe that leads to and from underground areas. .4

On all horizontal and vertical pipe runs, every 9 m (30') or less and there .5shall be at least one band in each compartment, room, story, etc.

At access doors. .6

At change of directions, complicated piping etc., in major equipment .7rooms so that piping systems may be easily followed viewing from floor or access platforms.

Install identification markers as directed by the manufacturer. .8

ELECTRICAL WORK 1.26

All wiring shall be in accordance with Electrical Section. .1

Supply and install all switches, starters, motor controllers and control apparatus, etc. as .2required for satisfactory completion of work as outlined in drawings and specifications. All electrical equipment supplied or installed shall have CSA approval for use in its intended location.

Provide as required any necessary wiring diagrams required for equipment. .3

CLEANING UP 1.27

After completion of this work, remove all rubbish, waste materials etc., due to work, make .1good all damage to building and leave premises and work in good order.

PAINTING 1.28

If equipment and material is to be painted refer to Section 09 90 00, unless noted .1otherwise.

Metal, other than galvanized steel, shall be prime coated under this Contract. .2

EXAMINATION OF SITE 1.29

Refer to Division 0. .1

COORDINATION OF MECHANICAL ITEMS 1.30

The Contractor shall arrange his work in cooperation with other trades in the building in a .1manner so as not to interfere with other work being carried out in the building and to the best advantage of the overall Project. He shall review and study Electrical, Structural and Architectural drawings.

Fire sprinklers shall be located as shown on Architectural reflected ceiling plans. .2Coordinate with light layouts. Locate centered in panels, T-bar grids, etc.

Likewise the location of fire sprinklers, extinguishers, etc. on walls shall be located as .3shown on Architectural drawings, such as elevations, work sheets, etc. Close co-ordination is required from all trades to ensure that the installations are disciplined to the requirements of the Contract.

All pipes which are to be concealed shall be installed neatly and closely to the building .4structure so that the necessary furring can be kept minimal.



PRICES FOR ADDITIONAL WORK 1.31

During the course of construction when this Contractor is requested to submit a price for .1the performance of additional work, his price shall be broken down to show the quantity and price of the items or material required to carry out the work together with a separate listing of the labour charges for each item.

COST BREAKDOWN 1.32

Submit to the Consultant at the time of Award of Contract cost breakdown of the Contract .1amount for the following items. Each item price shall be complete including piping, testing and balancing, vibration isolation, labour, overhead, mark-up etc.., where applicable to each item. Labour and material costs shall be shown separate for each item.

Items are as follows:

Job start and administration .1

Fire protection .2

Each progress claim submitted by the Contractor, for approval by the Consultant, shall .2indicate the work completed to date and the total cost, for each item indicated above. Contractor shall also provide a description of the work completed and the material and equipment delivered to the site for each progress claim period.

CONCEALMENT OF PIPES 1.33

It is the intention that piping be concealed above ceilings, in furred spaces, etc., except .1where otherwise shown or noted. Piping to be exposed shall be run in a neat workmanlike manner.

ACCESS PANELS 1.34

Access doors shall be supplied and installed wherever they are shown or necessary for .1proper servicing and removal of concealed equipment, such as valves.

Standard access door to be equivalent to MIFAB Type UA Universal with standard 1/4 .2turn screw driver cam latch.

Fire rated access door, where required, shall be equivalent to MIFAB series MFRU .3uninsulated fire rated door, 1½ hr UL rating, turn ring operator. 16 gauge door and frames.

Location of access doors shall be approved before installation. They shall be of size .4large enough to provide necessary access for the item they service.

PLATES AND SLEEVES 1.35

Supply and install sleeves wherever pipe passes through poured floors and wall. Use .1steel pipe or galvanized sheet steel sleeves for steel pipe and copper pipe sleeves for copper pipe.

Seal between pipe and sleeve at any fire separation, all as specified in Division 07. If plastic sleeves are used they must be removed before job is completed.



Approved chrome plated steel flanges shall be installed wherever exposed piping passes .2through finished floors, walls or ceilings.

FIRE STOPPING 1.36

Refer to Section 07 84 00 for Fire Stopping requirements. .1

DEMOLITION 1.37

As shown on drawings, some mechanical equipment and material is to be removed. .1Owner has first claim on all salvaged material. All material not claimed by the Owner shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site.

EXISTING SYSTEMS 1.38

Carefully dismantle existing mechanical equipment to be removed or relocated together .1with reusable materials. Existing equipment, piping, ductwork, conduit, light fixtures which interfere with the new installation shall be temporarily disconnected, remove that which the Owner does not wish to retain which shall become the Contractor’s property and removed from the site when so directed.

Where noted, this existing equipment shall be reused in new work after first repairing and reconditioning any defective items. Permanently disconnected mechanical and electrical connections shall be safely capped and sealed flush within finished surfaces. Remove existing inactive services which interfere with work execution.

Arrange work so that interruption of services is kept to a minimum. .2

The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs required to repair all damages to the .3existing building, equipment, etc. caused through execution of work in this contract.

END OF SECTION

L.F. McIntosh Building Section 21 05 29

Second Floor Renovation HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 2


PART 1 General

1.1 GENERAL

.1 Run all piping parallel to building lines. Where a number of pipes are to be hung side by side, pipes shall be hung using individual hangers; they shall not be supported by resting on pipe channel, angle or similar method. That is, trapeze hangers shall not be used unless approval has been obtained.

.2 Hangers and supports shall secure pipes in place, prevent vibration, maintain grade by adjustment, provide for expansion and contraction. Hangers or supports shall be located adjacent to all valves, pumps, equipment, etc. in order to prevent undue stresses in piping and equipment. All exposed hangers shall be prime coated. All exposed supports (rod, fasteners, brackets) shall be galvanized or cad plated.

.3 Do not use perforated band iron, wire or chain as hangers. All hanger rods are to have machine threads, capable of vertical adjustment after pipe is erected. Hanger rod and accessories exposed in crawl space shall be galvanized or cad plated. Where excessive lateral or axial movements may occur, provide hangers with suitable linkage to permit swing.

.4 Support horizontal steel piping as follows:

Nominal Pipe Size Distance Between

Supports (m) Hanger Rod Diameters

15 mm 2 9 mm

20 mm to 40 mm 2.5 9 mm

50 mm and 65 mm 3 9 mm

80 mm and 100 mm 3.5 16 mm

150 mm to 300 mm 4 22 mm

.5 Expansion of Pipes, Expansion Joints, Anchors and Guides

.1 Supply and install all pipe Work shown on the plans in such a manner as to allow it to expand and Contract with temperature changes without producing undue stress in piping and connections and install pipe loops as shown or required.

.2 Piping shall be rigidly anchored to the building at all points shown or necessary using substantial steel angles or channels. Anchors shall be to the approval of the Consultant.

.3 Where grooved piping method used, provide four Victaulic style 77 couplings between each pump inlet and outlet and first rigid support.

.4 Provide thrust restraint as necessary throughout the Project.

PART 2 Products

.1 Hangers and supports shall be suitable for the service and selected in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended maximum loading. All hangers shall have a safety factor of 5 to 1. Hanger types shall be as follows:

.1 Steel Piping Systems:

Section 21 05 29 L.F. McIntosh Building

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION Second Floor Renovation

PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

Page 2 of 2 Project No. 144401282


Nominal Pipe Size

(mm) Service Hanger Type Material

15 mm - 40 mm All services Adjustable wrought ring Carbon Steel

50 mm - 100 mm All services Adjustable wrought clevis (heavy duty)

Carbon Steel


Carbon Steel

2.2 ESCUTCHEON PLATES

Provide escutcheon plates of chrome or nickel plated brass, solid type, with set screws for ceiling or wall mounting. In Equipment Rooms, provide cast iron type.

PART 3 Execution

.1 Piping hung or supported by ring or clevis hangers shall be placed directly onto the hanger.

.2 Provide lateral or sway bracing as necessary throughout the project.

.3 Provide thrust restraint as necessary throughout the project.

END OF SECTION


Second Floor Renovation WET PIPE FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS



PART 1 General

1.1 SCOPE

.1 Equipment, piping, including sprinkler heads, valves, hangers and supports, sleeves, fire department connections and accessories.

.2 Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of all fire alarm interlocks with Division 28.

1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS


.2 Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Procedures.


.1 Provide complete sprinkler system as required by local Codes and as indicated on drawings. Size of sprinkler system based on light hazard occupancy and ordinary hazard occupancy group.

.2 Provide sprinklers for areas as indicated and as required, including specialized rooms. Run piping concealed above furred ceilings and in joist to minimize obstructions. Expose only heads.

.3 Hydraulically size sprinkler system based on performance of existing fire pump.


.1 Sprinkler equipment and installation shall be in accordance with the current edition of NFPA 13 - Standards for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems and approved by the Authority having jurisdiction.

.2 Sprinkler equipment shall be installed by qualified contractors licensed and regularly engaged in installation of automatic fire sprinkler equipment.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

.1 Refer to Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.2 Submit shop drawings, hydraulic calculations and equipment data of entire sprinkler system. Submitted drawings to be designed and stamped by a Professional Engineer.

.3 Submit for approval sample of all types of sprinkler heads to be used.

.4 Refer to Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

1.6 ENGINEERING DESIGN CRITERIA

.1 Design system in accordance with NFPA 13, using the following parameters:

.1 Hazard: To suit occupancy classification based on the quantity and/or combustibility of the building contents.


WET PIPE FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS Second Floor Renovation



.2 Pipe Size and Layout:

.1 Hydraulic design in accordance with NFPA standards.

.2 Sprinkler head layout: to NFPA 13, as directed by Authority having jurisdiction or as indicated on reflected ceiling plans, while meeting or exceeding the requirements of NFPA 13.

.3 Water Supply: Conduct flow pressure test of water supply provided by existing fire pump to obtain criteria for basis of design in accordance with NFPA 13.

.4 Zoning: System zoning as indicated or in accordance with NFPA standards.

1.7 MAINTENANCE DATA AND MATERIALS

.1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 21 00 00 - Documentation for Fire Suppression and Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals.

.2 Provide spare sprinklers and tools as indicated in Section 2 - Spare Parts Cabinet.

1.8 APPROVAL OF CONTRACTOR

.1 The work shall be done by an experienced and recognized Sprinkler Contractor who has completed at least one installation of this size to the approval of the Insurance Underwriters.

PART 2 Products

2.1 SPRINKLERS

.1 Provide sprinkler heads as approved by Canadian Underwriters Association. Where heads are located close to heating coils, unit heaters, mercury vapor lights, etc., heads of high temperature type are to be use to suit Canadian Underwriters regulations. Pendent heads as described below shall be used where any suspended ceilings occur, care being taken to locate heads in symmetrical pattern to suit the ceiling pattern, also to miss lights and fixtures, ductwork, etc. Heads shall be placed in the pattern shown on Mechanical drawings and reflected ceiling plans.

.2 Submit samples of sprinkler heads before installation.

.3 In all areas (except as noted) sprinkler heads shall be equivalent to Reliable Model GI concealed automatic sprinkler (AThe Concealer@), with full 25 mm field adjustment for installation flexibility, white finished cover plate to match ceilings. Submit samples of sprinkler heads before installation.

.4 Upright sprinkler heads shall be equivalent to Reliable Model G upright automatic sprinklers, bright chrome finish.

.5 Sidewall sprinklers in areas having large distance coverage shall be equivalent to Automatic Sprinkler Series 38-3000 or Reliable Model D type. Otherwise use standard chromed sidewall heads.

.6 For other areas, such as boiler room, janitor=s room, store rooms, crawl space, etc., standard brass finished pendent type or upright heads shall be used with escutcheon plates, Grinnell ADuraspeed@ or approved equivalent.





.7 This Contractor shall supply extra sprinklers for stock. These sprinklers shall correspond as to type and temperature ratings. The sprinklers shall be kept in a standard cabinet furnished by this Contractor. This Contractor shall provide in the cabinet a special wrench to be used in the removal and installation of sprinklers.

.8 Provide guards on heads where shown on drawings. Guards shall be equivalent to NFE model 01-105.

2.2 PIPING

.1 Pipe used in sprinkler system shall be designed to withstand a working pressure of 1200 kPa.

.2 Sprinkler piping and fittings shall be UL approved, Factory Mutual approved, NFPA approved and approved by the Authority having jurisdiction.

2.3 VALVES, PIPE FITTINGS AND HANGERS

.1 Valves

.1 All valves on connections to water supplies and in supply pipes to sprinklers shall be outside screw and yoke (OS & Y) or approved indicator type.

.2 Check valves shall be of approved type.

.3 Drain valves, test valves, etc. 50 mm and smaller shall be brass.

.4 All control, drain, test and alarm valves shall be provided with identification signs of standard design adopted by the automatic sprinkler industry.

.5 All valves shall be Jenkins, Crane or equivalent and shall be 1033 kPa SWP.

.2 Fittings

.1 Fittings shall be of a type specifically approved for use in sprinkler systems to withstand a pressure of 1200 kPa.

.2 All inside piping shall be installed by means of screwed, flanged fittings or grooved fittings. Permission for welding must be obtained from the authority having jurisdiction.

.3 A one-piece reducing fitting of approved design should be used wherever a change is made in pipe size.

.3 Hangers

.1 Sprinkler piping shall be substantially supported from building structure.

.2 Hanger shall be of type approved by the Underwriters.

.3 Spacing of hangers shall be as laid down by the Underwriters.

.4 Refer to Section 21 05 29.

.4 Flushing Connections: Standard flushing connections shall be provided where shown on drawings or where necessary.

.5 Test Connections: A test pipe of not less than 25 mm diameter, terminating in a smooth bore corrosion resistant outlet, having a flow equivalent to one sprinkler shall be provided as indicated on drawings or as necessary.

2.4 AUTOMATIC FIRE ALARM CHECK VALVES AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT

.1 Fire Alarm valve is existing.


WET PIPE FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS Second Floor Renovation



2.5 SUPERVISORY DEVICES

.1 Supervisory devices on valve of the plug type with loop through valve handle are not acceptable. Supply and install positive type, tamper proof, supervisory devices.

.2 Wiring by Electrical Contractor.

2.6 PRESSURE GAUGES

.1 ULC listed Meters and Gauges for Fire Suppression Systems.

.2 Shall have maximum limit of not less than twice normal working pressure at point where installed.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install, inspect and test to acceptance with NFPA 13 and local authorities.

.2 Protect sprinkler heads against mechanical injury with standard guards when necessary.

.3 All sprinkler system isolation valves, including those on glycol loops (in areas subject to freezing), shall have fire alarm contacts that can be monitored on the building fire alarm system. Coordinate contact type and wiring with Division 28.

.4 Centre heads in ceiling tile, see reflected ceiling layout. Sprinkler head locations shall be located symmetrically within each room or area but shall not exceed the manufactures ULC listed maximum spacing. Provide swing joints so adjustments can be made for exact placement of heads.

.5 Locate zone shutoff valves visible from the floor. Do not conceal from view, locate in janitor, storage rooms or stairwells as approved by the Consultant.

.6 Arrange sprinkler piping and provide auxiliary drain valves such that it is completely drainable. Extend drain lines to the floor level within the reach of a floor drain with a 15 m hose.

.7 Provide sprinkler flow test connections as per NFPA 13.

.8 Identify all piping and isolation valves in accordance with Section 21 00 00.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF PIPING

.1 Piping shall be installed in such a manner that all pipe and fittings may be thoroughly drained where practicable, all piping should be arranged to drain to the main drain valve. Where this is not feasible, drain valves with hose bibb connections shall be provided where necessary.

.2 Pipe shall be straight and free from sags and pockets as is possible. Slope piping where possible. On all risers 100 mm and larger, 50 mm drain pipes and valves shall be provided.





.3 Feed and cross mains shall be braced to prevent excessive oscillation. Branch lines shall not require bracing.

3.3 JOINING OF PIPE AND FITTINGS

.1 All threaded fittings and pipe shall have threads cut to standard. Care should be taken that pipe does not extend into fitting sufficiently to reduce the waterway.

.2 Pipe shall be properly reamed after cutting to remove all burrs and fins.

.3 Joint compound shall be applied to male threads only.

.4 Grooved type couplings may be used and shall be installed in approved manner.

3.4 TESTING

.1 The system including yard piping shall be tested hydrostatically at not less than 1378 kPa for two hours and shall be done according to Underwriters instructions.

.2 The amount of leakage shall not be more than specified by the Fire Underwriters.

.3 All tests shall be made by the Contractor in the presence of an inspector of the authority having jurisdiction. When an inspector is not available and permission is granted by the authority having jurisdiction, test may be witnessed by the Owner or his representative and test certificate signed by same.

.4 Verify operation of all alarm switches under operating (flows, tamper, etc.) conditions. Co-ordinate verification with Electrical Division to allow complete alarm function to be tested. Prepare written report listing each alarm point and test performed. Turn over report to Consultant prior to Substantial Performance.

3.5 SPRINKLER HEAD LAYOUT

.1 The Contractor's bid price shall be based upon a complete sprinkler system for the building based upon the Contractor's layout. (The number of heads as shown on drawings are not necessarily to be considered as the base number.)

END OF SECTION


Second Floor Renovation DRY CHEMICAL FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS



PART 1 General

1.1 SCOPE

.1 Fire extinguishers and fire extinguisher cabinets.


.1 Provide portable hand extinguishers and cabinets where indicated on drawings and specified herein.


.1 Fire protection equipment and installation shall be approved by local Fire Commissioner.

.2 Equipment and installation shall meet the requirements of NFPA 10 - Portable Fire Extinguishers.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit shop drawings for review.

PART 2 Products

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

.1 Fire extinguishers: National, Flag, Kidde.

.2 Fire extinguisher cabinets: Wilson & Cousins.

2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS

.1 Supply and install fire extinguishers and cabinets as shown on drawings and described herein.

.2 Extinguisher cabinets located as shown on drawings shall be equivalent to National Fire Equipment Model 102-RS-SS recessed to accommodate a 2.27 Kg (5 pound) dry chemical extinguisher. Door and cabinet shall be vertical stainless steel style with plexiglas window. Cabinet to be 16 gauge with 12 gauge door with plexiglas panel. Latch to be all metal.

.1 Equivalent product: Wilson & Cousins.

.3 Extinguishers for mounting inside cabinets shall be equivalent to National Fire Equipment Ltd., 2.27 Kg (5 pounds) dry chemical type having a 2A+10B:C rating.

.1 Equivalent product: Wilson & Cousins.

.4 Supply and install dry chemical fire extinguishers where shown on drawings.

.5 All extinguishers, cabinets, etc. to be ULC approved.


DRY CHEMICAL FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS Second Floor Renovation



.6 In addition to extinguishers in cabinets, supply and install dry chemical fire extinguishers in the following rooms c/w wall mounting brackets. Extinguishers shall be 4.5 Kg 4A:60BC.

.1 Mechanical Rooms.

.2 Janitor Rooms.

.3 Elsewhere as shown on drawings.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

.1 Install cabinets and extinguishers in locations as shown on drawings.

END OF SECTION


Second Floor Renovation PLUMBING



PART 1 General

1.1 GENERAL

.1 This section is common to all sections of Division 22 and supplements the requirements of Division 0 and Division 01.

.2 Where errors or discrepancies appear in catalogue numbers, provide the article in accordance with the system requirements and to the standard of specifications.

1.2 INTENT

.1 Provide complete and fully operational plumbing systems with facilities and services to meet requirements described herein and in complete accord with applicable codes and ordinances.

.2 Contract documents of this division are diagrammatic and approximately to scale unless detailed otherwise. They establish the scope, material and installation quality and are not detailed installation instructions.

1.3 DRAWINGS

.1 Drawings for this division do not indicate exact architectural, structural, or electrical features. Examine drawings prior to laying out, fabricating, installing or commencing work to ensure no interference exists. Report conflicts to Consultant before proceeding. Any information involving accurate measurement of building shall be taken at building.

.2 Drawings indicate general location and route to be followed by pipes which are to be installed under this Contract. Where pipes are not shown on plans or are shown only diagrammatically, they shall be installed parallel to building lines and in such a way as to conserve head room and interfere as little as possible with free use of space through which they pass.

1.4 CODES, REGULATIONS, PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS

.1 Conform to the latest edition and supplements of the following for all materials and installations:

.1 National Building Code of Canada, as amended by local Bylaws and Provincial Statutes.

.2 Codes, Standards, Bylaws, Statutes and Manufacturer's Association Specifications or instructions mentioned in Division 22 sections, refer to latest revisions thereof at time of calling of bids, unless specifically designated otherwise.

.3 In no instance shall the standard established by the drawings and specifications be reduced by Code or otherwise.

.4 Furnish all notices, obtain all necessary permits related to Division 22 works.

.5 Employ tradesmen fully qualified under Provincial and local regulations pertaining to licensing and qualifications for tradesmen for this work.


PLUMBING Second Floor Renovation



1.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

.1 Follow manufacturer's recommended installation details and procedures for equipment, supplemented by details given herein and on plans subject to approval of the Consultant.

.2 Install equipment generally in locations and routes shown, close to building structure with minimum interference with other services or free space. Remove and replace improperly installed equipment to satisfaction of the Consultant at no extra cost.

.3 Provide labour, material and tools required to install, test and place into operation a complete mechanical system. Provide material for modifications required to correct minor job confliction.

.4 Locate distribution systems, access doors, equipment and materials for maximum usable space to satisfaction of the Consultant.

1.6 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

.1 Replace materials or workmanship below specified quality and relocate work wrongly placed.

.2 Materials and equipment installed to be new, full weight and of the best quality specified. Use same brand or manufacturer for each specific application. Provide statically and dynamically balanced rotating equipment for minimum vibration and low operating noise levels. Provide balancing certificates if requested by the Consultant.

.3 Each major component of equipment to have manufacturer's name, address, catalogue and serial number in a conspicuous place.

.4 Install materials and equipment in a neat and workmanlike manner by competent specialists. At the request of the Consultant, provide certificates proving competency of specialists employed. Certificates shall be from recognized, related governing associations. The Owner reserves the right to terminate any specific person's employment on this Project for failure to prove adequate qualifications and/or workmanship.

1.7 ABBREVIATIONS

.1 Abbreviations used in this specification are common to and in general use within the related trades.

1.8 CUTTING AND PATCHING

.1 Locate and provide holes and sleeves, cutting and fitting required for mechanical work. Relocate improperly located holes and sleeves at no extra cost.

.2 Obtain approval from Consultant prior to any cutting of structural assemblies. Thoroughly co-ordinate cutting methods, processes and locations prior to cutting operations.

.3 Cutting practices shall be limited to neat openings created through recognized drilling or coring practices.

.4 Fill excess voids at openings with materials and practices as described in Division 07 Firestops.

.5 Drill for expansion bolts, hanger rods, brackets and supports.





.6 Patching of finished surfaces shall be consistent with sections of the Contract specifications identifying such construction.

1.9 STARTUP AND OPERATION OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the startup of all equipment and systems and shall place all equipment and systems in operating condition and in operation.

.2 It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to make all necessary arrangements with the manufacturers of the various equipment and materials to have them available as required and as necessary to assist in startup and operation of their equipment.

.3 All systems of every description that are part of the Mechanical Contract shall be tested and trial operated and adjusted and corrected until they function as designed.

1.10 CONTRACT CLOSE OUT

.1 .1 Refer to Division 01.

.2 Perform the following items prior to Substantial Performance of the Work:

.1 Mechanical systems capable of operation with alarm systems functional.

.2 Necessary tests on equipment made including those required by authorities and certificates of approval obtained.

.3 Valve tagging completed and equipment identified. Equipment and piping painted and escutcheons installed.

.4 Warranty forms have been mailed to manufacturer. Provide copy of original warranty for equipment which has warranty period longer than one (1) year.

.5 Submit sample of Operating/Maintenance Manuals. Arrange Operating and Maintenance Instructions and submit schedule for approval to Consultant.

.6 Review and ensure access doors are suitably located and equipment easily accessible.

.7 Submit record drawings.

.3 Prior to Substantial Performance of the Work, provide complete list of items which are either not finished or deficient at the time of the inspection.

.4 Provide declaration in writing that Substantial Performance of the Work deficiencies and the following items have been completed prior to the total performance inspection:

.1 Equipment cleaned inside, outside and lubricated.

.2 Instructions to Owners, refer to individual sections in Division 22.

1.11 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Provide shop drawings in accordance with Division 01 Submittals and this Section.

.2 All shop drawings submitted for approval shall be certified by the manufacturer and carefully checked by this Contractor, noting all changes required, and shall bear the Contractor's approval stamp signature; drawings will not be considered if not previously checked by this Contractor.

.3 Shop drawings shall include all information necessary to indicate the following:

.1 Dimensional data for roughing-in and installation.





.2 Technical data to enable the Consultant to check that the equipment meets the requirements of drawings and specifications.

.3 Wiring, piping and service connection data for all trades.

.4 All motor sizes complete with voltage rating.

.5 Job name, Mechanical Contractor, Supplier or agent, Manufacturer, Consultant.

.6 Schedules as applicable for coils, radiation, grilles, etc.

.7 All fan and pump curves.

.8 Sound data, where applicable.

.4 This Contractor shall accept full responsibility for any equipment ordered where this procedure has not been followed and no charges for cancellations, handling, restocking, etc. will be accepted for failure to carry out this procedure.

.5 A complete file of approved shop drawings shall be kept on site at all times and no shop drawings shall be used which do not bear the signed review stamp of the Consultant.

.6 Submittals to be made in both Metric and English units.

.7 Shop drawings that are unclear or illegible will not be accepted. Faxed shop drawings are not acceptable.

1.12 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

.1 This project will require the preparation of Operation and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with Division 01 - Contract Close Out and this section.

The Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be compilation that includes fire suppression, plumbing, HVAC, controls and mechanical site services. The documentation that is required for this Division is to be turned over to the Division 23 Contractor for assembly into the final O&M manuals. The number of copies of O&M manual information shall satisfy the number specified in Division 01 plus one (1) additional copy for the Consultant.

.2 Provide services of qualified and experienced personnel to prepare proper documentation and to instruct Owner in the operation and preventative maintenance of each piece of equipment and system supplied and installed. Complete and turn over documentation prior to Substantial Performance inspection.

.3 The operating and maintenance information shall be fully indexed with table of contents (with clear plastic cover) at beginning and contain material according to the following indexing system:

.1 Tab 1.0 Mechanical Systems: Title page with clear plastic protection cover.

.2 Tab 1.1 List of Mechanical Drawings.

.3 Tab 1.2 Description of Systems: Provide complete description of each system. Include detailed system description and components comprising that system, explanation of how each component interfaces with others to complete the system, location of each thermostat, controller or operating setpoint. Include complete and detailed operation of each major component. Include how to energize and exact location of switches and controls, operational sequence, operational characteristic changes for summer or winter operation, and how to accomplish the changeover, complete troubleshooting sequence when setpoints cannot be maintained and safeguards to check if equipment goes off line. With each system description, include list of major equipment with make, model and serial numbers.





.4 Tab 1.3 Maintenance and Lubrication Division: Provide detailed preventative maintenance and lubrication schedule for each of the major components to include daily, weekly, monthly, semi-annual and yearly checks and tasks.

Explain how to proceed with each task required for each piece of typical equipment such as bearings, drives, motors and filters. Compile this information for each typical piece of equipment separate from the shop drawings section.

.5 Tab 1.4 List of Equipment Suppliers and Contractors: Provide complete list of equipment Suppliers and Contractors, including address, telephone number, facsimile number and E-mail address. Outline procedures for purchasing parts and equipment. Include steps to take in order to purchase new parts.

.6 Tab 1.5 Guarantees: Include in this section all written guarantees and performance certificates for work under Division 22 including extended manufacturer warranties.

.7 Tab 2.0, 2.1, etc. Certification: Include copy of test data: analysis of system water taken at time system was put into operation, hydrostatic or air tests performed on piping systems, equipment alignment certificates, copy of balancing data for water systems, copy of valve tag identification and pipe colour code, inspection approval certificates for plumbing system and operational tests on gas fired equipment, test data for motors, giving kW (HP), current data, motor rpm, voltage and phase. Include with major equipment makes, models and serial numbers.

.8 Tab 3.0, 3.1, etc. Shop Drawings and Maintenance Bulletins: A complete set of manufacturer's shop drawings duly approved by Consultant, a complete set of manufacturer's operating and maintenance brochures parts list for all equipment.

.9 The divider tabs shall be laminated mylar plastic, and coloured according to section. The colouring is as follows:

.1 Mechanical Systems - 1.0 to 1.5 - Orange.

.2 Certification - 2.0 to 2.4 - Green.

.3 Shop Drawings and Maintenance - 3.0 to 3.17 - Yellow.

.4 Plastic tabs with type insertions will not be accepted.

1.13 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS DEMONSTRATIONS

.1 Provide mechanical systems demonstrations in accordance with Division 01.

.2 Include in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals all instructions and information given to Owner's staff and instructions and information given by equipment manufacturer's representatives.

.3 The Contractor shall ensure that he has included an adequate allowance in his bid for these instructions. Proper and thorough instructions will be insisted upon and adequate money will be held back until satisfactory instructions have been provided. Record instruction date, topic and attendance. Submit records to Consultant at completion of Project.

1.14 RECORD DRAWINGS

.1 Refer to Division 01 for As-Built drawing requirements.

.2 Keep on site an extra set of white prints and specifications recording changes and deviations daily. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to mark up as-built white prints and specifications to show addenda corrections and Owner initiated construction changes.





.3 The As-Built white prints are to be turned over to the Owner and final payment may be held up by the Owner pending receipt of these drawings.

.4 Record drawings shall locate and identify location of access doors, tagged valves and actual room names and numbers. Tagged valves shall be identified on drawings in accordance with valve directory. Particular attention shall be paid to buried or concealed work.

1.15 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND CLEANUP

.1 Protect equipment and materials in storage on site, during and after installation until final acceptance. Leave factory covers in place and take special precautions to prevent entry of foreign material into any working parts or into piping and duct systems.

.2 Piping and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, cuttings and other foreign substances. Disconnect, clean and reconnect whenever necessary for purposes of locating and removing obstructions.

.3 Contractor shall be entirely responsible for cleaning up and removing his debris after completion of this Contract.

.4 All equipment throughout the Project shall be lubricated as per manufacturer's instructions prior to Substantial Performance of the Work.

1.16 TEMPORARY OR TRIAL USAGE

.1 Temporary or trial usage by the Owner of mechanical equipment supplied under this Contract before final acceptance shall not represent acceptance.

.2 Repair or replace permanent equipment used temporarily where any parts are worn or damaged.

.3 Take responsibility for damage caused by defective materials or workmanship during temporary or trial usage.

1.17 ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

.1 Refer to Division 0 which outlines criteria for approval of Equivalents/Alternatives.

.2 Approvals are of manufacturer only. This Contractor shall be fully responsible for any additional work or materials required by the mechanical trades or other Contractors to accommodate approved alternate materials or equipment. Extras will not be approved to cover such work.

.3 Manufacturers/Suppliers which are noted in individual sections as "Acceptable Manufacturers" are automatically approved for bidding and are not required to follow the approval process. All other Manufacturers/Suppliers must follow the approval process.


1.18 EXTENDED WARRANTY

.1 For all mechanical components, provide warranty as described in General Conditions.

.2 This general warranty is not to act as a waiver to any warranty specifying longer period.





1.19 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT AND COLOUR CODING OF PIPING

.1 All pieces of equipment (valves, switches, pumps, etc.) shall be numbered or named and indexed by this Contractor. Index shall state location of equipment, its name and its number. Number or name to be applied using black lamacoid plastic plates with white lettering screwed or adhered to the apparatus.

In case of valves and such pieces of equipment that do not have sufficient area to attach nameplates, a tag shall be attached securely with brass "S" hooks or chain. Tags shall be polished or lacquered brass or aluminum, 40 mm round or octagonal, with stamped letters or numbers, 15 mm high, filled with black paint. Use plates with 25 mm lettering on large equipment such as pumps, etc.

.2 One copy of index shall be inserted into each copy of maintenance manuals.

.3 All piping installed as part of this division shall be colour banded using manufactured pipe markers equivalent to W. H. Brady Company. Piping markings must comply with ANSI and CSA. All markers must be in compliance with respect to:

.1 Proper letter colour.

.2 Proper letter size.

.3 Correct background colour.

.4 Proper marker size (length).

Pipe shall be marked as follows.

.1 At valve stations (shut off valves).

.2 At branch take-off and valves.

.3 On pipe that passes through walls, floors and ceilings.

.4 On pipe that leads to and from underground areas.

.5 On all horizontal and vertical pipe runs, every 9 m (30') or less and there shall be at least one band in each compartment, room, story, etc.

.6 At access doors.

.7 At change of directions, complicated piping etc., in major equipment rooms so that piping systems may be easily followed viewing from floor or access platforms.

.8 Install identification markers as directed by the manufacturer.

1.20 ELECTRICAL WORK

.1 All wiring shall be in accordance with Electrical Division.

.2 Supply and install all switches, starters, motor controllers and control apparatus, etc. as required for satisfactory completion of work as outlined in drawings and specifications. All electrical equipment supplied or installed shall have CSA approval for use in its intended location.

.3 Provide as required any necessary wiring diagrams required for equipment.

1.21 CLEANING UP

.1 After completion of this work, remove all rubbish, waste materials etc., due to work, make good all damage to building and leave premises and work in good order.





1.22 PAINTING

.1 If equipment and material is to be painted refer to Section 09 90 00, unless noted otherwise.

.2 Metal, other than galvanized steel, shall be prime coated under this Contract.

1.23 EXAMINATION OF SITE

.1 Refer to Division 0.

1.24 CO-ORDINATION OF MECHANICAL ITEMS

.1 The Contractor shall arrange his work in cooperation with other trades in the building in a manner so as not to interfere with other work being carried out in the building and to the best advantage of the overall Project. He shall review and study Electrical, Structural and Architectural drawings.

.2 Plumbing fixtures shall be located as shown on Architectural plans. Coordinate with millwork/furniture layouts.

.3 The location of plumbing fixtures on walls shall be located as shown on Architectural as elevations, work sheets, etc. Close co-ordination is required from all trades to ensure that the installations are disciplined to the requirements of the Contract.

.4 All pipes which are to be concealed shall be installed neatly and closely to the building structure so that the necessary furring can be kept minimal.

1.25 PRICES FOR ADDITIONAL WORK

.1 During the course of construction when this Contractor is requested to submit a price for the performance of additional work, his price shall be broken down to show the quantity and price of the items or material required to carry out the work together with a separate listing of the labour charges for each item.

1.26 COST BREAKDOWN

.1 Submit to the Consultant at the time of Award of Contract cost breakdown of the Contract amount for the following items. Each item price shall be complete including piping, controls, insulation, testing and balancing, vibration isolation, labour, overhead, mark-up etc., where applicable to each item. Labour and material costs shall be shown separate for each item. Items are as follows:

.1 Job start and administration

.2 Sanitary drainage and venting systems

.3 Domestic water systems

.4 Plumbing fixtures and equipment

.5 Balancing

.6 Insulation

.2 Each progress claim submitted by the Contractor, for approval by the Consultant, shall indicate the work completed to date and the total cost, for each item indicated above. Contractor shall also provide a description of the work completed and the material and equipment delivered to the site for each progress claim period.





1.27 CONCEALMENT OF PIPES

.1 It is the intention that piping be concealed above ceilings, in furred spaces, etc., except where otherwise shown or noted. Piping to be exposed shall be run in a neat workmanlike manner.

1.28 ACCESS PANELS

.1 Access doors shall be supplied and installed wherever they are shown or necessary for proper servicing and removal of concealed equipment, such as valves, cleanouts, vents, drain access, etc.

.2 Standard access door to be equivalent to MIFAB Type UA Universal with standard 1/4 turn screw driver cam latch.

.3 Fire rated access door, where required, shall be equivalent to MIFAB series MFRU uninsulated fire rated door, 12 hr UL rating, turn ring operator. 16 gauge door and frames.

.4 Location of access doors shall be approved before installation. They shall be of size large enough to provide necessary access for the item they service.

1.29 PLATES AND SLEEVES

.1 Supply and install sleeves wherever pipe passes through poured floors and wall. Use steel pipe or galvanized sheet steel sleeves for steel pipe and copper pipe sleeves for copper pipe. Seal between pipe and sleeve at any fire separation, all as specified in Division 07. If plastic sleeves are used they must be removed before job is completed.

.2 Approved chrome plated steel flanges shall be installed wherever exposed piping passes through finished floors, walls or ceilings.

1.30 FIRE STOPPING

.1 Refer to Section 07 84 00 for Fire Stopping requirements.

1.31 DEMOLITION

.1 As shown on drawings, some mechanical equipment and material is to be removed. Owner has first claim on all salvaged material. All material not claimed by the Owner shall be come the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site.

1.32 EXISTING SYSTEMS

.1 Carefully dismantle existing mechanical equipment to be removed or relocated together with reusable materials. Existing equipment, piping, ductwork, conduit, light fixtures which interfere with the new installation shall be temporarily disconnected, remove that which the Owner does not wish to retain which shall become the Contractor’s property and removed from the site when so directed. Where noted, this existing equipment shall be reused in new work after first repairing and reconditioning any defective items. Permanently disconnected mechanical and electrical connections shall be safely capped and sealed flush within finished surfaces. Remove existing inactive services which interfere with work execution.

.2 Arrange work so that interruption of services is kept to a minimum.





.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs required to repair all damages to the existing building, equipment, etc. caused through execution of work in this contract.

1.33 ASBESTOS INSULATION

.1 Contractor shall be aware that insulation on pipe fittings and ductwork may contain asbestos. Wherever work requires this insulation to be disturbed or removed, it shall be the Owner’s responsibility to remove and dispose of it. Contractor shall advise Owner immediately upon finding any asbestos that needs to be removed. All work to be done in complete compliance with Provincial Regulations.

END OF SECTION


Second Floor Renovation COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR

PLUMBING EQUIPMENT



PART 1 General

1.1 GENERAL

.1 Where mechanical equipment is supplied with electrical motors, they shall be as specified herein.

.2 Motors shall be suitable for hard continuous service according to CEMA and CSA standards and shall operate free of vibration. Motors shall be drip proof, open type or explosion proof as required for the service indicated. Under full load, the motor temperature rise shall not exceed 40°C for open type and 50°C for drip proof. Motors shall have pre-lubricated ball or roller type bearings. Bearings shall be selected to provide an L-10 rated life of 40000 hours per AFBMA Standard 9" V belt drive applications with external load factors per NEMA MG1-14-42 and 100000 hours L-10 rated life in direct coupled applications. Motors used for similar functions such as pumps, fans, etc. shall be of the same manufacture.

.3 Motors shall have a 1.15 service factor, class F insulation, class B temperature rise.

.4 All motors shall operate at 1200 or 1750 rpm unless otherwise specified. Motors 1/2 HP (373 kW) and smaller shall be 120V/1Ph/60Hz and motors 3/4 HP (560 W) and larger shall be in accordance with Electrical Section.

.5 Supply all motor starters and disconnect switches, for all motors for the Project in accordance with Electrical Division. The Contractor shall review the electrical drawings and motor schedules and shall confirm with the electrical trade all motor voltages, phase and HP, switches, thermostats, etc. and locations of electrical equipment for the Mechanical Work.

.6 Refer to Equipment Schedule for further information on motors, i.e., explosion proof, 2 speed, etc.

.7 All electrical motors, except for fractional horsepower motors shall be Premium Efficient type.

.8 Provide thermistor protection on motors 11.1 kW (15 HP) and larger.

.9 Two (2) speed motors to have separate windings for two speeds.

.10 Acceptable Manufacturers: Westinghouse, Toshiba, C.G.E. Brook, Century, Baldor.

END OF SECTION


Second Floor Renovation PLUMBING INSULATION



PART 1 General

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

.1 This section covers the requirements, materials and methods of pipe and equipment insulation. The responsibility for trade separation rests with the Contractor.

1.2 RELATED WORK

.1 Section 22 11 13 - Facility Water Distribution.

.2 Section 22 11 19 - Domestic Water Piping Specialties.


.1 Insure insulation materials meet the requirements of the applicable Canadian Government Specifications Board Standards.

.2 Insulation shall be applied by qualified tradesmen in accordance with the Insulation Manufacturer's Instructions and the "Code of Workmanship for the Application of Insulating Materials".


.1 All material shall be new, uniform and undamaged and delivered to the site in factory packaging with labelling of UL rating and product density and thickness clearly visible.

1.5 JOB CONDITION

.1 Install insulation only when:

.1 All required tests have been completed.

.2 All surfaces are clean and dry.

.3 All foreign material - rust, scale, dirt, etc., has been removed.

.4 Rust proofing where specified has been applied.

.5 Insulation is clean and dry.

.6 Space ambient temperature is not to be less than 10ºC.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit samples of insulation for approval before ordering.

PART 2 Products


.1 Insulation Materials: Fibreglas Canada, Manson, Knauf, Schuller/Manville, Ottawa Fibre, Vitro Fabras.

.2 Adhesives and Coatings: Flintcote, 3-M Company, Durodyne, Benjamin Foster.


PLUMBING INSULATION Second Floor Renovation



2.2 MATERIALS

.1 All insulation materials, coating and other accessories shall have a fire hazard rating not to exceed 25 for flame spread and 50 for smoke developed when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Materials required which do not have this rating must be treated on site with finish which will provide necessary ratings.

.2 ULC label or listing or satisfactory certified report from an approved testing laboratory will be required to indicate that the fire hazard ratings for materials proposed for use do not exceed those specified.

.3 Flame proofing treatments subject to deterioration due to the effects of moisture or high humidity, are not acceptable.

.4 All adhesives, sealers, vapour coating, etc. shall be compatible with the materials to which they are applied and shall not deteriorate insulation material.

2.3 JACKETING

.1 Canvas jacketing where required is to be U.L. approved canvas, 230 grams per square meter as supplied by S. Fattal Canvas Inc. Canvas shall be treated and shall have ULC listing with flame spread of 25 or less and smoke development of 50 or less.

.2 Aluminum jacketing where required to be 0.50 m thick, embossed except engine exhaust which shall be 0.81mm unembossed. Secure with stainless steel bands.

.3 PVC jacketing where used is to be rated for flame spread of 25 or less and smoke development of 50 or less. PVC jacketing to be part of system consisting of pre-curled jacket for straight pipe and preformed covers for fittings, valves and pipeline components. Pipeline cover to be 15 mil thickness, equipment cover to be 20 mil thickness.

.1 Specified product Proto, Sure-Fit.

2.4 PIPING INSULATION SYSTEMS

.1 Type P1: Fibrous glass pipe insulation, maximum "K" value = 0.033 W/mC at 38°C mean

temperature. Jacket shall be the all purpose type, white draft bonded to an aluminized vapour barrier, reinforced with fibreglass yarn, maximum permeability = 0.02 perms. Jacketing employing pressure sensitive tape closure systems are acceptable but must be applied only where the ambient temperature is greater than 10°C as per 1.5.1.6.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Apply insulation to provide smooth and even finish, uniform diameter, no sagging, wrinkling, etc.

.2 A complete moisture and vapour seal shall be provided wherever insulation terminates against metal hangers, anchors and other projections through insulation and cold surfaces for which vapour seal is specified.

.3 Straps or twine ties used to secure insulation shall not unduly compress the insulation.

.4 Recover all exposed insulation with jacketing materials specified under Item 2.3 above.


Second Floor Renovation PLUMBING INSULATION



.1 AConcealed@ shall mean services in chases, furred spaces and above ceilings.

.2 AExposed@ shall mean Anot concealed@ and shall include mechanical rooms, any exposed areas (no ceilings), mechanical service spaces and accessible pipe shafts.

3.2 JACKETING

.1 Cover all pipe insulation and pipe fitting insulation in finished and exposed spaces including Mechanical Rooms with canvas jacket using a 100% coating of fire retardant lagging adhesive.

.2 Cover all equipment insulation with canvas jacket using a 100% coating of fire retardant lagging adhesive.

.3 Aluminum jacketing may be substituted for canvas jacket.

.4 Use no staples.

3.3 PIPE INSULATION - GENERAL

.1 Install pipe insulation with all end joints tightly butted together and all lap joints sealed with 100% coating or an approved fire resistant adhesive.

.2 Insulate pipe fitting and components with mitred sections of an equal thickness to match adjacent pipe covering and coat with insulating cement before jacketing.

.3 Apply all piping insulation for various temperatures in accordance with the recommendations of manufacturer in order to provide a complete, thorough, neat appearance and to maintain the vapour barrier throughout on cold piping. Use materials as specified for the piping and mitred sections, insulating cement, vapour barrier mastic, glass fabric, canvas, joints, butt strips, etc. as required for fittings.

3.4 PLUMBING PIPE INSULATION

.1 Insulate new domestic cold water, domestic hot water and domestic hot water recirculation piping including fittings, valves and other components.

.2 Insulate new sanitary plumbing vents 3 m back from cold area penetration.

.3 Insulate new rain water leaders 3 m in all directions from roof drain outlet. Cover roof drain body and seal to underside of roof deck.

.4 Use P-1 insulation in accordance with the following schedule:

Service Pipe Size Insulation Thickness

Domestic cold water All sizes 25 mm

Domestic hot water and recirculation Up to 50 mm 25 mm

65 mm and up 38 mm

Rainwater leaders and plumbing vents All sizes 25 mm

Roof Drain Bodies - Use mitred sections and insulating cement as for fittings.


PLUMBING INSULATION Second Floor Renovation



.5 Do not insulate sanitary drainage, piping used exclusively for fire protection, domestic hot water components such as strainers, flanges, etc.

.6 On domestic cold water, rainwater leaders and roof hoppers, the insulation shall have a built-in vapour barrier and be vapour sealed.

.7 Runouts to individual fixtures or to private washrooms or bathrooms need not be insulated for extent of piping within vertical partitions.

.8 Cold water valves and fittings shall be insulated with hydraulic setting cement. Cover with 6 ounce Thermocanvas or Fiberglass scrim sealed with vapour barrier lap cement. Finish as noted below. Do not use 90° mitred insulation on elbows.

.9 All hot water fittings, valves, etc. shall be covered with hydraulic setting cement to the thickness of the adjacent insulation and covered with 5 ounce Thermocanvas or Fiberglass scrim pasted on and finished with Lagfas. Do not use 90° mitred insulation at elbows.

.10 Insulate any other piping penetrating shell of building for a distance of 3 m from building penetration and all piping in spaces subject to freezing. Insulate as specified for domestic cold water.

END OF SECTION


Second Floor Renovation COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING



PART 1 General

1.1 GENERAL


.2 Work of this Section includes testing and adjustment of all plumbing piping systems.

.3 Balancing must be performed by trained personnel with records kept on each trial balance.

.4 Do not start the testing until the systems have been completed and put into full working order to the approval of the Consultant. All instruments used shall be accurately calibrated and maintained in good working order; if required, verification of instrument accuracy shall be obtained from an independent testing agency.

.5 The systems shall be balanced prior to the inspection for Substantial Performance of the Work and the Contractor shall schedule his works accordingly including the completion of the balancing reports. Should the building be occupied prior to inspection for Substantial Performance of the Work, a rough balance shall be made to ensure the comfort of the occupants. Balancing report must be submitted prior to Substantial Performance of Work.

.6 Test procedures shall be in accordance with Saskatchewan Plumbing and Drainage Regulations 1996 and Authority having jurisdiction and other recognized test codes as far as field conditions permit.

.7 Perform tests on site before and witnessed by the Consultant and the authorities having jurisdiction. Attendance at tests shall be at the discretion of the Consultant. Provide written notice of intentions to test ten (10) days prior to tests to Consultant and governing authorities.

.8 Provide copies of all test reports in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 Products

No Part 2 items in this Section.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 PLUMBING SYSTEMS AND PIPED UTILITY TESTS

.1 All drainage piping shall be tested in accordance with the current issue of "Saskatchewan Plumbing and Drainage Regulations 1996", and under the requirements of the Local Plumbing Inspection Branch.

.2 If approved, hydrostatic tests may be substituted with air or smoke tests when there is a danger of freezing.


COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING Second Floor Renovation



.3 Test drainage system by filling with water to produce a pressure of 30 kPa (10 ft. W.G.) minimum and 75 kPa (25 ft. W.G.) maximum. Check for proper grade and obstruction by ball test.

.4 Test interior domestic water piping system. Completely fill and hydraulically test with a pressure of at least 1034 kPa at system low point, maintain the pressure for four (4) hours after all air has been expelled with all outlets tightly closed. Isolate system components not designed for this test pressure.

END OF SECTION


Second Floor Renovation FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING



PART 1 General

1.1 GENERAL

.1 Scope: This section includes the supply and installation of complete piping systems as required and as shown on the drawings.

.2 Related Work specified elsewhere:

Section 22 00 00 - Plumbing

Section 22 07 00 - Insulation

Section 22 08 00 - Commissioning of Plumbing

Section 22 11 19 - Piping Specialties

.3 Screwed fittings on steel pipe shall be best quality, malleable, free from defects, and rated at 1034 kPa. Unions shall be 1034 kPa malleable iron screwed with ground joints

.4 Fittings for welded pipes shall be factory fabricated steel butt weld fittings for elbows, tees, reducers, and caps, etc. The use of shop or site fabricated weld fittings, caps or reducers will not be permitted.

.5 Weld fittings to be in accordance with ASTM A-234 and shall have rating at pressure of pipe used; elbows to be long radius; standard weight wall thickness to conform to adjoining pipe.

.6 Grooved fittings to be in accordance with ASTM A-536.

.7 Flanges to be forged steel to conform to ASTM A181 Grade 1 or grooved conforming to ASTM A-47 or ASTM A-536.

PART 2 Products

.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

Pipe and Fittings: Crane, Ladish, Taylor Forge. Plastic Pipe and Fittings: Building Products Orion, Emco, Domn-X, Ipex. Grooved Fittings: Victaulic.

.2 Domestic water above ground to be as follows:

Size Material Fittings Joint

All Sizes Type L Copper Wrought or cast copper pressure 95-5 solder

.1 Lead based solder are not allowed for use in potable water systems.

.2 Victaulic connection system manufacture to copper tube dimensions may also be used for sizes 50 mm and over. Systems which require flaring of tube end are not approved.

.1 50 mm to 200 mm - Victaulic System 606.

.2 50 mm to 100 mm - Victaulic Style 607 AQuick-Vic@ may be used.


FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING Second Floor Renovation



.3 For accessible above-grade domestic water lines, sizes 100 mm and larger, AWWA. Schedule 10S 304 or 316 stainless steel pipe may also be used, welded, flanged or Victaulic roll groove joint coupling system. Minimum working pressure to be 2068 kPa (300 psi). Stainless steel piping and fittings shall be manufactured to ASTM A312.

.4 Grooved joint systems shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s latest published installation instructions. Grooved ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections and roll marks in the area from the pipe end to the groove. Gaskets shall be of an elastomer grade suitable for intended service and shall be molded and produced by the coupling system manufacturer. The grooved coupling system manufacturer’s factory trained representative shall provide onsite training for the installers in the use of the grooving tools and installation of the grooved products.

.3 Natural Gas Piping:


Above Ground (Accessible Joints):

50 and under ASTM A-53, Schedule 40, CW, ERW or SMLS

ANSI B16.3 MI, 1034 kPa rated

Threaded

65 and over ASTM A-53, Schedule 40, CW, ERW or SMLS

ASTM A-234 standard weight wrought welded

Welded

Above Ground (Inaccessible Joints):

All sizes ASTM A-53, Schedule 40, CW, ERW or SMLS


Welded

PART 3 Execution

.1 Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without unduly stressing the pipe, equipment connected or building components. Install pipe loops where shown on drawings or required.


.3 Reductions in pipe sizes shall be made by suitable fittings installed to provide proper venting and drainage.

.4 All inaccessible piping to have welded, soldered or solvent cemented joints.

.5 Direct welded connections to valves and equipment not permitted. Use screw connections up to 50 mm, flanged connections for 65 mm and over, except when grooved valves are used.

.6 Piping to have non-conducting type di-electric connections and hangers where dissimilar metals are jointed and supported. Brass fitting does not constitute acceptable non-conducting connection.

.7 Provide a 20 mm ball valve drain c/w hose thread and cap w/ chain at all low points in piping system to facilitate draining of lines.


Second Floor Renovation FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING



.8 At all equipment, provide unions up to 50 mm and grooved couplings or flanges with gaskets 65 mm and larger piping.

.9 Screwed joints in steel or iron piping shall be made with full cut standard taper pipe threads with approved non-toxic joint compound applied to male threads only.

.10 Welded joints shall be made by a welder holding a current certificate from the Provincial authorities.

.11 Do not conceal piping prior to inspection.

.12 No piping shall be concealed in exterior walls except those pipes passing straight through.

END OF SECTION


Second Floor Renovation DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES



PART 1 General

1.1 GENERAL




.4 Support horizontal stainless steel or copper piping as follows:


Supports (m)

Hanger Rod

Diameters

15 mm 2 9 mm

20 mm to 40 mm 2.5 9 mm


80 mm and 100 mm 3.5 16 mm

150 mm to 300 mm 4 22 mm





.6 Valves

.1 All valves shall be of the same manufacturer throughout, except special valves specified and shall have manufacturer=s name and pressure rating clearly marked on outside.

.2 Shop drawings are required on all valves used on project.


DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES Second Floor Renovation



PART 2 Products


.1 Copper Piping System:

Nominal Pipe Size


15 mm - 40 mm All services Adjustable wrought ring

Carbon Steel Copper plated

50 mm - 100 mm All services Adjustable wrought clevis


.2 Valves

.1 All valves up to and including 50 mm shall be ball valves unless noted otherwise equivalent to Crane, Red & White Toyo, Lunkenheimer, Kitz, MAS, Newman Hattersley. They shall be full size port rebuilding type. All valves 65 mm and over shall be gate valves unless otherwise noted. All gate valves and globe valves shall be iron body brass trim. Gate valves 65 mm and over shall be OS&Y with rising stem. All gate, globe and check valves equivalent to Newman Hattersley, Crane, Red & White Toyo, Lunkenheimer or Kitz.

.2 A flanged valve or valve and union shall be provided in the supply and return piping connections to each piece of equipment in the plumbing systems to permit isolation of each piece of equipment and its removal for servicing.

.3 Unless noted otherwise valves shall be equivalent to the following Newman Hattersley numbers, except for ball valves. Ball valves shall be equivalent to Toyo. Plumbing Ball Gate Globe Check

TOYO NH NH NH Up to 50 mm 5049A 41SE A51SE A60AT or

A61SE 65 mm and over 5044A 504 73 651

.4 Drain valves shall be equivalent to Toyo Fig. 5046 brass ball valve with integral hose thread and cap and chain on outlet end.

PART 3 Execution

.1 Piping hung or supported by ring or clevis hangers shall be placed directly onto the hanger and insulation carried over the hanger; insulation shall be neatly finished where the hanger protrudes through the insulation. Piping 80 mm and over shall be provided with pipe covering protection saddles and insulation butted against the saddle; also provide insulation between the pipe and the saddle.

.2 Provide lateral or sway bracing as necessary throughout the Project. Where pipes rest on dissimilar metals, provide pipe sleeve or bushing to separate pipe from support.


.4 Specialties:

.1 All "Y" strainers shall be equivalent to Sarco, Trane or Victaulic. Basket strainers shall be equivalent to Sarco Canada STM with stainless steel lift out basket.


Second Floor Renovation DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES



Provide blowdown valve on all y-strainers 65 mm and larger. Valve shall be as specified in Section 22 11 19 for drain service.

.2 Pressure gauges shall be equivalent to Trerice model 620B, 114 mm (42@) dial size with stainless steel case and ring and acrylic window. Movement and bourdon tube shall be bronze with brass socket. (ASME B40.1 Grade 1A.)

Range shall be selected so that average operating pressure falls approximately in the middle of the scale selected. Dial shall be clearly legible and imprinted with both metric and imperial scales. All pressure gauges shall be equipped with Trerice XD866FFG25 ball valve and Trerice #872 snubber.

.3 Thermometers shall be equivalent to Trerice Model B83200 series except as noted, bimetallic dial type, 75 mm (3") dial size with stainless steel case, ring and stem and extra strength glass window. Dial shall be clearly legible and imprinted with both metric and imperial scales. Thermometers shall be installed in brass separable wells. Stem shall provide insertion length of roughly half of the installed pipe diameter with minimum of 50 mm. Range shall be selected so that average operating temperature range falls approximately in the middle of the scale selected. Where straight stemmed thermometers are not easily visible from the floor then substitute with adjustable angle thermometer equivalent to Trerice B83600 series as above except adjustable through 180.

.4 All pressure relief valves shall be A.S.M.E. rated. Pipe discharge to funnel drains or to glycol tanks if on a glycol system.

.5 Backflow preventers shall be equivalent to Watts #909 with inlet strainer, isolation ball valves and air gap drain funnel. Pipe air gap discharge to funnel drains. Install in accordance with manufacturer=s instructions.

Provide startup and testing in accordance with manufacturer=s instructions and the Authority having jurisdiction.

.6 All circuit balance valves to be equivalent to T&A with calibrated balancing valve, with calibrating chart. Meter connections to have positive shut-off valves.

.7 See specific sections for any additional specialties.

.8 Automatic Flow Control Valves:

.1 Automatic flow control valves for use on domestic hot water heating systems and elsewhere as shown on drawings shall be equivalent to Griswold Isolator AIY@ and Griswold Uni-flange valves.

.2 Automatic flow control valve cartridges shall automatically control flow rates with 5% accuracy over an operating differential range of at least

14 times the minimum required for control.

Unless specifically noted otherwise, the operating pressure range shall be 1-14 PSID when used for domestic water service.

.3 Valve internal control mechanism shall consist of a stainless steel one-piece cartridge with segmented port design and full travel linear coil spring. Cartridge shall be AISI type 304 stainless steel with AISI type 17-7 PH stainless steel spring.

.4 Manufacturer shall be able to provide certified independent laboratory tests verifying accuracy of performance.

.5 All flow control cartridges shall be warranted by the manufacturer for five (5) years from Date of Substantial Performance.

.6 Valve sizes 2" through 12" shall be Isolator AIY@ series valves with ASTM brass alloy body, rated at no less than 400 psi/250°F. Valve sizes 12" large through 2" shall have a cast brass alloy body, rated at no less than 275 psi/25°F. Isolator AIY@ series valves shall be constructed in a one-piece body to include a handle ball valve, a flow control cartridge assembly, dual pressure or pressure/temperature test valves for verifying


DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES Second Floor Renovation



accuracy of flow performance for all sizes combined with a manual air vent, union end which will accept various end pieces, removable 20 mesh stainless steel strainer, drain valve with hose bibb adapter and cap, valve handle extensions and pressure test port extensions.

.7 Valve sizes 22" and 3" shall be Griswold Uni-Flange with ductile iron body ASTM A536-80 Class 50-40-18, rated at no less than 150 psi/275°F. Uni-Flange valves shall be complete with a flow control cartridge assembly, dual P/T test valves, drain valve, test port extensions, flanged end connections, EPDM o-ring seals.

.8 Body design shall allow inspection or removal of cartridge or strainer without disturbing piping connections.

.9 Body design shall allow inspection or repair of handle operated stem without disturbing piping connections. The repairable stem shall include two Teflon seals and one EPDM o-ring for protection against chemicals and modulating temperature.

.10 The valves shall come fully assembled and be permanently marked to show direction of flow. Valves shall be complete with body tag to indicate flow rate and model number.

.11 It will also be acceptable to supply automatic flow control valves equal to Griswold Class 150 water for valves sizes larger than 2@. Cartridge to be 304 stainless steel with AISI Type 17-7 PH stainless steel spring. Ductile iron body c/w 3@ NPT P/T test valves. Pressure range to be 2-32 psi unless otherwise specifically noted. Valve flow rate and model number to be stamped on body. Valve pressure rating to be 200 psi, temperature

rating to be 250F. Provide flanges and bolts for wafer flow control valve installation. Not it must be possible to separate pipes if required for service of valve. Minimum valve size to equal size of pipe valve is installed in. If flow rating of valve is too low, larger valve must be supplied with necessary flanges and increaser/reducer fittings to facilitate valve installation. Wafer flow control valve bodies to be insulated with 12.5 mm closed cell elastromeric insulation equal to Armaflex AP. Insulation to be glued in place using Armaflex 520 BLV adhesive.

.12 Provision must be made for the removal of the strainers and cartridges at the time the flow control valves are installed. These components are to be tagged, protected from damage and either remain with the valves or be stored in such a manner that once the piping has been flushed and ready for service the correct strainers and valves are installed in the flow control valves.

END OF SECTION


Second Floor Renovation FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS



PART 1 General

1.1 GENERAL



Section 22 00 00 - Plumbing

Section 22 07 00 - Insulation

Section 22 08 00 - Commissioning of Plumbing

Section 22 11 19 - Piping Specialties

PART 2 Products

.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

Pipe and Fittings: Crane, Ladish, Taylor Forge. Plastic Pipe and Fittings: Building Products Orion, Emco, Domn-X, Ipex.

.2 Sanitary drainage and vent piping above ground to be as follows:

SIZE MATERIAL FITTINGS JOINT

Up to 65 mm Mor DWV Copper Wrought or Cast Copper Drainage

Solder, Threaded

All Sizes Cast Iron Plain End Cast Iron Approved MJ Coupling

Bell and Spigot Bibby Seal

.3 Cleanouts:

.1 Floor type cleanouts to be made using a "Y" and iron body cleanout with removable brass cap. The assembly to be installed below the floor. Add Graphite to the threads before installing cleanout plug. Access to the cleanouts shall be brought up to the floor of the fixtures it serves where shown on drawings. Ensure ample clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system.

.2 A bronze cleanout cover and ring assembly shall be installed in the floor for access to the cleanout plugs, equivalent to Zurn ZANB-1460-13. C.O.'s to have adjustable collar. Covers to be 13 mm nickel bronze with screws and suit adjacent floor covering material.

.3 Provide access panels or brass flush plates for cleanouts in wall.

.4 Acceptable Products: Cleanouts and Cleanout Covers - Zurn, Watts/Ancon, Jay R. Smith.

.4 Flashing and Safing: On vents through flat roof use Thaler Roofing Specialties Stack Jack Flashing (pre-insulated model), constructed of one piece copper sleeve and base flange c/w copper collar with neoprene grommet.


FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS Second Floor Renovation



PART 3 Execution

.1 Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without unduly stressing the pipe, equipment connected or building components.





.6 Horizontal drainage lines shall grade not less than 10 mm per meter, vent pipes shall be graded to drain back to soil or waste pipes by gravity.



3.2 CLEANOUTS

.1 Install cleanouts where shown on drawings and where required. Bring cleanouts up to the floor on which the fixture they serve is located where shown on drawings. Provide access panels for cleanouts in walls. They must not protrude.

.2 Provide graphite on cleanout plugs.

3.3 FLASHING

.1 Flash all pipes passing through roof as specified. Refer to 22 13 13 – Item 2.4.

.2 Co-ordinate installation details and cooperate with Roofing Contractor.

END OF SECTION


Second Floor Renovation SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES



PART 1 General

1.1 GENERAL


.2 Hangers and supports shall secure pipes in place, prevent vibration, maintain grade by adjustment, and provide for expansion and contraction. Hangers or supports shall be located adjacent to all valves, pumps, equipment, etc. in order to prevent undue stresses in piping and equipment. All exposed hangers shall be prime coated. All exposed supports (rod, fasteners, brackets) shall be galvanized or cad plated.


.4 Support horizontal cast iron or copper piping as follows:


Supports (m)

Hanger Rod

Diameters

15 mm 2 9 mm

20 mm to 40 mm 2.5 9 mm


80 mm and 100 mm 3.5 16 mm

150 mm to 300 mm 4 22 mm

Cast iron piping shall be supported at every joint and as indicated above.

PART 2 Products


.1 Cast Iron Piping Systems

Nominal Pipe

Size (mm) Service Hanger Type Material


50 mm - 300 mm

All services Adjustable wrought clevis (heavy duty)

Carbon Steel


SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES Second Floor Renovation




Nominal Pipe

Size (mm) Service Hanger Type Material

15 mm - 40 mm All services Adjustable wrought ring Carbon Steel Copper plated

50 mm - 100 mm

All services Adjustable wrought clevis Carbon Steel Copper plated

PART 3 Execution


.2 Support all horizontal cast iron soil pipe with hanger, pipe rest or pier, two for each pipe length; locate support close to hub, with maximum 2.5 m spacing between hangers.

.3 Provide lateral or sway bracing as necessary throughout the Project.


END OF SECTION


Second Floor Renovation PLUMBING EQUIPMENT



PART 1 General

1.1 SCOPE

.1 This section outlines supply and installation of all items relating specifically to the plumbing system and connection to equipment supplied by Owner and other Divisions.

.2 Refer to all other sections of this Division which are to be part of these specifications. These include specifications on testing, pipe and fittings, workmanship, hangers, valves, specialties, access panels, etc.


.1 The drawings show the approximate locations of the various items of equipment and the main runs of piping, in diagrammatic form. The equipment and piping shall be installed in such a manner that it will function safely and efficiently and that the piping shall be as neat and inconspicuous as possible.

.2 Install the plumbing Work in accordance with Local and Provincial rules, regulations and ordinances. The drawings show in general only the waste and sanitary drainage but it shall be this Section's responsibility to install drains, traps and vents as required by the Plumbing Inspector. Changes shall be permitted providing approval is obtained from the Consultant.

.3 Bid price shall include the cost for the complete plumbing installation and no extra shall be allowed for changes due to failure to meet the Plumbing Inspector's requirements.

.4 Provide and include charges for connections to Municipal and utility company services as specified.

.5 Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible to check the exact locations of all fixtures, size of rough-in openings in counters, plumbing brass, etc. connected with the plumbing fixtures, with the Consultant's representatives and General Contractor before rough-in and installing the fixtures and fixture equipment. He shall obtain a set of millwork shop drawings from the General Contractor to indicate location and sizes of counter mounted plumbing fixtures. No extras will be allowed for his failure to meet these requirements.

END OF SECTION


Second Floor Renovation PLUMBING FIXTURES



PART 1 General

1.1 SCOPE

.1 This section outlines supply and installation of all items relating specifically to the plumbing system and connection to equipment supplied by Owner and other Divisions.

.2 Refer to all other sections of this Division which are to be part of these specifications. These include specifications on testing, pipe and fittings, workmanship, hangers, valves, specialties, access panels, etc.


.1 The drawings show the approximate locations of the various items of equipment and the main runs of piping, in diagrammatic form. The equipment and piping shall be installed in such a manner that it will function safely and efficiently and that the piping shall be as neat and inconspicuous as possible.

.2 Install the plumbing Work in accordance with Local and Provincial rules, regulations and ordinances. The drawings show in general only the waste and sanitary drainage but it shall be this Section's responsibility to install drains, traps and vents as required by the Plumbing Inspector. Changes shall be permitted providing approval is obtained from the Consultant.

.3 Bid price shall include the cost for the complete plumbing installation and no extra shall be allowed for changes due to failure to meet the Plumbing Inspector's requirements.

.4 Provide and include charges for connections to Municipal and utility company services as specified.

.5 Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible to check the exact locations of all fixtures, size of rough-in openings in counters, plumbing brass, etc. connected with the plumbing fixtures, with the Consultant's representatives and General Contractor before rough-in and installing the fixtures and fixture equipment. He shall obtain a set of millwork shop drawings from the General Contractor to indicate location and sizes of counter mounted plumbing fixtures. No extras will be allowed for his failure to meet these requirements.

PART 2 Products

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS/PRODUCTS

.1 Floor Drains: Zurn, Watts/Ancon, Jay R. Smith.

.2 Back Flow Preventors: Watts, Singer, Lawlor, Wilkins, Conbraco, Febco.

.3 Vacuum Breakers: Watts, Singer.

.4 Domestic Water Tempering Valves: Symmons, Powers.

.5 Hose Bibbs: Zurn, Watts/Ancon, Jay R. Smith.

.6 Carriers: Ancon, Watts/Ancon, Jay R. Smith.


PLUMBING FIXTURES Second Floor Renovation



2.2 PLUMBING FIXTURES, SUPPLIES AND DRAINS

.1 Supply and install all plumbing fixtures as noted on plans or mentioned herein. Protect all fixtures until installation is accepted and leave all fixtures clean and in operation. Remove all labels.

.2 All fixtures shall be free from flaws and blemishes and subject to approval of the Consultant.

.3 Vitreous china fixtures shall conform to CSA B45.1 - latest edition. Stainless steel fixtures shall conform to CSA B45.4 - latest edition.

.4 All supplies to all fixtures shall be equipped with screw driver stops.

.5 All exposed piping and fittings shall be of brass with polished chromium finish; finish to be first quality. (Note this applies to water supplies to flexible connections also.) All escutcheons and wall plates to be steel or brass, set screw type, chrome plated. All exposed traps on lavatories shall be chromium plated.

.6 Supply and install all traps and water supplies to all fixtures.

.7 All other fixtures specified herein and/or noted on drawings and all traps and water supplies to all fixtures shall be supplied and installed by Division 22 (Plumbing Section) including any specialty fixtures. All fixtures shall be white or stainless steel or as otherwise noted. See plan for fixtures.

.8 Water Closets

Type WC-1 – shall be Crane Hymont Jr., 3816, 406 mm (16") high, vitreous china, floor mount, elongated bowl, syphon jet flush action, top spud and bolt caps. Seats shall be Centoco 820STSS extra heavy duty solid plastic, white, open front, to suit bowl, less cover, concealed hinge, self-sustaining. Fit with Zurn oval flush exposed flush valve model Z6000AV-WS1-DF, 1.6 gallon low consumption flush action exposed diaphragm flush valve, vacuum breaker, one piece hex coupling nut, adjustable tailpiece, spud coupling and flange for top spud connection. Caulk around base of all water closets using white silicone equivalent to CGE. All exposed water piping to be chromed.

Type WC-2 – Same as above but Centoco seat with cover.

.9 Lavatory - Type L-1 - Vanity type equal to Crane Atlanta Model #120H, self-rimming oval basin, front overflow, vitreous china, single hole. 508 mm x 432 mm x 210 mm, drop-in. Fit with Toto Standard Ecopower Faucet, model #TEL5G10. Hydro-power self-generating system, sensor faucet with aerated flow, thermal mixing, up to 10 seconds while activated. Plug with perforated strainer and 33T311 adjustable trap with C.O. and 47T312 water supplies, all chrome plated. On all lavatories in each washroom containing barrier free water closet, provide offset waste 33T920 and 47T512 offset supplies.

.10 Drinking Fountain – Type DF-1 – Equivalent to Acorn Model A111408B, refrigerated, wall mounted barrier-free water cooler. Unit shall deliver 8 gph of 50°F water at 90°F ambient with 80°F entering water temperature. 400W, 1Ø, 115V. Unit to include stainless steel cabinet panels with satin finish, stainless steel cooler top with satin finish, one-piece chrome plated vandal resistant bubbler, push-button actuation. Refrigeration system to include hermetically sealed compressor, built-in overload protection, dryer-strainer, self-lubricating cooling fan, R-134a refrigerant, automatic stream height regulator, inlet strainer, stainless steel insulated storage tank, removable drain strainer. Entire waterway shall be certified to NSF/ANSI 61.


Second Floor Renovation PLUMBING FIXTURES



.11 Inside Hose Bibbs - rough brass type unless noted otherwise.

.12 Floor Drains

.1 Type FD-1 - Zurn ZXN-415-A5, floor drains with heavy duty round grate, cast iron body, clamp collar, polished nickel bronze, heavy strainer 13 mm (½") thick, attached with screws.

.2 Type FD-2 - Funnel Type - Zurn Z-415F, cast iron with 229 mm x 89 mm nickel bronze funnel complete with membrane clamp and adjustable collar.

.3 Type FD-3 - Mechanical Room Floor Drains - Cast iron with adjustable collar, integral clamping device and grate, 75 mm size, Zurn Z536 or equivalent. Where funnel floor drain called for or required use Zurn Z-536-FO.

.13 Stainless Steel Sinks

Type S-1 – Equivalent to Franke LBS6808-1/2 single compartment sink, 520 mm x 510 mm x 200 mm (20½” x 20” x 8”) overall size with crumb cup strainer 20 gauge, grade 18-8, type 302 stainless. Fit with Delta 26C3922 heavy duty cast brass sink faucet, 203 mm (8”0) centre, two handle, polished chrome plated finish, Cer-Teck ¼ turn ceramic cartridges, heavy duty 152 mm (6”) bend, rigid/swivel gooseneck spout, vandal resistant 5.7 L/m (1.5 US gpm) laminar flow aerator with anti-microbial, 102 mm (4”) hooded blade handles. Sinks shall be complete with sealant, undercoating and complete with clamps. Ensure all sinks are firmly anchored and adequately sealed to counter to provide a complete watertight seal all around.

Type S-2 – Equivalent to Franke LBD6408-1/3 double compartment sink with faucet ledge, 20 gauge, type 302, 18-8 stainless steel. 790 mm x 520 mm x 200 mm deep overall size with crumb cup strainers, self-rimming, exposed surfaces, satin finished, underside sound dampened and undercoated, factory applied rim seal. Fit with Delta 29C2841 single handle brass deckmount faucet, polished chrome plated finish, ceramic cartridge with rotational limit stop, 225 mm tubular swing spout, vandal resistant 89 mm lever handle, 200 mm brass cover for 3 hole 8” centre hole sink, 5.7 L/m (1.5 US gpm) standard flow control aerator. Ensure all sinks are firmly anchored and adequately sealed to counter to provide a complete watertight seal all around.

.14 Urinals – Type U-1 – Equivalent to Zurn Z5798 EcoVantage hard wired efficiency urinal system. System comes complete with exposed high efficiency flushometer valve and vitreous china urinal. The system is designed to perform to industry standards with as little as 0.5 litres of water per flush. Valve is operated by an infrared convergence-type proximity sensor with smart technology, powered by hardwired power converter, furnished with vandal resistant protective metal housing and chloramine resistant internal seals. Sensor is factory set for optimal performance but can be calibrated in the field for specified applications. Valve features an internal flow regulator to maintain constant flow rates independent of line pressures and an inline filter to protect the valve from debris within the water. Complete with high pressure vacuum breaker, one piece hex coupling nut, adjustable tailpiece, spud coupling and flange for top spud connection. Control stop has internal siphon-guard protection, vandal resistant stop cap, cast wall flange and sweat solder kit. Vitreous china urinal is ¾” top sput with 2” outlet connection and vandal resistant outlet strainer. Supply all necessary power transformers. Mount urinal on concealed carrier with legs and feet equivalent to Zurn. Securely anchor carrier assembly to floor.


PLUMBING FIXTURES Second Floor Renovation



PART 3 Execution

3.1 VENTS AND VENTING AND DRAINAGE SYSTEM

.1 Supply and install individual vents on all fixtures or group of fixtures. Vents shall be sized in accordance with the Plumbing Code and Municipal requirements. See 2.3 for roof vents.

.2 Supply and install drainage piping throughout.

3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS

.1 Install shut off valves on branch lines and mains where shown or where necessary for control of system.

.2 Supply and install shock stops on hot and cold water lines at the top of each riser group (hot and cold) and at each fixture or group of fixtures where noted on drawings.

.3 Provide screwdriver stops on water supplies to each fixture.

.4 Supply and install all piping systems, as shown on drawings.

3.3 FIXTURES, DRAINS, ETC.

.1 Install all fixtures, drains, roof drains, etc. as specified and as shown on drawings. Make all drain, vent and water connections. All to meet plumbing regulations.

.2 Protect all fixtures from damage. Clean fixtures and remove all labels before Substantial Performance of the Work.

.3 Rough-in drain on centrelines of fixture drain outlets. Rough-in water supplies symmetrically about drain. Revise wall structure if required.

.4 Wall hung fixtures shall be securely fastened to carriers or plates set into walls and anchored at floor all as specified.

3.4 CLEANOUTS

.1 Install cleanouts where shown on drawings and where required. Bring cleanouts up to the floor on which the fixture they serve is located where shown on drawings.

Provide access panels for cleanouts in walls. They must not protrude.

.2 Provide graphite on cleanout plugs.

3.5 FLASHING

.1 Flash all pipes passing through roof as specified.

.2 Co-ordinate installation details and cooperate with Roofing Contractor.

END OF SECTION


Second Floor Renovation HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING



PART 1 General

1.1 GENERAL

.1 This section is common to all sections of Division 23 and supplements the requirements of Division 00 and Division 01.


.3 Refer to Section 01 12 16 for Project Work Sequence description.

1.2 INTENT

.1 Provide complete and fully operational mechanical systems with facilities and services to meet requirements described herein and in complete accord with applicable codes and ordinances.

.2 Contract documents of this division are diagrammatic and approximately to scale unless detailed otherwise. They establish the scope, material and installation quality and are not detailed installation instructions.

1.3 DRAWINGS

.1 Drawings for this division do not indicate exact architectural, structural, or electrical features. Examine drawings prior to laying out, fabricating, installing or commencing work to ensure no interference exists. Report conflicts to Consultant before proceeding. Any information involving accurate measurement of building shall be taken at building.

.2 Drawings indicate general location and route to be followed by pipes which are to be installed under this Contract. Where pipes are not shown on plans or are shown only diagrammatically, they shall be installed parallel to building lines and in such a way as to conserve head room and interfere as little as possible with free use of space through which they pass.

1.4 CODES, REGULATIONS, PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS

.1 Conform to the latest edition and supplements of the following for all materials and installations:

.1 National Building Code of Canada, as amended by local Bylaws and Provincial Statutes.

.2 Codes, Standards, Bylaws, Statutes and Manufacturer's Association Specifications or instructions mentioned in Division 23 sections, refer to latest revisions thereof at time of calling of bids, unless specifically designated otherwise.

.3 In no instance shall the standard established by the drawings and specifications be reduced by Code or otherwise.

.4 Furnish all notices, obtain all necessary permits related to Division 23 works.

.5 Employ tradesmen fully qualified under Provincial and local regulations pertaining to licensing and qualifications for tradesmen for this work.


HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING Second Floor Renovation



1.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

.1 Follow manufacturer's recommended installation details and procedures for equipment, supplemented by details given herein and on plans subject to approval of the Consultant.

.2 Install equipment generally in locations and routes shown, close to building structure with minimum interference with other services or free space. Remove and replace improperly installed equipment to satisfaction of the Consultant at no extra cost.

.3 Provide labour, material and tools required to install, test and place into operation a complete mechanical system. Provide material for modifications required to correct minor job confliction.

.4 Locate distribution systems, access doors, equipment and materials for maximum usable space to satisfaction of the Consultant.

1.6 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

.1 Replace materials or workmanship below specified quality and relocate work wrongly placed.

.2 Materials and equipment installed to be new, full weight and of the best quality specified. Use same brand or manufacturer for each specific application. Provide statically and dynamically balanced rotating equipment for minimum vibration and low operating noise levels. Provide balancing certificates if requested by the Consultant.

.3 Each major component of equipment to have manufacturer's name, address, catalogue and serial number in a conspicuous place.

.4 Install materials and equipment in a neat and workmanlike manner by competent specialists. At the request of the Consultant, provide certificates proving competency of specialists employed. Certificates shall be from recognized, related governing associations. The Owner reserves the right to terminate any specific person's employment on this Project for failure to prove adequate qualifications and/or workmanship.

1.7 ABBREVIATIONS

.1 Abbreviations used in this specification are common to and in general use within the related trades.

1.8 CUTTING AND PATCHING

.1 Locate and provide holes and sleeves, cutting and fitting required for mechanical work. Relocate improperly located holes and sleeves at no extra cost.

.2 Obtain approval from Consultant prior to any cutting of structural assemblies. Thoroughly co-ordinate cutting methods, processes and locations prior to cutting operations.

.3 Cutting practices shall be limited to neat openings created through recognized drilling or coring practices.

.4 Fill excess voids at openings with materials and practices as described in Division 7 Firestops.

.5 Drill for expansion bolts, hanger rods, brackets and supports.





.6 Patching of finished surfaces shall be consistent with sections of the Contract specifications identifying such construction.

1.9 STARTUP AND OPERATION OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the startup of all equipment and systems and shall place all equipment and systems in operating condition and in operation.

.2 It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to make all necessary arrangements with the manufacturers of the various equipment and materials to have them available as required and as necessary to assist in startup and operation of their equipment.

.3 All systems of every description that are part of the Mechanical Contract shall be tested and trial operated and adjusted and corrected until they function as designed.

1.10 CONTRACT CLOSE OUT


.2 Perform the following items prior to Substantial Performance of the Work:

.1 Mechanical systems capable of operation with alarm systems functional.

.2 Necessary tests on equipment made including those required by authorities and certificates of approval obtained.

.3 Valve tagging completed and equipment identified. Equipment and piping painted and escutcheons installed.

.4 Warranty forms have been mailed to manufacturer. Provide copy of original warranty for equipment which has warranty period longer than one (1) year.

.5 Submit sample of Operating/Maintenance Manuals. Arrange Operating and Maintenance Instructions and submit schedule for approval to Consultant.

.6 Review and ensure access doors are suitably located and equipment easily accessible.

.7 Submit record drawings.

.3 Prior to Substantial Performance of the Work, provide complete list of items which are either not finished or deficient at the time of the inspection.

.4 Provide declaration in writing that Substantial Performance of the Work deficiencies and the following items have been completed prior to the total performance inspection:

.1 Equipment cleaned inside, outside and lubricated.

.2 Instructions to Owners, refer to individual sections in Division 23.

1.11 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Provide shop drawings in accordance with Division 1 Submittals and this Section.

.2 All shop drawings submitted for approval shall be certified by the manufacturer and carefully checked by this Contractor, noting all changes required, and shall bear the Contractor's approval stamp signature; drawings will not be considered if not previously checked by this Contractor.

.3 Shop drawings shall include all information necessary to indicate the following:

.1 Dimensional data for roughing-in and installation.





.2 Technical data to enable the Consultant to check that the equipment meets the requirements of drawings and specifications.

.3 Wiring, piping and service connection data for all trades.

.4 All motor sizes complete with voltage rating.

.5 Job name, Mechanical Contractor, Supplier or agent, Manufacturer, Consultant.

.6 Schedules as applicable for coils, radiation, grilles, etc.

.7 All fan and pump curves.

.8 Sound data, where applicable.

.4 This Contractor shall accept full responsibility for any equipment ordered where this procedure has not been followed and no charges for cancellations, handling, restocking, etc. will be accepted for failure to carry out this procedure.

.5 A complete file of approved shop drawings shall be kept on site at all times and no shop drawings shall be used which do not bear the signed review stamp of the Consultant.

.6 Submittals to be made in both Metric and English units.

.7 Shop drawings that are unclear or illegible will not be accepted. Faxed shop drawings are not acceptable.

1.12 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

.1 This project will require the preparation of Operation and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with Division 1 - Contract Close Out and this section. The Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be compilation that includes fire suppression, plumbing, HVAC, controls and mechanical site services.

It shall be the responsibility of the Division 23 00 00 Contractor to collect and prepare the Operation and Maintenance Manuals for this project.

.2 Provide services of qualified and experienced personnel to prepare proper documentation and to instruct Owner in the operation and preventative maintenance of each piece of equipment and system supplied and installed. Complete and turn over documentation prior to Substantial Performance inspection.

.3 In addition to the number of copies of Operating and Maintenance Manuals specified in Division 1, provide one (1) additional copy for Consultant.

.4 Each binder shall be fully indexed with table of contents (with clear plastic cover) at beginning and contain material according to the following indexing system:

.1 Tab 1.0 Mechanical Systems: Title page with clear plastic protection cover.

.2 Tab 1.1 List of Mechanical Drawings.

.3 Tab 1.2 Description of Systems: Provide complete description of each system. Include detailed system description and components comprising that system, explanation of how each component interfaces with others to complete the system, location of each thermostat, controller or operating setpoint. Include complete and detailed operation of each major component. Include how to energize and exact location of switches and controls, operational sequence, operational characteristic changes for summer or winter operation, and how to accomplish the changeover, complete troubleshooting sequence when setpoints cannot be maintained and safeguards to check if equipment goes off line. With each system description, include list of major equipment with make, model and serial numbers.





.4 Tab 1.3 Maintenance and Lubrication Division: Provide detailed preventative maintenance and lubrication schedule for each of the major components to include daily, weekly, monthly, semi-annual and yearly checks and tasks. Explain how to proceed with each task required for each piece of typical equipment such as bearings, drives, motors and filters. Compile this information for each typical piece of equipment separate from the shop drawings section.

.5 Tab 1.4 List of Equipment Suppliers and Contractors: Provide complete list of equipment Suppliers and Contractors, including address, telephone number, facsimile number and E-mail address. Outline procedures for purchasing parts and equipment. Include steps to take in order to purchase new parts.

.6 Tab 1.5 Guarantees: Include in this section all written guarantees and performance certificates for work under Division 23 including extended manufacturer warranties.

.7 Tab 2.0, 2.1, etc. Certification: Include copy of test data: degreasing and flushing of heating system, analysis of system water taken at time system was put into operation, hydrostatic or air tests performed on piping systems, equipment alignment certificates, copy of balancing data for air and water systems, copy of valve tag identification and pipe colour code, inspection approval certificates for plumbing system, ventilation systems, hydronic and steam systems, and operational tests on gas fired equipment, test data for motors, giving kW (HP), current data, motor rpm, voltage and phase. Include with major equipment makes, models and serial numbers.

.8 Tab 3.0, 3.1, etc. Shop Drawings and Maintenance Bulletins: A complete set of manufacturer's shop drawings duly approved by Consultant, a complete set of manufacturer's operating and maintenance brochures parts list for all equipment.

.9 The divider tabs shall be laminated mylar plastic, and coloured according to section. The colouring is as follows:

Mechanical Systems - 1.0 to 1.5 - Orange.

Certification - 2.0 to 2.4 - Green.

Shop Drawings and Maintenance - 3.0 to 3.17 - Yellow.

Plastic tabs with type insertions will not be accepted.

1.13 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS DEMONSTRATIONS

.1 Provide mechanical systems demonstrations in accordance with Division 01.

.2 Include in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals all instructions and information given to Owner's staff and instructions and information given by equipment manufacturer's representatives.

.3 The Contractor shall ensure that he has included an adequate allowance in his bid for these instructions. Proper and thorough instructions will be insisted upon and adequate money will be held back until satisfactory instructions have been provided. Record instruction date, topic and attendance. Submit records to Consultant at completion of Project.

1.14 RECORD DRAWINGS

.1 Refer to Division 01 for As-Built drawing requirements.

.2 Keep on site an extra set of white prints and specifications recording changes and deviations daily. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to mark up as-built white prints and specifications to show addenda corrections and Owner initiated construction changes.





.3 The As-Built white prints are to be turned over to the Owner and final payment may be held up by the Owner pending receipt of these drawings.

.4 Record drawings shall locate and identify location of fire dampers, major control lines, access doors, tagged valves and actual room names and numbers. Tagged valves shall be identified on drawings in accordance with valve directory. Particular attention shall be paid to buried or concealed work.

1.15 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND CLEANUP

.1 Protect equipment and materials in storage on site, during and after installation until final acceptance. Leave factory covers in place and take special precautions to prevent entry of foreign material into any working parts or into piping and duct systems.

.2 Piping, ducts and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, cuttings and other foreign substances. Disconnect, clean and reconnect whenever necessary for purposes of locating and removing obstructions. Flush and clean heating systems as specified elsewhere prior to use for temporary or permanent heat. Note that use of heating systems for temporary heat is permissible only if approved by Consultant.

.3 Contractor shall be entirely responsible for cleaning up and removing his debris after completion of this Contract.

.4 All equipment throughout the Project shall be lubricated as per manufacturer's instructions prior to Substantial Performance of the Work.

1.16 TEMPORARY OR TRIAL USAGE

.1 Temporary or trial usage by the Owner of mechanical equipment supplied under this Contract before final acceptance shall not represent acceptance.

.2 Repair or replace permanent equipment used temporarily where any parts are worn or damaged.

.3 Take responsibility for damage caused by defective materials or workmanship during temporary or trial usage.

1.17 ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

.1 Refer to Division 0 which outlines criteria for approval of Equivalents/Alternatives.

.2 Approvals are of manufacturer only. This Contractor shall be fully responsible for any additional work or materials required by the mechanical trades or other Contractors to accommodate approved alternate materials or equipment. Extras will not be approved to cover such work.

.3 Manufacturers/Suppliers which are noted in individual sections as "Acceptable Manufacturers" are automatically approved for bidding and are not required to follow the approval process. All other Manufacturers/Suppliers must follow the approval process.


1.18 EXTENDED WARRANTY

.1 For all mechanical components, provide warranty as described in General Conditions.





.2 This general warranty is not to act as a waiver to any warranty specifying longer period.

1.19 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT AND COLOUR CODING OF PIPING

.1 All pieces of equipment (valves, switches, pumps, fans, boilers, etc.) shall be numbered or named and indexed by this Contractor. Index shall state location of equipment, its name and its number. Number or name to be applied using black lamacoid plastic plates with white lettering screwed or adhered to the apparatus. In case of valves and such pieces of equipment that do not have sufficient area to attach nameplates, a tag shall be attached securely with brass "S" hooks or chain. Tags shall be polished or lacquered brass or aluminum, 40 mm round or octagonal, with stamped letters or numbers, 15 mm high, filled with black paint. Use plates with 25 mm lettering on large equipment such as boilers, fans, pumps, etc.

.2 One copy of index shall be inserted into each copy of maintenance manuals.

.3 All piping installed as part of this division shall be colour banded using manufactured pipe markers equivalent to W. H. Brady Company. Piping markings must comply with ANSI and CSA. All markers must be in compliance with respect to:

.1 Proper letter colour.

.2 Proper letter size.

.3 Correct background colour.

.4 Proper marker size (length).

Pipe shall be marked as follows.

.1 At valve stations (shut off valves).

.2 At branch take-off and valves.

.3 On pipe that passes through walls, floors and ceilings.

.4 On pipe that leads to and from underground areas.

.5 On all horizontal and vertical pipe runs, every 9 m (30') or less and there shall be at least one band in each compartment, room, story, etc.

.6 At access doors.

.7 At change of directions, complicated piping etc., in major equipment rooms so that piping systems may be easily followed viewing from floor or access platforms.

.8 Install identification markers as directed by the manufacturer.

1.20 ELECTRICAL WORK

.1 All wiring shall be in accordance with Electrical Section.

.2 Supply and install all switches, starters, motor controllers and control apparatus, etc. as required for satisfactory completion of work as outlined in drawings and specifications. All electrical equipment supplied or installed shall have CSA approval for use in its intended location.

.3 Provide as required any necessary wiring diagrams required for equipment.

1.21 CLEANING UP

.1 After completion of this work, remove all rubbish, waste materials etc., due to work, make good all damage to building and leave premises and work in good order.





1.22 PAINTING

.1 If equipment and material is to be painted refer to Division 9, unless noted otherwise.

.2 Metal, other than galvanized steel, shall be prime coated under this Contract.



1.24 CO-ORDINATION OF MECHANICAL ITEMS

.1 The Contractor shall arrange his work in cooperation with other trades in the building in a manner so as not to interfere with other work being carried out in the building and to the best advantage of the overall Project. He shall review and study Electrical, Structural and Architectural drawings.

.2 Diffusers, grilles, registers, etc., shall be located as shown on Architectural reflected ceiling plans. Coordinate with light layouts. Locate in centered in panels, T-bar grids, etc.

.3 Likewise the location of grilles, registers, thermostats, etc. on walls shall be located as shown on Architectural drawings, such as elevations, work sheets, etc. Close co-ordination is required from all trades to ensure that the installations are disciplined to the requirements of the Contract.

.4 All pipes and ductwork which are to be concealed shall be installed neatly and closely to the building structure so that the necessary furring can be kept minimal.

1.25 PRICES FOR ADDITIONAL WORK

.1 During the course of construction when this Contractor is requested to submit a price for the performance of additional work, his price shall be broken down to show the quantity and price of the items or material required to carry out the work together with a separate listing of the labour charges for each item.

1.26 TEMPORARY HEAT

.1 Refer to General Requirements.

.2 The permanent system shall not be used for temporary heating purpose, without the written permission of the Consultant.

.3 All costs to provide temporary heat shall be paid for by the Contractor, any equipment used during the construction period shall be thoroughly cleaned and overhauled, replacing any worn or damaged parts, all to the satisfaction of the Consultant.

.4 The use of the permanent system for temporary heat shall in no way modify the terms of the guarantee. The heating system shall, if used for temporary heat, be operated under conditions which will ensure that the system is not temporarily or permanently damaged in any way. Fans shall be operated at proper resistance with filters installed; filters to be changed at regular intervals. No system shall be operated without proper safety devices and controls installed and fully operational. Any equipment or any component not properly operating at the time of the final inspection shall be exchanged with new equipment or components to the Consultant's satisfaction.





.5 Where air systems are used for temporary heat, provide filter media on return and exhaust air outlets. Clean duct systems which have become dirty.

1.27 COST BREAKDOWN

.1 Submit to the Consultant at the time of Award of Contract cost breakdown of the Contract amount for the following items. Each item price shall be complete including piping, controls, insulation, testing and balancing, vibration isolation, labour, overhead, mark-up etc., where applicable to each item. Labour and material costs shall be shown separate for each item.

Items are as follows:

.1 Job start and administration

.2 Heating and cooling piping systems

.3 Duct systems

.4 Ventilation equipment

.5 Balancing

.6 Insulation

.2 Each progress claim submitted by the Contractor, for approval by the Consultant, shall indicate the work completed to date and the total cost, for each item indicated above. Contractor shall also provide a description of the work completed and the material and equipment delivered to the site for each progress claim period.

1.28 CONCEALMENT OF PIPES

.1 It is the intention that piping be concealed above ceilings, in furred spaces, etc., except where otherwise shown or noted. Piping to be exposed shall be run in a neat workmanlike manner.

1.29 ACCESS PANELS

.1 Access doors shall be supplied and installed wherever they are shown or necessary for proper servicing and removal of concealed equipment, such as valves, cleanouts, vents, fire damper access, drain access, etc.

.2 Standard access door to be equivalent to MIFAB Type UA Universal with standard 1/4 turn screw driver cam latch.

.3 Fire rated access door, where required, shall be equivalent to MIFAB series MFRU uninsulated fire rated door, 12 hr UL rating, turn ring operator. 16 gauge door and frames.

.4 Location of access doors shall be approved before installation. They shall be of size large enough to provide necessary access for the item they service.

1.30 PLATES AND SLEEVES

.1 Supply and install sleeves wherever pipe passes through poured floors and wall. Use steel pipe or galvanized sheet steel sleeves for steel pipe and copper pipe sleeves for copper pipe. Seal between pipe and sleeve at any fire separation, all as specified in Section 07 84 00. If plastic sleeves are used they must be removed before job is completed.





.2 Approved chrome plated steel flanges shall be installed wherever exposed piping passes through finished floors, walls or ceilings.

1.31 FIRE STOPPING

.1 Refer to Section 07 84 00 for Fire Stopping requirements.

1.32 DEMOLITION

.1 As shown on drawings, some mechanical equipment and material is to be removed. Owner has first claim on all salvaged material. All material not claimed by the Owner shall be come the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site.

1.33 EXISTING SYSTEMS

.1 Carefully dismantle existing mechanical equipment to be removed or relocated together with reusable materials. Existing equipment, piping, ductwork, conduit, light fixtures which interfere with the new installation shall be temporarily disconnected, remove that which the Owner does not wish to retain which shall become the Contractor’s property and removed from the site when so directed. Where noted, this existing equipment shall be reused in new work after first repairing and reconditioning any defective items. Permanently disconnected mechanical and electrical connections shall be safely capped and sealed flush within finished surfaces. Remove existing inactive services which interfere with work execution.

.2 Arrange work so that interruption of services is kept to a minimum.

.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs required to repair all damages to the existing building, equipment, etc. caused through execution of work in this contract.

1.34 ASBESTOS INSULATION

.1 Contractor shall be aware that insulation on pipe fittings and ductwork may contain asbestos. Wherever work requires this insulation to be disturbed or removed, it shall be the Owner’s responsibility to remove and dispose of it. Contractor shall advise Owner immediately upon finding any asbestos that needs to be removed. All work to be done in complete compliance with Provincial Regulations.

END OF SECTION


Second Floor Renovation COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT



PART 1 General

1.1 GENERAL


.2 Motors shall be suitable for hard continuous service according to CEMA and CSA standards and shall operate free of vibration. Motors shall be drip proof, open type or explosion proof as required for the service indicated. Under full load, the motor temperature rise shall not exceed 40°C for open type and 50°C for drip proof. Motors shall have pre-lubricated ball or roller type bearings. Bearings shall be selected to provide an L-10 rated life of 40000 hours per AFBMA Standard 9" V belt drive applications with external load factors per NEMA MG1-14-42 and 100000 hours L-10 rated life in direct coupled applications. Motors used for similar functions such as pumps, fans, etc. shall be of the same manufacture.

.3 Motors shall have a 1.15 service factor, class F insulation, class B temperature rise.

.4 Motors associated with variable speed drives shall be rated for that use according to NEMA Standard MG1 Part 31.4.4.2 and shall have minimum 1.15 service factory, Class F insulation, Class B temperature rise. Co-ordinate motor selection with drive manufacturer and related equipment manufacturer prior to order.

.5 All motors shall operate at 1200 or 1750 rpm unless otherwise specified. Motors 1/2 HP (373 kW) and smaller shall be 120V/1Ph/60Hz and motors 3/4 HP (560 W) and larger shall be in accordance with Electrical Section.

.6 Supply all motor starters and disconnect switches, for all motors for the Project in accordance with Electrical Division. The Contractor shall review the electrical drawings and motor schedules and shall confirm with the electrical trade all motor voltages, phase and HP, switches, thermostats, etc. and locations of electrical equipment for the Mechanical Work.

.7 Refer to Equipment Schedule for further information on motors, i.e. explosion proof, 2 speed, etc.

.8 All electrical motors, except for fractional horsepower motors shall be Premium Efficient type.

.9 Provide thermistor protection on motors 11.1 kW (15 HP) and larger.

.10 Two (2) speed motors to have separate windings for two speeds.

.11 Acceptable Manufacturers: Westinghouse, Toshiba, C.G.E. Brook, Century, Baldor.

END OF SECTION


Second Floor Renovation GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING



PART 1 General

1.1 GENERAL

.1 All valves shall be of same manufacturer throughout, except special valves specified, and shall have manufacturer's name and pressure rating clearly marked on outside of body.

.2 Shop drawings are required on all valves used on project.

PART 2 Products

.1 All valves up to and including 50 mm shall be ball valves unless noted otherwise equivalent to Crane, Red & White Toyo, Lunkenheimer, Kitz, MAS, Newman Hattersley. They shall be full size port rebuilding type. All valves 65 mm and over shall be gate valves unless otherwise noted. All gate valves and globe valves shall be iron body brass trim. Gate valves 65 mm and over shall be OS&Y with rising stem. All gate, globe and check valves equivalent to Newman Hattersley, Crane, Red & White Toyo, Lunkenheimer or Kitz.

.2 A flanged valve or valve and union shall be provided in the supply and return piping connections to each piece of equipment in the heating, air conditioning and plumbing systems to permit isolation of each piece of equipment and its removal for servicing.

.3 Unless noted otherwise valves shall be equivalent to the following Newman Hattersley numbers, except for ball valves. Ball valves shall be equivalent to Toyo.

Heating & Cooling Ball Gate Globe Check

TOYO NH NH NH 13 mm to 50 mm 5044A A60AT 65 mm and over 5044A 504 731 651

.4 Butterfly Valves

.1 If grooved piping is used, butterfly valves shall be equivalent to Victaulic Series 300. Valves shall have a polyphenylene sulfide (PPS) coated ductile iron body and a ductile iron disc encapsulated in grade E, EPDM rubber. Valves shall have bubble tight, dead end or bi-directional service good to 300 psi. On valves to 150 mm provide 10 position lever lock handles. Provide gear operator on valves 200 mm and larger.

.2 If grooved piping system is not used butterfly valves shall be equivalent to Keystone, Centreline. For dead end service use Keystone F1020CBF2, lug style, drilled and tapped holes. These dead end service valves shall be used at control valves, equipment and other locations where the valves must be attached to the pipe and the equipment or control valve removed. Rating for 1033.5 kPa. For in-line service use Keystone F1000 CMF2 wafer style with locating holes.

All valves shall be bubble tight on shut-off, with field replaceable seat. Valves shall have cast iron body with cast in top plate, bronze disc hand buffed and polished.

Shaft shall be one piece through the disc design and fastened to the shaft with 18-8 disc screws. Seat or liner shall be EPDM (Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer) bushing shall be delrin or oilite bronze and secondary EPDM shaft seal.


GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING Second Floor Renovation



Operators on 50 mm to 150 mm shall be 10 position lever lock operators when used to replace a globe valve otherwise standard 2 position handle is satisfactory. 200 mm and larger shall have gear operators, weatherproof design, adjustable stops, travel indicator and handwheel.

.5 Drain valves shall be equivalent to Toyo Fig. 5046 brass ball valve with integral hose thread and cap and chain on outlet end.

END OF SECTION


Second Floor Renovation HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT



PART 1 General

1.1 GENERAL




.4 Support horizontal steel or copper piping as follows:


Supports (m)

Hanger Rod

Diameters

15 mm 2 9 mm

20 mm to 40 mm 2.5 9 mm


80 mm and 100 mm 3.5 16 mm

150 mm to 300 mm 4 22 mm




.3 Where grooved piping method used, provide four Victaulic style 77 couplings between each pump inlet and outlet and first rigid support. Gasket as specified in Section 23 21 13.


PART 2 Products



Second Floor Renovation HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT



.1 Steel Piping Systems:

Nominal Pipe Size




Carbon Steel

150 mm - 300 mm Hot piping Adjustable wrought clevis (heavy duty)

Carbon Steel


Nominal Pipe Size


15 mm - 40 mm All services Adjustable wrought ring


50 mm - 100 mm All services Adjustable wrought clevis


.3 Piping on roof is to be supported on manufactured supports equivalent to Pro Pipe or Quick-Block.

PART 3 EXECUTION


.2 Support all horizontal cast iron soil pipe with hanger, pipe rest or pier, two for each pipe length; locate support close to hub, with maximum 2.5 m spacing between hangers.

.3 Provide lateral or sway bracing as necessary throughout the Project.


END OF SECTION


Second Floor Renovation VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR

HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT



PART 1 General

1.1 GENERAL

.1 This section outlines the requirements for sound and vibration isolation for mechanical equipment.

.2 Refer to section noted below which are part of these specifications.

Section 23 00 00 - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning

Section 23 21 13 - Hydronic Piping

Section 23 80 00 - Decentralized HVAC Equipment

1.2 GENERAL SOUND AND ISOLATION REQUIREMENTS

.1 All noise and vibration control material specified herein shall be supplied by one manufacturer or manufacturer's representative.

.2 All mechanical equipment shall be isolated to the standards and requirements outlined in these specifications.

.3 The Contractor shall supply to the isolation manufacturer a copy of all approved drawings of the equipment to be isolated.

.4 The isolation manufacturer shall supply drawings showing isolator location, estimated load on each isolator, static deflection, capacity and average isolator efficiency, concrete slab dimensions, anchor positions, etc. and shall supply installation instructions and supervision where required to obtain optimum results. Duct silencer drawings giving dimensions, insertion loss data and pressure drops shall be submitted by the Manufacturer. Tag all isolators and equipment for location on site.

1.3 EXTENT OF WORK - ISOLATORS

.1 Provide vibration isolation on all motor driven equipment over 0.35 kW (0.5 H.P.) or as scheduled, plus associated piping and ductwork shown on the drawings or indicated therein.

.2 Provide horizontal limit springs on all fans (except vertical discharge) in excess of 1.5 kPa (6 in. WG) static pressure, and on hanger supported, horizontally mounted axial fans with more than 330 N (75 lbs.) thrust due to static pressure.

.3 The required minimum static deflection of isolators for all equipment exceeding 0.35 kW (0.5 HP) is indicated below (also see application). All isolators shall be "open spring". Closed spring isolators shall only be used where specified. Provide neoprene grommets on equipment 0.35 kW or less unless directed otherwise.

Basement

Machine Speed Under 15 kW Over 15 kW Upper Floor r/minute (20 HP) (20 HP) Normal Critical

Under 400 Special * Special * Special * Special *

400 - 600 25 mm 50 mm 90 mm Special *

600 - 800 12 mm 25 mm 50 mm 90 mm


VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR Second Floor Renovation




800 - 1100 5 mm 12 mm 25 mm 50 mm

1100 - 1500 4 mm 5 mm 12 mm 25 mm

Over 1500 3 mm 4 mm 5 mm 12 mm

* "Special" indicates as directed by the Consultant.

.4 All upper floor locations shall be considered critical unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

.5 Steel spring isolators shall be used for deflections 12 mm (0.5") and over.

.6 Neoprene isolators shall be used for deflections 5 mm (0.2") and under. Neoprene shall be a maximum hardness of 60 durometer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ISOLATORS

.1 Spring isolators located out of doors or in humid areas shall have hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

.2 Isolation mounts for equipment with operating weights substantially different from the install weights, such as condensing units, etc. shall have adjustable limit stops if mounted on springs.

2.2 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTIONS

.1 Flexible pipe connections shall be flexible stainless steel braid and shall be protected from strain beyond their design limits.

.2 Flexible connectors at pumps shall be equivalent to Hydro-Flex, flexible joint, spherical shape with 150 pound flanges, neoprene and nylon.

2.3 SPRING HANGERS

.1 Hangers capable of 10° misalignment shall be provided unless otherwise specified.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 ISOLATORS

.1 All equipment mounted on vibration isolators shall have a minimum clearance of 50 mm (2") to other structures, piping, equipment, etc. All isolators shall be adjusted to make equipment level.

.2 Prior to making piping connections to equipment with operating weights substantially different from install weights, the equipment shall be blocked up with temporary shims to the final heights. When full load is applied, the isolators shall be adjusted to take up the load just enough to allow shim removal.

.3 Adjustable, horizontal stabilizers on close spring isolators shall be adjusted so that the side stabilizers are clear under normal conditions.


Second Floor Renovation VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR




3.2 CONNECTIONS TO ISOLATED EQUIPMENT

.1 Flexible connectors shall be installed in all piping connected to isolated equipment.

.2 All piping connections to isolated equipment shall be supported resiliently for the following distances or to the nearest flexible pipe connector.

Pipe Size Distance

12 - 37 mm 3,000 mm

38 - 67 mm 4,500 mm

68 - 87 mm 6,000 mm

88 - 125 mm 7,500 mm

126 - 175 mm 9,000 mm

176 - 225 mm 12,000 mm

226 - 275 mm 13,500 mm

276 - 350 mm 15,000 mm

351 - 500 mm 18,000 mm

501 - 700 mm 23,000 mm

Over 700 mm Advise Consultant

.3 Where required in Clause 3.2.2., the three closest hangers to the vibration source shall be selected for the lesser of a 25 mm (1") static deflection or the static deflection of the isolated equipment. The remaining isolators shall be selected for the lesser of a 25 mm (1") static deflection or 1/2 the static deflection of the isolated equipment.

.4 Spring hangers shall be installed without binding.

3.3 APPLICATION

.1 General

.1 The requirement for spring deflections shall be either as noted in table under 1.3.3 or as listed herein, whichever is the greatest.

.2 The requirement for inertia base thickness shall be either as noted in 1.2.4 or as listed herein.

3.4 INSTALLATION

.1 Install sound attenuators, fan bases, isolators and hangers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

END OF SECTION


Second Floor Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC



PART 1 General

1.1 GENERAL

.1 Work of this Section includes testing and adjustment of all duct and piping systems.

.2 Balancing must be performed by a National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) certified contractor with records and drawings kept for each point of testing, adjusting and balancing of HVAC systems.”

.3 Do not start the air balancing and testing until the systems have been completed and put into full working order including permanent filters and automatic operation or to the approval of the Consultant. All instruments used shall be accurately calibrated and maintained in good working order; if required, verification of instrument accuracy shall be obtained from an independent testing agency. Prior to commencement of air balancing, a complete review shall be made with the Consultant on method and instruments to be used for air balance and his approval shall be obtained. Any tests or subsequent changes shall be made under the direction of the Consultant to ascertain that design conditions are met.

.4 The systems shall be balanced prior to the inspection for Substantial Performance of the Work and the Contractor shall schedule his works accordingly including the completion of the balancing reports. Should the building be occupied prior to inspection for Substantial Performance of the Work, a rough balance shall be made to ensure the comfort of the occupants. Balancing report must be submitted prior to Substantial Performance of Work.

.5 Test procedures shall be in accordance with applicable portions of ASME, ASHRAE, SMACNA and other recognized test codes as far as field conditions permit.

.6 Perform tests on site before and witnessed by the Consultant and the authorities having jurisdiction. Attendance at tests shall be at the discretion of the Consultant. Provide written notice of intentions to test ten (10) days prior to tests to Consultant and governing authorities.

.7 Provide copies of all test reports in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 Products

No Part 2 items in this Section.

PART 3 Execution

.1 Carry out hydraulic tests for an eight (8) hour period and maintain pressure with no appreciable pressure drop. Where leakage or pressure drop occurs, repair and retest.

.2 Conduct all tests as work is completed and conditions permit or on portions of systems as directed by Consultant.

.3 Gas fired appliances to be subjected to Gas Inspection Branch operational tests.


TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Second Floor Renovation



.4 Balance the entire new heating, ventilation and exhaust systems to ensure the flow of specified air and water quantities. Note requirements for balancing of some existing systems as described on drawings.

.5 Balance air flows from all fans in ducts, all supply and exhaust diffusers and grilles. Permissable air flow deviation shall be 10% of specified values.

.6 Balance water flows in hot water heating and chilled water systems.

3.2 AIR BALANCING

.1 The systems shall be balanced to provide the air quantities indicated on the drawings. The Work shall include all velocity, pressure, rpm, amperage, temperature readings and other such data required to ensure that the equipment is operating as intended. Provide all necessary adjustments and change to the systems to meet the required quantities; as part of the air balancing work the Contractor shall make any changes in the pulleys, belts, dampers (or add dampers) as required for correct balance at no additional cost to the Owner.

.2 Air balancing work shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:

.1 Adjust fan rpm to design requirements.

.2 Record of amperage of motors. Also provide nameplate ratings of fan motors.

.3 Take pitot tube traverse of main ducts at equipment.

.4 Record static pressures (suction and discharge).

.5 Adjust all air ducts to proper design air volumes.

.6 Adjust all air outlets to within ten percent (10%) of design requirements.

.7 Tabulate all outlets on schedule and identify by number; provide single line schematic layout of systems.

.3 Perform balancing in individual rooms with doors closed.

.4 All data shall be compiled on printed sheets, as approved by the Consultant, and five (5) copies of the final test data in booklet form shall be submitted after approval is obtained on the draft copy.

.5 Provide spot check on system when requested by the Consultant. If actual air quantities do not agree with air balance report data, the Contractor may be called upon to completely rebalance system until required quantities are provided.

.6 Acceptance of Work and/or occupancy by Owner or others will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for making further adjustments within first year after the building is turned over to Owner, it being intended that the Contractor make the system function satisfactorily at all seasons of the year.

.7 Acceptable Air Balance Contractors: Air-Tech Management Ltd., Centre West Air.

3.3 HEAT TRANSFER SYSTEMS BALANCING

.1 Balance water flow through all heat transfer equipment to provide the required flow rates throughout the system.

.2 Hydronic tests including water flow balancing shall be to Association Standards.


Second Floor Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC



.3 If necessary, replace pump impellers to provide proper flow or to prevent overloading of pump motors.

.4 General overall "loop" balancing shall be provided as necessary to ensure flow in all areas. Balancing to be done between areas and loops. Balancing to individual radiation units is not to be part of the balancing Contract.

.5 Tolerance of water flow quantities shall be ± 10%.

.6 Acceptable Heat Transfer System Balance Contractors: Air-Tech Management Ltd., Centre West Air.

3.4 HEAT TRANSFER PIPING SYSTEM TESTS

.1 Completely fill and hydraulically test with a pressure of at least 12 times the actual working pressure, but no less than 689 kPa for water circulating system.

.2 Maintain the test pressure on each system for a four (4) hour period.

END OF SECTION


Second Floor Renovation HVAC INSULATION



PART 1 General

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

.1 This section covers the requirements, materials and methods of pipe, duct, breeching and equipment insulation. Note that it includes the specification for interior duct and plenum insulation also. The responsibility for trade separation rests with the Contractor.

1.2 RELATED WORK

.1 Section 23 21 00 - Hydronic Piping and Pumps

Section 23 30 00 - HVAC Air Distribution


.1 Insure insulation materials meet the requirements of the applicable Canadian Government Specifications Board Standards.

.2 Insulation shall be applied by qualified tradesmen in accordance with the Insulation Manufacturer's Instructions and the "Code of Workmanship for the Application of Insulating Materials".


.1 All material shall be new, uniform and undamaged and delivered to the site in factory packaging with labeling of UL rating and product density and thickness clearly visible.

1.5 JOB CONDITION

.1 Install insulation only when:

.1 All required tests have been completed.

.2 All surfaces are clean and dry.

.3 All foreign material - rust, scale, dirt, etc., has been removed.

.4 Rust proofing where specified has been applied.

.5 Insulation is clean and dry.

.6 Space ambient temperature is not to be less than 10ºC.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit samples of insulation for approval before ordering.

PART 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 All insulation to be glass or mineral fibre (unless noted otherwise) having a K factor of 34.56 W/mm/m

2/oC at 24

oC (.24 BTU/HR/in/

oF/sq.ft. at 75

oF).

.2 On Hot Water Heating and Glycol Heating - insulation equal to Fiberglas Sectional Pipe Insulation, Manson Alley-K (Micro Lok), Fibrex or Knauf complete with All Service Jacket.





.3 On Chilled Water Lines - insulation equal to Fiberglas, Manson Alley-K Sectional Pipe Insulation, Fibrex or Knauf with All Service Jacket (to be vapour sealed).

.4 External Duct Insulation - vapour barrier type - rigid vapour seal duct insulation with reinforced foil flame resistant Kraft faced (RFFRK) 48 kg/m

3 (3.0 PCF) density Fiberglas

or Manson AK Board FSK or equal, or Fiberglas flexible duct insulation with RFFRK facing, 12 kg/m

3(3/4 PCF) density or Manson alley wrap FSK. See "Execution" for

locations and areas where various types and thickness= are to be used. Approved Equivalent - Knauf, Johns Manville.

.5 Duct Lining (Acoustical): Flexible duct liner insulation, 24 kg/m; (1.0 lb/ft;) density, finished on one side with a bonded black mat, equivalent to Knauf Duct Liner M. Thickness to be 25 mm unless noted otherwise. Equivalent - Johns Manville Linacoustic RC.

.6 Canvas covering on exposed insulated surfaces as noted under "Execution" shall be "Thermocanvas" as supplied by S. Fattal Canvas Inc., 5 ounce weight. Canvas shall be treated and shall have ULC listing with flame spread of 25 or less and smoke development of 50 or less. Canvas shall carry ULC label and label shall be permanently marked on the canvas every 2 to 4 feet on the roll.

"Concealed" spaces shall mean services in trenches, chases, furred spaces above ceilings, pipe shafts and other non-accessible areas.

"Exposed" spaces shall mean "not concealed" and shall include mechanical rooms, any exposed areas (no ceilings), mechanical service spaces, accessible pipe shafts, etc.

.7 Vapour barrier adhesive for use on laps and butt strips shall be equal to Flintstik 230-04 or Childers CP-82. Vapour barrier mastic to be used to seal insulation on fittings, etc., shall be equal to Foster Monolar Mastic 60-56, 60-39, white. Combination finish, sizing and lagging adhesive to be used with canvas finish to be Foster Lagfas 81-42W, white or Childer CP-52 or Robson White Lag. Wall paper or wheat paste shall NOT be used anywhere, even if it is covered with approved lagging adhesive. Pressure sensitive tape shall be used to seal longitudinal and butt joints in addition to adhesive. Tape shall be Mactac Foil/Scrim/Kraft (FSK) tape well burnished in place.

.8 PVC Jacketing - Note, this product is to be used only where surface temperature of the insulation or PVC will be no greater than 52C (125F). PVC to be equal to Proto

LoSmoke having a flame spread rating of not more than 25 and a smoke developed classification of not more than 50 (per CAN 4-S102). Fitting material thickness to be minimum 0.51 mm (0.020") up to 375 mm (15") O.D. and -.762 mm (0.030") above 375 mm (15") O.D. Adhesive to be water based butyl acrylate formula equal to Red Devil Glulon.

.9 Tie wire where called for to be 18 gauge T316 stainless steel, soft annealed. Metal strapping to be 0.381 mm (0.015@) thick 316 stainless steel, 12 mm or 19 mm wide.

.10 Elastomeric Flexible Thermal Insulation - To be used to insulate chilled water pumps. Thermal conductivity of 0.27 BTU-in/hr ft² °F flame spread index of less than 25 and a smoke development index of less than 50. Insulation shall carry factory mutual approval. Testing for surface burn characteristics for building materials CAN/ULS S-102.

.11 Plenum Lining and In Ductwork When Perforated Liner Used (Acoustical) – Rigid duct insulation shall be Knauf Rigid Plenum Liner, 48 kg/m³ (3.0 PCF) density, coated on one side with bonded black mat, of thickness noted. Approved Equivalent: Manson Akousti-Liner R, Johns Manville.





PART 3 Execution

3.1 PROHIBITIONS AND SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS

.1 DO NOT use staples anywhere.

.2 The insulation subcontractor must cover and protect all surfaces from his work. Clean up all drips, splatters and spills on floors, walls, ceilings, pipes, ducts, supports, conduits, equipment, etc. at no additional cost to the Contract.

3.2 INSULATION ON PIPING FOR HOT WATER HEATING, GLYCOL HEATING

.1 Cover with Fiberglas Sectional Pipe Insulation with All Service Jacket with side and end joints butted tightly. Seal lap of jacket and Butt Joint strips with Lagging Adhesive. Pressure sensitive tape shall also be used to seal longitudinal and butt joints as well as the adhesive. Tape shall be Mactac Aluminum Foil Tape well burnished in place. Where piping is exposed, (mechanical rooms, basements, etc.) the insulation shall be recovered with 5 ounce "Thermocanvas" pasted down and finished with sufficient coats of Foster Lagfas to completely seal canvas, fill the weave and provide smooth surface for painting.

.2 Expansion joints and ball joints shall be insulated - allow for movement due to expansion.

.3 All flanges, valves and fittings 64 mm and over shall be insulated with fabricated mitred segments of pipe insulation equal in thickness to the insulation on the adjoining pipe. Insulation shall then be held in place with wire or rope or other approved manner and covered with glass fabric tape or scrim sealed with fabric. Do not use 90

o mitres at

elbows. In exposed areas recover with 5 ounce Thermocanvas sealed with Lagfas.

.4 Fittings on pipe 50 mm and smaller shall be insulated with insulating cement to a thickness equal to the adjoining pipe insulation and covered with glass fabric tape or scrim sealed with Lagfas. In exposed areas recover with 5 ounce "Thermocanvas" sealed with Lagfas. Do not use 90

o mitres at elbows in exposed areas.

.5 If Victaulic piping systems are used all Victaulic couplings shall be insulated and finished as noted above.

.6 Approved PVC jacketing meeting National Building Code 25/50 requirements for flame spread and smoke developed may be used. Install insulation and cover as per manufacturer's specific recommendations. Screws, tacks or other mechanical fasteners are not to be used, adhesive only to be used to make watertight seams except that in the case of Victaulic elbows, tees and reducers, the cover manufacturer=s tacks may be used, installed as per recommendations.

.7 All concealed insulation shall be wired or roped securely in place or shall be canvassed with adhesive applied to canvas. Note this applies to all pipe insulation as well as duct insulation. Ties shall be snug but shall not unduly compress the insulation.

.8 Do not insulate over unions. Ends of insulation at unions and other non-insulated components to be neatly tapered, sealed and finished.

3.3 CHILLED WATER PIPING

.1 This section applies to all chilled water piping.

.2 Piping, Fittings, Valves - Insulate with Fiberglas or Manson Alley-K sectional pipe insulation with All Service Jacket with vapour barrier.





.3 All insulation and vapour barriers to be continuous without penetration or breaks except for hanger rods. See below for treatment of insulation at hanger rods.

.4 Insulation shall be applied over clean dry surfaces at room temperature. Adjoining sections shall be firmly butted together and longitudinal seam of the vapour barrier jacket shall be sealed with vapour barrier adhesive under the lap and then covered with Mactac Tape well burnished in place. Butt joints shall be sealed with Mactac Tape. Ends of pipe insulation shall be sealed off with a vapour barrier adhesive at all valves and fittings. Vapour barrier adhesive shall be equal to Flintstik 230-04 or Childers CP-82. It will be acceptable to use the peal and stick adhesive supplied on the vapor barrier insulation longitudinal lip in lieu of the use of a separate vapor barrier adhesive applied under the vapor barrier longitudinal lip, however in both cases, the use of the MacTac tape is required as specified to cover and seal the longitudinal lap and butt joints as specified.

The specification makes reference to the ends of the insulation to be sealed off with a vapor barrier adhesive at all valves and fittings. The fittings that this is to refer to would be exposed fittings where the pipe insulation ends such as at unions.

.5 All pumps, valves, fittings, etc., shall be insulated with molded or fabricated insulation of a thickness equal to that of the insulation of the adjoining pipe, securely fastened in place. Unions shall be insulated over but identified with external pipe insulation label. Insulate expansion joints allowing for movement of components. Insulation on valves, fittings, tanks, etc., shall be covered with glass fabric membrane saturated with brush coat of Vapour Barrier mastic equal to Foster Monolar Mastic 60-56, 60-39, white, to form a complete seal.

.6 All exposed piping, fittings, valves, etc., shall be covered with 5 ounce Thermocanvas neatly adhered in place. Lagging adhesive shall be applied to canvas. Finish with Lagfas, sufficient coats to completely seal canvas, fill the weave and provide a smooth surface.

.7 See 23 05 29 for hangers on cold piping. Piping at hangers shall be as follows: insulate up to the ring hanger with a first layer of insulation (25 mm), apply over the ring hanger a second layer of insulation (25 mm or as required), approximately 300 mm long, then insulate up the rod and past the turnbuckle and vapour seal all. Hanger rods shall have 13 mm insulation applied around the rod for a distance of 100 mm up the rod beyond the pipe insulation. The insulation on the hanger rod shall have a vapour seal jacket and all joints shall be vapour sealed as described above. Finish with canvas as for rest of insulation.

.8 Victaulic couplings shall be insulated in similar manner to flanges with insulation applied over the couplings to a thickness equal to the pipe insulation and finished off so that sides of insulation are at 90

o to the pipe and corners are squared.

.9 All concealed insulation shall be wired or roped securely in place or shall be canvassed with adhesive applied to canvas. Note this applies to all pipe insulation.

.10 PVC jacketing may be used where where surface temperature of the insulation or PVC will be no greater than 52°C (125°F). PVC to be equal to Proto Zeston LoSmoke having a flame spread rating of not more than 25 and a smoke developed classification of not more than 50 (per CAN 4-S102). Fitting material thickness to be minimum 0.51 mm (0.020@) up to 375 mm (15@) O.D. and 0.762 mm (0.030") above 375 mm (15") O.D. Adhesive to be water based butyl acrylate formula equal to Red Devil Glulon.





3.4 INSULATION ON EXTERIOR OF DUCTWORK (VAPOR SEALED TYPE)

.1 The following ductwork shall be insulated on the outside with Fiberglas Vapour Seal RFFRK Duct Insulation as specified under Products except as otherwise noted. See below for application of rigid and flexible. Where rigid insulation is used thickness shall be 25 mm, 48 kg/m

3 (3 PCF) density, (unless otherwise noted), where flexible insulation is

used insulation material shall be 50 mm thick, 12 kg/m3 (3/4 PCF) density. Use 50 mm (or

as noted on drawings if greater than 50 mm) thick rigid on exterior of outdoor air intake ductwork up to preheat coil or mixed air plenum.

.1 All discharge ducts from exhaust fans, from exhaust dampers to discharge louvre or outlet unless insulated on interior as shown on drawings.

.2 All supply ducting from all supply fan systems to each and every outlet and terminal unit and all duct from each terminal unit to each boot, outlet, diffuser or register not including flexible ductwork. That is, all supply ductwork except as noted.

.3 Duct that is insulated on the inside need not be insulated on the outside. Thermal resistance of insulation shall be equivalent whether internal or external.

.4 Any ducting as elsewhere noted on drawings shall be insulated.

.2 Insulation on all exposed rectangular ducts shall be 25 mm except it shall be 50 mm (unless greater thickness noted on drawings) on outdoor air ductwork - Rigid Vapour Seal Duct type, butt all joints.

.1 Insulation shall be cut to fit between standing seams and stiffeners and shall be attached to ductwork by impaling over Mechanical Fasteners at the rate of one fastener per 450 mm (each way). All joints shall be tightly butted.

.2 All joints in insulation, transverse and longitudinal, shall be sealed using aluminum foil self-adhesive tape. All penetrations of vapour barrier including all metal clips and all joints to be sealed with aluminum foil self-adhesive tape. All breaks at hangers, etc., shall be sealed with aluminum foil self-adhesive tape. Tape equal to Mactac pressure sensitive tape well burnished in place.

.3 All exposed insulated surfaces shall be canvas jacketed using 5 ounce Thermocanvas which shall be adhered to insulation and finished with Foster Lagfas. (This includes basements, tunnels, mechanical rooms, mechanical service spaces, etc.)

.3 Insulation on round ducts and concealed rectangular ducts shall be 50 mm thick Flexible Vapour Seal Duct Insulation RFFRK 12 kg/m

3 (3/4 PCF) density reinforced foil faced

Fiberglas or equal with all joints butted. Insulation shall be adhered to duct surfaces using an adhesive equal to 3M #21 applied in strips approximately 100 mm wide on approximately 200 mm centres.

.1 Butt all edges of insulation and seal all joints with self-adhesive vapour barrier tape equal to Mactac over joints. Twine shall be used for securing insulation and shall be used and left on all concealed insulated surfaces. All holes, breaks, etc., shall be sealed with Mactac aluminum foil self-adhesive tape. All exposed insulated surfaces (in mechanical rooms and other areas which have exposed ducts) shall be canvas jacketed using 5 ounce Thermocanvas which shall be adhered to insulation finished with Foster Lagfas. Care shall be taken when applying insulation and canvas cover (where applicable) that insulation is not pulled up so tightly that it is squashed down to less than 25 mm.





3.5 INSULATION ON INTERIOR OF DUCTS (ACOUSTIC INSULATION)

.1 The following ductwork shall be insulated on the inside with 25 mm thick (unless noted otherwise) flexible coated duct liner (referred to on drawings as Acoustic Insulation). Note some insulation as noted on drawings shall be thicker than 25 mm and may be covered with perforated metal. Duct dimensions shown shall mean clear inside dimension after insulation has been applied.

.1 In supply ductwork on discharge from fan coil units as shown on drawings.

.2 In return ducts and boots as shown on drawings.

.3 In toilet exhaust ductwork as shown on drawings.

.4 As elsewhere shown on drawings.

.2 Insulation shall be adhered to inside surfaces using an adhesive equal to 3M fire retardant adhesive. Adhesive shall be applied to 50% of the area. In addition, use mechanical fastening on maximum 400 mm centres on top, sides and bottom. Fasteners shall be flush with liner surface and shall start within 50 mm of all leading edges of each section.

.3 Butt all joints and brush all joints, breaks and tears with approved fire resistant asphaltic type adhesive and embed 100 mm wide glass fabric and then brush over fabric again. Seal all edges and ends of insulation.

3.6 INSULATION THICKNESS SCHEDULE - PIPES AND TANKS

Service Location Size Thickness

Hot Water Heating, All Locations Up to 38 mm 25 mm 50 mm & larger 38 mm

Chilled Water All Locations Up to 38 mm 25 mm

50 mm & larger

END OF SECTION


Second Floor Renovation HYDRONIC PIPING



PART 1 General

1.1 GENERAL



Section 23 05 23 - General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping

Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for VAC.

Section 23 07 00 - HVAC Insulation

Section 23 80 00 - Decentralized HVAC Equipment

.3 Screwed fittings on steel pipe shall be best quality, malleable, free from defects, and rated at 1034 kPa. Unions shall be 1034 kPa malleable iron screwed with ground joints.

.4 Fittings for welded pipes shall be factory fabricated steel butt weld fittings for elbows, tees, reducers, and caps, etc. The use of shop or site fabricated weld fittings, caps or reducers will not be permitted.

.5 Weld fittings to be in accordance with ASTM A-234 and shall have rating at pressure of pipe used; elbows to be long radius; standard weight wall thickness to conform to adjoining pipe.

.6 Grooved fittings to be in accordance with ASTM A-536.

.7 Flanges to be forged steel to conform to ASTM A181 Grade 1 or grooved conforming to ASTM A-47 or ASTM A-536.

PART 2 Products

.1 Acceptable Manufacturers

.1 Pipe and Fittings: Crane, Grinnell, Ladish, Taylor Forge.

.2 Plastic Pipe and Fittings: Building Products Orion, Emco, Domn-X, Ipex.

.3 Grooved Fittings: Victaulic.

.2 Hydronic piping to be as follows:


50 mm and under

ASTM A-53 Sch. 40 CW, ERW or SMLS

ANSI B16.3 MI 1034 kPa rated

Threaded

ASTM A-88 Copper Type L hard temper

Wrought or cast copper pressure

95-5 solder

50 mm - 150 mm ASTM A-53 Sch. 40 CW, ERW or SMLS

Grooved Victaulic 107 Quick Vil Grade E Gaskets

65 mm - 250 mm ASTM A-53 Sch. 40 CW, ERW or SMLS


Welded, flanged


HYDRONIC PIPING Second Floor Renovation




Grooved >Victaulic= No. 07 zero-flex U.N.O.) Grade E gaskets

.1 Mill test reports must be available for all steel pipe used on this project. Provide to Consultant upon request.

.2 Malleable iron fittings must have CRN registration.

.3 Specialties:

.1 All "Y" strainers shall be equivalent to Sarco, Trane or Victaulic. Basket strainers shall be equivalent to Sarco Canada STM with stainless steel lift out basket. Provide blowdown valve on all y-strainers 65 mm and larger. Valve shall be as specified in Section 23 05 23 for drain service.

.2 Pressure gauges shall be equivalent to Trerice model 620B, 114 mm (42@) dial size with stainless steel case and ring and acrylic window. Movement and bourdon tube shall be bronze with brass socket. (ASME B40.1 Grade 1A.) Range shall be selected so that average operating pressure falls approximately in the middle of the scale selected. Dial shall be clearly legible and imprinted with both metric and imperial scales. All pressure gauges shall be equipped with Trerice XD866FFG25 ball valve and Trerice #872 snubber.

.3 Thermometers shall be equivalent to Trerice Model B83200 series except as noted, bimetallic dial type, 75 mm (3") dial size with stainless steel case, ring and stem and extra strength glass window. Dial shall be clearly legible and imprinted with both metric and imperial scales. Thermometers shall be installed in brass separable wells. Stem shall provide insertion length of roughly half of the installed pipe diameter with minimum of 50 mm. Range shall be selected so that average operating temperature range falls approximately in the middle of the scale selected. Where straight stemmed thermometers are not easily visible from the floor then substitute with adjustable angle thermometer equivalent to Trerice B83600 series as above except adjustable through 180.

.4 All pressure relief valves shall be A.S.M.E. rated. Pipe discharge to funnel drains or to glycol tanks if on a glycol system.

.5 Manual air vents are to be used on all high points of hydronic piping systems except where automatic air vents are specifically called for. This applies to all closed piping systems carrying liquids and includes hot water heating system, chilled water system and glycol heating system. Provide valve on air vents equivalent to Toyo 5046 having 19 mm hose connection with cap and chain.

On vents above accessible ceilings bring vent valve down to within 450 mm of the ceiling to allow maintenance personnel easy access to the valve (from step ladder and access through T-bar ceiling). In mechanical equipment rooms pipe vents to valves accessible from floor level. On glycol systems in mechanical rooms pipe vent drains to glycol storage tank. Clearly identify all remote vent locations with systems served.

.6 All automatic air vents shall be equivalent to Ener-Tech Purg-O-Matic model ET-71 float operated self closing type.

.7 Backflow preventors shall be equivalent to Watts #909 with inlet strainer, isolation ball valves and airgap drain funnel. Pipe air gap discharge to funnel drains.

.8 All manual circuit balance valves to be equivalent to T&A with calibrated balancing valve, with calibrating chart. Meter connections to have positive shut-off valves.


Second Floor Renovation HYDRONIC PIPING



.9 Where shown on suction intake of pumps supply and install Suction Strainer Diffusers equivalent to B & G or Victaulic. Diffuser complete with start-up strainer and regular strainer. Remove start-up strainer after system cleaning and install regular strainer.

.10 Automatic flow control valves in 2" (12 mm) to 2" (50 mm) size range shall be equal to Griswold isolator Y automatic flow control valve. Valve to be complete with stainless steel flow control cartridge, #20 mesh stainless steel strainer, brass body, inlet isolation valve, drain and test ports and valve I.D. tag. Flow to be as indicated on drawings. Pressure range to be 13.8 kPa to 200 kPa unless noted otherwise.

.11 Expansion tanks to be as shown on drawings. Equivalent to Expanflex with EDPM replaceable bladder.

.12 See specific sections for any additional specialties.

.13 Water pressure reducing valve shall be Mueller or Watts, bronze and stainless steel construction. Approved equivalent: Conbraco.

.14 On hydronic piping systems, where indicated, supply and install in the piping ahead of the take-off of the expansion tank a Bell and Gossett Rolairtrol Air Separator - inline type sized as recommended by the manufacturer (sizes in some cases will be smaller than the line size). Connect expansion tank take-off downstream of air separator. Do not connect expansion tank to air separator. Supply and install on top air outlet a B&G Model 107 high capacity float type air vent complete with shutoff valve on inlet. For an automatic air vent serving a glycol system, the vent shall be piped back to the glycol fill barrel.

.15 Automatic flow control valves greater than 2" shall be equivalent to Griswold Class 150 wafer flow control valve. Valve to be complete with stainless steel cartridge and spring, 1/4" pressure and temperature test extensions and aluminum identification tag. Pressure range to be 13.8 kPa to 220 kPa unless otherwise noted. Valve may be larger than pipe size if required to meet flow requirements. Minimum valve size to be equivalent to pipe size it=s installed in. Provide flanges as necessary to install valves.

.16 Provision must be made for the removal of the strainers and cartridges at the time the flow control valves are installed. These components are to be tagged, protected from damage and either remain with the valves or be stored in such a manner that once the piping has been flushed and ready for service the correct strainers and valves are installed in the flow control valves.

2.2 EXPANSION TANKS

.1 Of sizes as shown on drawings equivalent to Expanflex precharged with EPDM bladder.

PART 3 Execution

.1 Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without unduly stressing the pipe, equipment connected or building components. Install pipe loops where shown on drawings or required.





HYDRONIC PIPING Second Floor Renovation



.5 Direct welded connections to valves and equipment not permitted. Use screw connections up to 50 mm, flanged connections for 65 mm and over, except when grooved valves are used.


.7 Horizontal drainage lines shall grade not less than 10 mm per meter, vent pipes shall be graded to drain back to soil or waste pipes by gravity.

.8 Provide a 20 mm ball valve drain c/w hose thread and cap w/ chain at all low points in piping system to facilitate draining of lines.

.9 At all equipment, provide unions up to 50 mm and grooved couplings or flanges with gaskets 65 mm and larger piping.

.10 Screwed joints in steel or iron piping shall be made with full cut standard taper pipe threads with approved non-toxic joint compound applied to male threads only.

.11 Welded joints shall be made by a welder holding a current certificate from the Provincial authorities.



3.2 EXPANSION TANKS

.1 Hang expansion tanks with sturdy hanger rods and angle supports or straps or support on pipe stand or housekeeping pad.

.2 Run drain lines to floor drains or to glycol barrels as required with accessible drain valve.

END OF SECTION


Second Floor Renovation HYDRONIC PUMPS



PART 1 General

1.1 SCOPE

.1 All pumps except where integral with a manufactured piece of equipment.

.2 Pump controls where self-contained.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit with shop drawings certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable.


.1 Base mounted pumps shall be aligned by qualified millwright and alignment certifed.

.2 Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid operating temperatures and pressures with vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, operate with 25% of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. Motor capacity shall be adequately sized to prevent overloading throughout entire range of performance curve.

.3 Comply with Section 23 05 13 Electric Motors.

PART 2 Products


.1 End Suction Centrifugal Pumps: Bell & Gossett, Armstrong, Taco.

.2 Vertical Centrifugal Pumps: Bell & Gossett, Armstrong, Taco.

2.2 GENERAL

.1 Statically and dynamically balance rotating parts.

.2 Construction shall permit complete servicing without breaking piping or motor connections.

.3 Pumps shall operate at 1750 rpm unless specified otherwise.

.4 Pump connections shall be flanged.

.5 All pump flanges to be complete with pressure gauge tappings.

2.3 CIRCULATING PUMPS

.1 Circulation pumps shall be of sizes and capacities as shown on schedule on drawings. Pumps equivalent to B&G, Armstrong, Taco.


HYDRONIC PUMPS Second Floor Renovation



.2 Pumps shall have cast iron body, oil lubricant, with mechanical seals. Equip with flexible couplings, complete with guards.

.3 Pump curves shall be required with shop drawings.

.4 Starters and wiring in accordance with Electrical section.

.5 Pumps to be complete with suction and discharge pressure taps.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Provide drains for bases piped to and discharging into floor drains.

.2 Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings.

.3 Provide suction guides complete with strainer on inlet to all pumps except domestic hot water recirc pumps and sump pumps. Refer to Section 23 05 23 and 23 21 13 for requirements for strainers and combination suction guides with strainers.

.4 Decrease from suction line size with eccentric reducers. Support piping adjacent to pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings. Support suction guide and discharge elbow from a floor stand with rubber and shear sandwich pad isolators or from above with hangers and spring isolators.

.5 Maintain manufacturer’s recommendations for length of straight pipe required on pump inlet and discharge.

.6 Provide 4" high housekeeping pads for pumps. Grout base mounted pumps to inertia and/or housekeeping pads.

.7 Check and align base mounted pumps prior to startup by qualified millwright.

3.2 PERFORMANCE

.1 Refer to Pump Schedule.

END OF SECTION


Second Floor Renovation PIPE CLEANING AND CHEMICAL TREATMENT



PART 1 General

1.1 SCOPE

.1 This section specifies the requirements for the supply and performance of pipe cleaning and chemical treatment for the following systems:

.1 New Chilled Water Systems.

.2 New Hot Water Heating Systems.

.3 New Glycol Heating Systems.


.1 Provide chemical treatment, chemicals, and equipment by an agency that specializes in this type of Work. Agency shall take full responsibility for providing acceptable cleaning and treatment procedures to Provide suitable working systems.

.2 Perform cleaning operation on site before and witnessed by the Consultant at his discretion.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit shop drawings including proposed chemicals, quantities and calculations, procedures, and equipment to be supplied.

.2 Provide typewritten report containing log and procedure of system cleaning giving times, dates, problems encountered and condition of water, before and after treatment.

.3 All reports shall be included in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 Products

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - TREATMENT SPECIALISTS

.1 Nalco.

2.2 GENERAL

.1 Provide sufficient treatment material to place systems into stable operation.

.2 Materials which may contact finish areas through leakage shall be colourless.

.3 It is the responsibility of the chemical treatment specialist to provide treatment and cleaning materials and procedures suited to system conditions. Pay careful attention to gasketing systems and special material conditions to ensure that procedures and materials employed do not compromise system's integrity. Procedures must not damage seals, gaskets, or system's joining methods.

2.3 CHEMICALS

.1 Hydronic Systems Cleaner: Nalco.

.2 Hydronic Systems Treatment: Nalco.


PIPE CLEANING AND CHEMICAL TREATMENT Second Floor Renovation



PART 3 Execution

3.1 SYSTEM CLEANING

.1 Only new piping shall be cleaned. Provide temporary bypass piping, pot feeder and pumps as required to allow this cleaning.

.2 Prevent debris, dirt and other foreign material from entering piping system during construction.

.3 Install adequate drain connections to completely drain each system in one hour. Use a water meter to record the water volume in each system.

.4 Install temporary strainers in the system during the cleaning. Protect or remove control devices from the systems being cleaned.

.5 System pumps may be used for the cleaning provided that the system is manually pre-flushed with potable water. Dismantle and inspect the pumps after use and replace worn parts or seals. Install new gaskets. Check rotation of pumps.

.6 Systems shall be completely operational, with all safety devices functional prior to cleaning.

.7 Hydronic Systems: Introduce to the system via the pot feeder, as directed by chemical representative. Flush the system to drain from the lowest points with a minimum of 5 system volumes or until the water is clear, free of all foam and pH, conductivity, and alkalinity readings of the flush water match the raw water. Treat the system immediately as required by Chemical Consultant. Contractor shall ensure that complete circulation is being achieved and that no valves are closed to restrict circulation.

.8 Inspect, clean off sludge and flush all low points with clean water after cleaning process is completed. Include disassembly of components as required.

3.2 SYSTEMS TREATMENT

.1 Hydronic Systems: Treat systems as specified by Nalco representative.

3.3 RECORDS AND LOGS

.1 Keep detailed log of all chemical cleaning and treatment activities. Report as outlined previously and logs to be inserted in maintenance manuals.

END OF SECTION


Second Floor Renovation HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION



PART 1 General

1.1 SCOPE

.1 This section outlines supply and installation of packaged air handling units.

.2 Refer to Sections noted below which are part of these specifications.


Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC

Section 23 05 23 - Mechanical General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping

Section 23 05 13 - Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment

Section 23 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping Equipment


PART 2 Products

2.1 DUCT HARDWARE FITMENTS

.1 Ball joint splitter damper controls equivalent to Duro Dyne, SRP-24.

.2 Turning vanes equivalent to Duro Dyne Vane Rail or Hart & Cooley - hollow type turning vanes.

.3 Manual balancing damper handles equivalent to Duro Dyne, KS-12 up to 250 mm size and KSR-19 up to 500 mm size and KS-38 up to 750 mm size. Mark final balancing position with felt marker pen.

.4 Access door handles equivalent to Vent lock with inside and outside handles.

2.2 GENERAL DUCTWORK AND APPARATUS CASINGS AND PLENUMS

.1 Pitot tube openings shall be provided in discharge ducts from all supply fans and in the discharge or intake of all return air or exhaust fans. Openings shall be required on 200 mm x 300 mm centre on rectangular ducts. If distance across duct is more than 750 mm openings shall be provided on both sides of widest dimension. On round ducts openings are required on one half the periphery and shall be 300 mm on centre measured around circumference of duct.

.2 All necessary allowances and provisions shall be made in the installations of the ducts for structural conditions of the building and ducts may be transformed or divided as may be required and directed. All changes must be approved.

.3 Open ends of ducts shall be protected to prevent dirt and debris from entering.

.4 Where ducts are shown connecting to masonry openings and along edges of plenums at walls and floor etc., there shall be provided a continuous angle iron which shall be bolted or ramset to the wall, floor, etc., with caulking compound applied before angle secured. Bolt sheet metal to angle iron.


HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION Second Floor Renovation



.5 Holes for pipes, hangers, conduit, etc., shall be provided where the services are permitted to pass through ducts as authorized on site. After pipes, hangers, etc., have been installed holes shall be caulked to close any openings.

.6 All ducts shall be adequately supported. Ducts shall have hangers on not more than 2400 centres.

.7 Hangers on ducts up to 750 mm in width shall be constructed from galvanized steel straps 25 mm x 18 gauge rivetted to side of duct. On ducts 751 to 1200 use 25 x 3 mm straps. On ducts over 1200 use 38 mm x 38 mm x 3 mm angles across bottom of duct with 6 mm rods.

.8 All joints both longitudinal and transverse in all plenums and ducts (low and high pressure, supply, return and exhaust) shall be sealed using Foster Safetee Duct Sealant 32-50. Any larger gaps or openings shall be covered first with scrim and then sealed. Also seal at diffuser and grille connections.

.9 All plenum chambers, intake plenums, mixing plenums, and discharge plenums shall be constructed of 18 gauge galvanized steel (unless noted otherwise) reinforced with 38 mm x 38 mm x 4.75 mm angles. Angles shall be installed on not more than 600 mm centres and also at all vertical and horizontal seams. Standing seams may be used in one direction. They shall be free from vibration, rattles, etc. and in addition bracing shall be added if necessary. Floor of intake plenum shall be raised off floor with channels or joists, a minimum of 150 mm to ensure air space below plenum. Insulate floor of plenum with 50 mm rigid insulation and cover with galvanized sheet metal suitably supported to provide a walking surface. Internally insulate fan casings, plenums, etc. with 48 kg/m

3

density rigid insulation (3.0 #) of thicknesses noted on drawings.

.10 Provide sheet metal walking surface over insulated floors on walk-in plenums.

.11 Where ducts pass through floor of mechanical rooms they shall be flashed or dammed to prevent entry of water.

.12 Supply and install access door for all fan equipment plenums and ductwork, etc. as indicated on drawings or as required. Access doors shall be insulated sandwich panel construction of same material as casings complete with 2 way latches. Openings shall be braced all around with angle iron. Doors shall be rubber gasketed all around and shall have a minimum of 2 quick opening catches with both inside and outside handles and shall be side hinged. Swing doors such that air pressure tends to hold doors closed. See 2.1.4 for door handles. The entire door construction shall be as shown in SMACNA Duct Manual.

.13 Floors of intake plenums and elsewhere as shown shall be fitted with drains. Provide as many drains as required to permit complete drainage of plenum floors. Plenum floors shall be made water-tight by soldering all seams to 100 mm up from floor.

Traps in floor drains and fan unit drains shall be extra deep to prevent blowing out or "sucking out" of trap seal.

2.3 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK

.1 Low pressure ductwork unless noted otherwise shall be constructed as follows.

.2 All ducts shall be run as shown on the drawings. Insofar as possible, duct shall be constructed in accordance with the dimensions shown on the plans. Where necessitated by building construction, these dimensions may be altered provided the same equivalent





duct sizes are maintained: ducts shall be sized from the ASHRAE's "Table of Equivalent Rectangular and Round Ducts". No duct sizes shall be changed without permission.

.3 All ducts shall be constructed of galvanized sheet steel to the following gauges (unless otherwise noted).

Duct Size (Max. Side) U.S.S. Gauge Up to 300 mm (12") No. 26 301 to 705 mm (13" to 30") No. 24 751 to 1350 mm (31" to 54") No. 22 Above 1350 mm (54") No. 20

.4 All ducts shall be properly braced or stiffened so as not to interfere with free flow, and shall be air tight and free from buckling, sagging and vibration.

.5 All ducts or casings of 914 mm (36") width or more shall have galvanized iron or steel bracing which shall be rivetted to the duct if required to prevent vibration.

.6 Where largest dimension of a duct is over 450 mm (18") the duct shall be stiffened by bending in a break across the corners in both directions.

.7 All longitudinal seams in the ductwork shall be grooved seams and all transverse seams shall be made by means of drive slip joints at no more than 2400 mm centres. If a Contractor wishes to use other duct construction it shall be in accordance with "Duct Manual and Sheet Metal Construction" published by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors.

.8 All bends, tees, and ells shall be made with radius of not less than 12 times the width of duct in the plane or rotation of the radius and where this is not possible such turns shall be fitted with duct turns of proper sizes. Tubular type duct turns shall be used on ducts 400 mm and under, single thickness turning vanes shall be used on smaller sizes.

.9 Balancing dampers and splitters shall be supplied and installed where shown. They shall be rigidly constructed and fitted with quadrant locks at readily accessible locations. Splitters shall be at least the same gauge as duct and shall be securely hinged at air leaving edge and shall be made up to have a round leading edge.

.10 All ducts shall be securely braced against vibrating.

.11 All joints both transverse and longitudinal and flex duct connections shall be sealed with duct sealer.

2.4 HIGH PRESSURE DUCTWORK

.1 All discharge ductwork from all supply fans to terminal units and exposed ductwork in gymnasium shall be high pressure ductwork as described below.

.2 High pressure fittings are shown on drawings and Contractor shall supply and install his ductwork in strict accordance with detail and good practice. All take-offs shall be by conical fitting. All elbows shall be 5 piece or smooth with centre line radius of 1.5 x diameter.

.3 Construction of high pressure ductwork and fittings shall be factory fabricated conduit consisting of helically wound galvanized iron strips with special lock seams equivalent to United Spiral Uni-Seal Duct. Fittings shall be fabricated of 20 gauge galvanized steel with





butt joint machine welded. Fittings shown on drawings shall be equivalent to "United" uniform fittings.

Duct gauges shall be as follows: Diameter U.S. Gauge Up to 350 No. 26 375 to 650 No. 24 675 to 900 No. 22

.4 Joints - all ducts shall be connected by a sleeve coupling or by use of fittings as required.

A fitting-to-duct connection shall be made by slipping the fitting into the duct. A fitting-to-duct connection shall be made by using a female coupling. The ends of fittings or ducts shall not be crimped.

Inside surface of duct and outside surface of fitting shall be wiped clean with a cloth and should be clean and dry, free from grease, oil, rust and loose paint or galvanizing. When fitting collar is started into the duct but before pushed into the band stop, apply Premium Grade Duro Dyne S-2 High Velocity Duct Sealer or approved equivalent. Push fitting into bead stop. Drill and install rivets or sheet metal screws at least 3 per joint on smaller ducts and more on larger ducts. Coat screws with sealing compound.

Apply Duct Sealer to the outside of the joint to a 50 mm band width ensuring that screw heads and joint gap are covered. Apply fiberglass scrim over the wet sealer. Cover scrim with sealer. Twenty-four hours later ductwork may be tested.

.5 Do not use screws or rivets to hang high pressure ductwork. Support horizontal runs by one piece band straps around duct with single suspension hanger or by two piece clamp band. Large fittings shall have individual supports.

.6 All exposed ductwork shall be installed in a first class manner. Installation shall be to the highest standard and poor or sloppy Work shall be rejected.

.7 Remove any and all labels, stickers, etc. on all exposed ductwork in preparation for painting.

2.5 FIRE DAMPERS

.1 Supply and install a complete system of fire dampers throughout the job all as required by the Fire Commissioner, as shown on drawings. All shall have ULC approval.

.2 Dampers shall be of the folded interlocking type equivalent to Ruskin or Nailor.

.3 Fire dampers must be installed within the separation. Provide steel angle all around as directed by manufacturer. Installation directions and dampers must be ULC approved. Provide required clearance between sleeve and fire separation.

.4 Provide duct "break-away" connections on each side of separation so that ducts will break away if hit by falling objects leaving damper retained in separation.

.5 Seal all around pipes where they pass through fire separation all as specified in Division 07.

.6 Access openings shall be provided in wall or ceiling at all dampers with access panels in duct at each damper. Dampers shall be in accessible locations.





.7 Access panels in ducts to be of manufactured type, equivalent to Nailor Hart series 0800 complete. Sizes shall be as required to permit servicing of fire damper.

2.6 GRILLES, REGISTERS, LOUVRES, TURNING VANES, DAMPERS, ETC.

.1 Supply and install all items as listed herein and as shown on schedule on drawings. Grilles registers, diffusers, etc., equivalent to E. H. Price, Titus, Krueger or Nailor.

.2 At ends of runs and at other points in ductwork where 12 radius cannot be formed, duct turns equivalent to Duro Dyne shall be provided.

.3 All exterior louvres shall be supplied and installed by the Mechanical Division. Mechanical Division shall connect ductwork to louvres and blank off with insulation panels (25 mm styrofoam with metal on both sides) all portions of the louvre not used. All louvres equivalent to Price JE443 with channel frame complete with bird screen. Finish in baked enamel in colour selected by Consultant. Construction Specialties equivalent.

.4 All dampers shall be provided as shown on drawings and as specified. Balancing dampers shall be provided as shown on drawings. Equip with manual lever and quadrant lock.

On ducts smaller than 450 mm butterfly type dampers may be used. Blade shall be 16 gauge securely fastened to rod. Equip with lever and quadrant lock. All damper rod ends shall be slotted with the slot running parallel to the damper blade.

2.7 QUIET OPERATION

.1 It is intended that the heating and ventilating systems be quiet in operation, and it shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to supply and install the equipment in a manner to secure as quiet operation as possible with the equipment or material specified.

.2 Provide sound data on all fans over .74 kW (1 hp). Data to accompany submittal drawings.

2.8 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS AT FANS

.1 Provide on suction and discharge of all fans a flexible connection equivalent to Duro Dyne, 100 mm Neoprene, consisting of a heavy glass fabric double coated with Neoprene or "Durolon", heavy fiberglass fabric coated with Dupont elastomer, securely fastened to the fan and to the ductwork by galvanized steel. Do not use canvas or asbestos.

.2 Flexible connections on suction side of fans shall be one diameter away from fan intake.

2.9 COOLING COILS

.1 Cooling coils shall be equivalent to Trane, York, McQuay or Engineered Air of type, series and capacities noted on schedule on drawings where cooling coils are installed in ductwork, ductwork shall be constructed to provide minimum 300 wide x 25 mm deep drain pan, with all joints and seams waterproofed.

2.10 FLEXIBLE DUCT

.1 Flexible ducts shall be equivalent to Thermaflex T/L High Pressure flexible duct. Ducts shall be joined in a similar manner to rigid high velocity ductwork. The duct shall be constructed of single ply triple lock aluminum. This applies to flexible duct on both high and low pressure ductwork.





.2 Duct shall comply with NBFU standards, pamphlet 90A paragraph 303(a)3.

.3 Flexible duct lengths as shown on drawings are diagrammatic and additional rigid ductwork shall be used except that the minimum length of flexible duct shall be 600 and the maximum length shall not exceed 1 metres (3'). Note that in many cases longer flexible ductwork is shown. This is only to show that flexible ductwork is required on the run and can be located within the run.

.4 Flexible ductwork shall not be used on inlet ductwork to terminal boxes.

2.11 DUAL DUCT TERMINAL UNITS

.1 All new terminal units are specified as Price equipment. Titus is an equivalent manufacturer.

.2 Units shall be Price DDS5000 series units as noted on schedule.

.3 The volume control device shall be operated by a 24 VAC actuator.

.4 Units shall be of the variable volume type. Initial operation shall be pressure independent constant volume.

.5 Discharge ductwork shall be lined with acoustic insulation by the Contractor. Provide necessary access doors. Contractor to ensure that units are accessible. Install with minimum 450 mm service access to each side of unit.

.6 Terminal Units Manufacturer must supply units with controllers and controls provided by the same manufacturer as the building automation system. The terminal units shall be supplied and complete with all devices, controllers, operators and fully wired. The terminal unit manufacturer shall be responsible for performance of the unit including the controller. It shall be the responsibility of the terminal unit manufacturer to ensure that the controller supplied to them through the building automation system manufacturer performs in full compliance with the requirements of these specifications.

.7 The terminal unit manufacturer shall negotiate with the controls manufacturers the OEM supply, factory installation, research, development, servicing and/or other costs.

.8 The actuator on the DDS5000 or variable constant volume air valve shall be controlled by a flow measuring device such as the Honeywell microbridge air flow sensor or if a multi-point sensing device and transducer is used an amplifier shall be provided. Transducer shall be an electronic device to convert static and velocity pressure through software to provide a flow input signal which shall be amplified for processing through the controller.

.9 Each terminal unit or as noted on schedule or shown on drawings shall be provided with a DDC Terminal Unit Controller (TUC) and a Room Sensor/Thermostat. The control system shall be as described below.

.10 Interfacing with the Building Automation System and air flow control/space temperature control overall shall be the primary responsibility of the Building Automation System controller.

.11 Notwithstanding these assigned areas of primary responsibility it shall also be considered an essential condition of this Contract that the terminal unit manufacturer and building automation system manufacturer agree to collaborate closely such that the performance commitments of each represents also an integration of the other and that together they represent a single source responsibility for the system overall.





.12 The box shall control air flow to maintain constant flow to within ± 5% of volume with pressure variations from minimum pressure up to 1000 Pa.

.13 Controls shall be direct digital (P.I.D.) for control and monitoring of VAV terminal air valve units.

.14 Terminal Box Controllers shall be supplied, mounted and wired to box by the terminal unit manufacturer at their factory.

.15 Control wiring external to unit assembly by Control Contractor. Power wiring to transformers by Electrical Division. Wiring to space temperature sensor to be as required by manufacturer for capability to access system from portable operator terminal at room temperature sensor.

.16 Units complete with dampers capable of leakage at shut off, less than 2% of nominal box rating of 1000 Pa.

.17 Construct box of minimum 22 gauge coated steel, lined with 25 mm thick 1.5 PCF internal acoustical-thermal insulation, meeting NFPA 90A and UL 181.

.18 Provide sheet metal control enclosure.

.19 Provide factory disconnect switch at unit to permit shutting of power to unit.

.20 Each controller shall have all operating system and application software in non-volatile memory, i.e., EPROM. The use of batteries for any reason is not acceptable. Controller shall operate on 24 VAC circuit. Controller shall have LED indication of Communications Processing Unit operation, data transmission and data reception.

.21 The logic circuit shall be pressure independent and shall be adjustable in time response and volume sensitivity.

.22 The unit shall communicate through industry standard communications port.

.23 Multiple units shall communicate via a single communications line.

.24 The unit shall be able to store and recall maximum, minimum and temperature setpoints, even after power interruptions. The program logic shall be able to reset remotely through the communications network. The use of dip switches and/or potentiometers for any adjustment is not acceptable. System must be able to execute adjustment from central system.

.25 The unit shall be able to communicate and transfer the following information through the communication network to the Building Automation System.

.1 air flow rate

.2 air flow rate setpoint maximum

.3 air flow rate setpoint minimum

.4 space temperature current

.5 space temperature maximum 24 hours

.6 space temperature minimum 24 hours

.7 space temperature setpoint

.26 The unit shall be able to communication with the Building Automation System to:

.1 reset space temperature setpoints





.2 reset air flow rate maximum

.3 reset air flow rate minimum

.27 All units shall have the capability of resetting the flow constraints and the flow sensor calibration after the unit is installed.

.28 The terminal unit on supply to rooms or on the exhaust from the room or space shall maintain temperature or monitor the air leaving the space and shall maintain the set flow and shall transmit this information to the controller as shown on the control wiring diagram.

.29 See drawings for sequence of operation descriptions for various room functions - see Controls section, Schedules and Details on drawings.

.30 Controllers shall be programmed to provide alarms for flow differential variations and for high and low inputs and logic stops.

END OF SECTION


Second Floor Renovation DECENTRALIZED HVAC EQUIPMENT



PART 1 General

1.1 SCOPE

.1 This section outlines supply and installation of all items relating specifically to the heating and air conditioning systems.

.2 Refer to Sections noted below which are part of these specifications.


Section 23 05 93 - Testing Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC

Section 23 21 13 - Hydronic Piping

Section 23 05 23 - General Duty Valves for HVAC


Section 23 25 00 - HVAC Water Treatment

PART 2 Products

2.1 RADIATION

.1 Radiant Heating Panels

.1 Supply and install radiant heating panels equivalent to Airtex (Engineered Air) or TWA Panels as shown on drawings.

.2 Panels shall be type as specified on drawings, factory finished in standard manufacturer's colour as selected by the Consultant. Install panels wearing clean gloves. Panels shall be as noted on plan. Pipe panel piping as shown on drawings - connect tubes between panels and provide serpentine coils for each panel or as shown.

.3 The Contractor shall supply and install panels in ceiling as shown. Supply and install any additional hangers required to support panels. Cooperate with the ceiling Contractor. Panel sizes are to be sizes shown in drawing and in schedule.

.4 Radiant panels shall produce a minimum heating output of 730 watts per sq. metre with average water temperature of 82.2°C (232 BTU/HR/FT²) with 180°F average water).

.5 Contractor shall connect to panels with 13 mm (2") soft copper piping and connect between panels to pipe up panels as shown on drawing.

.6 Panels to be factory assembled complete with cross braces as required and factory insulated. Insulation shall be 50 mm RFFRK fiberglass batt insulation with foil facing on both sides, all edges taped and sealed to completely encapsulate fibreglass insulation. Insulation shall be installed continuous between cross braces and securely fastened to radiant panels using screws and washers.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 PIPING, ETC.

.1 Install all piping, valves, fittings, etc., as shown and as required to complete the heating water systems all as shown on drawings, described herein and as necessary to provide


DECENTRALIZED HVAC EQUIPMENT Second Floor Renovation



complete and operable systems. Install all anchors, expansion joints and loops as shown. Clean piping systems and treat water all as described in Section 23 25 00.

3.2 RADIATION

.1 All radiation is to have valve on supply and return on hot water. Provide manual air vents on all upfeed radiation.

.2 Install radiation as noted on drawings and in specifications.

.3 Support radiant heating panels independently from building structure using steel wire or rods.

3.3 RELIEF VALVES

.1 Pipe all relief valves on hot water system and drains to glycol barrel.

3.4 TAPPINGS

.1 Supply and install tappings, thermometer wells, etc., required for thermometers and controllers as shown on flow diagram and control diagram.

3.5 CLEARANCES AND CO-ORDINATION

.1 Maintain clearances in mechanical rooms and other areas to permit free movement for maintenance and maintain minimum clearances. Pay special attention to access to equipment.

.2 The trades must co-operate and Work out in detail the proposed coordinated routing of pipes, ducts, conduits, etc.

END OF SECTION


Second Floor Renovation AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS



PART 1 General

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

.1 Related work specified elsewhere.

Divisions 21, 22, 23

Divisions 26, 27, 28

1.2 GENERAL

.1 This section is common to all sections of Division 21, 22 and 23 and supplements the requirements of Section 0 and Division 1.


1.3 WORK INCLUDED

.1 Provide a Building Management and Control System (BMCS) incorporating Direct Digital Control (DDC), equipment monitoring and control for all mechanical systems as specified in Division 15. Note that the mechanical systems in this building are presently controlled by Honeywell Excell 5000 DDC system complete with PC operator workstation. All new controls shall be an extension to this existing system.

.2 The Temperature Control Subcontractor shall furnish all labour, material, equipment, including electric wiring, wiring diagrams, and services necessary for the complete installation of the controls system described herein and/or as shown on the drawings. Refer to Division of Work and electrical drawings for additional information.

.3 All wiring, tubing and interface equipment such as valves, relays, solenoids, etc. shall be furnished and installed by the Controls Contractor.

.4 All wiring shall be installed in accordance with local Codes and Standards. Low voltage wire in concealed locations may be approved Teflon coated without conduit. All wiring in Mechanical Rooms and spaces required by Code shall be in EMT.

.5 The Temperature Controls Contractor shall input all processes, trend logs, alarm messages, custom equations, etc. for each mechanical system.

.6 Supervision, engineering and checkout of the system shall be by factory trained engineers and technicians employed directly by the automation controls system manufacturer.

.7 Submittals, data entry, pneumatic and electrical installation, programming, startup, test and validation acceptance document and system warranty.


.1 Codes and Approvals

.1 The complete BMCS installation shall be in strict compliance to all applicable national, provincial and local mechanical and electrical codes.

.2 All devices shall be CSA certified and UL or FM listed and labeled for the specific use, application and environment to which they are applied.


AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS Second Floor Renovation



.3 System shall be designed and manufactured to ISO 9001 quality standard and all electronic equipment shall conform to the requirements of FCC regulation Part 15, Section 15 governing radio frequency electromagnetic interference and be so labeled and European CE rating for electromagnetic emissions standards.

.2 Provide satisfactory operation without damage at 110% above and 85% below rated voltage and at 3 hertz variation in line frequency. Provide static, transient, and short circuit protection on all inputs and outputs. Communication lines shall be protected against incorrect wiring, static transients and induced magnetic interference. Bus connected devices shall be a/c coupled or equivalent so that any single device failure will not disrupt or halt bus communication.

1.5 ACCEPTABLE BIDDERS AND BID PROCEDURES

.1 Bidders shall be manufactures or franchised dealers whose principal business is that of installing and/or manufacturing automatic temperature control systems. Bids by wholesalers, contractors, franchised dealers whose principal business is not that described above shall not be acceptable.

.2 Acceptable manufactures shall be DMA Applied Controls.

.3 The system shall be engineered, programmed and installed by personnel trained and regularly employed by the manufacturer of the control equipment. The Temperature Control Subcontractor shall be experienced specifically in the installation of direct digital temperature control in similar size projects.

.4 The Division 15 Control Contractor shall have an in place support facility with 400 km traveling distance of the site with technical staff, spare parts inventory and all necessary test and diagnostic equipment. The office shall be staffed with factory trained personnel capable of providing instructions, routing preventative maintenance and emergency maintenance service on all system components. The contractor shall be able to provide emergency service in a minimum of six (6) hours after notification of a problem on site.

.5 In addition to factory trainer personnel, the local office shall carry in stock a complete complement of field components, printed circuit cards and controllers for immediate repair and/or replacement of defective equipment. A list of branch stock items listed as follows, but shall not be limited to:

.1 Temperature sensing elements.

.2 Start/stop relays and controllers.

.3 All standard electronic control components.

.6 The Facility Management Supplier shall have maintained an office in Saskatchewan for at least five (5) years and shall have a minimum of four factory trained service technicians dedicated to port construction support of this manufacturer's FMS systems. Commissioning of the system shall be performed by a factory trained technician under the direct guidance of a local (within Saskatchewan) technician with a minimum of five (5) years continuous experience in the commissioning of similar systems.





PART 2 Products

2.1 GENERAL

.1 The system shall consist of DDC devices and electric thermostats, valves, dampers and associated devices capable of providing the sequences specified herein the contract documents.

.2 All components shall be graduated in degree Celsius.

.3 The system shall consist of a PC based operator workstation(s) (existing) with colour graphics data displays, standalone DDC controllers, and unitary DDC controllers interfacing directly with sensors, actuators, and environmental delivery systems (I.E. HVAC units, boilers, etc.); pneumatic and electric controls and mechanical devices for all items indicated on drawings described herein including dampers, valves, panels and compressed air piping.

.4 All controllers shall be independent micro processor based controllers and shall be field programmable by a built in or portable keyboard or from the PC operator work station. Direct digital outputs for proportional, integral, derivative, and two position control shall be available as standard equipment. Variables shall be capable of digital display and adjustment at each controller and at the PC operator workstation.

.5 All controls shall be the products of one manufacturer.

.6 All materials and equipment including software, operating systems, man-machine interfaces and application routine software shall be standard components regularly manufactured for this and/or other systems and not custom designed especially for this project. All system and components shall have been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use.

.7 System shall be complete with full English display and multiple access levels that are password protected.

2.2 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION

.1 The DDC system will monitor and control equipment and function as detailed on drawings. Provide all required software and instruction to make a complete operating system.

2.3 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM

.1 The Energy Management and Control system (EMCS) shall be capable of integrating multiple building functions, including equipment supervision and control, alarm management, energy management, and trend data collection.

.2 The EMCS shall consist of the following:

.1 Network panel

.2 Stand-alone Application Specific Controllers (ASCs)

.3 Operator's Terminal

.4 Communications hardware

.5 Field devices including sensors, relays, contactors, transducers, switches and related electronic control components.





.3 The system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit expansion of both capacity and functionality through the addition of sensors, actuators, ASCs, and operator devices.

.4 The failure of any single component or network connection shall not interrupt the execution of control strategies at other operational devices.

.5 Networking/Communications

.1 The design of the EMCS shall be networked as shown on drawings or described in these specifications. Inherent in the system's design shall be the ability to expand or modify the network either via a local network, auto-dial telephone line modem connections, or a combination of the two networking schemes.

.2 Local Network

.1 Digital: The Network panel shall directly oversee a local network such that communications may be executed directly to and between ASCs.

.2 Data Access: All operator devices, either network resident or connected via dial-up modems, shall have the ability to access all point status and application report data on the network. Access to system data shall not be restricted by the hardware configuration of the facility management system.

.3 Global Data Sharing: Global Data Sharing or Global point broadcasting shall allow point data to be shared between ASCs, when it would be inefficient or impractical to locate multiple sensors.

.4 General Network Design: Network design shall include the following provisions:

.1 Data transfer rates for alarm reporting and quick point status from multiple ASCs. The minimum transfer rate shall be 9600 bps.

.2 Support of any combination of ASCs. A minimum of 100 ASCs shall be supported on a single local network. The bus shall be addressable for up to 255 ASCs.

.3 Detection of single or multiple failures of ASCs or the network media.

.4 Error detection, correction, and retransmission to guarantee data integrity.

.5 Commonly available, multiple-sourced, networking components shall be used.

.5 Dial-Up Communications: Auto-dial/auto-answer communications shall be provided to allow Network panels to communicate with remote operator terminals on an occasional basis via telephone lines.

.1 Dial-Up Network Panels: Auto-Dial Network panels shall automatically place calls to remote terminals to report critical alarms.

.1 Network panels shall analyze and prioritize all alarms to minimize the initiation of calls. Non-critical alarms shall be buffered in memory and reported as a group of alarms, or until an operator manually requests an upload of all alarms.

.2 The auto-dial program shall include provisions for handling busy signals, "no-answers", and incomplete data transfers. Default devices shall be called when communications cannot be established with primary devices.





.2 Dial-Up Remote Operator Terminals: Operators at dial-up remote operator terminals shall be able to perform all control functions, all report functions, and all data base generation and modification functions as described for local operator terminals connected via the RS-232 port. Routines shall be provided to automatically answer calls, and display information sent from remote Network panels. The fact that communication is taking place with remote control systems over telephone lines shall be completely transparent to an operator.

.1 An operator shall be able to access remote buildings by selecting any facility by its logical name or associated telephone numbers.

.2 Alarm and data file transfers handled via dial-up transactions shall not interfere with local network activity, nor shall local network activity keep the remote operator's terminal from handling incoming calls.

.3 Both local and remote operators shall be able to access and perform functions with the Network panel simultaneously.

.3 Modem Characteristics: Dial-up communications shall make use of Hayes compatible or 2400 baud modems and voice grade telephone lines. Each Network panel shall have its own modem for remote monitoring or diagnostics purposes.

.6 The Controls contract shall supply the necessary software, graphical databases, etc. required for at least two remote operator workstation connections to the network. One copy shall be provided to the Owner and the second directly to the Mechanical Consultant. The Consultant shall be granted the minimum password level access available in the system. Software such as PC-anywhere or other remote operator software which requires the remote user to gain control of the on-site operator workstation will not be accepted.

2.4 NETWORK PANELS

.1 General: Network panels shall be microprocessor-based, multi-tasking, multi-user, digital control processors.

.2 Memory: Each Network panel shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system and data bases including:

.1 Control processes

.2 Energy Management Applications

.3 Alarm Management

.4 Trend Data

.5 Maintenance Support Applications

.6 Operator I/O

.7 Dial-Up Communications

.8 Manual Override Monitoring

.3 Expandability: The system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit easy expansion through the addition of field controllers, sensors, and actuators.





.4 Serial Communication Ports: Network panels shall provide at least two RS-232C serial data communication ports for simultaneous operation of multiple operator I/O devices, such as laptop computers, Personal Computers, and Video Display terminals.

.5 Hardware Override Monitoring: Network panels shall monitor the status of all overrides, and include this information in logs and summaries to inform the operator that automatic control has been inhibited.

.6 Integrated On-Line Diagnostics: Each Network panel shall continuously perform self-diagnostics, communication diagnosis and diagnosis of all subsidiary equipment.

Network panels shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures, or repeated failure to establish communication. Indication of the diagnostic results shall be provided at each Network panel.

.7 Surge and Transient Protection: Isolation shall be provided at all network terminations, as well as all field point terminations, to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with IEEE Standard 587-1980. Isolation levels shall be sufficiently high as to allow all signal wiring to be run in the same conduit as high voltage wiring where acceptable by electrical code.

.8 Powerfail Restart: In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of the Network panel to prevent the loss of data base or operating system software. Non-volatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data, and battery backup shall be provided to support the real-time clock and all volatile memory for a minimum of 72 hours. Upon restoration of normal power, the Network panel shall automatically resume full operation without manual intervention. Should Network panel memory be lost for any reason, the user shall have the capability of reloading the Network panel via the local RS-232C port, or telephone line dial-in.

2.5 SYSTEM SOFTWARE FEATURES

.1 General

.1 All necessary software to form a complete operating system, as described in this specification, shall be provided.

.2 The software programs specified in this section shall be provided as an integral part of the Network panel, and shall not be dependent upon any higher level computer for execution.

.2 Control Software Description:

.1 Equipment Cycling Protection: Control software shall include a provision for limiting the number of times each piece of equipment may be cycled within any one-hour period.

.2 Heavy Equipment Delays: The system shall provide protection against excessive demand situations during start-up periods by automatically introducing time delays between successive start commands to heavy electrical loads.

.3 Energy Management Applications: Network panels shall have the ability to perform any or all of the following energy management routines:

.1 Time of Day Scheduling

.2 Calendar Based Scheduling

.3 Holiday Scheduling

.4 Optimal Start

.5 Optimal Stop





.6 Demand Limiting

.7 Load Rolling

.8 Heating/Cooling Interlock

All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator intervention, and shall be flexible enough to allow user customization. Programs shall be applied to building equipment described in the "Execution" portion of this specification.

.4 Programming Capability: Network panels shall be able to execute configured processes defined by the user to automatically perform calculations and control routines.

.1 Process Inputs and Variables: It shall be possible to use any of the following in a configured process: - Any system-measured point data or status - Any calculated data - Any results from other processes - Boolean logic operators (and, or)

.2 Process Triggers: Configured processes may be triggered based on any combination of the following: - Time of day - Calendar Date - Other processes - Events (e.g., point alarms)

.3 Data Access: A single process shall be able to incorporate measured or calculated data from any and all other ASCs. In addition, a single process shall be able to issue commands to points in any and all other ASCs on the local network.

.5 Alarm Management: Alarm management shall be provided to monitor, buffer, and direct alarm reports to operator devices and memory files. Each Network panel shall perform distributed, independent alarm analysis and filtering to minimize operator interruptions due to non-critical alarms, minimize network traffic, and prevent alarms from being lost. At no time shall the Network panel's ability to report alarms be affected by either operator activity at the local I/O device, or communications with other ASCs on the network.

.1 Point Change Report Description: All alarm or point change reports shall include the point's English language description, and the time and date of occurrence.

.2 Prioritizing: The user shall be able to define the specific system reaction for each point. Alarms shall be prioritized to minimize nuisance reporting and to speed operator response to critical alarms. A minimum of three priority levels shall be provided. Users shall have the ability to manually inhibit alarm reporting for each point. The user shall also be able to define conditions under which point changes need to be acknowledged by an operator, and/or logged for analysis at a later date.

.3 Report Routing: Alarm reports and messages shall be directed to an operator device.

.4 Alarm Messages: In addition to the point's descriptor and the time and date, the user shall be able to print, display or store a 60-character alarm message to more fully describe the alarm condition or direct operator response. Each Network panel shall be capable of storing a library of at least 100 Alarm Messages. Each message may be assignable to any number of points in the panel.

.5 Auto-Dial Alarm Management: In Dial-up applications, only critical alarms shall initiate a call to a remote operator device. In all other cases, call activity shall be minimized by time-stamping and saving reports until a manual request is received, or until the buffer space is full. The alarm buffer must store a minimum of 50 alarms.





.6 Trend Analysis: A data collection utility shall be provided to automatically sample, store, and display system data. Measured and calculated analog and binary data shall be assignable to user-definable trends for the purpose of collecting operator-specified performance data over extended periods of time. Sample intervals of 1 minute to 24 hours, in one-minute or one-hour intervals, shall be provided. Each Network panel shall have a dedicated buffer for trend data, and shall be capable of storing 16 trend logs. Each trend log shall have up to four points trended at 48 data samples each. Data shall be stored at the Network panel, and uploaded to floppy disk storage when archival is desired.

.7 Runtime Totalization: Network panels shall automatically accumulate and store runtime hours for binary input and output points specified in the "Execution" portion of this specification.

.1 The Totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute.

.2 The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit for Runtime Totalization. Unique, user-specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.

.8 Event Totalization: Network panels shall have the ability to count events, such as the number of times a pump or fan system is cycled on and off.

.1 The Event Totalization feature shall be able to store the records associated with a minimum of 9,999,999 events before reset.

.2 The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.

2.6 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS - HVAC APPLICATIONS

.1 Each Network panel shall be able to extend its monitoring and control through the use of standalone Application Specific Controllers (ASCs).

.2 Each ASC shall operate as a standalone controller capable of performing its specified control responsibilities independently of other controllers in the network. Each ASC shall be a microprocessor-based, multi-tasking, real-time digital control processor.

.3 Each ASC shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system and data bases including:

.1 Control Processes

.2 Energy Management Applications

.3 Operator I/O (Portable Service Terminal)

.4 The operator interface to any ASC point data or programs shall be through the Network panel or portable operator's terminal connected to any ASC on the network.

.5 ASCs shall directly support the temporary use of a portable service terminal that can be connected to the ASC via zone temperature sensor or directly at the controller. The capabilities of the portable service terminal shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

.1 Display temperatures

.2 Display status

.3 Display setpoints

.4 Display control parameters

.5 Override binary output control

.6 Override analog setpoints

.7 Modification of gain and offset constants





.6 Powerfail Protection: All system setpoints, proportional bands, control algorithms, and any other programmable parameters shall be stored such that a power failure of any duration does not necessitate reprogramming the ASC.

.7 Configuration and Download: The ASC's shall have the capability of receiving configuration and program loading by the following:

.1 Locally, via a direct connect portable laptop service tool.

.2 Over the network, from the portable laptop service tool, and;

.3 From the operator workstation, via the communication networks.

.8 Hardware Override Switches: The operator shall have the ability to manually override automatic or centrally executed commands at the network panel via local, point discreet, onboard hand/off/auto operator override switches for binary control points and gradual switches for analog control type points. These override switches shall be operable whether the panel is powered or not.

.9 Hardware Override Monitoring: Network panels shall monitor the status or position of all overrides, and include this information in logs and summaries to inform the operator that automatic control has been inhibited. Network panels shall also collect override activity information for daily and monthly reports.

.10 Application Descriptions:

.1 Air Handling Unit (AHU) Controllers:

.1 AHU Controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the following configurations of systems to address current requirements as described in the "Control Description" portion of this specification, and for future expansion:

- Air Handling Units

.2 AHU Controllers shall support all the necessary point inputs and outputs to perform the specified control sequences in a totally standalone fashion.

.3 AHU controllers shall have a library of control routines and program logic to perform the sequence of operation specified in the "Execution" portion of this specification.

.4 Continuous Zone Temperature Histories: Each AHU Controller shall automatically and continuously maintain a history of the associated zone temperature to allow users to quickly analyze space comfort and equipment performance for the past 24 hours. A minimum of two samples per hour shall be stored.

.5 Alarm Management: Each AHU Controller shall perform its own limit and status monitoring and analysis to maximize network performance by reducing unnecessary communications.

.2 VAV Terminal Unit Controllers:

.1 VAV Terminal Unit Controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the control of the following configurations of VAV boxes to address current requirements as described in the Execution portion of this specification, and for future expansion:

.1 Single Duct Only (Cooling Only, or Cooling with Reheat

.2 Fan Powered (Parallel/Side Pocket, Series/On-Off Logic)

.3 Dual Duct (Constant Volume, Variable Volume)

.4 Supply/Exhaust





.2 VAV Terminal Unit Controllers shall support the following types of point inputs and outputs:

.1 Proportional Cooling Outputs

.2 Box and Baseboard Heating Outputs (Proportional, or 1 to 3 Stages)

.3 Fan Control Output (On/Off Logic, or Proportional Series Fan Logic)

.3 The modes of operation supported by the VAV Terminal Unit Controllers shall minimally include, but not be limited to, the following:

.1 Day/Weekly Schedules

.2 Economy Mode (Standby Mode, Unoccupied, etc.)

.3 Temporary Override Mode

.4 Occupancy-Based Standby/Comfort Mode Control: Each VAV Terminal Unit Controller shall have a provision for occupancy sensing overrides. Based upon the contact status of either a manual wall switch or an occupancy sensing device, the VAV Terminal Unit Controller shall automatically select either Standby or Comfort mode to minimize the heating and cooling requirements while satisfying comfort conditions.

.5 Continuous Zone Temperature Histories: Each VAV Terminal Unit Controller shall automatically and continuously maintain a history of the associated zone temperature to allow users to quickly analyze space comfort and equipment performance for the past 24 hours. A minimum of two samples per hour shall be stored.

.6 Alarm Management: Each VAV Terminal Unit Controller shall perform its own limit and status monitoring and analysis to maximize network performance by reducing unnecessary communications.

.7 Provide for initial operation of terminal units to be pressure independent constant volume with future capability for pressure independent variable volume operation.

.3 Lab and Central Plant (LCP) Controllers:

.1 LCP controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the following configurations of systems to address current requirements described in the "Control Description" portion of this specification, and for future expansion.

- Single boiler or chiller plants with pump logic

.2 LCP controllers shall support all the necessary point inputs and outputs to perform the specified control sequences in a totally standalone fashion.

.3 LCP controllers shall have a built in status and adjust panel interface to allow for the local adjustment of all setpoints, temporary override of any input or output points and status of any points in alarm.

.4 Alarm Management: Each LCP controller shall perform its own limit and status monitoring and analysis to maximize network performance by reducing unnecessary communications.

2.7 OPERATOR INTERFACE

.1 Basic Interface Description:

.1 Command Entry/Menu Selection Process: Operator interface software shall minimize operator training through the use of English language prompting and English language point identification.

.2 Text-Based Displays: The Operator interface shall provide consistent text-based displays of all system point and application data described in this specification.





Point identification, engineering units, status indication, and application naming conventions shall be the same at all operator devices.

.3 Password Protection: Multiple-level password access protection provided to allow the user/manager to limit control, display, and data base manipulation capabilities as he deems appropriate for each user, based upon an assigned password.

.1 Passwords shall be exactly the same for all operator devices.

.2 A minimum of three levels of access shall be supported:

- Level 1 = Data Access and Display

- Level 2 = Level 1 + Operator Overrides and Commands

- Level 3 = Level 2 + Database Generation and Modification.

.3 A minimum of 4 passwords shall be supported at each Network panel.

.4 Operators will be able to perform only those commands available for their respective passwords. Menu selections displayed at any operator device shall be limited to only those items defined for the access level of the password used to log-on.

.5 User-definable, automatic log-off timers of from 1 to 60 minutes shall be provided to prevent operators from inadvertently leaving devices on-line.

.4 Operator Commands: The operator interface shall allow the operator to perform commands including, but not limited to, the following:

.1 Start-up or shutdown selected equipment

.2 Adjust setpoints

.3 Add/Modify/Delete time programming

.4 Enable/Disable process execution

.5 Lock/Unlock alarm reporting for each point

.6 Enable/Disable Totalization for each point

.7 Enable/Disable Trending

.8 Enter temporary override schedules

.9 Define Holiday Schedules

.10 Change time/date

.11 Enter/Modify analog alarm limits

.12 Enable/Disable demand limiting

.13 Enable/Disable duty cycle

.14 Enable/Disable average/high/low signal select and reset

.5 Logs and Summaries: Reports shall be generated manually, and directed to the displays. As a minimum, the system shall allow the user to easily obtain the following types of reports:

.1 A general listing of all points in the system shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

.1 Points currently in alarm

.2 Off-line points

.3 Points currently in override status

.4 Points in Weekly Schedules

.5 Holiday Programming

.2 Summaries shall be provided for specific points, for a logical point group, for a user-selected group of groups, or for the entire facility without restriction due to the hardware configuration of the facility management system. Under no conditions shall the operator need to specify the address of hardware controller to obtain system information.





.2 System Configuration and Definition: All temperature and equipment control strategies and energy management routines shall be definable by the operator. System definition and modification procedures shall not interfere with normal system operation and control.

.1 The system shall be provided complete with all equipment and documentation necessary to allow an operator to independently perform the following functions:

.1 Add/Delete/Modify Application Specific Controllers

.2 Add/Delete/Modify points of any type, and all associated point parameters, and tuning constants

.3 Add/Delete/Modify alarm reporting definition for each point

.4 Add/Delete/Modify energy management applications

.5 Add/Delete/Modify time- and calendar-based programming

.6 Add/Delete/Modify Totalization for every point

.7 Add/Delete/Modify Historical Data Trending for every point

.8 Add/Delete/Modify configured control processes

.9 Add/Delete/Modify dial-up telecommunication definition

.10 Add/Delete/Modify all operator passwords

.11 Add/Delete/Modify Alarm Messages.

.2 Programming Description: Definition of operator device characteristics, ASCs, individual points, applications and control sequences shall be performed through fill-in-the-blank templates.

.1 Network-Wide Strategy Development: Inputs and outputs for any process shall not be restricted to a single ASC, but shall be able to include data from any and all other ASCs to allow the development of network-wide control strategies.

.3 System Definition/Control Sequence Documentation: All portions of system definition shall be self-documenting to provide hardcopy printouts of all configuration and application data.

.4 Data Base Save/Restore/Back-Up: Back-up copies of all ASC and Network panel data bases shall be stored in at least one personal computer or Laptop. Users shall also have the ability to manually execute downloads of an ASC or Network panel data base.

.3 Dynamic Color Graphic Displays: Color graphic floor plan displays, and system schematics for each piece of mechanical equipment, including air handling units and fan coils units shall be provided to optimize system performance analysis and speed alarm recognition.

.1 System Selection/Penetration: The operator interface shall allow users to access the various system schematics and floor plans via a graphical penetration scheme, menu selection, or text-based commands.

.2 Dynamic Data Displays: Dynamic temperature values, humidity values, flow values, and status indication shall be shown in their actual respective locations, and shall automatically update to represent current conditions without operator intervention.

.3 Graphics Definition Package: Graphic generation software shall be provided to allow the user to add, modify or delete system graphic displays.

.1 The FMS Contractor shall provide libraries of pre-engineered screens and symbols depicting standard air handling unit components (e.g. fans, cooling coils, filters, dampers, etc.), complete mechanical systems (e.g. constant volume-terminal reheat, VAV, etc.) and electrical symbols.





.2 The graphic development package shall use a mouse or similar pointing device in conjunction with a drawing program to allow the user to perform the following:

- Define symbols.

- Position and size symbols. - Define background screens.

- Define connecting lines and curves. - Locate, orient and size descriptive text. - Define and display colors for all elements. - Establish correlation between symbols or text and associated system

points or other displays.

.3 Graphical displays can be created to represent any logical grouping of system points or calculated data based upon building function, mechanical system, building layout, or any other logical grouping of points which aids the operator in the analysis of the facility. To accomplish this, the user shall be able to build graphic displays that include point data from multiple application specific controllers.

.4 Personal Computer Operator Workstation Description

.1 Existing personal Computer Operator Workstation shall be utilized for command entry, information management, network alarm management, and database management functions. All real-time control functions shall be resident in the standalone network and ASC controllers panels to facilitate greater fault tolerance and reliability.

2.8 TEMPERATURE SENSORS

.1 Temperature sensors shall be 1000 OHM nickel RTD type. Analog temperature sensors shall provide an output signal that varies continuously with the sensed temperature, within a specified range. Binary temperature sensors shall provide an output signal that is either on or off depending upon whether the sensed temperature is above or below the setpoint temperature. All sensors of a particular category shall be of the same type and manufacturer. Provide temperature sensors suitable for one or more of the following mounting methods: Johnson Type - TE1100, 1200, 1700, 1800, Metastat.

.1 Insertion Type - Suitable for insertion into air ducts at any angle, and shall have a minimum insertion of 6".

.2 Immersion Type - Suitable for immersion into fluids in tanks or pipes with separable well and heat transfer compound.

.3 Averaging Type with Extended Element - Suitable for duct mounting to obtain average temperature by sampling along a capillary tube element not less than 8' in length.

.4 Outside Air Sensing Type - Shall have sun shades to minimize solar effects and shall be mounted to minimize building outside air film effects.

.5 Space Type

.1 shall be provided with guards where indicated on drawings.

.2 shall not have local setpoint adjustment capability.

.3 mount space thermostats at 1400 mm above floor. The following shall apply to temperature sensors:

.2 Stem or tip sensitive type, for insertion or immersion.

.1 Sensing elements shall be hermetically sealed.

.2 All external trim material shall be completely corrosion resistant with all parts assembled into a watertight, vibration-proof, heat resistant assembly.





.3 Sensor wells shall be brass and compatible with the sensor.

2.9 ELECTRIC LINE VOLTAGE THERMOSTATS

.1 Thermostats for line voltage devices such as unit heaters and fan coils units shall be heavy duty, capable of switching 15 amps at 120 volts, with adjustable setpoint and temperature indication.

.2 Provide heavy cast aluminum guards where shown on drawings.

.3 Thermostats shall be equal to Johnson T26.

2.10 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES

.1 All pressure sensing elements shall be corrosion resistant.

.2 Pressure sensing elements shall be diaphragm type as required by the application.

.3 Units shall have adjustable range and differential pressure settings.

.4 Pressure sensor switches shall be snap action type.

.5 Sensor assembly shall operate automatically and reset automatically when conditions return to normal.

.6 Protect complete sensor assembly against vibration at all critical movement pivots and slides.

.7 Sensors on all liquid lines shall have an isolation valve installed between each sensor and its pressure source.

.8 Sensor Ratings: Sensors shall have the following pressure and accuracy ratings:

.1 Hot water pressure sensors shall be rated at 125 PSIG, with an accuracy of plus or minus 1 PSI.

.9 Johnson Type P-32, P-74.

2.11 CONTROL VALVES

.1 Sized by temperature control manufacturer and guaranteed to meet the heating and cooling requirements; each tagged for Project location. Water valves shall be sized on the basis of 15% of the total system pressure drop, but not more than 5 psi pressure drop for major heating valves and 1 psi pressure drop for terminal unit application such as radiation and reheat coils. Pressure drop for valves shall be submitted for review.

.2 Equal percentage type, equipped with characteristic type throttling plug, stainless steel stem, removable composition discs, and rubber diaphragms. Provided with necessary features to operate in sequence with other valves or damper operators and adjustable throttling range.

.3 Valves 50 mm and smaller: screwed 1375 kPa bronze bodies; 63 mm (2-1/2") and larger: flanged cast iron bodies; designed for 1375 kPa operating pressure. Arranged to fail-safe as called for, tight closing and quiet operating.





.4 Physical sizes of valves will be such that they will fit within the physical space provided within radiation and equipment enclosures. Verify before ordering materials.

.5 Johnson Type VB-3800, 3754, 3974, 4324, 5842, VT-Series.

2.12 ELECTRIC OPERATORS (VALVES)

.1 Provide 24 vac control operators which are 0-10 VDC input proportional and designed for water or steam service valve bodies. Operator shall be Synchronous motor driven with 50 lb force and force sensor safety stop. Enclosure shall be cast aluminum. Johnson Type M-100, VA-8020, 8022, 8050, 8051, 8052.

2.13 ELECTRIC OPERATORS (DAMPERS)

.1 Provide 24 vac damper actuators which are 0-10 vac input proportional and designed to operate position dampers. Operator shall be synchronous motor driven with up to 100 in. lb. force sensor safety stops and spring return as required. Enclosure shall be cast aluminum.

.2 Provide adequate number of damper motors to assure tight seal of damper blades.

.3 Locate damper operators outside of air stream in a warm location.

.4 Damper operators shall be direct digital control type with spring return for fail safe operation.

2.14 STATIC PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS

.1 The sensors shall be a variable capacitance type, utilizing a stainless steel diaphragm and insulated electrode for positioning of the diaphragm.

.2 The sensor shall produce a linear 4 to 20 mA or 0-5 VDC with accuracies of 1% full scale in normal ambient temperature environments.

.3 Pressure ranges 0 to 0.1 in w.g. through 0 to 25.0 in w.g.

.4 The transmitter shall be temperature compensated to account for any thermal error over

the entire temperature range of 40F - 100F, 0-95% RH. Over pressurization 10 in w.g. up to ten times range.

.5 The transmitter shall have zero span adjustment capability, but shall be factory calibrated.

.6 Johnson Type DPT-2641.

2.15 RELATIVE HUMIDITY SENSORS

.1 Relative humidity sensors shall be an analog precision resistance type relative humidity detector. Sensor shall have an overall accuracy of ± two (2%) percent of span over a range of 20% to 80% relative humidity. Johnson Type - HE-6300.





PART 3 Execution

3.1 GENERAL

.1 Mount each low temperature protection element rigidly and as close as possible to the downstream face of the coil being protected. Element shall extend, at least to two

diagonally opposite corners of the coil. On sensing a temperature below 2C on any 300 mm length of capillary, low temperature protection thermostat shall shut down the supply fan, close fully the outside air and relief air dampers and open fully the return air damper.

.2 Label all ducted mounted sensors, duct mounted thermometers, remote and local control panels, relays and switches with 25 mm x 64 mm engraved lamacoid plastic nameplates, white lettering on black plastic to clearly indicate the function of each device. Nameplates greater in distance than 1500 mm from point of reference are to be increased by 50% in size and proportionally for each.

.3 Provide interlocks as noted on control diagrams on drawings and as noted below.

.1 Supply and return/exhaust air fans.

.4 Detailed Control System operation shall be as described on control diagrams on drawings.

3.2 SERVICE AND GUARANTEE

.1 After completion of the installation, representatives of the Temperature Control Contractor shall calibrate and adjust all controls, and place them in complete operating condition. The control system herein specified shall be free from defects in workmanship and material under normal use and service for a period of 1 year after substantial completion of the work.

3.3 RECORD DRAWINGS

.1 Computer Aided Drawings (CAD) record drawings will be supplied by the Contractor after the system has been accepted but prior to final payment. Drawings shall represent the as-built condition of the system and incorporate all information supplied with the approved submittal.

3.4 TESTS

.1 This work shall include pre-delivery testing of major components, field testing and adjustment of major subsystems and of the complete Temperature Control and Energy Management Control System, (EMCS) and an on-site operational acceptance test of the complete operational EMCS. Provide performance certifications of the required tests. Acceptance of tests by the Owner/Consultant shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the complete system meeting the requirements of these specifications after installation.

.2 Field Test: After installation of the field panels and related peripherals, and the field interface devices and sensors, calibrate equipment and check transmission media.

.3 Operational Test: Conduct operational test on the complete, totally installed and operational Energy Monitoring and Control System to demonstrate that it is functioning properly in accordance with all requirements of this specification. Demonstrate the correct operation of all monitored and controlled points as well as the operation and





capabilities of all sequences, reports, specialized control algorithms, diagnostics, and all other software.

.4 The EMCS Contractor shall provide to the Consultant the following documents generated by the EMCS.

.1 All Points Summary

.2 Alarm Point Summary

.3 Alarm Message Summary

.4 Totalization Summary

.5 Trend Log of Temperature Points Over 24 Hour Period

.6 Start/Stop times for all Mechanical Systems

.7 Optimal Start/Stop Parameters

.8 Software Documentation for all EMCS Programs installed in Application Specific Controllers and Central Station

.5 Where it is required for the Contractor to modify, alter, add or remove hardware or software programs of the EMCS or related accessories for the purpose of testing, these changes shall be done as required by the Contractor until such time acceptable performance of the EMCS has been established.

3.5 OPERATOR INSTRUCTION

.1 After system commissioning the Contractor shall provide on-site operator instruction to the Owner's operating personnel. Operator instruction during normal working hours shall be performed by competent representatives familiar with the installed system.

.2 An Owner's Manual, prepared for the Project by the Control Contractor to be used during instruction.

END OF SECTION

2nd Floor Building Upgrade Section 26 03 10 L.F. McIntosh Building ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 3

PART 1 General


.1 Common Work Results - Electrical Section 26 05 01

1.2 SUMMARY

.1 This section describes the demolition of electrical systems, individual components and devices, as well as restorative measures.

1.3 STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 The Contractor will be fully responsible for assessing the condition of all components, systems and devices, which are to be removed from the project and subsequently reinstalled at a later date. Should any damage be noted, the Contractor shall inform the Consultant immediately. Failure to do so will result in replacement of any damaged or non-functional equipment by the Contractor at his own cost at the completion of the project.

1.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

.1 Prior to demolition the Contractor shall identify with the Owner items that shall be salvaged from the project and be turned over to the Owner in good condition.

RECYCLING

.2 All metals that are to be removed from the construction site and not designated to be re-used at a later date are to be recycled in accordance with other sections for these specifications.

.3 All non-recyclable components that are to be removed from the construction site are to be disposed of in accordance with Division 1 - Waste Management and Disposal.

PART 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 TIMING OF WORK

Stantec Consulting Ltd. June 27, 2014

Section 26 03 10 2nd Floor Building Upgrade ELECTRICAL DEMOLITIONFOR REMODELING L.F. McIntosh Building Page 2 of 3 Project No. 144401282

.1 Work involving alterations, connections to or extensions of the existing power distribution, fire alarm, telephone, data, etc. to be carried out in such a manner to keep interruptions of service to existing systems to a minimum. Electrical Sub-Contractor to allow necessary overtime work to accomplish changeovers and reconnections at a time when existing building is at a minimum of use.

.2 Contractor to provide a comprehensive schedule and detailed written confirmation of procedures for review by the Consultant. Identify outage times and durations for each service outage. Outages to be scheduled at Owner’s convenience. No disconnection or isolation of services is to take place without 72 hours notice and approval of the Owner.

.3 If required to maintain services to certain areas or keep outages to an acceptable minimum, make such temporary connections and provide such temporary facilities as are required to accomplish this.

.4 Contractor to allow in bid price for premium and overtime charges as required to accommodate conditions as outlined in the preceding paragraphs and specifically addressed in various sections of the specifications.

.5 The adjacent existing facility’s functions are to proceed uninterrupted during the course of Work on this Contract. Coordinate schedule or work with the Owner’s representative before work begins.

.6 The contractor shall make suitable arrangements with the owner representative for access to the work as appropriate.

.7 Certain construction activities that generate noise and/or vibration and/or dust may have to be temporarily halted during critical functions at the existing Facility. Coordinate and schedule such activities in advance with the User Representative.

3.2 DEMOLITION

.1 Demolition to be performed in accordance with Architectural demolition plans.

.2 Replacement of all wiring devices, receptacles and switches as specified in 26 27 26. Wiring Locations and Device Types are to be recorded on project record drawings as specified in Section 26 05 01 – Item 1.10 Project Record Drawings.

.3 Contractor is to remove all redundant and abandoned conduits. Where conduits originate or terminate in the work area but continue beyond the boundaries of the Work, remove those conduits where located in accessible ceiling spaces.

.4 Contractor is to remove all abandoned cabling and wiring. Existing wiring and cabling is not to be reused except emergency lighting circuits.

.5 Do not disconnect any electrical services without the express permission of the Owner.

.6 Provide temporary heat detectors and fire alarm signal devices throughout the construction area and connect to the fire alarm system to ensure adequate coverage during non-working hours.

.7 During demolition work, ensure that all products of combustion devices are removed or covered up to avoid nuisance alarms. Coordinate with existing Fire Alarm manufacturer and the service provider.

June 27, 2014 Stantec Consulting Ltd.

2nd Floor Building Upgrade Section 26 03 10 L.F. McIntosh Building ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING Project No. 144401282 Page 3 of 3 3.3 RESTORATION OF SERVICES

.1 The drawings indicate known permanent or temporary reconnection of services only.

.2 Where removal of existing conduit, wiring and/or devices affects devices not removed, altered or relocated under this contract, Contractor is to restore service to these devices in a permanent manner utilizing methods specified in other sections of these specifications. Where necessary, walls are to be opened up to allow the installation of conduits for new interconnection of devices or homeruns as required. Coordinate all such work.

.3 Check all products of combustion detectors in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction upon completion of the project.

3.4 COORDINATION

.1 The contract documents do not indicate electrical work required to accommodate mechanical and architectural requirements. Division 16 is advised to examine all mechanical and architectural contract documents for removal and reinstallation of ceiling and wall components to facilitate the installation of mechanical components.

END OF SECTION


2nd Floor Building Upgrade Section 26 05 01 L.F. McIntosh Building COMMON WORK RESULTS - ELECTRICAL Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 7

PART 1 General

1.1 INTENT

.1 Division 16 to provide all labour and materials necessary for complete and operating electrical systems as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. Any work, even if not shown or specified, which is obviously necessary or reasonably implied to complete the work to be done as if it was both shown and specified.

1.2 RELATED WORK

.1 Introductory Information Division 0 .2 Bidding Requirements Division 0

.3 Contracting Requirements Division 0

.4 General Requirements Division 1

1.3 CODES, PERMITS AND INSPECTION

.1 The installation is to comply with the requirements of the 2012 edition of the Canadian Electrical Code, and the Regulations of the electrical inspection authority.

.2 Division 16 to obtain all permits required and after completion of the work, furnish to the Consultant a Certificate of Final Inspection and Approval from the electrical inspection authority. Division 16 to take out all permits at the beginning of the work.


.1 Division 16 to note that electrical specifications and drawings form part of the Contract Documents and are to be read interpreted and coordinated with all other Divisions. The General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1, and amendments and supplements thereto form a part of this Division and contain items related to this Division.

1.5 STANDARDS OF MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP

.1 All materials to be new, of minimum quality specified and conform to standards of Canadian Standards Association. Where equipment or materials are specified by technical description only, they are to be of the best commercial quality obtainable for the purpose.

.2 Where materials are damaged either in transit to site, during the course of installation or following the installation prior to a turn-over, they shall be evaluated by the consultant as to the course of corrective action or replacement. The final decision shall be at the discretion of the consultant.

.3 All work to be executed in a neat and workmanlike manner by qualified tradesmen. Division 16 to keep a competent foreman and all necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Consultants, on the job during progress of the work. Where reference is made to


Section 26 05 01 2nd Floor Building Upgrade COMMON WORK RESULTS - ELECTRICAL L.F. McIntosh Building Page 2 of 7 Project No. 144401282

standards such as EEMAC, NEMA, CSA, IPCEA, U/C, etc., the latest editions and revisions of such standard specifications to apply.

.4 All electrical equipment to be CSA approved. Electrical equipment that is shown on the drawings or called for in the specifications that are not CSA approved is to be treated by Division 16 in one of the following ways:

.1 Make allowance in Contract Price for having said equipment CSA approved, or

.2 Make allowance in Contract Price for most expensive CSA approved equivalent.

1.6 WARRANTY


.2 Furnish a written guarantee stating that all work executed and all apparatus installed in this contract will be free from defective workmanship and materials for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of work. The Contractor shall repair and replace any work, which fails or becomes defective within 12 months of the date of final acceptance of the work during the term of the guarantee/warranty, providing the operating and maintenance instructions have been complied with. The period of guarantee specified shall not, in any way, supplant any other guarantees of a longer period provided by Manufacturers or as called for in the project documents.

.3 Owner Requirements During Warranty:

.1 Unless specified otherwise the Owner shall be responsible for all routine maintenance requirements as required in the manufacturers instructions.

.2 The Owner shall be responsible for replacing all lamps during the warranty period unless it is determined by the Owner and the Consultant that an unusual rate of failure is encountered.

1.7 UNIFORMITY OF EQUIPMENT

.1 Unless otherwise specifically called for in the specifications, uniformity of manufacturer to be maintained throughout the building for any particular item or type of equipment.

1.8 COMPLIANCE OF EQUIPMENT WITH SPECIFICATIONS


.2 Division 16 to be completely responsible for ascertaining that every item included in Contract complies in all respects with specifications and drawings. Any item of equipment found by the Consultant not to comply with specifications and drawings to be replaced at no additional cost with an item or unit of the Consultant's choice.

.3 Catalogue numbers used in the specifications are for reference purposes only. Confirm exact component requirements with technical descriptions provided. Should any discrepancy exist, which leaves doubt as to the true intent and meaning, obtain a ruling from the Consultant.



.4 Make known in writing to the Consultant ten (10) days prior to the tender closing date any materials specified that are required to complete the work which are not currently available or will not be available for use as called for herein. Failing to do so, it will be assumed that the most expensive alternate has been included in the tender price.

1.9 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

.1 Drawings and specifications are complementary each to the other and what is called for by one to be binding as if called for by both.

.2 Should any discrepancy appear between drawings and specifications, which leaves doubt as to the true intent and meaning, obtain a ruling from the Consultant.

.3 Electrical drawings may indicate general location and route to be followed by conduits and/or wire and do not show all structural and mechanical details. In most cases, conduit or wiring is not shown on drawings or is shown diagrammatically in schematic or riser diagrams. Conduit and wire to be installed to provide a complete operating job and to be installed physically to conserve headroom, furring spaces, etc.

.4 Follow architectural, structural and mechanical drawings for details of this work and install electrical conduit, boxes and fittings to coordinate with architectural, structural and mechanical work and details. Refer to architectural and structural drawings for accurate building dimensions.

.5 In order to provide sufficient detail and maximum degree of clarity on the drawings, symbols used for various electrical devices, particularly wall mounted devices, take up more space on the drawings than the device does on the wall. In these instances, locate device on wall with primary regard for convenience of operation and usage of wall space, rather than stringing devices out along wall so as to comply with scale locations of electrical symbols.

.6 Examine structural, architectural and mechanical drawings and work of other trades to ensure that work can be satisfactorily carried out without changes to building as shown on the drawings. Conflicts or additional work beyond work covered by drawings and specifications to be brought to the attention of the Consultant.

1.10 PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS


.2 Consultant to furnish one set of ozalid white prints to be used for record work as actually installed. Accurately record on this set of drawings, day by day, all outlets, conduits, luminaires and equipment as actually installed on the job. Any changes to contract work to be similarly recorded.



.2 Before submitting tender, visit and examine the site and note all characteristics and features affecting the work. Report discrepancies to the Consultant seven (7) days prior to tender closing. No allowances will be made for any difficulties encountered or any expenses incurred because of any conditions of the site or item existing, thereon, which



are visible or known to exist at the time of tender. Failure to advise Consultant of discrepancies will assume Trade Contractor accepts documents as presented without accumulation of additional costs.

1.12 TECHNICAL INFORMATION

.1 If Division 16 requires detailed information regarding existing electrical equipment or systems he shall contact the Consultant in writing detailing exact information needed, with ample lead time to respond.

1.13 TIMING OF WORK

.1 Work involving alterations, connections to or extensions of existing power distribution, fire alarm, telephone, clock program, paging system, etc to be carried out in such a manner to keep interruptions of service to existing systems to a minimum.

Division 16 to allow necessary overtime work to accomplish changeovers and reconnections at a time when existing building is at a minimum of use.

.2 Division 16 to provide a comprehensive schedule and detailed written confirmation of procedures for review by the Owner and Consultant identifying outage times and duration for each service outage. Outages to be scheduled at Owner’s convenience. No disconnection or isolation of services is to take place without 72 hours notice and approval of the Owner.

.3 If required to maintain services to certain areas or keep outages to an acceptable minimum, Division 16 to make such temporary connections and provide such temporary facilities as are required to accomplish this.

.4 Division 16 to allow in tender price for premium and overtime charges as required to accommodate conditions as outlined in the preceding paragraphs and specifically addressed in various sections of the specifications.

1.14 PHASING OF WORK

.1 Division 16 to familiarize himself with schedules established for the various phases of the work. This schedule, together with time allotments is outlined by Division 1 and may be modified by the General Contractor as required.

.2 Electrical tender price to include allowance for delays caused to the electrical contract due to phasing of the project.

1.15 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

.1 Refer to Divisions 0 and 1.

.2 Prior to a Substantial Completion review being done, Division 16 to submit the following to the Consultant.

.1 A complete list of outstanding work as assessed by Division 16 on site. List to be detailed, accurate and shall list room by room, all work not yet complete.



.2 A completed substantial completion check list. Check list to be supplied by the Consultant.

.3 Project Record drawings.

.4 A complete list of any material not on site to complete project.

.5 All test results.

.6 All electrical operation and maintenance data to be included in the O&M manuals as specified elsewhere.

.7 Transmittal letter signed by the Owner’s authorized representative indicating all spare parts, tools, etc. turned over to the Owner, as required by the contract.

.3 A Substantial Completion review will not be performed until all of this information is received.

1.16 SHOP DRAWINGS


.2 Submit shop drawings of all electrical components as required by Consultant. Approval of shop drawings is for general design only and does not relieve Division 16 and/or his supplier or manufacturer from complying with all requirements of drawings plans and specifications. Division 16 to be responsible for conforming to and coordinating all dimensions.

Division 16 to take note that any shop drawing reviews required after the second review shall be at expense of Division 16.

.3 Prior to submission, all shop drawings to be stamped, dated and signed by both Division 16 and the General Contractor.

.4 Division 16 to coordinate each shop drawing submission with requirements of the contract documents. Individual drawings will not be reviewed until all related shop drawings and product data is available.

.5 Division 16 to review shop drawings and assume responsibility for:

.1 Completeness - including all details specified.

.2 Dimensions, field measurements.

.3 Catalogue numbers and similar data.

.4 Conformance with contract documents.

.5 Colours.

.6 Site conditions.

.7 Interference with mechanical equipment including motor sizes and loads, equipment locations and connection points.



.6 Shop drawing submissions to include:

.1 Name of the General Contractor, Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, Supplier and Manufacturer.

.2 Date and revision dates.

.3 Project name.

.4 All pertinent data.

.5 Dimensions.

.6 Colour.

.7 Specification section number.

.8 General Contractor’s stamp and Division 16's stamp.

.9 A clear space of 100 mm x 75 mm on each sheet for placement of Consultant's review stamp. Each sheet to be numbered sequentially.

.10 Model and type numbers.

.7 Shop drawings will not be reviewed if they:

.1 Are not clearly legible.

.2 Do not contain all information required above.

.3 Describe other products or models not applicable to this project.

.8 Submit for review after the award of the contract, number of copies of shop drawings as specified in Division 1.

.9 Luminaire shop drawings to include:

.1 Replacement ballast shop drawings.

.2 Replacement lamp data.

.10 Include with shop drawing submittal, detailed pre-startup check lists, startup/post startup procedures and checklists for each piece of equipment and for each system.

.11 Submit shop drawings on all wiring devices, relays and motor controls.

.12 Do not release material or equipment for delivery to site until the Consultant has reviewed applicable shop drawings and all applicable comments have been addressed in writing. Progress payments will not be released until shop drawing review process has been completed in a manner satisfactory to the consultant.

.13 Maintain on site, one complete indexed copy of all reviewed shop drawings.

.14 Refer to technical specifications throughout for additional submittal requirements.


2nd Floor Building Upgrade Section 26 05 01 L.F. McIntosh Building COMMON WORK RESULTS - ELECTRICAL Project No. 144401282 Page 7 of 7 1.17 CONTRACT BREAKDOWN

.1 Within 14 days after award of Contract, Division 16 to submit a breakdown of Contract Price into divisions to the satisfaction of the Consultant with aggregate of breakdown totalling total Contract amount. Breakdown will be used in computing of progress claims. Progress claims, when submitted are to be itemized against each item of the Contract breakdown. Contract breakdown to be of material and labour as listed herein:

.1 Mechanical Equipment Wiring

.2 Distribution Equipment

.3 Conduit, Boxes and Wire

.4 Lighting

.5 Fire Alarm System Modifications

.6 New Wiring Devices

.7 Telephone/Data System Modifications

.8 Sound Masking System Install

.9 Maintenance Manuals/Record Drawings

.10 Demolition

1.18 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND CLEAN-UP

.1 Protect equipment and materials in storage on site during and after installation until final acceptance. Leave factory covers in place. Take special precautions to prevent entry of foreign material into working parts of piping and duct systems.

.2 Protect equipment with polyethylene covers and crates.

.3 Ensure that existing equipment to be turned over to the Owner or reused is carefully dismantled and not damaged or lost. Do not reuse existing materials and equipment unless specifically indicated.

1.19 LOCATION OF OUTLETS

.1 Owner reserves the right to change location of outlets to within 3 m of points indicated on drawings without extra charge providing Division 16 is advised prior to installation.

.2 Location of outlets shown on architectural detail drawings take precedence over positions or mounting heights located on electrical drawings and/or in the specifications.

1.20 MOUNTING HEIGHTS OF EQUIPMENT

.1 Installation of electrical equipment in ceiling spaces to be coordinated with other Divisions in order not to restrict access to ceiling voids about the installed electrical and mechanical services.

.2 In existing areas, mount outlets at height to match existing.

.3 Check architectural drawings for room details, dados, built-in units, etc. to avoid conflicts.

END OF SECTION


2nd Floor Building Upgrade Section 26 05 26 L.F. McIntosh Building GROUNDING AND BONDING Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 2

PART 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK


PART 2 Products

2.1 EQUIPMENT

.1 Grounding conductors: bare stranded copper, soft annealed, size as indicated.

.2 Insulated grounding conductors: green.

.3 Non-corroding accessories necessary for grounding system, type, size, material as indicated, including but not necessarily limited to:

.1 Grounding and bonding bushings.

.2 Protective type clamps.

.3 Bolted type conductor connectors.

.4 Thermit welded type conductor connectors.

.5 Bonding jumpers, straps.

.6 Pressure wire connectors.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

.1 Install complete permanent, continuous grounding system including, conductors, connectors, accessories. Where EMT is used, run ground wire in conduit.

.2 Install connectors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

.3 Protect exposed grounding conductors from mechanical injury.

.4 Use mechanical connectors for grounding connections to equipment provided with lugs.

.5 Soldered joints not permitted.

.6 Install bonding wire for flexible conduit, connected at both ends to grounding bushing, solderless lug, clamp or cup washer and screw. Neatly cleat bonding wire to exterior of flexible conduit.


Section 26 05 26 2nd Floor Building Upgrade GROUNDING AND BONDING L.F. McIntosh Building Page 2 of 2 Project No. 144401282 3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

.1 Install grounding connections to typical equipment included in, but not necessarily limited to following list. Service equipment, transformers, switchgear, duct systems, frames of motors, motor control centres, starters, control panels, building steel work, generators, elevators and escalators, distribution panels, outdoor lighting.

.2 Connect equipment to building ground system.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 01 – Common Work Results - Electrical.

.2 Perform ground continuity and resistance tests using method appropriate to site conditions and to approval of Consultant and local authority having jurisdiction over installation.

.3 Perform tests before energizing electrical system.

.4 Disconnect ground fault indicator during tests.

END OF SECTION


2nd Floor Building Upgrade Section 26 05 32 L.F. McIntosh Building OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 3

PART 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK

.1 Common Work Results - Electrical Section 26 05 01 .2 Identification for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 53

1.2 This section details specifications for standard and specialty wiring device outlet boxes, as well as multi device outlet assemblies.


.1 Boxes: hot dip galvanized, conforming to CSA requirements.

PART 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Interior boxes: provide galvanized pressed sheet steel boxes, blanked for conduit, attached lugs for locating.

.2 Exterior boxes: provide cast corrosion-resistant deep type boxes, Crouse Hinds F series or equivalent.

.3 Multi device outlet assemblies shall be manufactured from 16 gauge cold rolled

galvanized steel.

2.2 COMPONENTS

.1 Boxes for ceiling to be octagon No. 54171, and/or square No. 52171 or 72171.

.2 Boxes for flush mounting switches, receptacles, low tension, telephone to be 52171 box with matching plaster cover for single or two gang outlets. For larger boxes use GSB solid type as required. For masonry work use MBD type boxes.

.3 Boxes for floor mounting to be “Tombstone” type.

.4 Boxes for surface mounted switches, receptacles, low tension, telephone to be 100 mm

square 52171 with Taylor 8300 series covers.

2.3 MULTI DEVICE OUTLET ASSEMBLIES – HARD WALLS

.1 Multi device outlet assemblies shall be manufactured from 16 gauge cold rolled galvanized steel and be equipped with two adjustable stud mounting bracket suitable for wood or steel framed walls.

.2 Boxes to include a PVC device mounting platform to ensure a flush appearance to the finished product.

.3 Boxes to be furnished with barriers to isolate power and low voltage circuit as required.


Section 26 05 32 2nd Floor Building Upgrade OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS L.F. McIntosh Building Page 2 of 3 Project No. 144401282

.4 Face plates shall be manufactured of high strength PVC. Face plates shall snap in place.

Face plates shall accommodate standard duplex or decorator style receptacles, toggle type devices, blank outlets and various data openings to suit project requirements. Each gang is to be equipped with an individual face plate.

.5 Provide wall flanges and face plates to present a uniform finished appearance.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 All outlet boxes to be flush mounted in all areas, except mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, above removable ceilings and crawl spaces.

.2 Adjust position of outlets in finished masonry walls to suit masonry course lines. Coordinate cutting of masonry walls to achieve neat openings for all boxes. All cutting of masonry work for installation of electrical fittings to be done using rotary cutting equipment.

.3 No sectional or handy boxes to be installed.

.4 For outlets mounted in exterior walls provide insulation behind outlet boxes to prevent condensation through boxes.

.5 Maintain integrity of vapour barriers for all outlet boxes mounted in exterior walls.

.6 For outlets mounted above counters, benches, splashbacks, co-ordinate location and mounting heights with built-in units. Refer to architectural details. Where heating units occur, adjust outlet mounting height to coordinate with same.

.7 Refer to wiring device and low-tension sections of these specifications and to architectural layouts for mounting heights of outlet boxes.

.8 Backboxes for all low-tension systems equipment to be provided in accordance with specific manufacturer’s recommendations and as specified in the low tension sections of these specifications.

.9 Separate outlets located immediately alongside one another to be mounted at exactly the same height above finished floor.

.10 Where outlet boxes penetrate through a fire separation, they are to be tightly fitted with non-combustible material to prevent passage of smoke or flame in the event of a fire.

.11 All outlet boxes for each system to be spray painted with colour as specified in Section 16040.

.12 Backboxes for ceiling mounted devices shall be supported utilizing non-combustible supports.

.13 Do not mount boxes in office areas back to back. Provide minimum 150 mm separation. Where common conduits are used, conduits to be sealed to prevent sound transmission between rooms.


2nd Floor Building Upgrade Section 26 05 32 L.F. McIntosh Building OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS Project No. 144401282 Page 3 of 3

.14 Use Masonry Style boxes for installation in millwork counters. All devices in millwork to be flush mount.

.15 Where a number of outlet boxes are shown in the same vicinity, i.e. receptacles and voice/data outlets in offices, mount outlet boxes to within 50 mm of each other.

.16 Coordinate cutting of openings in millwork with General Contractor.

.17 Refer to drawing details for specialty installation details in laboratories, cleanrooms, etc.

.18 Use Cast FS box or wire mould style box for surface mounted devices in public areas.

.19 Outlet boxes in metal stud wall to be solidly anchored on two sides of the box to the wall system to ensure box will not move within the wall.

END OF SECTION


2nd Floor Building Upgrade Section 26 05 33 L.F. McIntosh Building RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 1

PART 1 General


.1 This Section covers items common to all of sections of Division 26. Instructions to Bidders, any Supplements and/or Addenda thereto form an integral part of this Specification and must be read in conjunction herewith.

1.2 WORK INCLUDED

.1 Provide telephone and data raceways consisting of conduits, outlet boxes, jacks, pull boxes and pull strings, and cable tray.

PART 2 Products

1.3 MATERIALS

.1 Grounding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.

.2 Plywood backboards in accordance with Division 6.

PART 3 Execution

1.4 INSTALLATION

.1 L.B. fittings or pull boxes cannot be used in lieu of 90 degrees bends.

.2 All conduits must be reamed, bushed and equipped with a pull string.

.3 The pulling eye must be placed in a position directly opposite the incoming ducts yet not interfere with the terminating of communications cables.

.4 Provide 27 mm EMT minimum from device box to ceiling space then j-hook to to new cable tray.

.5 Bond telecommunications raceways to cable tray or nearby power conduits.

.6 Install pull cord in any empty conduits.

END OF SECTION


2nd Floor Building Upgrade Section 26 05 34 L.F. McIntosh Building CONDUIT AND CONDUIT FITTINGS Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 2

PART 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK

.1 Identification for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 53

PART 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Minimum size of conduit to be 21 mm.

.2 Conduit electrical metallic tubing.

.3 Couplings: rigid threaded galvanized steel, set screw and liquidtight. All EMT connectors and couplings over 41 mm to be steel. Die cast zinc NOT permitted.

.4 Flexible conduit: steel armour, flexible plastic jacketed type with liquidtight connectors.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Electrical metallic tubing may be utilized for all exposed runs except where subject to mechanical injury in accordance with Code.

.2 Conduit to be installed concealed in all areas except in mechanical and electrical rooms. All conduit to be installed parallel, or at right angles to building lines.

.3 All wiring to be installed in conduit. AC90 may be installed from ceiling outlet box to tee bar mounted luminaires and connections from flush conduit floor stubs. Provide excess AC90 cable length for connection to each ceiling luminaire to allow future relocation of luminaire 3 m in any direction without rewiring.

.4 Install conduit free from dents and bruises and plug ends to prevent entrance of dirt or moisture. Clean out conduit prior to installation of conductors.

.5 Install liquid tight flexible conduit connections to all motors from conduit stubups and from junction boxes to avoid transmission of vibration from machinery to building structure.

.6 Install conduit to avoid interference with work or equipment of other trades and to maintain maximum headroom.

.7 Junction boxes when used to be installed in areas that are accessible through luminaire openings and/or access panels upon construction completion.

.8 Seal conduit with approved sealant or fibreglass where conduits leave heated area and enter an unheated area.


Section 26 05 34 2nd Floor Building Upgrade CONDUIT AND CONDUIT FITTINGS L.F. McIntosh Building Page 2 of 2 Project No. 144401282

.9 Provide necessary flashing and pitchpockets to create watertight joints where conduits pass through roofing membrane.

.10 Utilize approved expansion fittings complete with bonding jumper where conduit crosses building expansion lines. Install feeder runs of conduit in suspended ceiling spaces in such a manner that there is a bend or off-set adjacent to the major building expansion line to take up building movement. In lieu of this, utilize approved expansion fitting.

.11 All openings for conduit penetrations in fire rated and smoke separations to be sealed using materials approved by the Consultant.

.12 All empty conduits to be cleaned, swabbed and provided with #22 gauge galvanized metal pullwire or nylon pullstring. For the purpose of this paragraph, an empty conduit is any conduit where conductors are not installed as part of this specific contract, but may be installed by others prior to project completion.

.13 The owner reserves the right to retain other contractors to install electrical or other systems in empty conduit systems prior to substantial completion of this contract. Division 16 to install pullwires prior to substantial completion and at times as reasonably directed by the Owner.

END OF SECTION


2nd Floor Building Upgrade Section 26 05 36 L.F. McIntosh Building CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 2

PART 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK

.1 Firestopping Section 07 84 00

.2 Common Work Results - Electrical Section 26 05 01 .3 Identification for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 53

.4 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 26

PART 2 Products

2.1 COMPONENTS

.1 All tray shall be fabricated of rolled sheet steel. All non-painted steel tray shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication to CSA G164-M92 ASTM designation A386.

.2 Cable Tray: complete with manufactured angles, offsets, corners, saddles, tees, etc., as indicated and required to suit installation. Cable tray to have cable loading depth of 90 mm.

.3 Suspended Tray Supports: Trapeze style hangers, 40 mm square Unistrut on 9.5 mm threaded rod hangers from preset or afterset concrete inserts.

.4 Fire Barrier Pillows: self-contained intumescent firestop product for use in through-penetration firestops. Product to achieve up to three (3) hours fire rating in accordance with ASTM E 814 tests.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION

.1 Support suspended cable tray from trapeze style hangers with hangers located on not greater than 3.0 m centres on straight runs and at all corners, offsets and tee fittings. Cable trays may be supported using wall mounted support on masonry walls only.

.2 Cable tray location and mounting heights to be coordinated on site to avoid conflict with other services, to maintain maximum headroom and to be serviceable.

.3 Cable tray sections shall be joined by approved connector plates and rust-resistant (plated) hardware. Torque all hardware as per manufacturer’s recommendations.

.4 Low tension cabling shall be secured to tray by use of Velcro style straps.

.5 Division 16 to take note that all cable trays shall connect to or terminate at the respective panel backboard location with an appropriate section of tray. Connector tray sections


Section 26 05 36 2nd Floor Building Upgrade CABLE TRAYSFOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS L.F. McIntosh Building Page 2 of 2 Project No. 144401282

shall be complete with all necessary elbows, offset, 45° corners, supports, etc., for a complete installation. The intent is that all major tray runs be installed at the same elevation. Changes in elevation will be required in a number of locations to permit passage of other major services. Install cable drop out sections at backboards, distribution centres and racks as required.

.6 Bonding: A #6 bonding conductor shall be installed within all electrical cable trays and connected to each length of tray by a ground clamp. Connect bonding conductor to building ground system at one or both ends.

.7 Utilize cable tray as indicated on drawings for all low tension cabling.

.8 Where cutting cable tray on site, remove all burrs.

.9 Where cable tray encounters electrical room wall discontinue cable tray and install 3 STI Firestop EZ Path Series 33 pathways.

END OF SECTION


2nd Floor Building Upgrades L.F. McIntosh Building Project No. 144401282

Section 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Page 1 of 4

1 GENERAL

1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

.1 Painting and Coating Section 099000

1.02 PAINTING AND FINISHES

.1 All electrical fittings, supports, hanger rods, pullboxes, channel frames, conduit racks, outlet boxes, brackets, clamps, etc. to have galvanized finish or enamel paint finish over corrosion resistant primer.

.2 All panelboards, distribution centres, motor control centres, transformers, etc., to be factory finished in alkyd high gloss enamel applied over corrosion resistant primer. Matte or flat type finish paint not acceptable. Factory finished units that are scratched or marked during installation or shipping to be touched up with matching spray-on air dry lacquer or, if required to provide a satisfactory job, completely refinished.

.3 Colour Schedule: Voltage/System Colour Man. & Colour Chip Number 120/208V ASA 61 Grey N/A 347/600V Sand Endura Coatings CLR 23532 277/480V Maroon Endura Coatings CLR 2622 2400/4160V Apple Green Benjamin Moore 2029-40 13,800 V Burnt Orange

All 347/600 volt equipment including pullboxes and raceways to be finished in sand.

.4 All 120/208 volt equipment including pullboxes and raceways to be finished in grey.

.5 Transformer enclosures to be finished in accordance with primary voltage colour as outlined above.

.6 Fire alarm pullboxes and junction boxes to be finished in red.

.7 Telephone/Data terminal panels and junction boxes to be finished in light blue.

.8 Sound terminal panels and junction boxes to be finished in yellow.

.9 Nurses call system terminal panels and junction boxes to be finished in brown.

.10 Clock and timing system terminal panels and junction boxes to be finished in light green.

.11 RF television and in-house television system pullboxes and junction boxes to be finished in dark green.

.12 Low voltage switching terminal cabinets and pullboxes to be finished in black enamel.

.13 Door monitor, access control system pullboxes, staff panic system and junction boxes to be finished in rust.

.14 Security television system pullboxes and junction boxes to be finished in gold.

.15 Patient telemetry system pullboxes and junction boxes to be finished in orange.

.16 Miscellaneous (future) system pullboxes and junction boxes to be finished in pink.

1.03 NAMETAGS




Page 2 of 4

.1 Clearly identify main distribution centre, sub-distribution panels, power panels, lighting panels, disconnect switches, starters, contactors, motor control centres, terminal cabinets, junction boxes, On/Off switches, receptacles, and transformers by permanent labels described below.

.2 Nametags to be of 3-layer laminated plastic, black/white/black (red/white/red for emergency) with etched lettering giving white letters on black background where called for on the drawings or in the specifications. Size of lettering as indicated below: Device Lettering Receptacle, etc. 3 mm Panelboards 9 mm Transformers 12 mm Distribution Centres 12 mm MCC Cells 9 mm Disconnects 9 mm Main Distribution 25 mm

Nameplates for exterior installation shall be UV stabilized or stainless steel.

.3 At Main Distribution Centre lamicoid nameplate to identify year of Installation, Building name and name of the Consultant.

.4 In terminal cabinets for control wiring, low voltage relays, television distribution, nurses call, sound, telephone, fire alarm, clock, etc., identify terminal strips, etc., utilizing 9 mm roll adhesive back embossed type nametags.

.5 Panels: identify panels as shown on the drawings and indicate voltage. Nametags to be attached to outside of panel door.

.6 Transformers: identify as shown on drawings, showing capacity, primary and secondary voltages.

.7 Disconnect switches, starters and contactors: indicate equipment being controlled and voltage.

.8 Terminal cabinets and pullboxes: indicate system and voltage.

.9 On/Off switches: indicate areas being served.

.10 Distribution centres: identify distribution centres as indicated on drawings and main voltage or voltages if more than one.

.11 Motor control centres: identify as shown on drawings and show main voltage or voltages if more than one.

.12 Standard duplex receptacles:

above each receptacle provide lamicoid nametag self-adhesive with 3 mm high white lettering on black background (red background for emergency receptacles) indicating circuit breaker number and panel designation. On all other receptacles, provide lamicoid nametag indicating voltage, phase, amps, circuit and panel designation.

[All standard power duplex receptacles not adjacent to beds in patient care areas to be labelled “Housekeeping”.

Duplex receptacles intended for Motorized Patient Bed to be labelled “Housekeeping – For MOTORIZED Patient Bed Only”.

For receptacles in Operating Room Cabinets used for background music tape deck power, provide nametag “Not for Medical Equipment for Music Tape Deck use Only”.]




Page 3 of 4

.13 Fire alarm end-of-line resistors: identify zone numbers.

.14 Fire alarm modules: identify address and function.

.15 Fire alarm monitor control modules, etc: identify address and device monitored or controlled.

.16 347 volt lighting switch: label “347 volt switch”.

1.04 CONDUIT IDENTIFICATION

.1 All conduit for electrical systems to be colour coded. Colour coding of conduit to consist of paint applied to couplings and connectors in colours identified so as to provide easy identification, to satisfaction of the Consultant.

.2 Colour coding to be in accordance with 26 05 53. 1.2.

1.05 BOX IDENTIFICATION

.1 Above Removable Ceilings: in areas where pullboxes, junction boxes, and/or cabinets are located above removable ceilings, finish to be in colour specified both on outside and inside. Coverplates to be painted on both sides in the colour specified. Provide panel and circuit numbers or appropriate low tension system identification on coverplate with 12 mm letters in indelible ink. Indicate “Emergency “ where applicable.

.2 Non-removable Ceilings: where pullboxes, junction boxes, and/or cabinets are located on or in non-removable ceilings, the interior only shall be finished in the colour specified. Interior faces of coverplates to be painted to match box interior finish.




Page 4 of 4

1.06 COLOUR CODING OF CONDUCTORS

.1 Conductors to be colour coded throughout the building with the same colour applying to the same phase throughout. Colour coding to be by insulation colour or permanently applied colour banding at all distribution centres and panels. Colour coding to be as follows: .1 Equipment grounding conductor – green. .2 Neutral conductor – white. .3 120/208 volt phase wires – red, black and blue. .4 347/600 volt phase wires – orange, brown and yellow.

.2 At all distribution centres, pullboxes, wireways, etc., feeder conductors of each feeder group to be neatly laced or clipped into a feeder group with each conductor identified as to load fed. At all pullboxes, junction boxes and device outlet box locations identify each conductor as to panel and circuit, i.e., Panel 2A circuit 23 – identify 2A-23. Similar to system proposed for power, conductor identification to be provided for all systems at all pullbox, junction box and device locations.

.3 All conductors for fire alarm system to be colour coded with separate colour used for each of the following systems: smoke detector box circuits; trouble circuits; auxiliary control circuits; gong circuits, etc. Provide bead markers identifying zones at each device location, junction box, annunciators and panels.

END OF SECTION


2nd Floor Building Upgrade Section 26 24 17 L.F. McIntosh Building PANEL BOARDS Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 3

PART 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK


1.2 DESIGN

.1 This section includes the requirements for lighting and power panelboards.

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Full shop drawings to be submitted to the Consultant for review prior to manufacture.

1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

.1 Panelboards shall comply with CSA C22.2 No 29-M1983.

PART 2 Products

2.1 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS

.1 Schneider .2 Siemens .3 Cutler Hammer .4 General Electric

2.2 COMPONENTS

.1 Enclosure: rust resistant sheet steel enclosure with interior supports, bonding wire connectors provisions for isolated ground bus and adjustable panel interior supports. Wiring gutters shall be sized to comply with CSA Code Part 1 “Panelboards and Panel Enclosures”.

.2 Interior: factory assembled sequence style rectangular section bussing for 3 phase, 4 wire grounded neutral system application. Branch breakers are to be bolt on type.

.3 Neutral bus to be full capacity solid neutral insulated from the enclosure. Neutral bus to be complete with one branch lug for each 1-pole branch circuit position.

.4 A grounding bus shall be provided in each panel. Grounding bus shall have one lug for each 1-pole branch circuit position.

.5 An isolated ground bus is to be provided in all designated panelboards.


Section 26 24 17 2nd Floor Building Upgrade PANEL BOARDS L.F. McIntosh Building Page 2 of 3 Project No. 144401282 2.3 TRIM

.1 Trim cover is to be for flush or surface mounted panelboards. Trim cover shall have a door over the circuit breaker handles. Door shall have concealed hinges, with a flush catch and lock assembly. Surface mounted panelboards to be complete with sprinkler drip cover.

.2 Trim shall be dead front type and render all live parts for the panel inaccessible.

.3 Special door-in-door style trims shall be provided for all panelboards. These trims shall have an outer-hinged cover to gain access to the entire panel interior including breaker termination. An inner hinged cover will provide access to the circuit breaker operating handles only. Outer hinged cover to be set in a box trim frame with flush hinges or continuous hinge on one side and semi-flush catch and lock assembly to hold the cover closed on the non-hinged side. The inner cover shall be fitted with concealed hinges and semi-flush catch and lock assembly. Provide at each door, a lock for every 42-breaker positions.

.4 A panel directory pocket is to be provided on the interior of the breaker cover.

.5 Panel bus ampacity and number of branch circuit breakers is to be as noted in the panelboard schedules. Minimum 225A unless otherwise noted.

.6 Provide 2 keys for each panelboard lock. Provide 2 circuit breaker “lock-on” devices for each panelboard.

.7 Where a main breaker is specified or shown to be installed in a panelboard, the main breaker shall be integrated into the panelboard so that the operating handle will be housed behind a common circuit breaker door.

.8 Where a transient voltage surge suppressor (TVSS) is indicated it shall be incorporated as part of the panelboard enclosure.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install panelboard securely, plumb and square to adjoining surfaces.

.2 Mount panelboards at 1800mm to top of trim.

.3 Provide all mounting brackets, busbar drillings and filler pieces for spaces.

.4 Affix typewritten directory to the inside cover of panelboard indicating loads controlled by each circuit. Directory is to be approved by the Consultant prior to installation. Panel directories are to include room numbers and/or room designations.

.5 Install six (6) 21 mm empty conduits from each flush mounted panelboard to ceiling space and/or floor space above. Cap exposed conduit ends.

.6 Panelboards located in service rooms, mechanical rooms, and electrical rooms to be mounted on unistrut supports.

.7 Provide lock dogs on all breakers controlling fire alarm, exit lights and emergency lighting equipment.


2nd Floor Building Upgrade Section 26 24 17 L.F. McIntosh Building PANEL BOARDS Project No. 144401282 Page 3 of 3

.8 Provide typewritten directories in plastic envelope inside all panelboards which are contactor controlled and/or which have pullboxes in their feeder. Directories are to indicate locations of all contactors and pullboxes.

END OF SECTION


2nd Floor Building Upgrade Section 26 27 26 L.F. McIntosh Building WIRING DEVICES Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 4

PART 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK

.1 Switches:



.2 Receptacles:


.2 Grounding and Bonding Section 26 05 26

.3 Plates:



1.2 SUMMARY

.1 Switches:

.1 Line voltage switches for control of lighting, small motor loads and miscellaneous items.

.2 Receptacles:

.1 This section details the various receptacle types to be utilized on the project. All receptacles installed throughout the project are to be by one manufacturer.

PART 2 Products

2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

.1 Switches:

120 V 347V Decorator Style Hubbell 2100 Series 18200 Series Pass & Seymour 2600 Series 371500 Series Leviton 5690 Series 18200 Series

.2 Receptacles:

.1 Bryant


Section 26 27 26 2nd Floor Building Upgrade WIRING DEVICES L.F. McIntosh Building Page 2 of 4 Project No. 144401282

.2 Hubbell

.3 Leviton

.4 Pass & Seymour

2.2 COMPONENTS

.1 Switches:

.1 Line voltage switches: Both 120 and 347-V Decora style, quiet, slow make, slow break design, white heavy duty impact resistant toggle handle, with totally enclosed case, rated at 15-A, industrial specification grade, colour white. Two pole, 3 way and 4 way switches to be of matching design, or equal. Full current rated capacity with tungsten, fluorescent, or motor loads.

.2 Occupancy sensor: Wall mounted occupancy sensor WSD NGX (347V). PIR, Switch Type, Single-Pole, Wall mounted. Pattern: 180 degrees, colour white. Use Sensor Switch product or equivalent. Ceiling mounted occupancy sensor CMR 9 (347V). PIR, Switch Type, Single-Pole, Ceiling mounted. Pattern: 360 degrees, color white. Use Sensor Switch product or equivalent.

.2 Receptacles:

.1 All receptacles, non-locking and locking type, to be in conformance with CSA configurations identified in Diagrams 1 and 2 of the Canadian Electrical Code (CEC).

.2 All receptacles to be complete with White impact resistant Nylon faceplate.

.3 Receptacle faceplate to be as listed below unless otherwise indicated:

.1 All receptacles connected to have white faceplates.

.2 Receptacles to be rated a 15-A (20-A), 125-V, duplex grade Decora style, triple wip contacts, impact resistant white nylon face, one-piece wrap-around mounting strap, Bryant series, Leviton series, Hubbell series, Pass Seymour series or equivalent.

.3 Ground fault interrupter duplex receptacles to be rated at 15 or 20 A, 125-V, Decora style, specification grade, terminal type to provide individual protection complete with breaker and reset switch, triple wipe contacts, parallel blade U-grounding slot. Receptacle to have sensitivity of 5mA protection. Bryant, Hubbell, Pass & Seymour, Levition or approved equivalent.

.3 Plates:

.1 Nylon wall plates shall be manufactured from molded nylon for maximum resistance to impact, abrasion, grease, oils, acids, moisture, fading, discoloration. Nylon wall plates to be self extinguishing.

.2 Weatherproof plates to be thermoplastic nylon with re-enforcing ribs and two independent spring loaded self-closing lids. Gasketing to be provided to seal plate to mounting surface and an individual gasket for each self-closing lid.


2nd Floor Building Upgrade Section 26 27 26 L.F. McIntosh Building WIRING DEVICES Project No. 144401282 Page 3 of 4

.3 Surface box plates: Taylor style plated steel, bevelled and pressure formed for smooth edge free fit to box.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Switches:

.1 Coordinate switch location with architectural detail and adjust, if required, to coordinate with panelling, dados, and masonry course lines.

.2 Install or wire to and connect all switches required for special equipment that are not prewired by supplier

.3 Refer to our Common Works Section for mounting heights.

.4 Switches for lighting in HVAC plenums to be lighted handle type.

.5 Provide black lamacoid nametag for all 347-V switches, labelled “347-V Switch” and panel and circuit number.

.2 Receptacles:

.1 Mount receptacles vertically and at height specified in Common Works unless otherwise noted above finished floor in offices, administrative areas and corridors. Mount receptacles vertically at 150 mm (to bottom of plate) above counter and open shelves, and centred between shelves in millwork areas unless otherwise noted.

.2 In all service areas, receptacle mounting height to be co-ordinated with furnishings within the space.

.3 Receptacle locations and mounting heights to be as indicated on detail drawings.

.4 Provide a dedicated neutral conductor for each circuit serving receptacles adjacent to data outlets.

.3 Plates

.1 Upper edge of plates located on separate outlets immediately alongside one another to be at exactly the same height above finished floor.

.2 All plates to be installed parallel, or perpendicular, to building lines.

.3 Weatherproof plates to be used where outlets exposed to moisture or where indicated on the drawings.

.4 Weatherproof plates where installed onto surface boxes to be fastened with minimum of four (4) screws

.5 Install flush plates in all finished areas.


Section 26 27 26 2nd Floor Building Upgrade WIRING DEVICES L.F. McIntosh Building Page 4 of 4 Project No. 144401282

.6 Flush mount style plates are not to be used for surface mount boxes.

END OF SECTION


2nd Floor Building Upgrade Section 26 50 00 L.F. McIntosh Building LIGHTING Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 2

PART 1 General

1.1 SCOPE

.1 Common Work Results - Electrical Section 26 05 01 .2 Interior Lighting Fixtures, Lamps and Ballasts Section 26 51 13

1.2 WORK INCLUDED

.1 This section includes for supply and installation of luminaires, lamps, ballasts, supports and accessories, and for supply of plaster frames, trim rings and backboxes for plaster or drywall ceilings or concrete.

1.3 COORDINATION WITH OTHER SECTIONS

.1 Confirm compatibility and interface of other materials with luminaire and ceiling system. Report discrepancies to the Owner and defer ordering until clarified.

.2 Supply plaster frames, trim rings and backboxes to other trades as the work requires.

.3 Coordinate with Mechanical Divisions to avoid conflicts between luminaires, supports, fillings and mechanical equipment.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 Samples of luminaires noted are required for approval prior to final production.

.2 Construction and performance of luminaires, subject to approval of the Owner.

.3 Provide, if requested by the Owner, complete photometric data and heat dissipation reports from independent testing laboratory.

.4 Shop drawings for all luminaires showing all pertinent physical characteristics.

1.5 LUMINAIRE DESIGNATION

.1 Refer to Light Fixture Schedule on the drawings.

1.6 RECESSED LUMINAIRES

.1 Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below, to gain access to outlet or prewired luminaire box. Connect recessed luminaires to boxes with flexible conduit and approved luminaire wire.

.2 Supply recessed luminaire complete with trim type required for ceiling system installed. Before ordering, confirm ceiling construction details and architectural finish for each area.


Section 26 50 00 2nd Floor Building Upgrade LIGHTING L.F. McIntosh Building Page 2 of 2 Project No. 144401282

.3 Recessed incandescent luminaires: prewired type with junction box forming an integral part of assembly with satisfactory access complete with necessary plaster rings, supports, required.

.4 Depth of recessed fluorescent luminaires to be 150 mm maximum including mounting yokes or bridges with distance from backface of luminaire or lens to centre of lamp 62 mm minimum. Design reflector and lamp positions to provide high efficiency, even brightness and lack of lamp lines.

.5 Recessed high intensity discharge luminaires to be complete with integral encapsulated ballasts.

PART 2 Products

2.1 LUMINAIRES

.1 Provide all 347V luminaries with local disconnect means.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install a disconnect at each 347V fixture. Approved Product: Thomas & Betts Sta-Ken Disconnect LD2-D.

END OF SECTION


2nd Floor Building Upgrade Section 26 51 13 L.F. McIntosh Building INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES, LAMPS, AND BALLASTS Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 3

PART 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK

.1 General Requirements for Lighting Section 26 50 00

1.2 SUMMARY

.1 This section details the various receptacle types to be utilized on the project. All lamps provided for each lamp type throughout the project are to be by one manufacturer.

1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING

.1 Refer to Section 26 50 00.


.1 All fluorescent lamps provided to comply with the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency’s (EPA) 1990 Toxic Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) for Low-Mercury content lamps.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Provide shop drawings for all lamps and ballasts. Shop drawings to identify which luminaire type the lamps are to be supplied in. Shop drawings are to be supplied along with the corresponding luminaire submittal.

PART 2 Products

2.1 INCANDESCENT LAMPS

.1 Acceptable Manufacturers:

.1 General Electric

.2 Phillips Lighting Company

.3 Osram Sylvania

.2 General Requirements:

.1 Incandescent lamps: 2500 hour, 130 volt, extended service, inside frosted, clear, base type A, MR, PAR, R, reflector as specified for particular luminaire type. Special lamps to be used where indicated with longest life available in each category.

.2 All incandescent lamps to be of the extended service type.


Section 26 51 13 2nd Floor Building Upgrade INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES, LAMPS, AND BALLASTS L.F. McIntosh Building Page 2 of 3 Project No. 144401282

2.2 FLUORESCENT LAMPS

.1 Acceptable Manufacturers:

.1 General Electric

.2 Phillips Lighting Company

.3 Osram Sylvania

.2 Ballast Requirements:

.1 Ballast shall operate at 120 volts, or 347 volts, with +/- 10% variation tolerance, 50/60 Hz.

.2 Ballast input current shall have Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of less than 10%. It shall be less than 20% on other approved lamps.

.3 Ballast shall have a Ballast Factor between .9 and 1.

.4 Ballast shall be Sound Rated A.

.5 Ballast output frequency to the lamps shall be above 20kHz to minimize visible flicker and outside 30-42kHz to avoid interference with infrared devices.

.6 Ballast shall be Instant Start with independent parallel lamp operation.

.7 Ballast shall have less than a 1.7 lamp current crest factor.

.8 Lamps may be remote or tandem mounted up to a maximum of 18ft. overall lead length.

.9 Ballast shall have a minimum starting temperature of 0 degree F for F32T8, F25T8 and F17T8 lamps, and 60 degree F for WattMiser and F28T8 lamps.

.10 Ballast shall have the capability to restart replacement lamps without resetting power.

.11 Ballast shall tolerate sustained open circuit and short circuit output conditions without damage

.3 General Requirements:

.1 All fluorescent lamps provided to be compatible with the ballast supplied with the luminaire.

.2 All fluorescent lamps provided to comply with the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency’s (EPA) 1990 Toxic Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) for Low-Mercury content lamps.

.3 All fluorescent lamps to be high colour rendition, high efficacy, thermal stability, long life, energy efficient lamps with following minimum requirements:

Linear fluorescent lamps: Mean Rated Life Wattage (Nom. Length) Lamp Initial Colour Lumens CRI (Minimum)

17 (610 mm long) T8 3500°K 1,400 85 50,000 hrs 32 (1220 mm long) T8 3500°K 2000 85 50,000 hrs


2nd Floor Building Upgrade Section 26 51 13 L.F. McIntosh Building INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES, LAMPS, AND BALLASTS Project No. 144401282 Page 3 of 3 PART 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Provide lamps of compatible design to ballasts specified.

.2 All luminaires (excluding incandescent lamps) are to be “burned-in” at full illumination for a minimum continuous period of 100 hours at initial start-up prior to being dimmed, switched, or de-energized.

END OF SECTION


2nd Floor Building Upgrade Section 26 53 00 L.F. McIntosh Building EXIT SIGNS Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 2

PART 1 General


.1 This Section covers items common to all sections of Division 16, Instructions to Bidders, any Supplements and/or Addenda thereto form an integral part of this Specification and must be read in conjunction herewith.

1.2 WORK INCLUDED

.1 Provide exit lights as indicated on Drawings and as specified herein.

1.3 STANDARDS

.1 Exit lights shall meet CSA.C860-01 Standard.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit product data in accordance with Section 26 05 01 – Common Work Results - Electrical.

PART 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Product: EXIT sign, A/C powered, internally lit by indirect LEDS.

.2 Housing: Extruded aluminum, white baked enamel finish. Matching ceiling canopy and back plate provide field installed universal mounting capability, ceiling / wall.

.3 Face Plate: Extruded aluminum, white baked enamel finish. Die stamped stencil letters and knockout arrows. Fastened to housing with Philips screws. Refer to drawings for single or double face.

.4 Letters: EXIT in 150 mm / 6" high red letters. Shall be evenly back lit and be certified as CSA C860. Contractor to prevent shadows from loose internal wiring.

.5 Directional Arrows: As indicated on the Drawings. Universal knockout type chevrons.

.6 Mounting: As indicated on the Drawings. Capable of Universal field mounting. Manufacturer provides hardware necessary to mount exit to any 100mm / 4" octagon box.

.7 Voltage Operation: Normal Power AC Input 347V,

.8 Lamps: LEDs. Service life shall meet CSA C860 minimum luminance for 10 years. Total Watts consumed by LEDs shall not exceed 5W maximum for bilingual.

1.5 DESIGN

.1 Wall, end to wall, ceiling mounted as indicated.


Section 26 53 00 2nd Floor Building Upgrade EXIT SIGNS L.F. McIntosh Building Page 2 of 2 Project No. 144401282

.2 Single or double face as indicated.

.3 Stem hang complete with two stems to avoid twisting obstructions and to assure visibility. Each stem complete with ball aligner to resist accidental damage.

.4 Provide a minimum of two canopies for ceiling mounted.

.5 Arrow right, left, both directions as indicated.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install exit lights where indicated on drawings to suit local building inspection authority having jurisdiction.

.2 Connect to emergency light circuits as indicated.

.3 Provide breaker locking devices for circuits feeding emergency light fixtures.

.4 Ensure that exit light circuit breaker is locked in ‘ON’ position.

.5 Ensure minimum mounting height to underside of exit lights of 2 m (6'-8").

END OF SECTION


2nd Floor Building Upgrade Section 27 05 13 L.F. McIntosh Building COMMUNICATION SERVICES Project No. 144401282 Page 1 of 7

PART 1 - General

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

.1 Communication Trunk cabling is terminated at one of four BIX consolidation points within ceiling plenum. All other data cabling from BIX consolidation point to end wall plate is to be removed and replaced with new Cat6 data cable.


.1 This Section covers items common to all sections of Division 26, Instructions to Bidders, any Supplements and/or Addenda thereto form an integral part of this Specification and must be read in conjunction herewith.

.2 Supply, installation, testing, and documentation of communications cabling shall be by SaskTel.

1.3 WORK INCLUDED

.1 Supply labour, tools, services, equipment and material for complete installation of new data outlets as indicated on drawings.

.2 New data outlets to consist of outlet box, conduits, cover plates, jacks, data cables, connectors, patch panels as required, racks as required, services, fittings and accessories.

PART 2 - Products

2.1 GENERAL

.1 All products to meet ANSI/TIA-568-C.2

2.2 DATA COMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS

.1 White faceplate with rectangular opening for filler plate.

.2 Filler plates with three 8-position RJ45 jacks, shall meet CAT 6 specifications.

.3 Leviton, Hubbell, Wireworks, Belden, TE, Superior Essex, Panduit, Siemons, or approved equivalent

2.3 DATA AND PATCH CABLES

.1 Data cables shall be 4-pair, 23 AWG unshielded twisted pair, solid copper conductors, enclosed in a CSA FT6 rated jacket.

.2 Cables shall be a high performance cable with a minimum of ANSI/TIA category CAT 6 performance.



Section 27 05 13 2nd Floor Building Upgrade COMMUNICATION SERVICES L.F. McIntosh Building Page 2 of 7 Project No. 144401282 2.4 PATCH PANELS (AS REQUIRED)

.1 Cables are to be terminated on existing BIX consolidation points using ANSI/TIA practices.


PART 3 - Execution

3.1 DATA CABLES

.1 Supply all materials and labour for the installation of the new data outlet cabling system including all cables and terminations as shown on the accompanying drawings and in this specification.

.2 Install the cabling system in accordance with manufacturer's specifications.

.3 Provide, install and terminate the indicated quantities of distribution cables from the patch panels in the floor wiring closet to the indicated communications outlet locations on the floor plans. Leave three (3) metres of slack in each cable at the outlet end to permit outlet relocation after installation.

.4 All cables are to be pulled in a continuous run. No cable splices will be permitted. No consolidation points to be used.

.5 All cables shall be neatly bundled and tie-wrapped. Cable to be run using J-hooks from new faceplate location to new cable tray. Utilize cable tray for cable runs to server room. Maintain less than 40% fill rate in all conduits.

.6 All cabling must be routed and organized to minimize cross-overs and congestion. Use best practice installation methods to ensure installation meets all certification requirements.

.7 Utilize all indicated and available cable pathways such as conduit, cable trays, ducts, raceways and furniture system channels except where otherwise noted. Exercise caution when pulling cables to ensure that the cable manufacturers' maximum pull-force and minimum bend radii specifications are adhered to.

.8 Document the exact installed cable route by recording the route on the floor plan drawings.

.9 Route all cables to maintain minimum separations from sources of lighting, power cables, HVAC and electrical equipment.

.10 Where required, ground all cable and components according to manufacturer's specifications as well as ANSI/TIA-607 requirements.

.11 No horizontal cable run will exceed 90 m in length.

.12 Cables shall be run at right angles to the building grid where possible. Cable routing shall be in areas identified on the floor plan as being aisles or corridor so as to allow future access to cables with minimum disruption to staff.



.13 All cable must be in cable tray, EMT, conduit or J-hooks.

.14 Each floor cables shall be terminated in floor plate that floor’s wiring closet.

3.2 WORKSTATION TERMINATION

.1 Supply all material and labour for the installation, assembly and mounting of all data communication outlets shown on the floor plans.

.2 At the outlet end of all data cables, the cable pairs shall be terminated onto the 8-position modular jack in a straight through manner, using EIA/TIA T568A wiring standards.

.3 For all outlets, install three data 8-position modular jacks (1 data, 1 voice).

3.3 PATCH PANEL (WIRING CLOSET TERMINATION)

.1 Supply all materials and labour for the installation and assembly of all cable management and patch panels as required.

.2 All pairs of data cables shall be terminated on the patch panels and workstation outlets according to manufacturer's recommendations.

.3 Terminate each cable as directed by Owner. Assume 1 phone 1 data for tender.

.4 All patch panels shall be installed according to manufacturer's specifications and exact location to be approved by the Tenant representative prior to installation.

.5 All patch panels shall be properly grounded as per manufacturer's specifications and EIA/TIA 568 requirements.

.6 Neatly route and bundle all data cables entering the wiring closet through cable guides to the patch panels.

.7 When routing data cables to patch panels, all cables shall be organized to minimize cross-overs and congestion.

.8 Mark the blank designation labels with electronic labels as per installation instructions provided by the Tenant representative prior to installation. Confirm with all labeling standards specified within.

3.4 LABELING

.1 Cabling system documentation to be per TIA-606 standards.

.2 Each wallplate will be labeled using the format ffww1Pdppj where ff is the user floor (02 or 03), ww is the wiring closet floor (02 or 03), '1P' is a constant for all labels, d is the patch panel number (1 or 2), pp is patch panel port number (from the panel in the wiring closet) and j is the jack outlet position (A for top outlet position and B for bottom). This is to be confirmed on site with Owner. The wallplate must correspond with relay racks, patch panels and jack outlet positions already labeled in the wiring closets. Upon completion, a copy of the floor plan indicating each wallplate number must be provided to the IT Division of the Owner.

.3 All cables, including jumper and patch cords shall be labeled on both ends with matching numbers.


Section 27 05 13 2nd Floor Building Upgrade COMMUNICATION SERVICES L.F. McIntosh Building Page 4 of 7 Project No. 144401282

.4 Labels shall be computer-printed, Panduit or Brady System.

.5 Include labelling document in O&M manuals.

3.5 TESTING

.1 All cables to be tested for conformance to ANSI/TIA 568 Standard.

.2 Provide a certified installation with 20 year warranty. Include certificate in the O&M manuals.

.3 Quality Assurance is based upon information derived from the testing procedures described in this section and submittals as outlined in the preceding submittals section.

.4 Principle

.1 Acceptance tests shall take place at the end of the work project. Every cabling link in the installation shall be tested in accordance with the ANSI/TIA-1152, ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C series, ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-7 and ANSI/EIA/TIA-526-14A.

.5 Test Equipment

.1 Trained technicians who have successfully attended an appropriate training program and have obtained a certificate as proof thereof shall execute the tests. Appropriate training programs include installation certification programs provided by manufacturer for their product.

.2 The test equipment shall comply with or exceed the accuracy requirements for level IV field testers.

.3 The tester interface adapters shall be of high quality and the cable shall not show any twisting or kinking resulting from coiling and storing of the tester interface adapters.

.4 The Pass or Fail condition for the link under test is determined by the results of the required individual tests. Any Fail or Fail* result yields a Fail for the link under test. In order to achieve an overall Pass condition, the results for each individual test parameter must Pass. No Pass* is considered as an acceptable result.

.5 A Pass or Fail result for each parameter is determined by comparing the measured values with the specified test limits for that parameter. The test result of a parameter shall be marked with an asterisk (*) when the result is closer to the test limit than the accuracy of the field tester.

.6 Testing the cabling system

.1 The Owner may reserve the right to be present at any time during the tests and, once the test phase is over, to select at random up to five (5) percent of the total of the copper and optical links in order to re-test them and compare them with the results given in the technical certification tests.



.2 Any test that has not been carried out according to the methods described in this document shall be repeated and will not be invoiced. If more than two (2) percent of the total of the tests fail, the whole cabling system shall be re-tested at no additional cost.

.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing the test equipment during the acceptance tests.

.4 Copper Testing

.1 Final testing shall be carried out after substantial completion of project, testing all runs, using the Permanent Link Standard testing method as specified in the above referenced standards.

.1 Wire map (continuity, paring, shorts, opens, grounds)

.2 Correct polarity

.3 Length

.4 Attenuation

.5 Propagation Delay

.6 Delay Skew

.7 Resistance

.8 Insertion loss

.9 NEXT – near-end crosstalk

.10 PSNEXT – power sum near-end crosstalk

.11 FEXT – far-end crosstalk

.12 ELFEXT (ACRF) – equal level far-end crosstalk (attenuation-to-crosstalk ratio, far-end)

.13 PSELFEXT (PSACRF) – power sum equal level far-end crosstalk (power sum attenuation-to-crosstalk ratio, far-end)

.14 Return loss (RL)

.15 PSFEXT – power sum far-end crosstalk

.16 PSACRF – power sum attenuation-to-crosstalk ratio, far-end

.17 AACRF – alien attenuation-to-crosstalk ratio, far-end

.18 AFEXT – alien far-end crosstalk

.19 ANEXT – alien near-end crosstalk


Section 27 05 13 2nd Floor Building Upgrade COMMUNICATION SERVICES L.F. McIntosh Building Page 6 of 7 Project No. 144401282

.20 PSAACRF – power sum alien attenuation-to-crosstalk ratio, far-end

.21 PSAFEXT – power sum alien far-end crosstalk

.22 PSANEXT – power sum alien near-end crosstalk

.7 Measurements

.1 Cat3: Continuity tests will be made on 100% of Cat3 links.

.2 Cat6:100% of links shall be tested for compliance with standard ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 and ANSI/TIA-1152 which shall result in:

.1 The name of the certification company

.2 The name of the operator

.3 The type, serial number and software version of the instrument used

.4 The identification number of the tested link system

.5 The type of test carried out (Cat6 link).

.6 The length of each link

.7 The results of all the tests carried out with the tester with the version of the software used.

.8 The cable's NVP (Nominal Velocity of Propagation) shall be taken into account for accurate length measurements.

.9 The test method shall be “Permanent Link”.

.10 All test devices of the same type shall be supplied by the same manufacturer and the results produced shall have a consistent format.

.8 Results

.1 In order to ensure proper performance of the cabling throughout the 20 years lifetime, the results for NEXT (Near-End Crosstalk) and for the RL (Return Loss) obtained shall be 3 dB better than the limit values stated in standard ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 and/or ANSI/TIA/EIA-1152 for 100% of the links installed and for the entire frequency range tested. This ensures that the cabling system will meet the performance requirements during its entire lifetime as usage and temperature variations always degrade performance with time.

3.6 RECORD DRAWING

.1 Upon completion a copy of the floor plan indicating each outlet number must be provided to the Consultant.


2nd Floor Building Upgrade Section 27 05 13 L.F. McIntosh Building COMMUNICATION SERVICES Project No. 144401282 Page 7 of 7 3.7 WARRANTY

.1 The wiring and all related information must be guaranteed free of defects for the entire period covered by manufacturers correct certification program.

.2 If any failures in the wiring occur during installation, then the wiring contractor must repunch/repair the cable at no cost to the Owner to ensure a fully certificated installation.

END OF SECTION
